SMIT.H'S 

mum  GRAMMAI 

PRODUCTIVE   SYSTEM. 


I)     ASl)    IMPROVKU,    AND    ADAPTKD    TO     illE     I   ^K 
SCHOOLS   IN   THIi   CONFEDERATE  STATES. 


SECOND    EDITION, 


IMCHMONM): 
rUBLI^HED   BY  GEOKGK  L.  BIIKJOOI). 

PRINTKD   I,Y    >  VV\.3  »■  rn(lS^VI,I.L.   OOi.tMIil^. 


=K 


George  Washington  Flowers 
Memorial  Collection 

DUKFUNIVFRSITY  l.IHKARV 


ESTABLISHED   BV  TH  K 

FAMILY  OF 

COI.ONKI.    FLOWERS 


||  HliTOmCAL  iQClETY[ 


T 


'l2± 


[jMiii[.'"t«:;'^'j 


ii?iaiiiiiii)i)i 


ii 


- -V  -V| 


-  r'  t 
5 


PREFACE.         ..^ 


# ',  '^ 


^ 


The  Grammar  of  Roswell  C,  Smith  has  been  selecjted  for  suita- 
ble revision  and  for  republication  by  the  Confederate  publisher, 
chiefly  on  account,  of  the  simplicity  of  its  introductory  section, 
.and   the  general   favor  which  the  book  has   received   In   our 
schools. 

It  is  much  preferred,  also,  because,  discarding  the  fancies  by 

which  some  writers  are  guided  in  their  efforts  to  change  the 

grammatical  nomenclature,  and  set  aside  the  simple  system,  of 

*^  Lindley  Murray,  it  conforms  very  generally  to  the  principles, 

and  most  frequently  employs  the  language,  of  that  distinguished 

»S^  and  favorite  grammarian. 

The  alterations  made  by  the  reviser  need  not  be  specifically 
pointed  out,  as  they  will  be  apparent  to  the  experienced  teacher, 
i»  and  to  any  who  may  take  the  pains  to  make  a  comparison.     It 

J^^  is  believed  that  they  will  be  accepted  by  all  as  decided  improve- 

<■  ments.     They  consist  chiefly  in   changing  the   imperfect  sen- 

tences in  which  "  answers  "  were  frequently  given,  into  com- 
plete affirmations  wherever  practicable ;  and  in  using  Confeder- 
ate instead  of  foreign  names  in  the  ♦<  examples." 


i^  \:>    j2-'(^,-cJ<<-t.^i 


I     ' 


RBtt 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR 


I.     OF  THE  NOUN. 


Q.  What  does  the  word  noxin  mean  ? 

Ans.  The  word  noun  moiins  name. 

Q.  Wuat,  then,  may  your  name  be  called  ? 

1.  A  NOUN. 

Q.  What  may  all  names  be  called  ? 

2.  Nouns. 

Q.  Nashville  is  the  name  of  a  place;  is  Nashville  a  nonn?  and  if  80, 
why  ? 

3.  Nashville  is  a  noun,  because  it  is  a  name. 

Q.   Potomac  is  the  name  of  a  river;  is  Potomac  a  noun,  and  why  ? 
Q.  Book  is  the  name  of  something  to  read  in  ;  is  book  a  noun,  and 
why  ? 

Q.  Will  you  now  inform  me  what  a  noun  is  ? 

4.  A  noun  is  the  name  of  any  person,  place,  or  thing. 

Q.  Will  you  mention  two  nouns  the  names  of  persons  ?  two,  the  namei 
of  things?  two,  the  names  of  different  places? 

Q.  Will  you  tell  me  which  words  are  the  nouns  in  the  following  sen- 
tences, as  I  read  them  to  you? 

"  Thomas  and  Joseph  are  in  the  house.^' 

"  The  horse  and  cow  are  in  the  lot." 

"  The  hawk  and  the  eagle  have  flown  to  the  moun- 
tain." 

''  Trees,  corn,  potatoes,  and  apples,  grow  in  the 
fields." 


II.     NUMBEK. 

Q.  .What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  number — as,  "The  number  of 
buttons  on  your  coat?" 

5.  Number  means  one  or  more. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  Hingidar  mean  ? 

6.  The  word  singular  means  one. 

Q.  AVhen,  then,  I  apeak  of  one  thing  onlv,  as  chair,  what  number  ia 
it? 

7.  Singular  number. 


6  EN'OMSH    ORAMMAR. 

Q.  Wbat,  then,  does  the  singular  number  of  nouns  denote? 

8.  Tho  singular  number  denotes  but  one  thing. 

Q.  Of  what  number  is  book,  and  why  ? 

'9.  Book  is  of  the  singular  number,  because  it  means 
but  one. 

Q.  Of  what  number  is  chair,  and  why? 
Q.  What  does  the  word  plural  moan  ? 

10.  The  word  plural  means  more  than  one. 

Q.  Of  what  number  is  lamjtt,  and  why  ? 

11.  Lamps  is  of  tho  plural  number,  because  it  moans 
more  than  one. 

Q.  Of  what  number  is  inkstand,  and  why  ? 

Q.  By  adding  $  to    '   •  c  we  have  doves,  and  e»  to  box  wo  have  hoxei. 
How,  then,  is  tho  plu;  •!  number  of  nouns  usual!}'  formed  ? 

12.  The  plural  nunil)er  is  I'urmod  l)y  adding  s  or  es 
to  the  singular. 

Q.  Will  you  Ppell  the  plural  of  ounce  /  ijhins  t   icindoxc  f   theatre  f  an- 
tccedf,'tf  church?   lahyrinthf 

Q.  How  many  numbers  do  nouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they? 

13.  Nouns  have  two  numbers — the  singular  and  plu- 
i-al. 

Q.  Will  you  name  a  noun  of  the  singular  number?  one  of  the  plural 
number? 


"^  III.     GENDER. 

Q.  What  docs  the  word  (jendcr  mean  ? 

14.  Gender  signifies  sex. 

Q.  What  doe.s  the  word  mciscnline  moan  ? 

15.  The  word  masculine  means  male. 

Q.  John  is  the  name  of  a  male ;  of  what  gender  or  sex,  then,  is  John  t 

16.  Of  the  masculine  or  male  gender. 

Q.  What  nouns,  then,  are  said  to  be  of  the  masculine  gender? 

17.  The  names  of  males  are  of  tho  masculine  gender. 

Q.  What  gender,  then,  is  man,  and  why  ?    ■ 

18.  Man  is  of  the  masculine  gender,  because  it  is  the 
name  of  a  male. 

Q.  Of  what  gender  is  uncle,  and  why  ?  father,  why  ? 
Q.  What  does; yV;/»r»;r»ic  mean? 

19.  Tlie  word  feminine  mea-ns  female. 

Q.  Susan  is  the  name  of  a  female;  of  what  gender,  then,  is  Susan  f 

20.  Of  the  feminine  gender. 

Q.  What  nouns,  then,  are  said  to  be  of  the  feminine  gender? 

21.  The  names  of  females  are  of  the  feminine  gender. 

Q.  What  goiidor  i»  woman,  and  why  ? 

22.  Woman  is  of  the  feminine  gender,  because  it  is 
the  name  of  a  female. 


NOUNS.  « 

•  Q.  Of -what  gender  is  aunt.,  and  whj' ?  daughter,  why? 
Q.  "What  does  the  word  neuter  moan  ? 

23.  The  word  7ieuter  means  neither. 

Q.  Chair  is  the  name  neither  of  a  male  nor  a  female  ;  what  gender, 
then,  may  it  properly  be  called  ? 

24.  Neuter  gender. 

Q.  What  nouns,  then,  may  be  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender  ? 

25.  The  names  of  objects  that  are  neither  males  nor 

•  females  are  of  the  neuter  gender. 

^.  Of  what  gender  is  inkstand,  and  why  ? 

26.  Neuter  gender,  because  it  is  the  name  neither  of 
a  male  nor  female. 

Q.  Oi  what  gender  is  bench  f  why  ?  chair  ?  why  ? 

Q.  Parent,  you  know,  is  the  name  either  of  father  or  mother,  that  is, 
it  is  a  name  common  to  both ;  of  what  gender,  then,  shall  we  call  such 
nouns  as  parent,  bird,  etc.  ? 

27.  Common  gender. 

Q.  What  nouns,  then,  may  be  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender? 

28.  The  names  of  such  animals  as  may  be  either 
males  or  female^  are  of  the  common  gender. 

Q.  Of  what  gender  is  sheep,  and  why? 

29.  Sheep  is  of  the  common  gender,  because  it  is  the 
name  either  of  a  male  or  female. 

Q.  Of  what  gender  is  robin,  and  why? 

Q.  How  many  genders  do  nouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they? 

30.  Nouns  have  four  genders — the  masculine,  the 
feminine,  the  neuter,  and  the  common. 

Q.  Will  you  name  a  noun  of  the  masculine  gender?  one  of  the  femi- 
nine? one  of  the  neuter?  one  of  the  common? 

Q.  Will  you  name  the  gender  and  number  of  each  noun  in  the  follow- 
ing sentences  as  I  read  them  to  you  ? 

'<  James  and  William."  «' Slate  and  pencil." 

'Uohn  and  the  girls."  "Women  and  birds." 


IV.    PROPER  AND  COMMON  NOUNS. 

Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  common — as,  "A  common  com- 
plaint ?" 

.  31.   Co  111711071  means  general. 

Q.  Although  there  are  a  vast  many  male  children  in  the  world,  each 
one  may  be  called  by  the  general  name  of  boy  ;  what  Rind  of  a  nouu, 
then,  would  you  call  boyf 

32.  A  common  noun. 

Q.  When,  then,  is  a  noun  called  common  ? 

33.  When  it  is  a  general  name. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  proper  mean  ? 

34.  It  means y?^  ov  imrticular. 

M*  Jo/tw,  and 


b  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

Q.  John,  yon  know,  is  the  name  of  a  particular  boy ;  what  kind  of 
noun,  then,  may  it  be  called? 

35.  A  proper  noun. 

Q.  "Wlicn,  then,  may  a  noun  be  called  proper  ? 
06.   When  it  is  a  particular  name. 

Q.  What  kind  nf  a  noun  is  Stmnu,  and  why? 

37.  JSvscm  is  a  proper  noun,  because  it  is  a  particu- 
lar name. 

Q.  "What  kind  of  a  noun  is  John,  and  why? 
Q.   What  kind  of  a  noun  is  rucr,  and  why  ? 

08.  Miitr  is  a  common  noun,  because  it  is  a  general 
name. 

Q.  IIow  many  kinds  of  nouns  do  there  appear  to  be,  and  what  are 
they? 

Q.  What  kind  of  a  noun  \i<j\rl»h  Mary  t  toxcnt  Loudon?  New  Or' 
leans  f   boat  ?  chain  f 

Q.  Will  you  now  tell  nic  which  words  are  the  nouns  in  the  fcdlowing 
sentences?  which  arc  proper,  and  which  common?  also  their gcuder  and 
number? 

•'  Thomas  and  John.'  "  King  and  queen." 

"Susan  and  Mary."  "House  and  barn." 


V.     PERSON. 

Q.  When  a  pcr-son,  in  ppcnking,  says,  "  I,  John,  will  do  it,"  what  per- 
son do  grammarians  call  J»hn  t 

39.  The  first  person. 

Q.  When,  then,  is  a  noun  of  the  first  person  ? 

40.  When  it  is  the  name  of  the  person  who  is  speak- 
ing. 

Q.  When  I  sny,  "James,  mind  your  studies,"  what  person  do  gram- 
marinn.s  cull  James  f 

41.  The  second  person,  being  the  person  who  is  spo- 
ken to. 

Q.'  When,  then,  is  a  noun  of  the  second  person  ? 

42.  When  it  is  the  name  of  the  person  who  is  spoken 
to. 

Q.  "William,  James  has  como ;"  what  person  is  William,  and  why? 

43.  Of  the  second  person,  because  William  is  spoken 
to. 

Q.  When  I  say,  Willium,  James  has  come,"  I  am  speaking  to  William 
iiboiit  James;  of  what  person,  then,  is  Jmnm,  an<l  why? 

44.  Of  the  tliini  person,  because  James  was  spoken 
of — that  is,  I  was  talking  about  James. 

Q.  Wlu.n,  then,  is  a  noun  of  ibe  third  person  ? 

^Ji\.   When  it  is  spoken  of 
the  name  or'u 


CASES.       -  9 

Q.  "Thomas,  Rufus  is  in  the  garden."    What  person  is  Thomas f 
why  ?     Is  Rtifm  f  why  ? 

Q.  How  many  persons  do  nouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

46.  Nouns  have  three  persons — the  first,  second,  and 
third. 

Q.  Will  you  inform  mo  which  of  the  following  nouns  are  proper, 
which  common;  also  their  gender,  number,  and  person? 

"I,  James  of  Eichmond."       "Boy  and  girl.'' 
''llenry,  study  your  book."  "William  and  his  sister." 


VI.     CASE. 

Q.  We  say  of  an  animal,  for  instance  a  horse,  when  he  is  fat,  that 
"He  is  in  a  good  case;"  and,  when  he  is  lean,  that  "He  is  in  a  bad 
case;"  what,  therefore,,  docs  the  word  co.ve  mean? 

47.    Case  means  condition,  state^  etc. 

Q.  When  I  say  "Charles  strikes  William,"  "William  strikes 
Charles,"  you  may  )»erfeive  that  the  state  or  condition  of  Charles  in 
the  fornier  example  is  quite  different  from  his  stale  or  condition  in  the 
latter:  in  the  one,  Charles  strike!* ;  in  the  other,  he  is  struck  ;  what, 
then,  is  nieant  by  the  different  cases  of  nouns? 

4^.  The  diflt'rent  relations  ihey  sustain  to  other  words 
in  the  same  sentence. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  voinivative  mean  ? 

49.  Nominative  means  naming, 

Q.  When  I  say,  "John  strikes,"  he  evidently  does  something; 
what,  then,  may  John  be  called  ? 

50.  An  actdr  or  doer. 

Q.  The  actor  or  doer  is  considered  the  naming  or  leading  noun. 
In  what  case,  then,  is  John,  when  I  s-ay,  "John  strikes  ?" 

51.  Im  the  nciminaiive  case. 

Q.  What,  then,  is  the  ncuninative  case  of  nouns? 

52.  The  nominative  case  is  ihe  agent  or  doer. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  The  dog  runs,"  in  what  case  is  dog,  and  why  ? 

6?i.  Dog  is  in  llie  nominative  case,  because  it  is  the 
agent,  actor,  or  doer. 

Q.  ''  The  cat  catches  mice."     In  what  case  is  cat,  and  why? 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  Thomas  is  pursuing  the  thief,"  what  is  the  object 
here  which  Thomas  is  pursuing? 

54.  Thief. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  ohjectivf.  mean  ? 

55.  it  means  belonging  to  ihe  object. 

Q.  In  what  case,  then,  may  th%rf_  be  reckoned,  in  the  phrase, 
"Thomas  pursues  the  thief?" 

50.   In  the  objective  case. 
Q.  What,  then,  does  the  objective  case  denote  ? 
57-   The  objective  case  denotes  tlie  object. 
Q.  When  I  say,  "  William  whips  John,"  in  what  ca- a  is  Joh7i^  and 
why  ? 


10  •  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

58.  In  the  objective  case,  because  John  is  the  object. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  possessive  imply  ? 

59.  Possession,  ownership,  property,  etc. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  It  is  Johns  slale,"  I  me'an  to  say  that  John  owns 
the  slate  ;  in  what  case,  then,  shall  we  reckon  John^s'i 

60.  In  tlie  possessive  case. 

Q.  What,  then,  does  the  possessive  case  of  nouns  denote  ? 

61.  The  possessive  case  denotes  possession  or  owner- 
ship. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "Peter's  knife,"  who  owns  or  possesses  the  knife? 
Q.  In  what  case,  then,  is  Peter^s^  and  why  ? 

62.  In  the  possessive  case,  because  Peter  possesses 
the  knife. 

Q.  In  the  example,  "John's  slate,"  you  perceive  that  Jo/i;t'jends  in 
J,  with  a  comma  before  it  J  what  is  the  comma,  and  what  is  the*, 
called  in  grammar  ? 

63.  The  comma  is  called  an  apostrophe,  and  the  8  an 
apostrophic  s. 

Q.  You  also  perceive  that  JoJui's  is  singular;  how,  then,  do  nouns 
In  the  singular  number  usually  form  their  possessive  case  ? 

64.  By  taking  after  them  an  apostrophe  with  the  letter 
8  following  it. 

Q.  "On  eagles'  wings."  Here  eagles^  is  plural,  and  in  the  posses- 
sive case ;  how,  then,  do  nouns  in  the  plural  usually  form  their  pos- 
sessive case  ? 

65.  Simply  by  taking  the  apostrophe  without  the  ad- 
dition of  s. 

Q.  But  if  the  plural  noun  does  not  end  in  *,  as  "  men's  concerns," 
how  is  the  possessive  case  formed  ? 

6d.  Just  as  the  same  case  in  the  singular  number  is 
formed. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing  remarks,  how  many  cases  do  nouns  appear 
to  have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

67.  Nouns  have  three  cases — the  nominative,  posses- 
sive, and  objective. 

Q.  Dedi7/e  sometimes  means  to  vary  the  endings  of  a  word;  what, 
then,  do  I  mean  when  I  ask  you  to  decline  a  noun  ? 

68.  To  decline  a  noun  is  to  tgll  its  different  cases  or 
endincs. 

Q.  Will  you  decline  Jb/t;?? 

69.  IS oniinative  case,  John. 
Possessive  case,               John's. 
Objective  case,  John. 

Q.  Will  you  decline  hoy,  in  both  numbers  ? 

Singular.  Plural. 

70.  Norn.  Boy.  Nom.  Boys. 
Poss.  Boy's.  Pass.  Boys'. 
Ohj.  Boy.  Obj,  Boys. 


ARTICLES.  '  11 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  William's  coat,"  you  perceive  that  the  noun  coat 
follows  WillCani'sj  by  what  is  William's  said  to  be  governed,  and 
why  ? 

71.  By  coatf  because  it  follows  William's. 

Q.  What,  then,  may  be  considered  a  rule  for  governing  the  posses- 
sive case? 

ETTLE  I. 
The  possessive  case  is  governed  by  the  following  noun. 

Q.  "William's  hat."  Is  William's  a  proper  or  common  noun? 
Why?  (36.)* 

Q.  What   is   its   person?  why?  (45.)*    Its   number?  why?   (8.)*. 
Its  gender?   why?  (17.)*     Its  case  ?  why?  (61.)*     What  noun  fol- 
lows   William^ s  ?     What  word,  then,  governs    William^s  ?     What  is 
the  rule? 

Q.  When  we  mention  the  several  properties  of  the  different  words 
in  sentences,- in  the  same  manner  as  we  have  those  of  WilliaTti's, 
above,  what  is  the  exercise  called  ? 

72.  Parsing. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

^^  John's  knife J^ 

73.  JohiVs  is  a  noun,  because  it  is  a  name — proper,  because  it  is  a 
particular  name — masculine  gender  ;  it  is  the  name  of  a  male — 
THIRD  PERSON  j  ft  is  spokcu  of — SINGULAR  NUMBER  J  it  means  but  one — 
POSSESSIVE  case;  it  implies  possession — and  it  is  governed  by  the 
noun  knife,  according  to 

Rule  I.   Tke  possessive  case  \s  governed  by  the  following  noun. 

Knife  is  a  noun;  it  is  a  name — common;  it  is  a  general  name — 
NEUTER  GENDER  ;  it  is  neither  male  nor  female;  third  person  ;  it  is 
spoken  of — singular  number  ;  it  means  but  one. 

J^^  hf.t  tlie  learner  parse  the  foregoing,  till  the  mode  of  parsing  th-e  _ 
nouu  is  so  familiar  to  him  that  he  can  do  it  readily  .^  without  looking  in  t}ie 
book.     He  may  then  take  the  following  exercises,  which  are  to  be  parsed 
in  a  similar  manner. 

EXERCISES  IN    PARSING    CONTINUED. 

"Peter's  cap."     <^  Stephen's  coat."     »' Brother's  knife." 
"John's  slate."     "Father's  house."     "  Boys' hats." 


VII.    OF   ARTICLES. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "Give  me  aboolc,"  I  evidently  mean  no  particular 
book  ;  but  when  I  say,  "  Give  me  the  book,"  what  do  I  mean  ? 
74.  Some  particular  book. 


*  Refer  back  to  this  number. 


r2  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

Q.  Which  are  the  words  thni  make  this  ditTerence  in  meaning  I 

75.  »4  and  the. 

Q.  What  are  these  little  words  called? 

76.  Articles. 

Q.   What,  then,  are  articles? 

77.  Articles  aie  words  placed  before  nouns  to  limit 
iheir  meaning-. 

Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  word  definite  ? 

78.  Definite  nrieans  particular. 

Q.  "Give  mc  the  I)ook."  Here  a  particular  book  is  referred  to; 
what  kind  of  an  article,  then,  shall  we  call  the? 

79.  The  definite  article. 

Q.   What,  then,  is  the  definite  article  ? 

bi).  The  definite  article  points  out  what  particular 
thincr  or  thinfrs  are  meant. 

Q.  The  word  In,  when  placed  before  words,  frequently  signifies  «oiy 
what,  tlien,  will  iiidijiiiite  mean? 

61.  Not  definite. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  Give  me  a  knife,"  no  particular  knife  is  rrteant: 
what  kind  of  an  article,  then,  may  a  be  called? 

82.  Indefinite  article. 
Q.  Why  is  it  so  called  ? 

83.  Because  it  is  not  used  before  the  name  of  any  par- 
ticular person  or  thin^. 

Q.  We  say,  "fl-??.  apple,"  "aw  inkstand,"  etc.,  in  preference  to  "a 
apple,"  "a  inkstand,"  etc. ;  why  is  this? 

84.  Because  it  is  easier  to  speak,  and  also  more  pleas- 
ant to  tlie  ear. 

Q.  What  kind  of  letters  do  apple  and  i7dsta7idheg'\a  with? 

85.  Vowels. 

Q.  In  what  cases  do  we  use  a7i  instead  of  a? 

86.  Before  words  beginning  with  the  vowels,  a,  c,  i,  o,  u, 
Q.  In  speaking,  we  say,  "  «  man,''  not  "«»  man;"    W'hen,  then,  do 

we  use  a  ? 

87.  Before  words  beginning  with  consonants. 
Q.  Which  letters  are  consonants? 

88.  All  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  except  the  vowels. 
Q.  How,  then,  do  a  and  an  differ? 

89.  Only  in  their  use  :  a  being  used  before  consonants, 

and   an   before    vowels;    both  are   called   by   the   same 

ntune. 

Q.  How  many  articles  do  there  appear  to  be,  and  what  are  they? 

90.  There  are  two  ariicli's — «  or  an,  and  the. 

Q.  It  is  customary  to  say,  "a  boy,"  not  "  a  i/oi/s  ;"  also,  "an  ink- 
stand," not  "an  ivlstands  ;''^  of  what  number,  ihen,  must  the  noun 
be,  before  which  the  indefinite  article  is  placed  ? 

91.  The  singular  number. 

Q.  What,  then,  is  the  rule  for  the  indefinite  article' 


ADJECTIVES.  1® 

RULE  II. 
r/w  iitdn/imte  article  a.  or  an  belongs  to  nojcns  of  the  singular  number 

only. 
Q.   We  can  say  "the  boy,"  and  "the boys;"  usin^  a  noun  either  of 
the  sin«?ular  or  plural  number  after  th? ;    what,  then,  is  the  rule  for 
the  definite  article  ? 

RTTLE  III. 
The  dqfiniu  article  the  belongs  to  nouns  of  either  the  singular  or  plural 

number. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  The  boy.'' 

92.  The  is  an  article,  a  word  placed  before  nouns  to  limit  their 
meaning — definite;  it  means  a  particular  boy— and  belongs  to  boy, 
according  to 

Rule  III.  The  definite  article  the  belongs  to  nouns  of  either  the  sin- 
gular or  plural  7iuniber. 

Boy  is  a  noun  ;  it  is  a  name— common;  it  is  a  general  name — mas- 
culine GENDiyi ;  it  is  the  name  of  a  male-— third  person  ;  it  is  spoken 
of— and  SINGULAR  number;  it  means  but  one. 

EXERCISES   IN  PARSING  rONTINUED. 

"  A  hand."  "  An  eagle."  "  The  man."  "  The  boys'  hats." 

"  A  man."  "  An  insect."  *'  The  men."  "  A  man's  cap." 

"Amite."  "  An  acorn."  "  The  boys."        ."  Tiie  girls' room." 

"  A  month."       "  An  ounce."         "  The  mice."         "  The  lady's  box." 


Vlll.   OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "John  is  iin  obedient,  industrious,  and  goofl  boy," 
I  use  certain  words  to  describe  boy ;  which  are  they? 

93.  liidusfrious,  obedient,  and  gcod. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "a  good  man,"  to  what  word  is  the  descrn:)itt5 
word  good  joined  or  added  ? 

94.  To  the  noun  nian. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  adjvctive  mean  ? 

95.  The  word  adjective  me^as  joined  or  added  to. 

Q,  What,  then,  shall  we  call  sucii  describing  words  as  good,  ohedi- 
fiU,  industrious,  etc.  ? 

96.  Adjectives. 

Q.  What,  then,  are  adjectives '? 

97.  Adjectives  are  vi-ords  joined  to  nouns  to  describe 

or  qualify  them. 

Q.  "  A  wise  man."      Which  word  is  the  adjective  here,  and  why? 

Q.  "  Rnfiis  is  a  good  boy,  but  James  is  a  belter  one,"  Hom'  are 
Rufus  and  James  spoken  of  here  1 

98.  In  comparison  with  each  other, 

Q.  The  adjectives  in  the  last  example  are  good  and  bette/,-  can  you 
tell  me  which  of  these  v/opdt.  denotes  a  higiiur  dcgrpr  exv^llence 
than  ibe  othttr''  * 


14  BNOLieH    GRAMMAR. 

99.  1'he  word  better. 

Q.  What  degree  of  comparison,  then,  shall  we  call  better  9 

100.  Comparative  degree. 

Q.  What,  then,  does  the  comparative  degree  imply? 

101.  The  comparative  degree   implies  a  comparison 
between  two. 

Q.  -'William  is  tall,  Thomas  is  taller,  but  Riifus  is  the 'tallest  boy 
111  ^cbool."     What  is  meant  hereby  tallest? 

102.  Exceeding  all  in  height. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  superlative  mean  ? 

103.  Exceeding  all;  the  highest  or  lowest  degree. 

Q.  What  degree  of  comparison,  then,  shall  we  call  tallest? 

104.  Superlative  degree. 

Q.  What,  then,  does  the  superlative  degree  do? 

105.  The  superlative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the 
positive  to  the  liighest  or  lowest  degree. 

Q.  When  I  say.  ='  James  is  u  good  boy,"  I  make  no  comparison 
between  him  and  any  other  ;  but  simply  assert,  in  a  positive  manner, 
that  James  is  a  good  boy.  What  kind  of  a  sentence,  then,  would  you 
call  this  ? 

106.  A  positive  sentence. 

Q.  Of  what  degree  of  comparison,  then,  shall  we  call  good? 

107.  The  positive  degree. 

Q.  What,  then,  dpes  the  positive  degree  do  ? 

108.  The  positive  degree  merely  describes,  without 
any  comparison. 

Q.  Will  you  compare  great? 

109.  ^^  Positive  great ',   comparative   greater;   superla- 
tive greatest." 

Q.   Will  you  compare  wise  in  the  same  manner? 
Q.   Wise  and  great  are  words  of  one  syllable  ;    how,  then,  are  the 
comparative  and  superlative  degrees  of  words  of  this  sort  formed? 

110.  By  adding  r  or  er,  st  or  est  to  the  positive. 

Q.  Will  you  in  this  manner  compare  small?  high?  mean? 
Q.  Will  you  compare  beautiful? 

1 1 1.  ^^ Pos.  beautiful ;  Cow/?,  more  beautiful ;  Suj)-  most 
beautiful." 

Q.  IIow  many  syllables  compose  the  word  beautiful? 

112.  Three, 

Q.  How,  then,  are  words  of  three,  or  more  syllables  than  one, 
usually  compared  ? 

118.   By  placing  inore  and  most  before  the  positive. 

Q.  Will  you,  in  this  manner,  compare  industrious?  t)ige?iiousl 
dutifzd? 

Q.  Will  you  compare  wise^  by  using  the  words  Itss  and  hast? 
114.  ^'  Pos.  w\se  ]   (7ow?7;.  less  wise.;   <Sz//).  least  wise." 

Q.  Will  you  in  like  manner  compare  benevolent?  distinguisJied? 
dilatory  ?    . 

Q.  "Good  mull,  belter  men,  bc^t  men."     Which  adjective   here  is 


ADJECTIVES.  15 

the  positive,  and  why?  (108.)     Which  the  comparative  ?  why?  (101.) 
Which  the  superlative  ?  why  ?  (105.) 

Q.  Good,  you  perceive,  is  not  compared  regularly,  like  great,  beau- 
tiful, etc.;  and  since  there  are  many  words  of  this  description,  I  will 
give  you  a  list  of  the  principal  ones,  together  with  others  regularly 
compared;  will  you  repeat  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees, 
as  I  name  the  positive? 

115.     Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

Good,  Better,  Best. 

,  Little,  Less,  Least. 

Much  or  many,  More,  Most. 

Bad,  ill,  or  evil,  Worse,  Worst. 

Near,  Nearer,  Nearest  or  next, 

Old,  Older,  Oldest  or  eldest. 

Late,  Later,  Latest  or  last. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing,  how  many  degrees  of  comparison  do  there 
appear  to  be,  and  what  are  they? 

1 16.  There  are  three  degrees  of  comparison — the  posi- 
tive,  comparative,  and  superlative. 

Q.  Adjectives,  you  recollect,  describe  nouns ;  to  what,  then,  do 
they  naturally  belong? 

BULE  IV. 

Adjectives  belong  to  the  nouns  which  they  describe, 

EXERCISES  IN   J'ARSING. 

"  A  wiser   child.''^ 

117.  ^  is  an  article,  a  word  placed  before  nouns  to  limit  their 
meaning — indefinite;  it  means  no  particular  child — and  belongs  to 
child,  agreeably  to  ^        . 

Rule  II.  The  indefinite  article  a  or  an  belongs  to  nonns  of  the  sin- 
gular number. 

Wiser  is  an  adjective,  a  word  joined  with  a  noun  to  describe  It — 
"Po5.  wise;  Comp.  wiser;  Sup.  wisest" — made  in  the  comparative 
degree — and  belongs  to  child,  by 

Rule  IV.  Adjectives  helong  to  the  nonns  which  they  describe. 

Child  is  a  noun;  it  is  a  name — common;  it  is  a  general  name — 
COMMON  gender;  it  may  be  either  male  or  female — third  person;  it 
Is  spoken  of— and  singular  number;  it  means  but  one. 

EXERCISES    IN    PARSING   CONTINUED. 

1       •  2  3 

"  A  dutiful  son."         "  An  ugly  child.'"         <'  The  base  man." 
*'  An  idle  boy."  '*  An  irksome  task."    '*  The  whiter  cloth." 

"  A  foolish  son."        *'  A  mild  reply."  "  Tho  milder  weather." 

4  5 

"  The  greatest  nian."  "  The  more  (1)  benevolent  citizen." 

"  The  wisest  prince."  "  The  most  (1)  suitable  method." 

•'  The  noblest  man."  "  The  least  (1)  dislruslfui  friend." 

(5  7 

"  A  large,  convenient,  and  (1)         "  The  last  choice." 

airy  habitation."  '<  The  best  man." 

"  The  intelligent,  indut^frious,         "  The  nrare.'^t  relations." 

obedient,  and  (I)  docile  "  Johnson's  (2)  large  dictionary." 

scholar.''  •'  Murray's  small  grammar." 


16  ENGLISH    ORAMMAIL 

IX.   OF  PRONOUNS. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  John  goes  lo  school,  John  learns  faot,  and  John 
will  excel,"  how  can  I  speak  so  as  lo  avoid  repealing  John  so 
often  ?  ,  1  //  T   L 

118.  By  using  the  wQrd  he  in  its  place  :  thus,   "John 
goes  to  school,  he  learns  fast,  and  he  will  excel." 

Q.  Whai  lilile  word,  then,  may  stand  for  John? 

119.  He. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  ;>ro7?o?t>j  mean? 

120.  Standing  for,  or  instead  of,  a  noun,. 
Q.  What,  then,  shall  we  call  the  word  fts,  above  ? 

121.  A  Pronoun. 

Q.  What,  then,  is  a  pronoun? 
12-J.  A  pronoan  is  a  word  used  for  a  noun,  to  avoid  a 

repetition  of  the  same  word. 

Q.  When  James  says,  "I  will  study,*'  you  perceive  thai /stands 
for  the  person  speaking;  what  person,  then,  is  il  ?  (39.) 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  James,  you  must  study,"  the  word  j/ou  evidently 
is  applied  to  James,  who  is  spoken  to;  what  person,  then,  ought  you 
to  be  ? 

123.  The  second  person. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  He  (meaning  William)  should  learn,"  what 
person  ought  he  to  be,  and  why  ? 

124.  The  third  person  ;   because  it  stands  in  the  place 
of  a  noun  which  is  spoken  of. 

Q.  If  i  invariably  stands  for  the  first  person,  yojf  for  the  second, 
and  Ae  for  the  third,  how  can  we  tell  the  different  persons  of  these 
pronouns  ? 

125.  By  the  pronouns  thennselves. 

Q.  What  have  these  pronouns  been  called  fro(n  this  circumstance  ? 
120.   Personal  pronouns. 
jt:^  I  will  now  give  you  a  list  of  all  the  personal  pronouns,  which 
you  must  carefully  memorize. 

DECLENSION  OV  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

PinST    PERSON. 

127.   Sing.  Plur. 

Norn.  I.  We. 

Pass.  My  or  mine.  Our  or  ours. 

Obj.  Me.  Us. 

SECOND  PERSON. 

Sing.  Sing.  Plur. 

Norn.  Thou.  ]  (Nom.  You.  Ye  or  you. 

Pons.  Thy  or  thine.  >  or    \  Posa.  Your  or  yours.  Your  or  your* 

Obj.  Thee.  J  (  Ohj.  You.  You. 

THIRD   PERSON   MASCULINE. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Nom.  He.  They. 

Po.ts.  His.  Their  or  theirs. 

Ohj.  Him.  Them. 

1.  To  bo  OTiitted  lu  parsing.  2.  Jofu^ron's  is  governed  by  dictianviry,  br 
Rulol. 


PKONOVNS;  17 

THIRD    PERSON    FEMININE. 

fSing.  Pliir. 

Nom.  Sh6.  They. 

Po'is.  Her  or  hers.  Their  or  theirs. 

•  Obj.  Her.  Them. 

THIRD    PKRSON    NKUTEH. 

Shi^.  Plur. 

No?/i,  It.  They. 

Poss.  Its.  Their  or  theirs. 

Obj.  It.  Them. 

Q.   Will  yoii  decline  /in  both  numbers  ?  thou-  or  i/ou  1  he?  she?  it  ? 

Q.  In  what  person,  number,  and  case  is  F?  ivc?  my?  miiie?  our 
ox  ours?  -nipf  us?  thou?  yc?  his?  they?  them? 

Q.  In  what  gender,  person,  number,  and  case  is  he^  she?  it?  his? 
hers?  her?  him? 

Q.  How  many  numbers  do  pronouns  appear  to  have,  and  what  are 
tliey  ? 

12S.  Pronouns  have  two  numbers; — the  singular  and 
plural, 
Q.  How  many  cases,  and  what  arc  they  ? 

129.  Pronouns  have  three  cases — the  nominative,  the 
possessive,  and  the  objective. 

Q.  How  many  per.sons  ? 

130.  Pronouns  have  three  persons— ^the  first,  second, 
and  third. 

Q.  How  many  gender.s  ? 

181.  Pronouns  have  three  genders — tlie  masculine, 
feminine,  and  neuter. 

Q.  How  many  pronouns  are  there  in  all,  of  the  first  person?       « 

Q.  How  many  of  the  second,  and  how  many  of  the  third? 

Q.  The  pronouns  of  the  nominative  ca-se,  singular,  are  called  lead- 
ing pronouns;  how  many  of  these  are  there? 

183.   Five — 7,  thou  or  xfoxt^  //e,  she^  it. 
.     Q.   Why  are  not  the  possessive  and  objective  cases  of  the  singular 
and  plural  numbers,  also  the  nominatives  plural,  reckoned  in  the  num- 
ber of  the  leading  pronouns? 

134.'  Because  they  are  all  considered  as  variations  of 
the  nominative  singular. 

Q.  To  which  of  the  pronouns  is  it  customary  to  apply  gender? 

135.   To  the  third  person  singular — he,  she,  it. 

Q.  Why  are  not  the  first  and  second  persons  each  made  always  to 
represent  a  differeni  gender? 

13().  Tiie  first  and  second  persojis  being  always  pres- 
ent, their  genders  are  supposed  to  be  known. 

Q.  As  pronouns  stand  for  nouns,  what  gender,  number,  and  person 
ought  they  to  have  ? 

137.  The  same  as  the  nouns  for  which  they  stand. 
Q.  What,  then,  m^y  be  <^onsidered  a  rule  for  (he  agreement  of  the 
pronouns?  , 

2 


IS  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

RTJLE  V, 

Pronouns  must  agree  with  the  nouns  for  which  they  stand, 

in  gender^  number,  and  person. 

QUESTIONS  ON  PARSING. 

Q.  How  many  difTcrent  sorts  of  woids  have  we  now  found,  and 
what  are  tht-y  ? 

138.  Four — the  Noun,  ihe  Article,  ihe  Adjectivck, 
and  the  Pronoiw. 

Q.  The  word  parr,  you  know,  means  divisioTi :  and  xprrch,  the  power 
of  using  words  or  lavgnage ;  what,  therefore,  shall  we  call  these 
grand  divixjons  of  words? 

180    Parts  of  Speech. 

Q.  When,  thrn,  I  ajilc  you  what  pari  of  speech  hoy  Is,  for  instance, 
what  do  ytui  understand  me  to  mean  ? 

140.  The  same  as  to  ask  me  whether  hoy  is  a  noun  or 
not. 

Q    What  part  of  apeccb,  then,  is  WiUiam,  and  why  ?  (36.) 

1.  "  He  went  to  i*ehool." 

2.  "She  went  lo  hvr  task." 

3.  ••  William  went  lo  his*  play." 

4.  "John  rt'lnrned  Irom  his  sc-hool." 

f).  ."  I  reqiie.>'t  you  to  mind  yonr  studies." 

G.  "The  book  was  mine,  but  now  it  is  yours." 

Q.  Will  you  name  the  jKonouns  in  the  six  foregoing  examples? 

Q.  How  many  aie  there  in  nil? 

Q.  What  is  the  gender,  number,  and  person  of  those  in  the  first  1 
sei-oiid  ?  liiird?  fourlli  ?  tilth?  sixth? 

Q.  What  is  the  jjendt-r  of  his,  in  the  fourth  sentence?  why?  (137.) 
hi  number?  why?  (137.)  Its  per>ou  ?  why?  (137.)  Its  case  ?  why? 
(01.) 

Q.  Will  voii  name  the  nonns  in  the  first  sentence  ?  in  tiie  second? 
third  ?  fourth  ?  filih  ?  sixth? 


X.     OF  THK  VERB. 

Q.  When  I  hay,  "Jame.s  strikes  William,"  which  word  tells  what 
Janiex  iloe>  ? 

\4\     Strikes. 

Q.  The  word  inb  mctms  itord ;  and  as  the  words  in  all  sentences 
which  tell  wlini  the  nouni»  do  are  the  principal  ones,  what  siiall  such 
word.-  be  c;illed  ? 

142.  Verbs. 
Q    If,  in  the  phra.se,  "  Williatn  ^trikes  James,"  we  leave  out  the 
word  striArs,  you  perceive  at  once  that  the  .xense  is  destroyed  j  what 
rca>*on,  then,  can  yoti  ^ive  for  calling  some  words  in  a  sentence  veri*, 
and  other-j  by  a  dillerenl  name  ? 


VERBS.  '  ]9 

143.  The  words  which  we  call  verbs  are  the  most  im- 
poriant. 

nn?wh^?''^'^"'  ^^"'^'''^  ^"^  lesson.'^     Which  word  is  the  verb  here, 

144.  Studies,  because  it  tells  what  Wilham  dues. 

Q.  When  I  sny,  '«  John  sing;*,"  which  word  is  the  verl>,  and  why' 
Q.  When  I  say    ''James  strikes  John,"  which  word  shows  that  nn 
action  IS  performed  ? 

145.  Strikes. 

Q.   Vyhai  kind  of  a  verb,  then,  shall  we  call  striles? 
1 40.   An  active  verb 

and  wTy^"^ '""''  °^  ^  ^""'^^  '"'  '''^^'^^'  ^"  *'^''  ^^"tence,  "John  walks," 

147.  Walks  is  an  active  verb,  because  it  expresses  ac- 
tion. ^ 

Q.  "He  beat  William."     Which  word  here  is  the  verb?    Is  WiU 
liam  an  agent  or  an  object  I 

148.  An  object. 

Te?b   b!ii',"J/'-''  '"^^^%^-^"'J  walks,"  «.«//:.,  it  is  trne,  is  an  active 
above,  ue.ther  can  we  supi,ly  one:  for  we  can   not  say.  "  ThL  child 

Retard  .o'lb  'n'f '  ""'''?''  "^.^••*^^«'-«.'  '^^  ^^^  ^^^  '"f'^rred  froni  this  fact,  in 
regard  to  the  nature  of  active  verbs? 

149    That  some   active   verbs   will  take  nouns   after 
them  for  objects,  and  others  will  not. 

.,n^:Z^  """'"  "*^^\"0!'"^'e  V"'  *"fler«n^-e.  The  term  transitive me^n^ 
passrvg  ov.r;  and  when  1  say.  "  William  whips  Charles,"  the  verb 
W;.;;.  shows  that  the  action  which  William  pe'rforms  paseToverZ 
2,>!7  ''  ''^"  "^•''''-     ^^''''  '^^"^  °^'  "  ^^^l''    ^''-^'   «hall  we  call 

150.  An  active-transitive   verb. 

Q.^What,  then,  is  an  activc-tran.«itive  verb? 

151.  An  active-transitive  verb  is  one  that  either  has, 
or  may  have,  an  object  after  it. 

Q.   Walks,  we  fbnnd.  would  not  take  an  object  after  it :    and  a*;  m- 
LX^'""""'  ""'  ''^"'"-^  ""'"'^  ^''^^^  ^^h^""  ^^-^  ^«"  su'ch  verbs  as 

152.  Active-intransitive  verbs. 

Q.   ^Vbai,  then,  is  an  active-intransitive  verb? 

153.  An  active-intransitive  verb  is  one  that  expresses 
action,  but  will  not  take  an  object  after  it 

terminTll^n".  / '7'  "  ^/^^'''  ''•"  "  "^  '^^"'^^  '^""'"  ^'^  '-mmediately  de- 
af.e  .ife  how  Vh  '""'■'  ^'^  «-''ve-transit.ve  verbs,  by  the  objects 
rin2n.!h"d'^         '        "'"'""^  transitive,  and  intransitive  verbs  be  dis- 

154.  When  we  can  place  him  or  it  after  any  active 
verb,  and  make  sense,  it  is  transitive;  otherwise  it  is 
intransitive.  ' 

J^;a.It:z  rbTh.;:'"""-""'" "  ■"'«'*-'' "  ''»"■«•"  which 


"^  ENGLISH     GRAMMAR, 

155.  liema'ms^  sleeps,  and  is. 

Q.  These  verb?  do  not  imply  acliou,  like  6(iik-es,  bi'ufs.  etc.:  what 
do  they  imply  ? 

150.  Existence,  rest,  or  heixs^,  in  a  certain  stale. 

Q.  These  verb.s,  and  others  of  similar  character,  have  been  called 
venter  (signilying  neither)  by  grammarians,  because  they  are  neither 
active  nor  passive.  On  a  future  occasion  I  will  make  you  fully  ac- 
quainted with  a  passive  verb.  It  is  sufficient  for  our  present  pur- 
pose that  yon  perceive  the  rea.son  of  the  name  of  the  neuter  verb. 
What  is  a  neuter  verb  ) 

157.  A  neuter  verb  is  one  that  simply  implies  being  or 
existence  in  a  certain  state. 

Q.  Will  you  inform  me  now,  in  general  terms,  what  is  a  correct 
definition  of  a  verb  ? 

158.  A  verb  is  a  word  whicli  signifies  actio.v  or  being. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "  1  strike,"  in  whnt  number  and  person  is  strike, 
and  why  ? 

159.  iStrike  is  of  the  first  person  singular,  because  its 
agent  /,  is  of  this  person  and  number. 

Q.  Hence  you  may  j^erceive  that  verbs,  in  themselves  considered, 
do  not  have  person  and  number;  why,  then,  are  they  said  to  have 
these  properties  at  all  .' 

160.  On  account  of  the  connection  which  they  have 
with  their  agents  or  nominatives. 

Q.  We  say,  "  I  write."  and  ''  He  writes  ;*'  hence  you  perceive  that 
the  ending  of  the  verb  varies,  as  its  agent  or  nominative  varies  ;  what, 
then,  will  be  the  rule  for  the  nominative  case  ? 

^   RULE  VI. 

The  nominative  case  governs  the  verb  in  nvmber  and perso7i. 
Q.  If  the  nominative  case  governs  the  verb  in  number  and  person, 
in  what  respect  must  the  verb  agree  wdih  its  nominative  (ase'? 

EULE  VII. 

A  verb  must  agree  unth  its  nomiyiative  case  in  nvmber  and  jierson . 
Q.  When  I  say,  "James  beats  him,"  the  pronoun  liim  is  the  object 
of  the  action  denoted  h'<j  heats ^  and  is,  therefore,  in  the  objective  case  ; 
what,  then,  will  be  a  good  rule  for  the  objective  case  after  active 
verbs  ? 

RULE  VIII. 
Active-transitive  verbs  goverii  the  objective  case. 

Q.  I  will  now  give  you  the  different  endings  of  the  verb  love,  in  its 
different  number.s  and  persons.     Will  you  repeat  ihem  ■? 
Singular.  Plural, 

161.  First  ])er8on,  I  love.  First  person,  We  love. 
Second  person,  You  love.  Second  person,  You  love. 
Third  person,      He  loves.  Third  person,      They  love. 

Q.  Will  you  repeat  the  variations  of  am? 

Siuffular.  Plural, 

162.  1  Pers.  1  am.  1  Pers.  We  are. 

2  Pers,  You  are.  2  Pers.  You  are. 

3  Pers.  He  is.  3  Pers.  They  aro. 


VERBS.  21 

Q.  Will  yon  repeat,  in  ihe  saixie  manner,  tlie  variations  ol"  hate? 
denire  ?   read? 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSIiVG. 

"  /  study  my  lc><>ion." 

1(53.  /is  a  PiiONOUN,  a  word  usod  instead  of  a  noun — personal  ;  it  al- 
ways denotes  the  same  person  (liie  first) — first  person;  it  denotes 
the  speaker — singular  number;  it  means  but  one — '■'•  Nom.  I" — made 
in  the  nominative  cask,  to  study,  according  to 

Rule  VI.  The  nominatice  case  governs  the  vevh  in  vumbcr  and  per- 
son. 

Study  in  a  VKUB ;  it  expresses  action — transitive;  it  admits  an  ob- 
ject after  it — "  I  Pers,  1  ■study" — made  in  the  first  pkrson — singular 
NUMBER,  because  its  nominative  /is,  with  which  it  agrees,  agreeably 
to 

Rule  VII.  A  i^crh  vmnt  agree  loitJt  its  nominative  case  in  nuviber  and 
person. 

My  is  a  pronoun,  a  word  used  for  a  nonn — personal;  it  always 
represents  the  same  person — first  person  ;  it  represents  the  person 
speaking — ^'■Nom.  I;  Poss.  my  or  ni'ne" — made  in  the  possessive  cask 
— and  governed  by  the  noun  lesson,  according  to  • 

Rule  T.    The  possessive  case  is  governed  hy  the  following  noun. 

Lesson  is  a  noun — common;  it  is  a  general  name — neuter  gender  ; 
it  is  neither  male  nor  female — third  person;  it  is  spoken  of — singu- 
lar number;  it  means  but  one — and  in  the  objective  case;  it  is  the 
object  of  Ihe  verb  study,  and  governed  by  it,  according  to 

Rule  VIII.  Active-transitive  verbs  govern  the  objective  case. 

exercises  in  parsing  continued. 
Transitive  verbs. 

1 

"  1  lament  my  fate."  *'  He  found  a  dollar." 
"  You  regard  your  friends."                    •■   "  She  attends  the  school." 

'*  We  desire  yoni"  improvement."  "  It  retards  the  work." 

"  We  love  our  children."  "  They  shun  vice." 

"  You  make  a  knife."  "  Ye  derive  comfort." 

2 
"  I  love  him."  "  She  forsook  you." 

''  I  lament  her."  "  They  annoy  me." 

"  You  assist  them."  "  We  took  it." 

"  He  struck  her."  "  She  relieved  us." 

"  Joh7i  reads  his  hookJ^ 

His  is  n  PRONOUN,  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun — personal;  it 
uniformly  stands  for  the  same  person — masculine  gender,  third 
person,  singular  number,  because  the  noun  Joh}i  is,  with  which  it 
agrees,  asrreeably  to 

Rule  V.  Pronoityi^  must  agree  with  the  noiina  for  ^vhich  they 
stand,  in  gender^  number,  and  ;?ffr.vo?i. 

"^  Nom.  he;  Pass,  his" — made  in  the  possessive  case — and  gov- 
erned by  the  noun  book,  according  to 

Rule  I.    The  possessive  case  is  governed  by  the  following  notin. 

^5E@*  The  remaining  words,,foc'<-,  reads,  and  John,  are  parsed  as 
before. 


22  ENGLI5H    GRAMMAR. 


EXERCISES    IN   PARSING   COMINUED. 
3 

*'  Mary  studies  her  lesson."  "  Virtue  rewords  its  followers." 

"  The  girls  love  their  ijooUs."  "  A  disobedient  son  grieves  his 

'*  Good  ehildren  niiud  their  parents." 

pnrenis."  "  The  intemperate  man  loves  his 

"  Sin  de«'eives  its  votaries."  dram." 

_^^*'  In  par^ing  personal  pronouns  we  do   not  apply  Rule  V  un- 
less the  uouns  lor  which  they  >iand  are  expressed. 

l)itransitive  verbs. 
4 
"  I  walk'."  "  You  smile."  "  John  swims." 

"James  runs."  "  Thev  wini,-."  *  "  Birds  fly." 

"  William  hops."  '«  We  dance."  "  Lions  roar." 

Neuter  verbs. 
"  William  is  (1)  di.-»creel."  (2)     "  John's  wife  is  fortunate." 
*'  James  is  happy."  «*  John's  brother  is  unhappy." 

"  He  was  studious."  "The  eagle's  flight  was  sudden." 

''  He  became  intemperate."         "The  scholar's  duty  is  plain." 
"  Thou  art  wise."  "The  judge's  pay  is  suflicient." 


XI.  INDICATIVE  MOOD— TENSE. 

Q  When  James  says,  "  I  will  learn,"  he  evidently  means,  by  his 
ma  nner  of  speaking,  to  express  his  intention  to  learn;  but  when  ho 
ijays,  •' I  can  learn,"  what  does  ho  mean? 

16o.  'J'hat  he  has  liie  nhility  lo  iearn. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  woo^  mean  ? 

If)6    iVood  nwans  manner. 
Q.  What,  then,  does  the  mood  of  verbs  denote"? 
107.  The  clifTirent  rnaitner  of  ivpresenling  actions. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  /'///■/(Va/ytc  mean.? 

168.   Declaring  or  sliowing. 

Q.  Wlieii  I  say,  ''  William  has  studied,"  I  declare  some  fact ;  ia 
what  njood,  then,  shall  we  class  has  Htndicd? 

1()9,    111  the  indicative  mood. 
Q.   Wiien  I  say,  "Has  William   studied?"  the  only  difllt-rence  be- 
tween this  phrase  and  the  fi>regoinp  consists  in  a  change  in  the  order 
o(  the  words,  so  as  to  show  that  a  question  is  asked  :  in  what  mood, 
then,  shall  we  call  has   Wil/idm  stitditUf 

170    Indicative  mood. 
Q    What,  then,  is  the  indicative  mood  used  for? 

J71.   Tlie  indicative  mood  is   used  for  asserting  or  de- 
claring a  thing,  or  asking  a  question. 

(1)  Is  is  a  verb;  it  ImplieH  being — nkuter  ;  it  is  noitlier  active  nor  jwesive.  but 
exjii  esses  Ifi'iiif;  i>ieiely — 1  jieis.  1  uni;  2  jn-rs.  Yuii  iii«;  3;>C7-s.  He  r;>- Williiun  is" 
—  made  in  tlie  tiurd  person  singular,  because  H'i7/i(im,  ilu  uoniinativc,  ia,  und 
agieea  witii  William,  ncconiintr  to 

Rlle  VIII.  A  verb  must  aqree  with  its  nommative  ccwc  in  7iumber  and  person. 

(2;  Discreet  belougs  to  William,  by  Rule  IV- 


VERBS. 


28 


^ 

-^ 


Q.  Tn  what  mood  is,  "They  do  sing?"  Why?  (171.) 
Q.  What  does  the  word  tense  mean? 

172.   Tense  means  time. 
Q.  What  does ^j/-i?RCN<  mean  ? 

17»^.  Present  means  vow, 

Q.  When  1  say,  "  Tlie  bird  sings,"  I  mean  thai  the  bird  sings  now  ; 
in  whcl  tense,  then,  is  sing  ? 

174.  (n  ihe  present  tense. 

Q.  What,  then,  is  the  present  tense  used  for? 

175.  Tlie   present   tense   is   used   to  express  what  is 
now  taking  place. 

Q.  In  what  tense  is,  ''  The  dog  runs  ?"   Why  7  (175.) 

Q.  "James  wrote."    ".Tames  has  written."  ,  These  phrases  denote 

what  is  past ;  in  what  tense  are  they  ? 

^    176.   In  the  past  tense. 

■-ijQ,.  What  does  the  word  future  mean— as,  '=  At  some  future  time?"' 

177.  Future  means  yet  to  come. 

Q.  In  what  tense  are  the  phrases,  "I  will  com.e,"  "I  shall  have 
come  ?■' 

178.  In  the  future  tense. 

Q.  How  many  grand  divisions  of  lime  do  lljere  appear  to  be,  and 
what  are  they  ? 

179.  Tliere  are  three — the  present,  past,  and  future. 
Q.  When  I  say,  "John  wrote,"  is  the  action  here  spoken  of  past 

and  finished  ? 

180.  It  is." 

What  does  imj^erfect  mean  ? 

181.  Unfinished  o r  iv compleie. 

Q.  "John  v;as  writing  when  I  saw  him."  This  denotes  an  action 
unfinished  in  past  time,  and  corresponds  with  \vhat  is  usually  denom- 
inated in  Latin  the  imperfect  tense:  hence  the  origin  of  the  name 
selected  by  English  jrrnminarians  to  denote  action  past  and  finished — 
a  term  not  at  ail  si(;ni(icant  of  an  action  finished  in  past  time;  what, 
then,  does  the  imperfect  tense  express  ? 

182.  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  what  took   place 
in  past  time,  however  dislanl. 

Q.  "Peter  wrote  yesterday,  and  has  written  to-day."  Hero  both 
nets  of  wriliniT  are  past  and  iinisliedj  but  which  has  more  immediate 
refert-nce  to  the  iiresenl  time? 

Ib;i.  Has  ivritten. 

Q.  To  distinguish  this  tense  from  the  imperfect,  gramrr:nrinn8 
have  <'alled  it  the  perlecl  tense  ;  what,  then,  will  the  perfect  tense 
express  ? 

184.   The  perfect  tense  express(^s  wlial  lias  taken  place, 
and  also  convej's  an  allusion  to  liie  present  time. 

Q.  "  James  had  r««ad  liefore  I  wrote."     Here  both  acts  are  past  and 
finished  ;  l)ut  whieii  took  place  fust  ? 
\^o.  The  act  of  reading. 
Q.  What  Joes  the  v,'ori.\  pl/'pet/ect  mean? 

18(3.  More  than  the  perfect. 


^1  ,  EN«Ll5iH    URAMMAU. 

Q.  Wliai  tense,  then,  shall  we  cull  "James  had  reod  .'" 

187.  The  pluperfect  lonse. 

Q.  "What,  then,  <lot;s  llie  pluperlVct  ten$e  express  2 

188.  Tiie  pluperfect  tense  expresses  what   Imd   taken 
place  at  or  before  some  past  time  mentioned. 

Q.  **John  will  come.''  This,  you  know,  was  called  the  future 
tense;  can  you  tell  mc  why  ? 

189.  Because  it  implies  I'me  to  come. 
Q.  What.  then,  does  the  future  tense  oxiiic?*? 

190.  The  future  tonse  expres.ses  what  will  take  place 
hereafter. 

Q.  "  I  shall  have  learned  my  lesson  by  noon."  Here  an  action  is 
to  talce  place  at  a  future  time  spcL-ilied  or  mentioned  ;  and  since  w« 
already  have  one  future  tense,  wj  will  call  that  the  lirst  and  this  the 
second  future  tense;  what.  then,  will  the  second  future  tetise  ex- 
press ? 

191.  The  second  future  expresses  what  will  have  taken 
place  at  or  before  some  future  time  mentioned. 

Q.   What  does  si'nopsis  mean  ? 

192.  ./?  concise  and  general  view. 

Q.  I  will  now  present  you  with  a  synopsis  of  all  thedifferent  tenses, 
illustrated  by  the  veb  Icani ;  will  you  repeal  it? 

SYNOPSIS. 

103.  Prcs.  tense,  \  learn  or  do  learn. 

Imp.  tetiae,  1  learned  or  did  learn. 

Per/,  tense,  1  have  learned. 

Plup.  tense,  I  had  learned.  v 

^st  Put.  tense,  I  shall  or  will  learn. 

2d  Flit,  tense,  I  shall  liave  learned. 

^j^^  You  shall  next  have  the  different  variations  of  the  foregoing 
verb,  in  each  tense  of  the  indicative  mood  ;  these  I  wish  you  to  study 
very  carefully,  that  you  may  be  able  to  answer  the  questions  which 
will  then  be  aslced  yoti. 

194.      7^0  learn. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

TRESEN'T    TEN.SE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

1  Pars.  I  learn.  1  Pers.   We  learn. 

2  Pera.  You  learn.  2  I'ers.  You  learn.  • 
.?  Pers.  lie.  she,  or  it  learns.        3  Pfrs.  Tliey  learn. 

oa, 

When  we  wish  to  express  energy  or  positiveness*ihus-^ 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  do  learn.  1.  We  do  learn. 

2.  You  do  learn.  2.  You  do  learn. 
.3    He  do»8  learn.  3.  They  do  JHarn. 


VERBS.  25 

IMPEEFECT  TENSE. 

Singular.  Plural, 

1.  T  I«*ariied.  1,   We  learrnHl. 

2.  You  learned.  2.  You  le;iriied. 

3.  He  learned.  3.  They  learned, 

OR, 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  did  learn.  1.  We  did  learn. 

2.  Yon  i\iii  learn.  2.  You  did  learn. 

3.  He  did  learn.  3.  They  did  learn. 

PERFECT  TENSB. 
Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  have  learned.  .  1.  We  have  learned. 

2.  You  havtr  learned.  2.  Ynu  have  learned. 

3.  He  has  learned.  3.  They  have  learned, 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 
Singular,  Plural, 

1.  I  had  learned  1.  We  had  learned. 

2.  Yon  had  learned.  2    You  had  learned. 
3. ''He  had  learned.                         3.  They  had  learned. 

FIRST  FUTURE  TENSE. 

Sitigular.  '  Plural. 

1.  I  shall  or  will  learn,  1.  We  shall  or  will  learn. 

2.  You  shall  or  will  learn.  2.  You  shall  or  will  learn. 

3.  He  shall  or  will  learn.  3.  They  shall  or  will  learn. 

SECOND  FUTURE  TENSE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  shall  have  learned.  1.  We  shall  have  learned. 

2.  You  will  have  learned.  2.  Ymu  will  have  learned. 

3.  He  will  have  learned.  3,  They  will  have  learned. 
***For  the  benefil  of  those. who  choose  to  retain  the  second  per« 

son  singular,  as  given  in  Ibrmer  treatises,  the  following  synopsis  is 
iDberted. 

>  SYNOPSIS. 

195. 2d  Pfirs.  Siitg.  Pres.  Thou  learnest  or  dost  learn. 

2d  Vers.  Si)ig.  Imp.  Thou  learnedst  or  didst  leara. 

2d  Pers.  Si)/g.  Perf.  Thou  ha.^t  learned. 

2d  Pers.  Si'/g.  Phip.  Thou  hadst  learned. 

2d  Pers.  Siug.  \st.  Put.  Thou  >.halt  or  wilt  learn. 

2d  Pers.  Sitig.  2d  Put.  Thou  wilt  have  learned. 

Q.  In  what  mood  is,  "I  learn?"  Why  .^  (171.)  In  what  tense? 
Why?  (175.)  In  what  mood  and  tense  i>*,  "lie  learns?"  "  W» 
learn?"  '*  I  did  learn  ?"  "1  have  learned  ?"  "  I  had  learned  ?'  "I 
shall  or  will  learn  ?"     "  I  shall  have  learned  ?" 

Q.  In  wlial  person  and  number  is,  ♦' f  learn?"  **  You  learn?" 
"  We  learu?"  *•  They  had  learned  ^"  "  He  shall  learn  ?"  '•  We  bad 
learned  ?" 

8 


26  T.NOLI6H    GRAMMAR. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  avxiliary  mean  ? 

196.  Auri/iur}/ means  helpinf^. 

Q.  in  the  phrase  "'1  vill  sing:,"  iri7/,  yon  perceiv««,  is  used  to  help 
form  the  future  tense  of  fhtg  :  icill  is,  therefore,  called  nu  nuxiliary 
verb*aiid  ilie  verb  nhuj  is  reckoned  the  principal  verb;  what,  iben, 
are  anxilifiry  verbs  ? 

197.  Auxiliary  verbs  are  lliose  by  the  help  of  which 
are  formed  the  diflerenl  lenses,  mocd.s,  etc.,  of  the  prin- 
cipal veibs. 

Q.  The  nuxiliary  verbs  are  not  unfrcquently  denoininnted  the  signs 
of  llie  tenseM,  because  each  tense  has,  in  gcnenil.  an  auxii'ary  pecu- 
liar to  itself;    what,  tl)en,  is  the  siyn  of  the  second  future  ? 

198.  Shal/  Qv  tvill  have. 

Q,.  What  i?<  the  sicri  of  the  first  future? 

199.  Shall  or  will. 

Q.  What  is  the'siga  of  the  pluperfe:!  ? 

200.  Had. 

Q.  What  is  the  fi\p\  of  the  perfect? 

201.  Have. 

Q.  What  is  the  sign  of  the  imperfect? 

202.  Did. 

i.\.  We  can  say,  "I  did  strike  yesterday,"  or,  "  I  struck  yesterday ;" 
how.  then,  can  we  tell  when  a  verb  is  in  the  imperfect  tense  without 
the  sig-n  did  ? 

203.  If  we  can  place  yesterday  after  the  verb,  and 
make  sense,  it  is  in  the  imperfect  tense. 

Q.  What  is  the  sign  of  the  present  tense? 

204.  /)o,  or  the  first  form  of  the  verb. 

Q.  From  the  foregninp,  how  n)any  lenses  does  the  indicative  mood 
appear  to  have,  and  what  are  they  ? 

205.  Six — the  present,  the  imperfect,  the  perfect,  the 
pluperfectj  the  first  and  second  future  tenses. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  They  have  arrived.^'' 

206.  They  is  a  pronoun,  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun 
— personal;  it  always  represents  the  same  person — 
THIRD  PF.R60N  J  it  denotes  the  person  spoken  of — plural; 
it  means  more  than  one — "  Nom.  he  :  Poss.  his  :  Obj. 
liim.  Plural,  Nom.  they" — made  in  the  nominative  case 
to  have  arrived,  accord  in j]^  to 

RtiLE  VI.    The  non)innti»e  case  ffuverna  the  verb. 

Ifnre  arrived  is  fl  VKKB,  a  word  that  imj)lies  action  or  being — active  ; 
it  implies  action — intkansitive  ;  it  does  not  admit  of  an  object — in- 
dicative mood;  it  simply  indicates  or  declares  a  thing — perkkot 
te.\sk;  it  expresses  what  has  just  taken  place — "1,  I  have  arrived; 
2,  You  have  arrived;  3,  He  has  arrived.  /-*/»<;•«/,  1,  We  have  arrived; 
2,  You  liuve  arrived  ;  3,  Tiiey  have  arrived  "-  -made  in  the  third  per- 


VERBS. 


2f7 


SON  PLURAL,  because  its  nominative  thej/  is,  and  ag:ree*  with  it,  ac- 
cording to 

Rule  VII.  A  verb  must  agree  with  its  nominative  case  in  number  and 
person. 

EXEnCISKS  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 


'*  They  had  come." 

'*  We  did  go." 

•'  The  bird  will  return." 


1. 

"The  sun  has  risen." 

"  Dogs  will  light." 
"  Lions  will  roar." 


'•James  loves  William." 
•'  Susan  l)eat.s  him." 
"I  have  heaten  iheni." 
"She  had  beaten  us." 
"You  shall  assist  him." 
"  It  did  disturb  me." 


Cohimbiis  discovered  America." 
Piety  promotes  our  happiness." 
He  will  learn  his  lesson." 
John  did  make  great  progress." 
They  do  study  their  lessons." 
'  Boys  love  sport." 


"Do  I  disturb  you?" 

"  Did  they  learn  their  lessons  ?" 

"  Have  they  recited?" 

"  Does  the  instructor  teach  us  ?" 

"  Had  he  dismissed  him?" 


Shall  I  expect  your  assistance?" 
■  Will  a  virtuous   citizen   commit 

such  (1)  acts?" 
'  Have  you  fouiid  your  knife?" 


XEI.  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

Q.  What  does  "  He  may  write,"  imply? 
207    Permission  or  liberty  to  write. 
Q,.  What  does  "  lie  must  write,"  imply? 

208.  Necessity  of  writing. 

Q..  What  does  "He  can  write,"  imply? 

209.  Power  or  ability  to  write. 

Q.   What  does  "  He  should  write,"  imply? 

210.  Duty  or  obligation  to  write. 
Q.  What  does  "He  would  write,"  imply? 

211.  Will  or  inclination  to  write. 
Q.  What  does  the  word  potential  mean  ? 

212.  ^^b/e  or  'powerful. 

Q.  In  what  mood,  then,  do  grammarians  reckon  can  learn,  may  write, 
and  also  vmst  write,  should  write,  etc.? 

213.  In  the  potential  mood. 

Q.  Why  are  all  these  difTt-rent  forms  of  representing  actions  con- 
sidered to  be  in  the  potential  mood — a  name,  as  we  have  seen,  peculiar 
only  to  that  form  of  the  verb  which  implies  power  ? 

2N.  To  I  r^'vent  multiplying  moods  to  a  great  and  al- 
most numberless  extent. 


fn  Adjectjvp. 


28  EKOLISH    GRAMMAR. 

Q.  Whnt,  then,  does  the  potential  mood  imply  '    ,    .  . 

*2Io    Tlie  poieiiiial   iiiood    implies  possibility,  liberty, 
power,  will,  ohiicalion.  or  necessity. 
-     Q.  Willi,  are  the  ^igns  of  this  inoo-l  ? 

2 Mi.   Mai/,  can,  musty  mii^hf,  could,  would,  and  should. 

Q.    W'liat  (lues  ihe  wnr'l  coujuriddon  mean  ? 

*217.    Unifhig,  combining,  or  joining  together. 

Q.  Veil  reioliert  that,  in  varyinjr  the  veri),  we  joined  the  pronouns 
vitl)  it ;  lience  this  cxtTcise  is  called  rnnjmjatiun  ;  what,  then,  tlo  you 
uiidtT-tand  by  the  <-oiijii^iition  of  a  verb? 

'ilini.  The  conjuiraiion  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  com- 
binaiion  and  arrangement  of  its  several  moods,  tenses, 
numbers,  and  persons. 

219.   Coujugation  of  the  verb  Learx. 
POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 
Singula):  Plural. 

1.  I  may,  can,  or  must  learn.  1.  We  may,  can,  or  mii.«t  learn. 

2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  learn.  2.  You  may,  can,  or  mnst  learn. 

3.  He  may,  can,  or  must  learn.  3.  They  may,  can,  or  must  lebru. 

IMPERFECT   TENSE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  miisht,  could,  would,  or  should     1.   W«  mifrht,  could,  would,  or 

learn.  should  learn. 

2.  You     miirht,   couJd,   would,    or     2.  You    mijiht.  could,  would,  or 

bhould  learn.  should  learn. 

3.  He    miirht,    could,    would,    or     3.  They  micht,  could,  would,  or 

should  learn.  should  learn. 

PERFECT  TENSE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  may,  can,  or  must  have  learn-     1.  We   may,  can,  or  must  hare 

e'd.  learned. 

2.  You    njny.  can,   or   mnsl   have     2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  have 

learned.  learned. 

3.  He    may,   can,   or   must    have     3.  They  may,  can,  or  must  have 

learned.  learned. 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE 
Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  mipht,  could,  would,  or  should     1.    We    mifrht,   could,  would,  or 

liave  learned.  should  have  learned. 

2.  You     might,    could,    would,    or     2.   You  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  have  learned.  should  have  learned. 

3      He    might,    could,    would,   or     3.  They  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  have  learned  should  have  learned 


VEUBS.  29 

St/nopsia  of  the  Second  Person  Siugular,  icith  Thou. 
220. 
Prcs.  Thou  mayst,  canst,  or  must  li'arn 
J^r>p. '\huu  ..lijrl.tsi,  could.t,  vvo-lds,,  or  shonldst  learn, 
y  ^//.  J  ho„  n,;iysi.  cnnst,  or  n.uM  hsive  learned. 
/  W  Thou  .n.jrhtsj   cronidM,  vvonldsi,  o,-  shouldsi  have  learned. 

Q-   in  w  hai  n.ood  i.s  "  1  may  learn  ?"     Wliy?     UUy ) 
fAV  ^'""  '^J''^"*  ^'^^^  synopsis  with  n  ihouf  he?  toef  yef  youf 

Q.  In  what  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person  is  "I  can  learn  i" 

«'  Wwf;:,:;:';,Tj";r."g^''  '""'"  •'  ''Ihavelearnedr     "Heshallrun?" 

vvii     you     oi.jijgate  love  in   the  same    mood,   and  imnerfecl   lense « 

S    fVn  ""  ''"'■^'^'  '•'"•^**  •     ^'^"'^'  '"  "'*^  Plnperlecl  teiiJe?  * 

C^.  How  many  tenses  has  the  potential  mood? 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING, 
"//e  may  return.'''' 

if  7^^'  ^f /''  **  PRONOUN,  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun— pfb^ovat  • 
It  .nvar.ably  represents  the  same  P^^vson-^^,scvur,KcLZHTno' 
resents  a  n.ale-THiRu  pkrson  j  it  denotes  the  person  ^.S  fn  Ar  ^' 
GUL.R  nua,ber;  it   implies  l.ni'  one-and  in  th^^A  inT,  ,^^^^ 

'X":  VT  ^>7'-"^--  ^-''-non.native  ca^rt^l^:;^^;  fb;  '' 
nvLE  Vl.—  fhe  uonnnaiire  vnse  govtnis  the  rerh  ^ 

J/uy  return  is  a  vf.rb;  it  in.plies  action  or  beinf.r_ACTlVF  •  it  imnl.V, 

vhat  maybl.  --ow-'M      Vuay  o^c^m  r^^^^^^  '«  ^leno.es 

turn;  3,    Ue  may  or  can  ret    n^'lmadr  n      ,'     '         "  """^  ""  *''"  '*" 

.^  be<^se  ijnominat- ^e'^iis,^;!::;;.^!:!::;-:^:^^^^^ 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 
1. 

"  He  may  come."  n  n  , 

"  Me  mijri.l  ret i  e  "  utu^'"  '^"]'  ^^""'^  «rithmetic." 

"  John  <an  assi'fme."  t^'rr."''  '""^'         *"  '*'^'''*'"  '''^ 

"WiilKim   must  obey  his  instruc-    "  Th  J  lady  could  have  procured 
"  We  may  have  erred  "  u  j    ''*"*  '''"•" 

"  j„h,.',.  U..  .voum' ,„,"         ..  ^i;''-„s  Lt:;.!/"'  ""•'^•" 

2. 
"I  do  rtMoice."  htu 

"Wedo|e:Mn"  ^''*'  .^"'V.'^'"''®   ''''"    ^''•'^'t    the 

<t  T  ,1    .  II  ■   .  S«ho()|. 

.Joliii  wi  I  resume  his  lasL-  "  a  \  ^  :  ir     i  -n  ^     . 

"  An  indu.,riuu«  boy  will  be  rich."       '^      "^'^  ^"^  ^''"  *"**  P°^"^y'' 


30 


ESOLI8H    GRAMMAR 


XIII.   CONJUGATION  OF  THE  NEUTER  VERB 

Tu  he. 

222.  When  I  say.  "I  am  lU  home,"  yon  know  lh:\t  am  is  a  verb,  be- 
cau>e  it  iin|)lies  beiii?  or  existence  j  and  since  to  be  meaus  lo  exwt,  the 
verb  am  has  been  called  the  verb  tu  be. 

223.  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Singular. 


1.  I  am. 

2.  You  are. 

3.  He  is. 


Singular. 


1.  I  was. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  He  was. 


Singular. 

1.  I  have  been. 

2.  You  have  been. 

3.  He  has  beea. 


Singular. 


1.  I  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been. 

3.  He  had  been. 


Singular. 

1.  I  shall  or  will  be. 

2.  You  shall  or  will  be. 

3.  He  shall  or  will  be. 


Singular. 

1.  I  shall  have  been. 

2.  You  will  have  been. 

3.  He  will  have  been. 


Singular. 


PRESENT   TENSE. 


IMP.£RF£CT  TENSE. 


Plural. 
We  are. 
You  are. 
They  are. 

Plural. 

1.  We  were. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  They  were. 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


Plural. 

1.  We  have  been. 

2.  You  have  been. 

3.  Thev  have  been. 


PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

FIRST  FUTURE  TENSE. 


Plural. 

We  had  been. 
You  had  been. 
They  had  been. 


Plural. 


1.  We  shall  or  will  be. 

2.  You  sh;ill  or  will  be. 

3.  They  shall  or  will  be. 


SECOND  FUTURE  TENSE. 


Plural. 

We  shall  have  been. 
You  will  have  been. 
They  will  have  been. 


POTENTIAL  MOOD. 


PRESKNT    TENSE. 


I  may,  candor  mus-t  be. 
You  may,  can,  or  must  be. 
He  may,  can,  or  must  be. 


Plural. 

1.  We  may,  can,  or  must  be. 

2.  You  may,  can.  or  must  be. 

3.  They  may,  can,  or  must  be. 


VERBS.  581 

IMPERFECT  TKNSB. 

St'ngidar.  Plural. 

1.  I  might,  could,  would,  or  should     1,  We  might,  could,  would,  or 

be.  .         should  be. 

2.  You    might,   could,   would,   or    2.  You  inijiht,  could,  would,  or 

should  be.     •  should  be. 

3.  He    might,    could,    would,    or    3.  They  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  be.  should  be. 

PERFECT  TENSE. 

SlngtUar.  Plural. 

1.  I  may,  can,  or  must  have  been.       1.  We  may,  can,  or  must  have 

been. 

2.  You   may,   can,  or   must   have    2.  You  may,  can,  or  must  have 

been.  been. 

3.  He  may,  can,  or  must  have  been.  3.  They  may,  can,  or  must  have 

been. 

Pluperfect  tense. 
Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  might,  could,  would,  or  should     1.   We   might,  could,  would,  or 

have  been.  should  have  been. 

2.  You    might,   could,   would,   or    2.  You   might,  could,  would,  or 

should  have  been.  should  have  been. 

3.  He    might,    could,    would,    or     3.  They  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  have  been.  should  have  been. 

224.  St/nopsin  of  the  Second  Person  Singular,  loith  Thou. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD.  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  Thou  art.  Pres.  Thou  mayst,  canst,  or  must  be. 

Imp.  Thou  wast.  Imp.  Thou  migntsl,  couldst,  wouldst,  or 
Per/.  Thou  hast  been.  "    should  be. 

Plnp.  Thou  had;!l  been.   '  Per/.  Thou  mayst,  canst,  or  must  have 

1  Fut.  Thou  shall  or  wi!t  be.  been. 

2  Fut.  Thou  wilt  have  been.  PUp.  Thou  mightst,  oouldst,  wouldst, 

or  shouldst  have  been. 


XIV.  QUESTIONS  ON  THE  FOREaOING  CON- 
JUGATION. 

Q.  Why  is  ow  a  verb?  (15S.)  What  is  It  sometimes  called  ?  (2-22.) 
Why  is  it  so  called  ?     (222.) 

Q.  Will  you  give  the  synopsis  of  the  verb  to  he  with  /through  the 
indicative  mood  ? 

Q.  Will  you  conjugate  am  in  the  present  indicative?  Imperfect? 
Perfect?  Pluperfect?  I  Future?  2  Future?  Preseiit  potenlial? 
Imperfect?     Perlecl  ?     Pluperfect? 

Q.  In  what  mood,  tense,  nuinl)er,  and  person  is  ''I  am?"     "Am 


92  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

I?"     "Yniiwere?"     "T  have  been  ?"    " Have  vou  been  ?''     "  He  may 

0.  ran  be?"'  ''We  slioiil.l  be?"  'Tie  ni»y'h;ne  been?"  '-Tljey 
fIioiiUI  have  been?"  "Thou  ^ho^llcl^l  liave  been?"  "Tlion  luayst 
be  ?■' 

Q.  Will  you  repeal  ihe  synopsis  with  fhon  ? 

EXEKCKSES  IN  PARSING. 

"  The  girls  were  industrious.^'' 

SSr*).  Were  \»  o  vkkb;  il  iinplie:*  action  or  beinsr — jvei'tkk  ;  it  is 
neither  ottive  nor  |ia>sive,  expre>j'ing  simply  bein<: — indicativk 
wood;  il  simply  inclicnles  or  ileirlnres  a  thniff — impkhkkct  tknsk  ; 
il  expresse>  pH>t  tinu — "  1,   1  was  ;  'i.  Von  were  ;  3,   He  was.     VInr. 

1,  We  were  ;  '-i.  Yon  were  ;  ^,  Tlit-y  were,  or  giiU  were" — made  in 
ihe  THIRD  PKKsoN  Pi.i'RAL,  becaus^e  its  nominative  girla  is,  wi;h  which 
il  jiprees,  Hgreeably  to 

Ki'i.E  VII.  A  verb  must  agree  with  its  vomivative  case  in  nvviber 
and  per.^ou. 

Industrious  is  an  ad.tective.  a  wonl  jViined  with  a  nonn  to  describe 
it — ••  iiidnsliions,  tnorc  indiistrions,  ///^yA/  jndn.-inun!*  "' — in  the  posi- 
tive nEfJKKK  ;  il  dfM-ribes,  wiihoiil  any  eompiirison  —  and  l)elong^  to 
the  nonn  r/ii/a.  aiTordinfi  I" 

\{  VUE    IV.   Adjccfivfs  /"/oug  to  the  iini'vs  utn'ch  tlit-y  dtt'Cribe, 
For  /Aftiind  g'li^,  apply  Ki.lk.s  III  and  VI. 


KXKUCiSKS    IN  TARSING    CONTINTEP. 

"  William  is  attentive."  "  Am  I  youn^z  ?" 

••John  is  stndioiis."  •'  Was  I  wron;>  ?'' 

"  We  are  jealous."  "  IJave  we  been  wielced  ?" 

"Thou  art  <lntiful.''  "Were  ihry  penitent  ?" 

'•Mary  has  been  inlellijrent."  "  Wa^hin-zton  was  patriotic." 

"  The  boys  will  have  been  dutiful."       "  Columbus  was  enterprising. 

"  Their  e&lale  was  small."  *'  My  wile's  luolher  is  sick." 


XV.  OF  T[^E  ADVERB. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "The  bird  flies  swiftly,"  I  do  not  mean  by  swiftly 
to  describe  l>ird ;  what  does  mi-ifily  dosenbe  ? 

2i^().  'J'Im'   rimniuT  of    flying. 

Q.  To  what  p-.tri  of  s[)eech  is  swiftly  joined  in  the  phrase,  "The 
bird  flies  swiltly  ?" 

2ti7    To  ilie  vprh /lies. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  udrerb  si<;nify? 

'Z'Z^.  Jitiiittl  to  ft  ve.ib. 

Q.    What,  then,  slmll  we  call  such  words  as  swifilyl 

^'29.    Advkkbs. 

Q.  "  Joliii  runs  very  swiCily.  '  Which  word  here  describes  or 
shows  how  swiMly  .Tuhn  runs  7 

'im.    Very. 

Q.  "Industrious,  more  industiioti.'*,  most  indu.strious."  Which 
words  here  tell  how  industrious  ihe  person  is? 

ii3l.  More  and  vioat. 


*> 


ADVERBS.  88 

Q.  In  one  of  the  laj«t  two  examples  the  nilverb  trry  qualifies  or 
de^(•ril)t^x  xhv  ailverl)  svijily.  In  the  other  eHse  the  ailxerhs  wore  and 
mwt  qiiahly  the  adjective  iiulu.strioi/s.  What  kind  ol  wuids,  then,  do 
adveilts  qualify  or  de-^erilie  ? 

28'2.  Aclvfibs  qunlify  verbs,  adjt^ciives,  and  oilier 
adverbs. 

Q.  What,  then,  appears  to  lie  a  proper  definition  of  adverbs? 
2»W.   Advt  rbs  are^vvords   joined    lo   verbs,   adjectives, 
and  oiber  adverbs,  to  qualify  or  describe  ihem. 

Q.  '-Jiihn  visits  me  offe}/,  but  Thomas  ofteiirrr  In  this  example 
"we  ^'ee  that  adverbs  may  be  compared  ;  will  you,  iherelore,  compare 

S0U71  / 

2JM.  "  Soon,  sooner,  soonest." 

Q.   Will  yon  compare  vixelyl 

2^5.   "  Wif^ely,  more  wisely,  most  wisely. 
Q.  How  do  adverbs  ending-  in  ly  appear  to  be  compared? 

^Z'My   By  ibe  ttd verbs  more  and  most. 

Q.   Will  you.  in  this  manner,  compare  ndmlrahly?  foolishly? 

Q.  Many  adverbs  are  compared  like  a<lieetiv«'>  oJ'  cuie  ^yllable,  as 
souii  ahove  ;  but  iheje  is  a  very  considerable  lunnber.  the  couipari>on 
of  which  is  not  refrulaled  by  any  jjeneral  rule.  The  roilovvin<r  li>t 
embraces  adverlis  varioii>iy  compar«  d  ;  you  will  repeal  the  compara- 
tive and  superlative  of  each,  as  I  name  llie  positive. 

237.  Positive.                 Comjiaiufive.  Svjyerlative. 
Often,  oltener,  oltenest. 
Miicii,  more,  most. 
Well,  better,  bt!st. 
Soon,  sooner,  soonest. 
Ju>tly,  I). ore  justly,  most  justly. 
Wisely,  more  wisely,  most  wisely. 
Justly,  less  justly,  lea>t  justly. 
Badly  or  ill,  worse,  worst. 

238.  Note. — Advorlis,  tl'Oiigh  very  numorows.  niny  nevorfliehBH  be  reducfd  to  a 
few  classes.  Yuu  will  new  read  witli  H)t<  ritioii  the  following  list,  aud  1  will  tLen 
ask  yoiri^onie  queBtions  resiu^  ting  ea«li  cIhss. 

1.  Of  number  :  us  ••  (  nee.  tvice,  tlirire."  etc. 

2.  or  order  :  h8  '  First  secondly,  tjiirdly  fcintlily.  fiftlily.  lastly,  finnlly  "  etc, 

3.  Ofplt'ce:  as-'Heie  theie.  where,  elsewliere,  iiiiywliere.  sonii-Mlieic.  nr-wliore, 
ht>ieiii,  whither,  hither  4hitl'er,  upward,  downward,  forward,  backward,  whence, 
bencc.  th^n^e.  whithersoever,"  etc. 

4.  Of  time.. 

Of  time  present :  as  ••  Now,  to-daj'."  etc. 

Of  •inif.  jiast:  as  ••  Already,  before,  lately,  yesterday,  heretofore,  bitherto,  long 
feince.  I'-iifr  iijro.-'etc. 

Of  tivif  in  come:  as '•  To-morrow,  not  yet,  bereafter,  henceforth,  henceforward, 
by  hihI  by   instant!)'   prisei.tly.  ininiedijifely,  sriiii.Lhlwj^ys  "  etc. 

<H'  linip.  ■iiidrfivife  :  a« '■  Oft  often,  ofttimes.  oltoniinips.  stiuietiines  soon  seldom, 
daily,  weekly.  niMiithiy  yeai  ly.  always,  wlien   then.  <  vt  r  n<ver,  again."  etc. 

6.  Ot  quavlH}/:  as-Ajucli.  little,  snfficiently.  how  niucb,  bow  k'^'^^  enough, 
abundantly  "  etc. 

ti.  Of  manner  or  qnaU'ly :  as  "Wisely,  foolishly  justly,  unjustly  qiiickl)*.  slowly." 
etc.  Advcrlii^  of  qn;ilily  are  tin-  most  nuniemuK  kind:  and  tbiy  an-  penerally 
lonncd  by  adding  tin-  teiiiiiiiuti(  n  tj/  to  an  adjoctiv*'  or  larficijle  vr  clmniiinK  ff 
Inxo  ly  :  as.  ••  Tad  liadly  :  cheerful  ( lirci  fully  ;  jib  e.  ably  ;  admiral  le.admiiably," 

7.  Of  doubt:  BB  ••  reihapB,  pcradveutme,  yosfcibly.  perchance." 


84  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR 

8.  Of  afflrmation :  as  "  Verily,  truly,  uudoubtedly,  doubtless,  certainly,  yea, 
yes,  Hureiy.  indeed,  really,"  etc. 

9.  Of  negation :  as  ••  Nay,  no,  not,  by  no  means,  not  at  all.  in  no  wise,"  etc. 

10.  ■  ;f  interrogation  :  as  "  How.  why,  wlierefore.  whether,"  etc. 

11.  Of  comparison :  as  "  More,  most,  better,  best,  worse,  worst,  less,  least,  very, 
almost,  little,  alike."  etc. 

Whfjn  a  preposition  suffers  no  chati^e.  but  becomes  an  adverb  merely  by  its  ap- 
plication :  as,  when  we'  say,  "  Ho  rides  about ;"  ''  He  was  muir  falling;"  **  But  do  not 
afti'r  lay  the  blame  on  me." 

There  are  also  some  adverbs,  which  are  composed  of  nouns,  and  the  letter  a 
used  instead  of  al,  on,  etc.:  as  '-Asido,  athirst,  afocrt,  aliead,  asleep,  aboard,  ashore, 
abed,  agrouud,  afloat." 

Q.  Will  you  name  two  adverbs  of  number?  two  of  order?  two  of 
place  ?  two  of  lime  present  ?  two  of  time  past  ?  two  of  time  to  come  ? 
two  of  time  indetinile?  two  of  quantity?  two  of  manner  or  quality? 
two  of  doubt?  two  of  affirmation?  two  of  iiegation?  two  of  interro- 
gation ?  two  of  comparison  ? 

Q.  Adjectives  de.scribe  as  well  as  adverbs  ;  how,  then,  can  you  tell 
one  from  the  other? 

2:39.  Adjectives  describe  nouns,  but  adverbs  dascribe 
or  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs. 

Q.  Tliis  fact  should  be  remembered;  you  shall,  therefore,  have  it 
in  the  form  of  a  rule:  will  you  repeat  u? 

KULE  IX. 

Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs. 

Q.  From  bad  we  form  the  adverb  badly;  how,  then,  may  a  large 
class  of  adverbs  be  formed? 

240.  Many  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  ly  to  adjec- 
tives. 

Q.  Will  you,  in  this  manner,  form  an  adverb  from  wise  ?  from  great  ? 
from  sinful  ? 

EXERCISES  IN  PAPwSING. 
'*  The  bird  sings  sweetly.'''^ 

241.  Sweetly  is  an  adverb,  a  word  used  to  qualify  a  verb,  adjective, 
or  other  adverb;  in  this  example  it  qualifies  the  verb  siugs,  agreea- 
ably  to 

Rule  TX.  Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjectives,  and  other  adverbs. 

Sings,  bird,  and  ike  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISES    IN   PARSING   CONTINUED. 

Adverbs  qualifying  verbs. 

"The  soldiers  marched  slowly."      "They  will  return  soon." 
"The  frirls  sing  delightfully."  ''The  boys  write  admirably." 

"Henry  improves  rapidly."  "Susan  reads  elegantly." 

Adverbs  qualifying  adjectives. 

"  He  was  very  attentive."'  "  James  is  more  studious." 

"John  is  quite  busy."  "Waller  is  m.ost  studious." 

"William  is  really  studious."  _       "Ellen  is  les.s  happy," 


PREPOSITIONS. 


85 


Adverbs  quallfyiv g  verbs  and  other  adverbs. 
"  You  learn  grammar  very  well."    "James  writes  most  elegantly." 
♦'The  boys  write  too  fast."  "  1  will  assist  you  most  clieert'ully." 

"He  will  come  much/)ftener." 

Adverbs  promiscnonsly^  used. 
"He  has  read  once."  "John  is  not  happy." 

"I  will  first  remind  you."  "  Wliiihor  shall  1  fly?" 

"I  saw  him  yesterday."  "My  I)roiher  sends  me  the  paper 

"1  have  eaten  sutficiently."  monthly." 


XVI.     OF  TtlE  PREPOSITION. 

Q.  To  say,  "The  cider  is— cellar,"  would  make  no  sense;  can  you 
inform  me  what  would  make  sense? 

242.  "The  cider  is  in  the  cellar.*' 

Q.  By  placing  the  little  word  iit  after  is,  and  before  cellar,  the  sen- 
tence is  rendered  complete;  what  office,  then,  does  iii  perform  ? 

243.  A  preposition  connects  words,  and  thereby  shows 
the  relation  between  them, 

Q.  What  does  the  word  preposition  mean.* 

244.  Placed  before. 

Q.   What,  then,  may  those  words  like  iji  be  called,  as  they  are 
placed  before  other  words  to  connect  them  with  words  preceding  ? 

245.  Prepositions. 

Q.   What,  then,  are  prepositions? 

246.  Prepositions  are  words  nsed  to  connect  words, 
and  thereby  show  the  relation  between  them. 


247.     List  of  principal  Prepositions. 


Among: 

around 

amidst 

athwart 

after 

about 

against 

across 

above 


at 

by 

below 

between 

beneath 

behind 

betwixt 

beside 

beyond 


concerning 

down 

except 

excepting 

for 

fro  na 

in 

into 

instead  of 


near 

of 

off 

on 

over 

out  of 

respecting 

to 

towards 


according  to    before 


notwithstanding  through 


throughout 

touching. 

up 

upon 

under 

underneath 

unto 

with 

within 

without 


\ 


Q.  Will  you  mention  the  prepositions  beginning  with  a?  with  6  .^ 
c  ?  d?  e?  f?  i  ?  n  ?  o  ?  r  ?  t  ?  n  ?  w  ? 

Q.  Will  you  now  repeat  all  the  prepositions? 

Q.  Do  we  say,  "  He  works  for  I,"  or,  "  He  works  for  me?" 

Q.  In  what  case  is  me?  (127.) 

Q.  What  case,  then,  follows  prepositions? 

248.  The  objective  case. 

Q.  This  fact  is  of  sufficient  importance  to  conglitute  a  rule ;  will 
you,  therefore,  repeat 


86  ENGLISH    ORAMMAB. 

BULE  X. 

Prepositions  govern  Ihe  ohjerfive  case. 

EXEKCISES  IN  PAUSI^^G. 

^'  Jo/ill  Jbu>id  hi.s  hat  in  the  rooiiy 

240.  hi  is  a  prevosiiion,  a  word  iisfd  lo  conned  words  nnd  show 
the  relation  between  them;  it  here  shows  the  relation  between //oi 
nn»l  road. 

liuad  is  a  jroUN ;  it  is  a  name — co.inioN ;  it  is  a  general  name — 
KKUTKR  gkndkb;  it  is  neither  male  nor  female — TiiiKr)  person;  it  is 
spoken  of^ — singular  numbkk;  it  means  but  one — objkciive  case^ 
it  is  the  object  of  the  relation  denoted  by  the  preposition  t?/,  and  gov- 
erned by  It,  atcortlin^  to 

K-t'LE  X.   Prcpositioiis  govern  the,  objective  case.^ 
"John  ran  throuijh  the  lioiise  into  '  "1  will  seareh  the  house  diligent- 

the  gTiirden."  ly  for  him." 

•' We  have  deceived  him  to  cursor-     "  \W  misihi  learn  the  lesson  be- 

row."  fore  them.'' 

"We  came  in  season."  "Accordm<i^  to  my  impression,  he 

"You  ^t^ldy  <rratnmar  for  your  im-  i>  in  fault." 

provemenl  in  lan«^u:iofe."  "Notwiihslandingrliis  poverty, he 

"  From  virtue  to  vice  the  progress         was    the    deliuht    of    his    ac- 

is  gradual."  quaiutances." 

"They     travelled      into      France     "On  all  occasions  she  behaved 

•     through  Italy."  with  propriety." 

"  He  lives  within  his  income."  "Of  his    talents   we    might   say 

"  Without  the  aid    of  charity,   he  much." 

lived  very  comfortably  by  his     "We  may  expect  a  calm  after  a 

industry."  storm." 


XVII.  OF  THE  CONJQNCTION. 

Q.  When  I  say.  "John — his  book,"  the  sense,  you  perceive,  is  in- 
complete. Can  you  put  a  word  into  the  blank  which  will  complete  the 
sense.' 

250.   *' Jolin  reads  his  boolc." 

Q.  Can  you  inform  me  what  the  foregoing  expression  is  called? 

251     A  s<"titence. 

Q.  What,  then,  is  a  sentence? 

252,  A  sitiience  is  a  collection  of  words  forming  a 
complt'ip  sens*'. 

Q.  "Life  is  short."  This  expression  is  called  a  sentence;  can  you 
tell  me  u  hat  kind,  and  why  ? 

25^5.   li  is  a  simple'  sentence,  because  it  makes  sense, 
and  has  but  one  nonjihative  and  one  verb. 
Q.   What  does  the  term  compound  mean  ? 

254.    It  means  compo.sed  of  (wo  or  more  things. 
*  The  remaining  words  are  parsed  as  boforo, 


CONJUNCTIONS.  87 

Q.  "Life  fs  short,  and  art  is  long."    This  sentence  is  raade  up  of 
two  simple  sentences;  what,  therefore,  may  it  be  called? 
25'>.   A  compound  senience, 

Q.   What,  tiien,  is  a  compound  sentence? 

ii5(i.  A  compound  sentence  contains  two  or  more  sim- 
p!<^  sentences  connected  tocrether. 

Q.  .Whiit  does  the  term  conjunction  signify? 

257.    Union  or  joining  together. 

Q.  In  tile  conipoinul  sentence,  "John  writes  and  William  learns," 
the  simple  sentences  are  joined  together  by  the  word  and ;  what, 
then,  may  and  be  called?"' 

25W    A  Conjunction. 

Q.  "The  king  and  queen  are  an  amiable  pair."-  In  this  sentence 
words  and  not  scntencres  are  connected  by  and  j  can  you  point  out 
the  words  so  connected  ?  * 

259.  King  and  queen. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing  particulars,  what  appears  to  be  the  use  of 
tbf  conjunction? 

260.  A  conjunction  is  used  to  connect  words  and  sen- 
tences together. 

Q.   When  I  say,  "  Five  and  four  are  nine,"  what  do  I  mean? 

261.  Five  added  to  four  nnake  nine. 
Q.   What,  then,  is  implied  by  and? 

26^.   Addition. 

Q.  When  I  say,  ''  I  will  go,  if  you  will  accompany  mc,"  what  does 
the  conjunction  (/'imply? 

2()'>.  Condition  or  siipposition. 
Q.  What  does  the  word  copulative  mean? 

264.  Uniting,  joining,  ox  Unking  together. 

Q.  And,  if,  etc.,  are  called  copulative  conjunctions;  can  you  tell 
roe  why? 

265.  Because  a  copulative  conjunction  connects  or 
continues  a  sentence  by  expressing  an  addition,  a  sup- 
position, a  cause,  etc. 

Q.  The  following  are  the  principal  conjunctions  of  this  class;  will 
you  repeat  them  ?  '^  . 

266.  And,  both,  because,  besides,  for,  if,  provided, 
since,  then,  that,  therefore,  wherefore. 

Q.  When  I  say,  "James  and  John  will  come,"  I  mean  both  will 
come,  but  when  I  say,  "James  or  John  will  come,"  what  do  I  mean  ? 

267.  That  eitlier  James  or  John,  one  of  them,  will 
come. 

Q.  Are  the  words  in  this  sentence,  then»  joined  or  disjoined  ? 
26n.   Disjoined. 
Q.  What  word  is  it  that  expresses  the  disjoining? 

269.  Or. 

Q.  What  part  of  speech  is  o«-  ►" 

270.  Conjunction' 


38  tNGLlSH   GRAMMAR. 

Q.  What  does  the  word  disjunctive  mean  1 

271.  Disjoining  or  separating. 

Q.   What  kind  of  a  conjunction,  then,  shall  we  call  or? 

272.  A  disjunctiA''e  conjunction. 

Q.  "  James  will  come,  but  Henry  will  not."     Here  the  two  clauses 
of  the  sentence  are  opposed  to  each  other  in  meaning,  and  the  word 
7>>it  separates  these  two  clauses;  what,  then,  does  this  word  imply? 
27'^.  Opposition  of  meaning*. 

Q.  From  the  foregoing,  what  appears  to  be  the  use  of  the  disjunc- 
tive conjunction  ? 

274.  The  conjunction  disjunctive  connects  sentences, 
by  expressing-  opposition  of  meaning  in  various  degrees. 

Q.  The  following  are  the  j>rincipal  conjunctions  of  this  class  j  will 
you  repeat  them  ? 

275.  "But,  thanj  though,  either,  or,  as,  unless,  neither, 
nor,  less,  yet,  notwithstanding.'' 

Q.  Prepositions,  you  recollect,  connect  wordsj  as  well  as  conjunc- 
tions; how,  then,  can  you  tell  the  one  fr(>m  the  other? 

276.  Prepositions  show  the  relation  between  words, 
but  conjunctions  express  an  addition,  a  supposition,  a 
cause,  or  an  opposition  of  meaning. 

Q.  "  He  and  she  write."     In  what  case  is  he?  she? 

Q.  The  pronouns  he  and  she,  you  perceive,  are  both  in  the  same 
case,  and  connected  by  the  conjunction  a.7id ;  when,  then,  may  nouna 
and  pronouns  be  connected  by  conjunctions? 

277.  When  the}''  are  in  the  same  case. 

Q.  "She  will  sing  and  plays."  How  may  this  sentence  Tie  cor- 
rected ? 

278.  She  will  sing  and  play. 

Q.  In  what  mood  and  tense  is,  "She  will  sing?" 

Q.  To  say,  "She  play,"  is  incorrect;  play,  then,  in  this  example, 
can  not  be  in  the  present  tense ;  will  you,  then,  inform  me  what  **  She 
will  sing  and  play"  means,  when  fully  expressed  ? 

279.  "  She  will  sing  and  she  will  play." 

Q.  Here  will  play  is  in  the  future  tense,  as  well  usteillsing  ;  when, 
then,  may  verbs,  in  general,  be  connected? 

280.  When  tliey  are  in  the  same  mood  and  tense. 

Q.  From,  the  foregoing  particulars,  what  appears  to  be  the  rule  for 
the  use  of  conjunctions  in  connecting  words? 

ETJLSXL 

Conjunctions  usually  connect  verbs  of  the  same  mood  and 

tense^  and  nouns  or  pronouns  of  the  same  case, 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

"  John  assists  his  father  and  mother^'' 

280.  And  is  a  conjonctiokt,  a  word  chiefly  used  to  connect  words 
and  sentences — copulative  ;  it  coww^cX^  father  and  mother. 
ilforf.^r  is  a  Nouy ;  it  is  a  name — common;  it  is  a  general  name — 


IKTERJECTIONS  39 

FEMININE  6EKDER ;  it  fs  the  name  of  a  female — thibb  person;  it  is 
spoken  of — singular  number  ;  it  means  but  one — and  it  is  one  of 
the  objects  of  assists,  and  is,  lliorefore,  io  tl)e  objective,  case,  and 
connected  wi[h  fatJ/er  by  the  conjunction  and,  according  to 

Rniac  XI.   Coyijintctiovs  nsitaUy  conduct  verbs  of  the  same  tnood  and 
tense^  avd  vows  or  proiioitus  of  the  same  case. 

EXERCISES    IN    PARSING   CONTINUED. 

"  r  will  reward  him  and  them  at  "She  reads  well,  writes  (3)  ele- 

some  Allure  til). e  "  gantly,  and  plays  admirably  on 

"We  in  \i\\n  (1)  look  for  a  path  the  piano-forte." 

between  virtue  arid  vice."  '*  Intemperance  destroys  the  mind 

"  Reproof  eiilier  hardens  or  soft-  and    benumbs  the   senses   of 

ens  its  objects.'-  man." 

"In  the  morning  of  life  we   ea-  "You    may    read    this    sentence 

gerly    pursue   pleasiire,    but  first,  and  then  parse  it." 

oltentimes  meet  (2)  with  sad  "He  has   equal    knowledge,  but 

disappointments."  inferior  judgment." 

'A    good   scholar   never  mutters  "John  rises  early  in  the  morning 

nor  disobeys  his  instructor."  and  pursues  his  studies." 


XVm.     OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

Q.  When  I  exclaim,  "Oh!  I  have  inined  my  friend,"  "Alas!  I  fear 
for  life,"  which  words  here  appear  to  '  e  thrown  in  between  the  sen- 
tences to  express  passion  or  feeling'/ 

282.    Oh!  Alas! 

Q.  "What  does  ijiterjectioii  mean  ? 

28J5.  Thrown  between. 

Q.  What  name,  then,  shall  we  give  si:    '?  vvovd'-  ■:"-  eh.'  alas!  etc.? 

284.  Interjections. 

Q.  What,  then,  are  interjections? 

285.  Interjections  are  words  llirown  in  between  the 
parts  of  sentences,  to  express  the  ja^pioDs  or  sudden 
feelings  of  ihe  speaker. 

LIST  OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

1.  Of  earnestvess  or  grief:  as,  "O !  oh  !  alas  !  ah  !" 

2.  Of  rvovder :  as,  "  lleallv !  strange  ! " 

3.  0/ cc/Zn/^:  as,  "Hallo"!  ho!  hem!" 

4.  Of  attention:  as,  "  Behold  !  lo  !  hark ! " 

5.  Of  disgust:  as,  "  Foh !  fy  !  fudge  !  away  '  " 

6.  Of  silence:  as,  "  Hush  !  hist ! " 

7.  Of  covtem-pt:  as,  "Pish  !  tush  ! " 

8.  Of  saluting:  as,  "  Welcome  !  hail !  " 


(1)  In  vain  means  the  same  as  vainly.    It  may,  therefore,  be  called  an  adverbial 
phrase,  qualifying  look,  by  Kule  IX. 

(2)  Meet  agrees  with  lue.  understood,  and  is,  therefore,  connected  viiihpunue  by 
the  conjunction  hut.,  according  to  liule  XI. 

(3)  Writes  Hud  plays  both  agree  with  she.  understood,  and  are,  therefore,  con- 
nectedi  tlie  former  with  reads,  and  the  latter  with  writes,  by  Rule  XT 


40  KNOLISH   GRAMMAR. 

Q.  Will  yotj  examine  tho  foresoins;  li^t,  and  then  name  an  inter- 
jection of  iirief'  One  oC  \von<ler  ?  One  of  callins;  ?  One  of  attenlioii? 
One  of  cJis53^n>t  ?  One  of'silence  ?  One  of  >alnlin«r? 

Q.   How  may  an  interjeclion  generally  be  known? 

M^a.   By  its  taking  an  excUiiintJon  point  after  it. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

*'  O/i !  I  have  alienated  my  friend.^^  » 

2S7.  Ok  is  an  interjection,  a  word  used  to  express  passion  or 
fe.  ling. 

The  remaining  words  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISKS   I\    PARSING   CONTINUED. 

"Oh!  I  must  go  and  see  (1)  my  *' Strange!     I  did  not  know  you." 
dear  father  before  he  (2)  dies."  "  II  nsh  I    our  instructor  is  at   tlie 

*' We    eagerly    pursue    pleasure,  door." 

but  alas!  we  often   mistake  "Fy!  i»ow  angry  he  is!" 
the    road    to    its   (3)    enjoy- 
ment." 

(1)  The  sense  is,  "  I  must  go,  and  I  must  see;  "  tlui  verb  see,  then,  agrees  with  /, 
understood,  and  is  thoreroro,  conuectod  with  must  go,  according  to  llule  XI. 

(2)  Before  an  adverb. 

(3)  Apply,  first,  Kule  V.;  then,  Rtile  1. 


RECAPITULATION. 


COMPOSITION. 

XlX.    ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

2SS.  ExGLiSH  Grammar  teaches  us  to  speak  and  write  the  English 
language  correctly. 

289.  Grammar  is  divided  into  four  parts,  namely: 

290.  1.  Orthography,  .       3.  Syntax, 
2.  Etymology,  4.  Prosody. 


•XX.    OF  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

.  * 

291.  Orthography  includes  a  knowledge  of  the  nature  and  power 
of  letters,  and  teaches  how  to  spell  words  correctly.  This  part  of 
graniniar  is  usually  learned  from  spelling-books  and  dictionaries. 

292.  Orthografhy  means  word-making  or  sjyelling. 


XXI.    OF  ETYMOLOGY. 

293.  Etymology  teaches  how  to  form,  from  all  the  words  in  the 
English  language,  several  grand  divisions  or  sorts,  commonly  called 
Parts  of  Speech. 

i3^4.  It  includes  a  knowledge  of  the  meaning  and  use  of  words — 
also  their  different  changes  and  derivations. 

295.  Elyniology  signifies  the  origin  or  jjedigree  of  words. 


XXtl.    OF  SYNTAX. 

296.  Syntax  teaches  how  to  arrange  or  form  words  into  sentences 
correctly. 

297.  It  includes  a  knowledge  of  the  rules  of  composition,  formed 
from  the  practice  of  the  best  writers  and  speakers. 

XIX.  What  does  English  gram-       What   does  orthography   mean? 
mar  teach  ?  2S8.        •    -.  292.    . 

Into  how  many  {jarts  is  it  dirid-       XXI.     What     does     etymology 
ed  ?  2S9.  .    teach  ?  293. 

What  are  they?  290.  What  does  it  include?  294. 

XX.  What  does  orthography  in-       What  does  the  word  signify  ?  295. 
elude  and  teach?  291.  XXII.  What  does  syntax  teach? 

How  is  a  knowledge  of  orthog-  296. 
raphy  usually  obtained  ?  29L  What  does  it  include  ?  297. 

4 


^^m' 


42  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

298.  Syntax  signifies  arraiiging  or  plachig  together;  or,  as  used  in 
grammar,  sentence-making. 


XXIII.     ETYMOLOGY  AND  SYNTAX  COMBINED. 

299.  The  words  of  the  English  language  are  usually  divided  into 
nine  sorts,  commonly  called  parts  of  speech,  namely  : 

Noun,  Pronoun,  Preposition, 

Article,  Verb,  Conjunction, 

Adjective,  Adverb,  Interjection. 


XXIV.    OF  NOUNS. 

300.  A  noun  is  the  name  of  any  person,  place,  or  thing:  as,  w«», 
ho n do 71  y  knife. 

301.  Nouns  are  of  two  kinds,  proper  and  common. 

Common  nouns  are  general  names;  that  is,  they  are  names  com- 
mon to  all  individuals  of  the  same  kind  oi-sort :  as,  house,  city,  river. 

302.  Proper  nouns  are  particular  names;  tiiat  is,  they  are  the 
names  of  particular  individuals  of  the  same  kind  or  sort:  as,  George^ 
Richmond,  Mississippi. 

303.  When  proper  names  have  an  article  placed  before  them,  they 
are  used  as  conHuon  names:  as,  "  He  is  the  Cicero  of  his  age."    . 

304.  When  a  proper  noun  admits  of  a  plural,  it  becomes  a  com- 
mon noun:    as,   "The    tM^elve    C«?.?ors,"  or,   "The    seven   Jameses.^'' 

^his  is  obvious  from  the  fact  t+iat  a  proper  noun  is,  in  its  nature, 
descriptive  of  one  object  only,  and,  therefore,  essentially  singular. 
Accordingly,  the  nouns  Spaniard,  Unropean,  American ,  etc.,  are  com- 
mon nouns,  as  well  as  their  plurals,  S2) an iards,  Europeans,  Americans, 
etc.* 


What   does   the  M'ord  signify?       V/hat  is  a  common  noun?  301. 
298.  Give  an.  example. 

XXIII.  How    many    difl'erent        What  does  j^/t!;;^;?- mean  ?  34; 
sorts  of  words  are  there?  299.  What    is   a   proper   noun?    302. 

What  are  they?  299.  Give  an  example. 
What  are  .these  sorts  of  words       When  proper  nouns  have  an  ar- 

commonly  called?  299.  tide   before  them,    how   are  they 

XXIV.  What    does    the    word  used?  303.     Give  an  example. 
noun  mean?f  Are  proper  names  used  as  such 

What  is  a  noun  ?  300.     Give  an  in  the  jilural  ?  -304. 
example.                                           -       Why  can  not  proper  names  have 

How  many   different   kinds  of  a  plural?  304. 
nouns   are  there,   and  what   are       What  do  they  become  when  so 

they?  301.  ^  used  ?  304.     Give  an  example. 

What  does   the  word  common       What  kinds  o/'  nouns  are  Span- 

mean?  31.  iard,  Americans,  Spaniards?  304. 

_  *  Spain  is  tbo  proper  name  of  a  country,  and  Spaniard  has,  by  some  gramma- 
ritins,  been  called  the  proper  name  of  a  people;  but  the  latter  is  a  generic  term, 
characterizing  any  one  of  a  great  number  of  persons,  in  their  connection  with 
ii^^Ain.—Encydopoedia. 
t  See  I.  l8(  answer. 


NOUNS. 


4S 


305.  Common  nouns  may  also  be  used  to  signify  individuals,  by 
the  addition  of  articles  or  pronouns;  as,  ^*' The  hoy  is  studious;" 
"  That  ffirl  is  discreet." 

300.  When  a  noun  signifies  many,  it  Is  called  a  noun  of  multitude, 
or  a  collective  noun  ;  as,  "  The  people,^''  "  The  army." 

307.  Abstract  signifies  taken  from;  hence  an  abstract  noun  is  the 
name  of  a  quality  abstracted  from  its  substance;  as.  knowledge,  good-' 
nesn,  virtue,  etc. 

308.  To  nouns  belong  person,  gender,  number,  and  case. 


XXV.    PERSON. 

309.  When  any  person,  in  speaking,  introduces  his  own  name,  it  is 
the  first  person  ;  as,  "  I^  James,  of  the  City  of  Richmond,  do  give,"  etc. 

310.  The  name  of  the  person  spoken  to  is  the  second  person;  as, 
"James,  come  to  me." 

311.  The  name  of  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of,  or  about,  is  the 
third  person;  as,  ''James  has  come." 


XXVI.     GENDER. 

312.  Gender  is  the  distinction  of  sex. 

313.  Nouns  have  four  genders — the  masculine,  the  feminine,  the 
common,  and  the  neuter. 

314.  The  masculine- gender  denotes  the  names  of  males';'  as,  man, 
boy,  etc. 

315.  The  feminine  gender  denotes  the  names  of  females  ;  as,  woman^ 
girl. 

316.  The  common  gender  denotes  the  names  of  such  animals  as 
may  be  either  male  or  female;  9.^,  parent,  bird. 

317.  The  neuter  gender  denotes  the  names  of  objects  which  are 
n^either  males  nor  females;  as,  chair,  table. 

318.  Some  nouns,. naturally  neuter,  do,  by  a  figure  of  speech,  as  it 
is  called,  become  masculine  or  feminine;  as  when  we  say  of  the  sun, 
*'J3e  is  setting,"  and  of  a  ship,  "  A%e  sails  well,"  etc. 


What  eflect  does  the  ose  of  ar- 
ticles have  on  common  nouns?  305. 

What  is  a  noun  of  multitude,  or 
a  collective  noun  ?  30G.  Give  an 
example. 

What  is  an  abstract  noun  ?  307. 
Give  an  example. 

What  belong  to  nouns?  30S. 

XXV.  When  is  a  noun  of  the  first 
persmi  ?  309.     Give  an  example. 

When  is  a  noun  of  the  second 
person  ?  310.     Give  an  example. 

When  is  a  noun  of  the  third  per- 
son ?  311.     Give  an  example. 

XXVI.  What  does  the  word 
gender  mean  ?  14. 

What  is  gender  as  applied  to 
nouns?  31'-^. 


What  does  the  word  masctdine 
mean  ?  15. 

What  does  the  masculine  gen- 
der of  nouns  denote?  314,  Give 
an  example. 

"What  does  feminine  mean  ?  19. 

What  does  the  feminine  gender 
denote  ?  315.     Give  an  example. 

What  does' the  commcHi  gender 
denote?  316.     Give  an  example. 

What  does  neuter  mean?  23. 

What  does  the  neuter  gender 
denote?  317.     Give  an  example. 

What  is  said  of  nouns  naturally 
neuter,  in  respect  to  gender?  318. 
Give  an  example. 

How  many  gender."?  do  nouns 
have,  and  what  are  they?  30. 


44 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


319..  The  English  language, has  three  methods  of  distinguishing 
sex,  viz: 

319-1.  I3y  different  words  :  as, 


Male. 

Female. 

Male. 

Female. 

Bachelor, 

Maid. 

Husband, 

Wife. 

Boar, 

Sow. 

King, 

■   Queen. 

Boy, 

Girl. 

Lad, 

Lass. 

Brother, 

Sister. 

Lord, 

Lady. 

Buck, 

Doe. 

Man, 

Woman. 

Bull, 

Cow. 

Master, 

Mistress. 

Bullock  or  1 
Steer,         j 

Heifer. 

Milter, 
Nephew, 

Spawner. 
Niece. 

Cock, 

Hen. 

Ram, 

Ewe. 

Dog, 

Bitch. 

Sin  O'er. 

■  Songstress  or 

Drake, 

Duck. 

•jiiijji^j  J 

Singer.  • 

Earl, 

Countess. 

Sir, 

Madam. 

Father, 

Mother. 

Sloven, 

Slut. 

Friar, 

Nun. 

Son, 

Daughter. 

Gander, 

Goose. 

Stag,     - 

Hind. 

Hart, 

Roe. 

Uacle, 

Aunt. 

Horse, 

Mare. 

Wizard, 

Witch. 

31S 

-2.  By  a  differenc 

e  of  termination: 

a^, 

Male. 

Female. 

Male. 

Female. 

Abbot, 

Abbess:- 

Enchanter, 

Enchantress. 

Actor, 

Actress. 

Executor, 

Executrix. 

Admiuirstrator 

Administratrix. 

God, 

Goddess. 

Adulterer, 

Adulteress. 

Governor, 

Governess. 

Ambassador, 

Ambassadress. 

Heir, 

Heiress. 

Arbiter, 

Arbitress. 

Hero, 

Heroine. 

Baron, 

Baroness. 

Hunter, 

Huntress. 

Bridegroom, 

Bride. 

Host, 

Hostess. 

Benefactor, 

Benefactress. 

Instructor, 

Instructress. 

Caterer, 

Cateress. 

Jew, 

Jewess. 

Ohanter, 

Chantress. 

Landgrave,' 

Landgravine. 

Conductor, 

Conductress. 

Lion, 

Lioness. 

Count, 

Countess. 

Marquis, 

Marchioness. 

Czar, 

Czarina. 

Mayor, 

Mayoress. 

Deacon, 

Deaconess. 

Patron,    • 

Patroness. 

Du  ke. 

Duchess. 

Peer, 

Peeress. 

Elector, 

Electress. 

Poet, 

Poetess. 

Emperor, 

Empress. 

Priest, 

Priestess. 

How  many  methods  are  there  in 
English  of  distinguishing  sex?  319. 

Which  is  the  first ;  as  hoy  ?  yirl? 
319-1. 

Will  you  spell  the  feminine  cor- 
responding to  brother?  319-1.  To 
hoy  ?  nephew  f  wizard  ?  friar  ?  sir  ? 
drahe  ?  earl  ?  gander  ?  hart  ?  king  ? 
lad?  man?  master?  singer?  sloifen? 
eon  ?  stag  ?  uncle  ? 

Will  you  spell  the  masculine 
corresponding  to  maid?  girl?  ma- 
dam ?  daughter  ?  niece  ? 


What  js  the  second  method  of 
distinguishing  sex;  as,  abbot?  ab- 
bess ?  319-2. 

Will  you  spell  the  feminine  cor- 
responding to  abbot?  actor?  adinin-% 
istrator?  haron?  benefactor  ?  bride- 
groom f  conductor  ?  czar  ?  duke  ? 
emperor  ?  executor  ?  god  ?  governor  ? 
heir?  hero?  host?  hunter?  instruc- 
tor? Jew  ?  lion  ?.  marquis  ?  patron  ? 
peer  ?  proprietor  ?  shepherd  ?  sor- 
cerer ?  sultan  ?  tiger  ?  tutor  ?  vis- 
count ?  votary  ?  widower  t 


NOUNS. 


45 


Male. 
Prince, 
Prior, 
Pro|)|iet, 
Protector. 
Pro|)rietor, 
Shepherd, 
Songster, 
Soreerer, 


Fe77iale. 
Princesis. 
Prioress. 
Prophetess.- 
Protectress. 
Proprietress. 
Shepherdess, 
Songstress". 
Sorceress. 


319-'5.  By  prefixing  a  noun. 
A  cock-sparrow. 
A  nian-.servant, 
A  he-goat, 
A  he-bear, 
A  male  child, 
Male  descendants, 


Male. 
Siillan, 

Tiger, 
Traitor, 
Tutor, 
Viscount, 
Votary, 
Widower, 
pronoun,  or  adjective:  as 

A  hen-sparrow. 

A  maid-servant. 

A  she-goal. 

A  she-bear. 

A  female  child. 

Female  descendants 


Female. 
rSiiItaness. 
I  Sultana. 

Tigress. 

Traitress. 

Tutorese. 

Viscountess. 

Votaress. 

Widow. 


XXVI r.  NUMBER. 
320.  Number  shows  how  many  are  meqnt,  whether  one  or  more, 
ooo    ;^"""^  ''^^^  ^"^^'o  numbers,  the  singular  and  the  plural, 
Hi'  J"*^  singular  number  expresses  but  one  ;  as,  hoy. 
o23.  The  plural  number  implies  more  than  one;  as,  boys. 

324.  Some  nouns  are  used  in  the  singular  number  only:  as,  wheaL 
gold,  Hloth,  pride,  dnfifulness.  J  '        »  y 

325.  Other  nouns  are  used  in  the  plural  number  only;  as,  helloioa, 
scusors,  liiiif/s,  riches,  etc.  ■>  '       7  > 

326.  Some  nouns  are  the  same  in  both  numbers;  as,  deer,  sheev  ' 

327.  The  plural  number  of  nouns  is  regularly  formed  by  adding  «  to 
the  singular;  as, -s/v),^',  dove,  ^j/,(;.  doves. 

32S.  The-irregular  mode  of  forming  the  plural  is  as  follows-  when 
the  noun  singular  ends  in  x.rch  soli,  «7i,  or  ss,  we  add  cs  to  form  the 
plural;  as,  box,  boxes;  church,  churches;  lash,  lashes;  kiss,  kisses. 


Will  you  spell  the  masculine  cor- 
responding to  abbess  f  czarina? 
duchess  ?  ambassadress  F  heroine  ? 
huntress f  poetess?  prophetess?  wid- 
ow ? 

What  is  the  third  method  of  dis- 
tinguishing sex  ;  as,  a  7)ian-servant  ? 
maid-servant  ?  3 1 9-3. 

Will  you  spell  the  feminine  cor- 
responding to  male  child?  male  de- 
acetidants  ? 

■  XXVII.  What  does  the  word  nnm- 
ber  mean  ?  5, 

What  does  the  number  of  nouns 
show?  320. 

What  does  singular  mean  ?  6, 

What  does  the  singular  nwnber 
of  nouns  imply?  322.  Give  an  ex- 
ample. 


What  does  7j/»ra?  mean?  10. 

What  does  the  plural  number 
of  nouns  imply?  323.  Give  an 
example. 

How  are  wheat, gold,  etc.,  used  ? 
324, 

How  are  belloios,  lunq^,  etc., 
used?  325. 

What  is  said  oi  deer,sheen,e\.c.  ? 
326.  ^' 

How  many  numbers  do  nouns 
have,  and  what  are  they  f  321. 

How  is  the  plural  number  reg- 
ularly formed  ?  327.  Give  an  ex- 
ample. 

When  do  we  add  es  to  form  the 
plural?  328. 

Give  an  exaaiple. 


i6 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


329.  Nouns  ending  in/  pr/e,  change  these  lerminations  into  vea  to 
form  the  plural;  a.s,  loaf,  loaves ^^  ivi/e,  -wives. 

330.  When  the  noun  singular  ends  in  y,  with  a  vowel  before  it,  the 
plural  is  formed  regularly;  as,  key,  kei/n ;  delay,  delays;  valley,  vaU 
leys.  But  if  the  y  does  not  have  a  vowel  before  it,  the  plural  is  form- 
ed b}'  changing?/  into  res;  a.s,/ly,^i'es  ;  beauty,  heauties. 

331.  The  following  nouns  form  their  plurals  not  according  to  any 
general  rules: — 

Sing.  Plur.  Sing. 

Man,  Men.  Penny, 

"VVfoman,  Women.  Die, 

Child,  Children.  Pea, 

Ox,  Oxen.  Fish, 

Tooth,  Teeth.  Cupful, 

Foot,  Feet.  Spoonful, 

Goose,  Geese.  Brother-in-law, 

Mouse.'  Mice.  Court-martial, 

Louse;  Lice 

„  (  Cow6  or  ' 

<^°^'  1  Kine. 

332.  Mathematics,  metaphysics,  pneumatics,  ethics,  2>olitics,  etc.,  are 
reckoned  either  as  singular  or  plural  nouns.  The  same  is  equally  true 
of  means,  alms,  amends.  Antip>ode8,  credenda,  minutise,  literati,  etc.,  are 
always  plural.  Bandit  is  now  considered  the  singular  of  banditti. 
The  noun  news  is  always  singular.  Many  nouns  form  their  plurals 
according  to  the  laws  of  the  language  from  which  they  are  derived. 
The  following  are  of  this  class  : 

Sing.  Plur. 

Genius,  Genii.  (4) 

Genus,  Genera. 

Hypothesis,  Hypotheses. 

Ignis  fatuus,  Ignus  fatui. 

T    1  f  Indi( 

Index,  \  T    , 

Lamina,  Laminae 

Magus,  Magi. 


Plur. 

Pence.  (1) 

Dice.  (2) 

Peas.  (3) 

Fishes.  (3) 

Cupfuls. 

Spoonfuls. 

Brothers-in-law. 

Courts-martial. 
I  Brothers  or 
{  Brethren. 


Sing. 
Antithesis, 

Appendix, 

Apex, 

Arcanum, 

Automaton, 

Axis, 

Beau, 


Plur. 

Antitheses, 
f  Appendixes  or 
i  Appendices. 

Apices. 

Arcana. 

Automata., 

Axes. 

Beaux  or  Beaus. 


ces  or 
xes.  (.5) 


What  is  the  rule  for  it?  329." 

What  is  the  plural  of  loa/l  329. 

Will  you  spell  the  plural  of  de- 
lay? 330.  valley?  What  is  the 
rule  fbrformingthese plurals?  330. 

Will  you  spell  the  plural  of  fly  ! 
330,  beatity  ?     Rule  for  the  pluVal'^ 

Do  man,  looman,  form  their  plu- 
rals regularly,  or  irregularly?  331. 

Will  ^ou  spell  the  plural  of  i^mji  ? 
teaman  ?  child  ?  ox  ?  tooth  f  foot  ? 
goose?  mouse?  louse?  brother?  die? 


fish?  spooonful?  court-martial? 

Will  you  spell  the  singular  of 
live?  kine?  coics  ?  brethren?  oxen? 
teeth?  pence?  j^^nnics?  peas?  fish- 
es ?  cupfuls  ?  brothers-in-law  ? 

What  is  the  plural  of  pea,  when 
we  refer  to  quantity?     Offish? 

What  is  the  singular  of  banditti? 
3.32. 

In  accordance  with  what  laws 
does  antithesis  form  the  plural? 
332. 


(1)  Pennies,  when  the  coin  is  meant.  (2)  Dies,  for  coining.  (3)  Pease  and  Jish, 
raeamng  quantities:  but  peas  and  fishes,  when  number  is  meant. 

(4)  Genii,  -when  denoting  aerial  or  imaginary' spirits;  geniuses,  w-hen  denoting 
persons  of  genius.  (5)  Indexes,  when  denoting  pointers  or  tables  of  coutentB ;  in- 
dices, when  referring  to  algebrais  quantities. 


• 
NOUN  5. 


47 


Basis, 
Calx, 

Cherub,  ] 

Crisis, 

Criterion, 

Datum, 

Diaeresis, 

Desideratum, 

Effluvium, 

Ellipsis, 

Emphasis, 

Encomium,    ] 

Erratum. 


Bases, 

Calces. 

Cherubim  or 

Cherubs. 

Crises. 

Criteria. 

Data. 

Disereses. 

Desiderata. 

Effluvia. 

Ellipses. 

Emphases. 

Encomia  or 

Encomiums. 

Errata. 


Memorandum,  ] 

Metamorphosis, 

Parenthesis, 

Phenomenon, 

Radius, 

Stamen, 

Seraph,  | 

Stimulus, 
Stratum, 
Thesis, 
Vertex, 


Vortex. 


Membranda  or 

Memorandums. 

Metamorphoses. 

Parentheses. 

Phenomena. 

Radii  or  Radiuses. 

Stamina. 

Seraphim  or 

Seraphs. 

Stimuli. 

Strata, 

Theses. 

Vertices. 

VoTtices  or 

Vortexes. 


XXVIII.  CASE. 

333.  Case  means  the  different  state,  condition,  or  relation  which 
nouns  have  to  other  words  in  the  same  sentence. 

334.  In  Enghsh,  nouns  have  three  cases — -the  nominative,  the  pos- 
sessive, and  the  objective. 

335.  The  nominative  case  is  usually  the  agent  or  doer,  and  always 
the  subject  of  the  verb. 

330.  The  subject  is  the  thing  chiefly  spoken  of;  as,  '^' John  assists 
William  ;"  here  John  is  the  subject  sj)olven  of,  or  the  nominative  case 
to  the  verb  assists.  , 

337.  The  possessive  case  denotes  possession,  ownership,  property, 
etc. ;  -as  "  William's  book."'  This  case  may  be  disting:uished  from  the 
otheC-cases  by  the  a]io.<trophe  or  the  letter  s. 

338.  A  noun  in  the  singular  forms  its  possessive  case  by  takiugthe 
apostrophe  and  the  letter  «  after  it ;  a.s,  '"John's  hat." 

339.  Plural  nouns  usually  form  their  ])0ssessive  case  simply  by 
taking  the  apostrophe;  as,  *'0n  eat;les'  wings." 


Will  you  spellthei)luralofo^^eic.? 
appendix?  arcaniun  ?  automaioTi? 
axis?  crisis?  bat<is?  criterion'^ 
datum?  desideratum  1  ejfinviuni?  en- 
comium? errutnni?  genius?  memo- 
randum? 

Will  you  spell  the  singular  of 
bases?  beavx?  cheriibs?  ellipces? 
genii?  theses?  farenlheses?  stioii- 
vli?  strata'} 

riow  are  mathematics,  optics, 
etc,,  considered  "in  regard  to  num- 
ber? 33-2. 

Of  what  number  in  means?  332. 
alms?  amends?  antipodes?  liter- 
ati ?  vcws  ? 

XXVIII.  What  is  the  meaning 
ol  the  word  ca^e?  47. 

What  is  meant  by  the  case  of 
nouns?  333, 


How  many  cases  have  nouns, 
and  what  are  they?  334. 

What  does  nominative  mean  ? 
49. 

What  is  the  nominative  case  ? 
335.     Give  an  example. 

What  do  you  understand  by  the 
subject  of  a  verb  ?  336.  Illustrate 
it  by  an  example. 

What  does  possessive  mean  ?  59. 

What  does  the  posse^sive  case 
denote?  337.     Give  an  example. 

IIow  may  this  ca.^ie  be  distin- 
guished Crouj  theotlier  cases?  337. 

How  do  nouns  in  the  singular 
form  their  possessive  case?  338, 
Give  an  example. 

How  do  nouns  in  the  plural'^ 
339, 


48 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


340.  When  'the  plural  of  nouns  does  not  end  in  s,  they  form  their 
possessive  case  by  taking  both  the  apostrophe  and  the  letters;  as 
"  Men's  houses." 

3il.  When  the  singular  ends  in  ss,  the  apostrophe  only  is  added; 
as  "  for  ^o.od'/tess' sake;"  except  the  noun  lottncus;  as  '^'  The  witness'' s 
deposition." 

342.  Nouns  ending*  in  nee  form  the  possessive  by  adding  the  apos- 
trophe only;  as,  "For  confidence'  sake;"'  because  an  additional  « 
would  occasion  too  much  of  the  hissing  sound,  or  increase  the  diffi- 
culty of  pronunciation. 

343.  The  objective  case  denotes  the  object  of  an  action  or  relation. 

344.  In  the  sentence,  ''John  strikes  him,"  Mm  is  the  object  of  the 
-action  denoted  hy  strikes  ;  and  in  the  sentence,  "He  went  from  Lon- 
don to  York,"  York  is  the  object  of  the  relation  denoted  by  the  prepo- 
sition to. 


345.  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 


Nominative  case, 
Possessive  case, 
Objective  case, 


Singular. 
Mother, 
M  other's, 
Mother, 


Plural.  Singular. 

Mothers.  Man, 

Mothers'.  Man's, 

Mothers.  Man, 


Plural. 
Men. 
Men's. 
Men. 


RULE  I. 

The  2'>ossessive  case  is  governed  by  the  following-  noun. 
EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX.' 
''John's  ici/e  retHrned.^\ 

.346.  John's  is  a  proper  noun,  of  the  biascultne  gender,  the  third 
PERSON,  SINGULAR  NUMBER,  POSSESSIVE  CASE,  and  governed  bj-  wife,  by 
Rule  I. 

■:,  Wife  is  a  coMAioN  noun,  of  the  feminine  gender,  the  third  person, 
SINGULAR  NUAiBiiiR,  and  NOMINATIVE  CASE  to  returned,  by  Rule  VI. 

Returned  is  an  intransitive  verb,  in  the  indicative  mood,  imper- 
fect TENSE—"!,  I  returned;  2,  You  returned;  3,  He  returned,  or 
wife  returned" — made  in  the  third  person,  singular,  a«d  agrees 
withwi/e,  by  Rule  VIL  • 


When  the  plural  noun  does  not 
eiid  in  s,  how  is  its  possessive 
formed  ?   340.     Give  an  example. 

When  the  singular  ends  ia  ss, 
how  is  the  possessive  case  form- 
ed ?  341.     Give  an  example.' 

How  is  the  possessive  case  of 
nouns  ending  in  nee  formed  ?  342. 
Give  an  example. 

Why  is  not  the  s  added?  342. 

What  does  the  word  objective 
mean?  55. 

What  does  the  objective  ease  of 
nouns  denote?  343.  Give  an  ex- 
ample. 

What  does  the  declension  of 
nouns  mean?  6S. 


Will  you  decline  mother?  345. 
man  ?   brother  f  hat  ? 

Will  you  repeal  the  rule  for  the 
possessive  case?  Rule  I. 

In  the  sentence,  "John's  wife 
returned,"  will  you  parse  John's? 
wife?  returned?    346. 

Why  is  John's  in  the  possessive 
case?  337. 

What  kind  of  a  verb  is  returned? 

^  Why?  153. 

In  what  case  is  wife?  346. 

Why?  335. 

7^"-  TKe  pupil  may  next  2^(t,rse 
the  additional  exercises  in  syntax. 


NOUNS. 


49 

MORE  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX 

"  Zl!:i^:jS:^:r''  "  ^■";=;"^rif«'•» -'«.  remaned 

"Joh"  ^^^l^f  ^^''•"  "^^:'!''^''  J"""- "'^  Die. 

li  n^u       1-  I  «...  injuniv- 


"The   boys    neglected   their   les-     "  Mary's  bonnet  is  old." 

•iT,f.°"^'  •      •  ""V'irtue's  reward  is  sure."  r2) 

Intemperance  ruins  Its  votaries."     ''Rufus's  hat  is  new."  ^ 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 
^^  Brothers  estate.^' 

tof.LrYafn''wher!",V^^f°::^^'''",^^'^"'"P'^'  5'""  ^^''I  fin<J  ''t  difficult 
to  ascertain  whether  the  estate  is  the  property  of  one  brother  or  more  • 

e.tate-  bu  V.';  ^.'T'^^'r  '^°"'^  P-'-^di  the  ..  thus:  "Brother's' 
f.i  .     '.I  1    ^  belongs  to  more  than  one,  an  apostrophe  should 

follow  the  .,  thus:  ''  Brothers'  estate."     Mistakes  of  this   sort  of  ea 

th^:  sui/e:?  of  ^.ran^m^r!^^^  '''  ^'"^^^^^^"^^' '"  -^^^^"^'  o^attendin'^to 

"  J/a»«'  happiness.''' 
348.  Irtcorrect,  because  mans  is  in  the  possessive   case   singular 
number,  and,  therefore,  the  apostrophe  should  be  place?beVre  fl  i  / 
according  to  the  observations  above,  and  Art.  33S.  ' 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED,  CONTINUED. 

;;  ^°''"'  ^"°"  departed."  uj  discovered  Marias  faults."  * 

Susans  sister  will  learn."  « Susan  made  little  Harriets  boa- 
"  Charles  task  is  too  difficult."  net  "  ^ 

"  I  have  read  Willi's  poem."  "  Johnson  makes  mens  shoes." 

exercises'  TO  BE  \VRITTEN.=^ 
319.  Will  you  write  down  two  sentences,  each  containing  a  proper 
noun,  as,  for  example,  -  William  learns  grammar  ?"  One,  containfn^ 
a  common  noun  ?  One,  containing  a  noun  of  the  third  person  sin4! 
oL  ,0"^°^^'^^  third  person  plural,  and  in  the  nominative  cale^ 
Une,  having  a  noun  of  the  second  person  singular,  and  of  the  femi- 
nine  gender?  One,  having  a  noun  the  name  of  some  article  of  food  ^ 
One,  having  a  noun  the  name  of  some  quality  ?  One,  having  a  noun 
ot  niult'tude  ?  One,  havijig  your  own  name  associated  wiUi  booji:  - 
as,  "John  Griscoms  book  ?"      ■  -' 

In   the   phrase,   "Brothers  es-  the   po^essive    case   ^nouns' 

late,'  does  one  brother,  or  more  33S                                             ^">i»  . 

than  one,  own  the  estate  ?  347.  Will  you  now  parse  magi's  ? 

Why  can  not  you  tell?  We   spell  the 'possessive  case 

If  only  one   brother  is   meant,  of  man  thus,  m-a.71  (apostrophe) 

nraced'^Hn.^'T    ^'^^^^''.^l^he    be  .;  will  you  in  like  n\aLer     pel 

placed?    How,  If  more  than  one?  the  posscssiveof  J.Am  ?  WimL? 

In    he  phrase,    "Mans'happi-  R?ifus?  ,rome7i?  bo^s? 

ness,    why  is  it  incorrect  for  the  jm-    The   remainins;   exercises 

What  IS  the   rule  for  forming 

(1)  Active-transitive  verb.    (2)  Adjective,  and  belonps  to  reward,  by  Rule  IV 
•'•  Lithcr^on  a  .slate  or  m  a  ?mall  niann.cript  book  kept  for  the  pm-posc 


50 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


XXIX.  OF  ARTICLES. 

3f)0.  Articles  ore  words  put  before  nouns  lo  point  thoni  out,  or 
to  limit  their  meaning. 

351.  There  are  two  articles — a  or  an,  and  the. 

352.  A  or  an  is  called  the  indefinite  article. 

353.  The  is  called  the  definite  article. 

354.  The  article  a  is  called  indefinite,  because  it  means  no  particu- 
lar person  or  thing;  as,  "a  house,"  "a  man" — that  is.  «^2y  house,  flj;?y 
man.  The  article  the  is  called  definite,  because  it  means  some  par- 
ticular person  or  thing- ;  as,  "  ^7(6  house,"  "^Aeman,"  meaning  some 
particular  house,  some  particular  man. 

355.  A  becomes  an  before  a  vowel,  and  before  a  silent  h  ;  as,  "  an 
acorn,"  -^  an  hour."  But  If- the  h  be  sounded,  the  a  only  is  used  ;  as 
'•'■  a,  hand."  "«  heart ;"  except  when  the  word  before  which  the  article 
is  placed  has  its  accent  on  the  second  syllable;  as,  '■^  an  heroic 
action,"  '■'■an  historical  account." 

356.  Before  words  beginninja:  with  u  long,  a  is  used  instead  of  an  ; 
as,  "«  union,"  "  o  university,"  "  a  useful  thing." 

357.  A  is  also  used  for  an  before  the  word  one,  because,  in  pro- 
nouncing one,  we  sound  it  as  if  written  ivnn. 

358.  The  article  a  or  an  means  one;  as,  '•'■an  ounce,"  "a  pound" — 
that  is,  one  ounce,  one  pound. 

RULE  II. 

Th^ indefinite  article  a  or  an  helovgs  to  noiins  of  the  si^ignlar  number. 

EXILE  III. 

TJie  d-efinite  article  the   helonga  to  noxins  of  the  singular  or  plural 

nnmber. 

350.  Exception.  When  the  adjectivesyi'70,  great  many,  dozen,  hnn- 
dred,thousand,  etc.,  come  between  the  noun  and  article,  the  noun  to 
which  the  indefinite  article  belongs  is  plural,-  as,  "a  few  men,"  "  a 
great  many  men." 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

'^  Th.e  bird  flies  stoifthf.''^ 

360.  The  is  a  definite  article,  and  belongs  to  bird,  according  to 
Rule  III. 


XXIX.  What  is  an  article  ?  350. 

What  does  definite  mean  ?  78. 

What  is  ^//c  called?  353.  Why? 
354.     Give  an  exnmple. 

What  does  indefinite  mean  ?  SI. 

What  is  a  or  an  called  ?  352. 
Why?  354.     Give  an  example. 

How  many  ariicJes  are  there  ? 
351.     Name  them. 

When  does  a  become  an?  355. 
Give  an  example. 

But  if  the  h  is  sounded,  whi<'h 
is  to  he  used  ?  355,  Give  an  ex- 
ample. 


355. 


an 
an 


What  exception  to  this  ? 
GiA'e  an  example. 

Do  we  say  "  a  union,"  or 
union?"  "a  university,"  or 
university?"     Why?     356. 

Do  we  say,  ''a  one,"  or  ^' an 
one?     Why?    357. 

What  does  the  article  a  mean  ? 
358.     Give  an  example. 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  indeti- 
nite  article  ?     Rule  IT. 

What  exception  to  this  rule?  359, 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  definite 
article  ?     Rule  III, 


At)JECTIVES.  51 

fiird  is  a  COMMON  noun,  of  the  common  gender,  the  third  person, 

SINGULAR  NUMBER,  and  ill   the  NOMINATIVB    CASE    tO    //j'es,  by  RuLE  VI. 

F/i'ea  is  an  active  intransitive  verb,  indicative  mood,  present 
TENSE — "],  I  fly;  "2,  You  fly  ;  3,  He  flies,  or  bird  flies" — made  in  the 
THIRD  person,  SINGULAR,  and  agrees  with  bird,  by  Rule  VII. 

Swiftly  is  an  adverb,  qnahfying^tes,  by  Rule  IX. 

EXERCISES    IN     SYNTAX    CONTINUED. 

"  The  boys  have  arrived  season-  "  Children  attend  the  school." 

ably.  '' Wilham  founded  a  university." 

"  Galileo  invented  tlie  telescope."  •'  The  grass  is  green." 

"The  boy  had  an  ulcer."  "Fanners    carry    hay    into    the 

"William  gave  an   historical  ac-  barn." 

count  (1)  of  the  transaction."  "The  good  scholar  obeys  his  in- 

"  Columbus  discovered  the  conti-  structor." 

nent  of  America." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

'^  He  had  a  ulcer." 

3G1.  Incorrect,  because  we  use  a»  .before  a  vowel,  except  ?/  long  ; 
o  should,  iHerefore,  be  an;  thus,  "an  ulcer." 

SENTENCES    TO    BE    PARSED    AND    CORRECTED,    CONTINUED. 

"A  enemy  approaches."  "Three     barley-corns      make    a 

"James  procured  a  inkstand,"  inch." 

"  He  conferred  a  honor."  "  Eight  drams  make  a  ounce." 

"An  unit  figure  occupies  the  low-     "They  formed  an  union." 
est  place  in  whole  numbers."     "He  quoted  an  hard  saying." 

"Thomas  has  lost  an  horse." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

36'i.  Will  you  write  down  two  sentences,  using  in  one  the  definite, 
and  in  the  other  the  indefinite  article?  One,  containing  «  correctly 
used  before  u  long?  One,  having  a  definite  article  correctly  used 
before  the  consonant  h? 

"Will  you  write  two  nouns,  the  names  of  diflerent  things  in  the 
school-room?  Two,  the  names  of  diflerent  cities?  One  sentence, 
having  a  proper  noun  used  as  a  common  noun  ? 


XXX.  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

363.  An  Adjectia^k  is  a  word  joined  to  a  noun,  to  describe  or  define 
It ;  as,  "An  obedient  son." 


In  the  sentence,  "the  bird  flies  ^^^  The  pupil  khottld  now  take 
swiftly,"  how  do  you  parse  the  f  the  remaining  sentences  to  be  correct- 
bird  ?  Jlien  ?  fwiftlii  I  3G0.  ed.     Be  should  be  required  to  parse 

^^^The  remainin//  exercisen  are  as  rccll,  as  correct  them, 

next  to  be  parsed  fror.i  the  book.  XXX.    What  is  the  meaning  of 

Would  you  say,  "a  ulcer,"  or  the  word  adjective?  95. 

"  an  ulcer  f     36 1 .  What  is  an  adjective  ?  363.  Give 

Why?  361.  an  example. 

(1)  Apply  Rule  VIII. 


5S 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


364.  Iri  English,  an  adjective  is  varied  only  to  express  the  degrees 
of  comparison.  There  are  thr»='e  degrees  of  comparison — the  positive, 
the  comparative,  and  the  superlative.' 

365.  Tiie  positive  degree  simply  describes  an  object;  as,  "John  is 

366.  The  comparative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the  positive  in 
meaning;  as,  "William  is  ie^erthan  .Tohn."  It  implies  a  comparison 
between  two. 

367.  The  superlative  degree  increases  or  lessens  the  positive  to  the 
highest  or  lowest  degree;  as,  ('Thomas  is  the  best;"  "■  Walter  is  the 
worst. '^ 

368.  It  implies  a  comparison  between  three  or  more. 

369.  The  simple  word,  or  positive,  if  a  monosyllable,  (1)  becomes 
the  comparative  by  adding  r  or  er,  and  the  superlative  by  adding  s4.or 
est  to  the  end  of  it;  as,  tnise,  wiser,  wisest ;  great,  greater,  greatest. 

370.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  the  comparative  is  usually 
made  by  placing  the  adverbs  more  and  most  before  the  positive  ;  as, 
benevolent,  more  benevolent,  most  benevolent. 

371.  The  comparative  is  sometimes  formed  by  the  adverbs  less  and 
least ;  as  wise,  less  wise,  least  wise. 

372.  Dissyllables  (2)  ending  in  y,  as  happy,  lovely  ;  and.  in  le,  after 
a  mute,  (3)  as  able,  ample  ;  or  accented  on  the  last  syllable,  as,  dis- 
creet, 2^oltte,  easily  admit  of  er  and  est;  as  hajipier,  hapipiest ;  abler, 
ablest^  etc.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  hardly  ever  admit  of 
these  terminations. 

373.  In  some  words  the  superlative  is  formed  by  adding  the  adverb 
most  to  the  end  of  them  ;  as,  nethermost,  uttermost,  vpjjermost, 

374.  Some  adjectives,  having  in  themselves  a  superlative  significa3 
tion,  do  not  admit  of  comparison  ;  as,  extreme,  perfect,  right,  wrong, 
infinite,  ceaseless,  sii2)reme,  omnipotent,  eternal. 

375.  By  adding  ish  to  adjectives,  we  have  a  slight  degree  of  com- 
parison below  the  positive;  as,  blach,  blackish;  salt,  saltish. 


How  many  degrees  of  compari- 
son are  there?  364. 

Will  you  name  them  1 

What  does  the  positive  degree 
do?  365. 

Give  an  example. 

What  does  the  comparative  de- 
gree do?  366.     Give  an  example. 

What  does  it  imply?  366. 

What  does  superlative  mean  ? 
103. 

What  does  the  superlative  de- 
gree do  ?  367. 

Give  an  example. 

What  does  it  imply?  363. 

What  is  a  monosyllable  ?  369. 

How  are  monosyllables  com- 
pared? 369.     Give  an  example. 

How  are  dissyllables  compar- 
ed ?  372. 


What  effect  do  less  and  least 
have  on  adjectives?  371. 

What  is  a  dissyllable  ?  372.    . 

Will  you  spell  the  comparative 
and  superlative  degrees  of  able  ? 
lovely?  ample?  discreet?  polite? 
372. 

Which  are  the  mutes  ?  372. 

How  do  words  of  more  than 
two 'Syllables  almost  invariably 
form  their  comparison'  372. 

Is  ;ofir/cc<  compared?  Why  ?  374. 

Will  you  name  several  others 
that  are  not  compared  ?  374. 

How  is  the  superlative  formed 
in  tiie  word  dipper?  373. 

What  is  the  effect  of  ish  addc^ 
to  adjectives  ?  375. 

Give  an  example. 


(1)  A  word  of  one  syllable.  (2)  A  word  of  two  syllabi ©e. 

(3)  h,  7i%p,  t,  and  c  and  g  hard,  are  mutes. 


ADJECTIVES.  Bit 

376.  Very  expresses  a  degree  of  quality,  but  not  the  highest ;  as, 
"  good,"  "  «Jery  good." 

377.  Words  used  in  counting  and  numbering  arc  called  numeral 
adjectives  ;  as,  o)ie,  two,  three  ;  jirst,  second,  third.  These  adjectives 
are  not  compared. 

378.  An  adjective  put  without  a  noun,  with  the  definite  article  be- 
fore it-,  becomes  a  noun  in  sense  and  meaning,  and  maybe  considered 
as  such  in  parsing;  as,  "Providence  rewards  the  good,  and  punishes 
the  bad.'' 

RULE  IV. 
Adjectiocs  belong  to  the  nouns  tohCch  they  describe. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  John  is  sincere." 

379.  John  is  a  rnoPER  noun,  of  the  thiud  peuson,  singular  num- 
ber, MASCULINE  GENDEH,  and  in  the  nominative  case  to  i«,  by  Rule  VI. 

Is  is  a  NEUTER  verb,  in  the  indicative  mood,  present  tense — "1, 
lam;  2,  You  are;  3,  He  or  John  is" — made  in  the  third  person 
SINGULAR,  and  agrees  with  John^  according  to  Rule  VII. 

Sincere  is  an  adjective — "sincere,  more  sincere,  most  sincere" — 
made  in  the  positive  degree,  and  belongs  to  John^  by  Rule  IV. 

exercises  in  syntax  continued. 

"  You  are  studious."  "One  man  has  come." 

"  John  is  more  studious."  "  Two  men  have  departed." 

"  William  is  most  studious."  "Twenty  men  will  sail." 

"  Mary  is  intelligent."  "James  wrote  his  name  on  the 
"  James  is  active."  first  page." 

*'  Thomas  is  less  active."  "  Here  comes  a  great  ma-n." 

"  Charles  is  hai)py."  "Here  comes  a  greater  man." 

"  Mary  is  tall.     Susan  is  taller."  "  Here  comes  the  greatest  man." 

"  No  composition  is  perfect."  "The    first  fleet  contained    five 
'*  Religion     makes    its    votaries  hundred  men." 

happy/' 

XXXI. 

380.  Double  comparatives  and  superlatives,  since  they  add  nothing 
to  the  sense,  should  be  avoided;  as,  worser^raore  wiser,  etc.;  also,  less- 
er, supremsst,  most  ivfinite,  etc. 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 
Q.   Will  you  write  down  two  sentences,  each  containing  a  differ- 
,ent  adjective  in  the  positive  degree?     Two,  with  adjectives  in  the 

What  is  the  force  of  very  in  In  the  phrase,  "John  is  sin- 
comparison?  370.  cere,"   hew  do  you  parse  John  f 

What  are  numeral  adjectives?  is  f  sincere?  379.     Why  is  sincere 

377.    Give  an  example.    Are  they  in  the  positive  degree  ?  365.  Why 

compared?  377.  do  you  call  is  a  neuter  verb  ?  167. 

Will  you  spell  the  comparative  ^^^  Let  the  pvinl  next  take  the 

and  su])erlative  degrees  of  good  ?  exercises  that  follow,  and  parse  as 

ill  ?  much  ?  little  /  before. 

•  When  is  an  adjective  to  be  con-  XXXI.    Is  it  correct  to  say,  "A 

sidered  a  noun  ?  37«S.  lesser  evil  ?" 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  adjec-  Wiiy  not.  380. 
tive?  IV. 


54 


ENGLISH    GRA.MMAR. 


comparative  degree  ?    Two,  with  adjectives  in  the  superlative  de- 
gree ? 

Q.  Will  you  supply  such  adjectives  in  the  following  sentences  as 

will  make  sense?     "A boy  studies  his  lesson."     "A boy 

deserves  punishment."     "A •  man  helps  the  man."     "  Mer- 
chants   own   ships."     "The   instructor   loves   scholars." 

*'  William  is  a scholar,  Rul'us  is  a one,  but  Thomas  is  the 

one  that  I  ever  saw." 


^  XXXII.    OF  PRONOUNS. 

381.  A  PRONOUN  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  nouu,  to  avoid  a  dis- 
agreeable repetition  of  the  noun. 

382.  A  pjiBSONAL  PRONOUN  is  SO  called  because  it  invariably  repre- 
sents the  same  person.  There  are  five  personal  pronouns — I,  thou 
or  you,  HE,  SHE,  IT.  They  have  person,  number,  and  case,  like 
nouns  ;  and  those  of  the  third  person  have  gender  also. 

383.  /is  the  first  person,  thou  the  second,  he,  she,  or  it,  the  third. 
Me  is  masculine,  she  is  feminine,  and  it  is  neuter. 

384.  Pronouns,  like  nouns,  have  three  cases — the  nominative,  the 
possessive,  and  the  objective;  and  two  numbers — the  singular  and 
plural. 

385.  3fine  and  thine,  instead  of  my  and  thi/,  were  formerly  used  in 
the  solemn  style,  before  nouns  and  adjectives  beginning  with  a  vowel 
or  silent  h;  as,  "  Blot  out  all  mine  iniquities." 


Will  you  correct  the  following 
inaccuracies  in  comparison  as  I 
read  them  to  you  ? 

"  He  is  intelligenter." 

"She  is  the  most  wisest." 

*'  A  worser  evil." 

"  William  is  a  bad  boy;  Joseph 
Is  a  worser  one." 

"  He  gave  a  more  stronger 
proof  of  the  fact  than  the  other." 

'•  The  pleasures  of  the  mind  are 
more  (1)  preferable  than  those  of 
the  body." 
.  "That  table  is  round,  but  this 
is  a  rounder  ona,  and  that  is  the 
roundest  of  the  three." 

"  This  is  more  square." 

"A  more  greater  concern." 

"  The  most  fairest  of  all  the 
daughters  of  Eve." 

"His  mother's  extremest  joy." 

XXXII.  What  does  the  word 
prono^iii  signiiy?     120. 

What  is  a  pronoun  ?     381. 

Why  is  a  personal  pronoun  so 
called  ?     382. 

How  many  personal  pronouns 


are  there,  and  what  are  they? 
332. 

Why  is  this  number  said  to  in- 
clude all  the  pronouns  ?     134. 

Which  is  the  first  person?  the 
second?  the  third?     353. 

To  which  of  the  pronouns  do 
we  apply  gender  ?     3S3« 

Why  is  not  gender  applied  to 
the  first  and  second  persons  ?  136. 

Which  is  masculine?  Which 
feminine?     Which    neuter?   383. 

How  many  cases  have  pro- 
nouns, and  what  are  they?     384. 

How  many  numbers  ?     384. 

Will  you  decline  I?  thou?  he  f 
she?   it?     127. 

Of  what  number  and  person  is 
mine  ?  ours  ?  me  ?  we  ?  they  F  thine  ? 


yon  7  yours . 


127. 


Of  what  gender,  numbei',  and 
person  is  he?  she?  it?    ^ 

Of  what  number,  person,  and 
case  is  tJtey  ?  ours  ?  his  ?  hers  ? 
mine  ? 

In  what  style  were  mine  and 
thine  formerlv  used  ?     385. 


(1)  For  more  praferahle  than,  read  preferable  to. 


PRONOUNS. 


5rj 


XXXriI.  COMPOUND  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

386.  Compound  personal  proaouiLs  are  formed  by  addinjj  the  word 
«e//;  111  the  plural  selves,  to  the  simple  pronouns;  as.'kimsd/',  thevmelveo, 
eic.  .  ■"  ' 


PERSON. 
Fir  at- 

Second. 


Third. 


CASK. 
Koin . 
Pose. 
Ohj. 
I^om. 

Poag. 
Ohj. 

Nom. 

Pose. 

Ohj. 

Nom. 

Poaa. 

Obj. 

Nom. 

Pass. 

Obj. 


SINGULAR. 

Myself, 
Wanting. 
Myself, 
Thyself,  or  ) 
Yourself,     j 

Thyself,  or  ) 
Yourself,  j 
Himself, 

Himself, 
Herself, 

Herself, 
Itself, 


Itself; 


PLURAL. 

Ourselves. 

Ourselves. 
Yourselves. 

Yourselves. 
Themselves. 

Themselves. 
Themselves. 

Themselves. 
Themselves. 

Themselves. 


EULE  V. 


Pronouns  must  agree  with  the  nounn  for  which  they  stand,    in  gender, 
number,  and  2}er8on. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

'^^  John  found  his  knife.'^ 

387.  John  is  a  proper  noun,  of  the  masculine  gender,  the  third 
PEHsoN,  singular  NUMBER,  and  NOMINATIVE  CASE  \o  found,  by  Rule 

Found  is  an  active-transitive  verb,  in  the  indicative  mood  im- 
perfect tense— "  1,  1  found  ;  2,  You  found:  3,  He  or  John  found"— 
made  m  the  third  person  singular,  and  agrees  with  John,  by  RijLtj 

His  is  a  PERSONAL  pronoun,  of  the  third  person  singular,  mascu- 
line gender,  and  agrees  with  .Foha,  according  to  Rule  V;  in  the 
POSSESSIVE  CASE,  and  governed  by  i-nife,  by  Rule  I. 

Knife  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  third  person  singular,  neuter 
GENDER,  the  objective  CASE,  and  governed  by  found,  according  to 
Rule  VIII.  ° 


XXXIII.  How  are  the  com- 
pound personal  pronouns  formed ' 
3SG. 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  agree- 
ment of  personal  pronouns  in  the 
phrase,  "John  found    his  knife?' 

How  do  you  parse  John  ?  3S7. 
Will    you    purse   John,   in    the 


plirase,  " John  found  his  knife?" 
387. 

Will    you    parse    found?    his? 
knife?  387. 

J^^^  The  learner  should  next 
par.se  (he  remaining  exei'cises  in 
Sj/n  tax  from  the,  book,  and  then  fa/l'<f 
thr  fxrrci.iefi  to  be  written. 


56  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

EXERCISES    IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 
1. 

•'. Fames  obtained  his  request."  "Ye  despise  reproof." 

'•  1  will  assist  you."  "They  iiiend  their  pens." 

"He  will  receive  his  reward."  "Mary  tore  her, handkerchief." 

"She  misused  hhn."  "Virtue  has  its  reward." 

"Sin  ruins  its  votaries."  "She  deceived  them." 

2. 

"An  indulgent  father  will  reprove  "John  is  in  distress,  and  I  will 

his  son  when  (1)  he  deserves  assist  him." 

it."  "  I  found  Mary  and  her  mother  in 
"A  dutiful  son  gladdens  the  hearts  trouble,  and  (2)  comfortecT  (3) 

of  his  parents."  them." 

EXERCISES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Q.  Will  yoy  compose  two  sentences,  each  having  a  different  per- 
.sonal  jironoun  of  the  first  person?  One,  having  a  pronoun  of  the  first 
person  plural  ? 

Q.  Will  you  fill  up  the  following  sentences  with  suitable  pronouns, 
so  as  to  make  sense?  " — lost  my  hat,  but  found  —  again."  "Let 
Harriet  have  —  book,  for  —  will  need  —  to  get  her  lesson."  "The 
travellers  lost  —  way,  and  the  boys  conducted  —  to  —  homes." 

Q.  Will  yon  fill  i>p  the  following  broken  sentences  with  suitable 

words  to  make  sense  ?     "  Intemperance evil."     "  Washington 

father  of  his ."     "Columbus America."     "Richmond 

inhabitants."     "The ocean  is miles  wide."     " 

first  man." 


XXXIV.    OF  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

3S8.  In  the  sentence,  "Both  wealth  and  poverty  are  temptations — 
that  tends  to  excite  pride,  tliis  discontent" — you  perceive  that  the  word 
that  represents  wealth,  and  the  word  this  poverty.  This  and  that  do, 
therefore,  resemble  pronouns,  and  may,  for  this  reason,  be  called  pro- 
nouns. 

389.  When  I  say,  "This  house  is  mine,  that  barn  is  yours',"  the 
words  this  and  that  are  joined  to  nouns  like  adjectives,  to  define  or 
specify  them  ;  they  maj'^,  on  this  account,  be  called  adjectives. 

390.  Adjective  pronouns,  then,  are  words  that  resemble  both  pro- 
nouns and  adjectives.  Those  pronouns  are  sometimes  called  pronom- 
inal adjectives,  or  specifying  adjectives. 

391.  The  ADJECTIVE  puonouns  may  be  divided  into  three  sorts — the 
distributive,  the  demonstrative,  and  the  indefinite. 

XXXIV.  What  are  adjective  which  these  words  resemble  pro- 
pronouns  ?  390.  nouns?  388.                         *, 

Why  are    they  so   called?  388,  One  in  which  they  resemble  ad- 

3S9.  jectivcs?     389. 

By  wljat  other  name  have  these  Into. how  many  sorts   may  these 

pronouns  been  called?  390.  pronouns  be  divided,  and  what  arc 

Will  you   give  an   example   in  they?     391. 

(1)  Advtub.  (2)  Ooiijuuctiou.  *  (3)  Apply  llulo  XI. 


PRONOUNS.  57 

392.  The  distributive  are  those  that  relate  to  persons  or  Ihincs 
tak^jn  separately  and  singly.  ' 

393.  DISTRIBUTIVE  (1)  PRONOUNS. 
Each,  every,  eithei;,  and  sometimes  neither. 

394.  Each  relates  to  two  or  more  persons  or  things,  taken  separ- 
ately, as  "  Each  of  his  brothers  is  doing  well." 

395.  Every  relates  to  several  persons  or  things,  and  signifies  each 
cue  of  them,  taken  separately;  as  ''Every  man  must  account  for  him- 
self." 

396.  Either  relates  to  two  persons  or  things  only,  taken  separately, 
and  signifies  the  one  or  the  other  ;  as  "  1  have  not  seen  cither."  IIei;ce. 
to  say,  "  Either  of  the  three,"  is  incorrect. 

397.  Neither  means  not  either;  that  is,  not  one  nor  the  other:  as 
"  JS  either  oi  my  friends  was  there." 

398.  The  demonstrauve  (2)  pronouns  are  those  which  precisely 
point  out  the  things  to  which  they  relate. 

399.  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
Sing-  Pin. 

This,  Thkse. 

That,  Those. 

,  Former,  Former. 

Latter,  Latter. 

400.  This  and  these  refer  to  the  nearest  persons  or  things— ^/mf  and 
those  to  the  most  distant;  as  ^'  The.^e  flowers  are  superior  to  those." 
'Both  wealth  and  poverty  arc  temptations;  that  tends  to  excite  pride, 

this  discontent."  • 

401.  Tiie  indefinite  are  those  that  refer  to  things  in  an  indefinite  or 
general  manner. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

402.  Some,  other,  any,  one,  all,  sech,  none.  Of  these  pronouns 
one  afid  other  are  declined  like  nouns.  Another  is  declined  in  the  sin- 
g  ular,  but  it  wants  the  plural. 

Sivg.  piu. 

403.  Norn.                         Other,  Others. 

Poss.                         Other's,  Others'. 

^h'-                           Other,  Others. 


What  is  a  distributive  pronoun?  What    are    demonstrative    pro- 

392.  nouns?     398. 

Why  is  it  so  called  ?     393.  Which  are  they  ?     399. 

Which  are  they  ?     393.     .  Which  are  singular?  399.  Which 

What   does  each  refer  to?    394.  plural?     399 

Give  an  example.  What  do  this  and  these  refer  to ? 

What  does  cvcnj  relate  to  ?    395.  400. 

Give  an  example.  What  do  that  and  those  refer  to  ? 

W  hat  does  either  relate  to  ?    396.  Give  an  example.     400.- 

Give  an  example.  What  docs  indernrite  mean  ?     81. 

What  does  neither  mean  ?     397.  What  is  an  indclinitc  pronoun? 

Uhat  docs  demonstrative  mean?  401. 


398 


Which  are  they?  402. 

Will  you  decline  other?  403. 


(1)  So  called  from   distrihuic.  to  divide,  among  several. 
(-)  So  called  from  dimonsirate,  to ^n-ove  or  show  precisdy. 


fJS  EN0U8H    GRAMMAR. 

Sing.  Flu. 

404.  Norn.  One,  Ones. 

Pos>i.  One's,  Ones'. 

ObJ.  One,  Ones. 

We  say,  "This  boolc,"  but  ''These  books;"  also,  "One  man," 
"Twetily  men:"  hence, 

405.  Note  1.  Adjective  pronouns  and  numerals  must  agree  Id  num- 
ber with  the  nouns  to  which  ihey  belong. 

EXERCISES  m  SYNTAX. 

« 

''  These  two  books  beloiry  to  wze." 

40(3.   These  is  an  ad.tectivk  pronoun  of  the  dk.moxstrative  kind,  iu 
the  PLURAL  NUMBER,  and  belongs  to  books,  according  to  Novb  I. 
Tiro  is  a  NUjiKUAL  ADJF.cnvR,  and  belongs  to  hooka,  by  Note  I. 
JBookb,  belong,  etc.,  are  par.sed  as  before. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING  CONTINURD. 

"  Every  man  performs  his  part  in  "  These  men  might  remain  with 

creation."  us." 

"Each  man  arrived  at  his  station."  "Those    men  make    many    pre- 

"  Either  parly  can  repair  the  inju-  tences  to  religion." 

ry."  "AH  rational  beings  dipsire  happi- 

"Some   persons   can   not  acquire  ness." 

weahh."  "  By  application  almost  any  boy 

"  Many  people  obtain  riches  with  may  acquire   an    honorablw 

apparently  little  exertion."  rank  in  his  class." 

"One  boy  labors  for  His  improve-  "Good    and   virtuous   men   will 

meat."  sooner  (1)  or  later  (1)  attain 

"This  man  neglects  his  alTairs."  to  happiness." 

"  The  old  bird  feeds  her  young  o?jes." 
407.   Ones  is  an  indefinite  pronoun,  representing  birds ;  in  the  com- 
mon gendi:r,  third  person  plural,  in  the  objective  case,  and  gov- 
erned h\j  feeds y  agreeably  to  E,ule  VIII. 

EXERCISISS  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 

"Oneboy influencesmanyolhers."  others  spend  their  time  in  idle- 
"None  act  their  part  loo  well."  ne.->s  ;  the  former  will,  receive 
"Some  scholars  study  diUgenilyj     praise,  the  latter  censure." 

We  can  not  .'Jay  -'Them  run,"  but  "They  rim:"  hence, 
Note  II.  When  a  noun  or  pronoun. is  the  subject  of  the  verb,  it 
should  be  in  the  nominative  case. 


Will  you  decline  one?  401.  feeds  her  young  ones,"  will  you 

What  note  do  you  apply  in  pars-  parse  ones  t    107. 

ing  adjective  pronouns  ?  Norsl.  Will  you  correct  by  Note  I  the 

In    the    jthrase,    "These    two  following  examples  as  1  read  tliern 

books,"  etc.,  will  you  parse  iheae'f  to  yon  ? 

tico  ?■  40G.  "  He  will    not  "come   this   two 

Will    you   now  take  the   book  hours." 

and    parse    the    remaining  exer-  "  I  dislike  those  sort  of  book.s." 

cises  under  Note  I?  "I  have  two  canes  ;   you  may 

In  the   phrase,  "The  old  bird  have  any  of  them." 

(1)  Advprb. 


PRONCUNal. 


59 


It  is  very  common  for  persons  in  conversation  to  say,  ''Them 
books,"  ''Them  knives,"  etc.,  instead  of  "Those  books,"  "Those 
knives,"  etc.  The  incorrectness  here  alluded  to  consists  in  substi- 
tuting a  jicrsonal  in  the  place  of  an  adjective  pronoun:  hence, 

Note  III.  The  pronoun  them  should  not  be  used  in  the  place  of  <7te«« 
or  those. 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Q.  Will  you  compose  two  sentences,  each  having  a  different  adjec- 
tive pronoun  ?  One,  having  a  demonstrative  pronoun  ?  One,  having 
an  indefinite  pronoun  used  as  a  noun  ? 

Q.  Will  you  fill  up  with  pronouns  suitable  to  make  sense  the  fol- 
lowing phrases  ?  "  When  Harriet  found  —  book,  —  tore  — ,  and  then 
liuiig  —  away."     " —  man  likes  —  larm,  —  merchandise." 

Q.  Will  you  compose  a  proper  example  under  Rule  I?  One  under 
Rule  II?     Rule  III?     Rule  IV?     RuleV?     Rule  VI? 


XXXV.  OF  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

408.  In  the  sentence,  ''That  man'  is  happy  who  lives  virtuously," 
the  word  %oho  is  a  pronoun,  because  it  stands  for  a  noun  (the  noun 
man),  and  it  is  a  relative,  because  it  relates  or  refers  to  this  noun  in 
the  same  sentence:  hence, 

409.  A  relative  pronoun  is  a  word  that  usually  stands  for  some  nouu 
before  it  in  the  same  sentence. 

410.  There  are  three  relative  pronouns,  viz  : 
'111.  Who,  which,  and  that. 

41^.    Who'xs  used  in  speakfng  of  persons  ;  as,  "The  man  who  came." 

413.  Which  is  useil  in  speaking  of  animals  or  things;  as,  *' The 
bird  7vhick  sings,"  "The  tree  which  I  planted." 

414.  IVhich^  however,  is  used  iii  speaking  of  persons,  when  we 
wish  to  distinguish  one  of  two  individuals,  or  a  particular  person 
among  many  others;  as,  "Which  of  the  two  is  he?"  "Which  of 
them  has  gone?  " 


Do  we  say  "  Thet/  run,"  or 
"  Them  run  ?"     Why  ?     Note  II. 

Will  you  now. correct  by  Note 
II  the  following  examples  as  I 
read  them  to  you  ? 

"  Them  will  go." 

"Him  and  me  went  to  church." 

"Art  thee  well?" 

"Him  who  is  diligent  will  im- 
prove." 

Would  you  say  "  Them  knives," 
or  "  77tc«e  knives?"    .Why?     III. 

In  what  does  the  incorrectness 
consist?     HI. 

Will  you  correct  the  following 
expressions? 

"Them  boys  are  very  idle." 

"  Bring  me  them  pens." 


"  Which  of  I  hem  three  things  do 
you  prefer?'' 

^^^**  The  2)upil  )nay  next  take  the 
exercises  to  be  written. 

XXXV.  In  the  sentence,  "That 
man  is  happy  who  lives  virtu- 
ously," what  part  of  speech  is  who? 
Why?  408.  What  kind?  Why? 
408. 

What  is  a  relative  pronoun? 
409. 

Will  you  name  them?  411. 

Wlien  do  wc  use  who  ?  Give 
an  example.  412. 

When  do  we  use  which?  Give 
an  example.  413. 

In  what  cases  do  we  use  which, 
in  speaking  of  persons?  Give  an 
example.  411. 


60  ENOUSn    GRAMMAR. 

415,  That,  as  a  relative,  is  often  used,  in  speaking  either  of  persons 
or  things,  in  the  place  of  'ivlto  or  ivhrcit ;  as, 

"The  boy  that  reads,"  or,  "  The  boy  who  reads  ;  "  "The  bird  that 
flew,"  or,  "The  bird  which  flew  j "  "The  bench  that  was  made,"  or, 
"The  bench  which  was  made." 

That  is  used  in  preference  Vo  who  or  ivhich.,  in  the  following  cases: 

1.  In  speaking  both  of  persons  and  things;  as,  "The  man  and  the 
beast  that  I  saw,  perished.'' 

2.  In  speaking  of  children  ;  as,  "The  child  that  I  met." 

3.  After  the  adjective  same  ^  as,  "He  is  the  same  nian  that  we  saw 
yesterday." 

4.  Alter  the  superlative  degree;  as,  "He  is  the  wisest  man  that 
the  world  ever  produced." 

5.  After  the  relative  who  ;  as,  "  Who  that  reflects." 

415 — 1.  Exception.  That,  as  a  relative,  can  not  take  the  preposi- 
tion immediately  before  it;  as,  "He  is  the  same  man  with  that  you 
were  acquainted."  For  with  that,  read  with  whom.  It  is  remarkable, 
however,  that,  when  the  arrangement  is  a  little  varied,  the  word 
that  admits  the  preposition  ;  as,  "  He  is  the  same  man  that  you  were 
acquainted  with." 

416 — 1.  We  can  say,  "The  man  who,"  or  "The  men  who,"  using 
the  relative  wAo  in  speaking  either  of  one  man  or  more  than  one; 
wlio,  then,  is  of  both  numbers,  and  is  thus  declined: 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  Who,  Who. 

Poss.  Whose,  Whose.        * 

Ohj.  '  Whom,  Whom. 

417.  Which  and  that  are  of  both  numbers,  but  they  are  not  declined, 
except  that  whose  is  sometimes  used  as  t  lie  possessive  case  of  which; 
as,  "  Is  there  any  other  doctrine  ichose  followers  are  punished  V 

41S.  Whose,  used  in  the  manner  last  described,  is  made  to  repre- 
sent three  words;  as,  "Philosophy  whose  end,"  for  "the  end  of 
which." 

419.  Antecedent  signiiies  going  before. 

420.  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  goes  before  the  relative,  and  to 
which  the  relative  refers,  is  ihereibre  called  the  antecedent  of  the 
relative;  as,  "  John,  who  has  gone."  Here,  John  is  the  antecedent 
of  who. 

421.  When  you  are  told  that  who,  7i'hich,a.i\d  z7<«f*are  relatives,  you 
should  not  get  the  impression  that  the  last  two  are  always  relatives; 
for  that  is. a  relative  only  when  it  is  used  in  the  sense  of  who  or  tvhich  ; 
that  is,  when  who  or  tvhich  may  be  used  in  its  place,  without  destroy- 
When  may  that  be   used  ?   415.         How  many  numbers  have  which 
Is  it  correct  to  say,  "  The  child     and  that  ?  Are  they  declined?  417. 

who?"  Why  not?  "The  same  man         What  exception  to  this?  417. 
who?"    Why   noti    "The  wisest         When 'ti'/fo.se  is  used  as  the  pos- 

man  which?"  Why  not?  "Who,  sessive  case  of  Wt?cA,  how  many 

who  reflects?"  Why  not?  415 — 1,  words  does  it  represent  ?  Give  an 

2,3/4,5.  example?  418. 

What  exception  is  mentioned?         What  is  the  meaning  of  antece- 

415—1.  Give  an  example.  415 — 1.  dent'^  419. 

How  many  numbers  has  whol         What   is   the   antecedent  of  a 

410.  pronoun  ?  Give  an  example.  420. 

Will  you  decline  it?  416—1.  Is  that  always  a  relative?  421. 


PRONOUNS.  61 

ing  the  sense;  as,  "Here  is  the  knife  that  1  fouad,"  which  can  be 
altered  to  "Here  is  the  knife  which  I  found,"  without  injury  to  the 
sense. 

422.  Tkat,  when  it  points  out  or  specifies  some  particular  person 
or  thing,  is  reckoned  an  adjective  pronoun.  "When  not  used  as  a 
relatire,  nor  as  an  adjective  pronoun,  it  is  reckoned  a  conjunction; 
as,  "  He  studies  that  he  may  learn." 

423.  Hence  it  appears  that  the  word  that  may  be  used  sometimes 
as  a  relative  pronoun,  sometimes  as  an  adjective  pronoun,  and  some- 
times as  a  conjunction. 

424.  Since  relative  pronouns  stand  for  nouns,  as  well  as  personal 
pronouns,  they  should  therefore  agree  with  nouns  in  the  same  par- 
ticulars and  by  the  same  rule.     Rule  V  will  therefore  apply  to  both. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  That  vian  is  happy  who  lives  virtuously.'''' 

42-5.  That  is  a  ukmon.strative  pronoux,  of  the  singular  number, 
and  belongs  to  man,  by  Note  I. 

Who    is     a    RELATIVE    PRONOtTN,    of    the    MASCULINE     GENDKR,    THIRD 

PERSON  si\GULAR,  and  agrees  with  man^  by  Rule  V.  It  is  in  the 
NOMiNATVE  CASE  to  lives^  according  to  Rule  VI. 

EXERCISES    IN   SYNTAX    CONTINUED. 

"That  man  is  fortunate  who  es-  "I   met    the   same    man    in   the 

capes  censure."  market  to-day  (1)   that  I  met 

"The  girl  whom  [  saw,  perished."  yesterday  in  the  street." 

"You,  who  came  first,  should  re-  '"That  house,  whicli  stands  on  the 

tire  first."  hill, once  (I)  belonged  to  me." 

"You  taught  the  boy  whose  hat  I  "  The  bov  whom  I  instruct  learns 

found."  welh" 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 
"  The  man  which  I  saioy 
426.  Incorrect;  because,  in  speaking  of  persons,  who,  whose^  or 
whom  is  .generally  to  be  used.     It  should  therefore  read,  "The  man 
wliom  I  saw." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED,  CONTINUED. 

"  The  bird  whom  I  killed  had  made  "Thou  who  are  in  'prosperity 
her  nest."  nlust  assist  me  in  adversity." 

"The  man  which  visited  me  has  "He  which  shuns  vice  does 
left  town."  generally  practice  virtue." 

"  That  man  is  happy  whom  is  vir-  "  I,  who  lives  by  your  charity, 
tuous."                         *      ■  should  be  grateful." 

When  is  it  a  relative?    (Jive  an  Will    you    parse    that,  in    the 

example.  421.  phrase  "That  man  ?"  42.'5. 

When  is  that  an  adjective  pro-  In  the  sentence,  "That  man  is 

noun?  Give  an  exnmple.  422.  happy  who  lives  virtuously,"  will 

When  a  conjunction?  Give  an  you  parse  toh-ol  42-'). 

example.  422.  Will  you  now  lake  the  book  and 

How    many    different    parts    of  parse  the  remaining  exercises  ? 

speech  may  ^7u7/  represent?  423.  Instead   of  saying,   "The   man 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  agree-  which  I  saw,"  what  should  I  say  ? 

ment  of  relative  pronouns?  424.  Why?  426. 

•     (1)  Adverb. 


62 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


SENTENCES  TO  BE  WEITTEN. 

Q.  Will  you  construct  a  .sentence  containing  the  relntive  who  ? 
One,  containing  vhich  ?     One  containing  ttiat  ? 

Q.  Will  you  fill  up  the  following  sentences  with  relatives  correctly* 

Tised  ?     "  The  man sims  shall  die."     ''  The  boy studies  will 

learn."     "  The  bird sung  so  sweetly   has  flown."     Will  you  fill 

up  the  following  with   on«^  or  more  words  that  will  make  sense? 
"  Intemperance evils."     '*  If truth sori-y." 

Q.  Will  you  embrace  in  diflerent  sentences  each  of  the  following 
words?  Waskir/gtoii,*  Colzcmbiis,  Cajytain,  Coofc,  Indians^  Wisdom^ 
Riches,  James  Motiroe  ? 


XXXVI.    OF     COMPOUND     AND     INTERROGATIVE     PRO- 
NOUNS. 

427.  *' I  took  7^7/ ^<  you  gave  me." 

"  I  took  that  ivhirh  you  gave  me." 

"  I  took  the  th'mg  irhich  you  gave  me." 

"  I  took  thu.se  things  which  you  gave  me." 
42S.  Ky  examining  the  foregoing  sentences,  you  will  see  that  tho 
word  what,  in  the  first  example,  means  the  same  as  the  words  in 
italics  in  the  successive  ones:  the  word  what^  then,  is  clearly  a  pro- 
noun ;  and  because  it  stands  for  more  than  one  word,  it  is  called  a 
compound  pronoun.  The  word  before  the  relative  which,  in  the 
phrase  "that  which,"  or  "the  thing  which,"  is  the  antecedent  of  «i'A?>/). 
Hence, 

429.  What  is  a  compound  relative  pronoun,  including  both  tho 
antecedent  and  the  relative,  and   is  generally  equivalent  to  that 

WHICH. 

430.  Who,  which,  and  what  have  sometimes  the  vi'ords  ever  or 
soever  annexed  (1)  to  them;  and  each  combination  of  this  sort  is 
called  a  compound  relative  ;  as  'whoever,  whosoever.,  whichever.^ 
whichsoever,  etc.     They  are  not  often  used. 

431.  Who,  tvklch,  and  ^l•hat  are  called  interrogatives,  cr  relative.s 
of  the  interrogative  kind,  when  they  are  used  in  asking  questions;  as 
"  Who  is  he  ?"     "  Which  i.s  the  book  ?"     "  What  are  you  doing  ?" 


Will  you  correct  and  parse  the 
remaining  exercises,  and  then 
take  the  exercises  to  be  written  ? 

XXXVI.  Will  you  repeat  those 
(sentences  which  mean  the  same 
as  "  I  took  what  you  gave  me  ?" 
427. 

What  words,  then,  does  what 
St  an  cr  for?  428. 

Why  is  wliat  a  pronoun  ?  42S. 

Why  a  compound  pronoun  ? 
428. 


you 

How  may  vOuit  be  described  ? 
429. 

Will  ynu  give  three  examples 
of  compound  pronouns  formed  by 
annexing  ever  or  soever  ?  430. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  a7i- 
vea-ed?  430. 

When  are  who,iDhic.h,  and  what 
called  interrogatives?  431. 

What  are  the  nouns  called  to 
which  interrogatives  refer  ?    431. 


*  Thus  '•  "VVashington  was  a  true  patriot,"  etc. 
tences  on  each  word, 
(1)     Placed  after. 


The  i^t/pil  may  write  several  sen- 


J»R0N0UN8.  Qg 

These  relatives    you  perceive,   have  no  antecedents,   bin  relate 'to 
^ome  word  or  phrase  contained  in  the  ansM-er,  which  is  called  a  U" 

reilrs.  "  "^"'  ''  '"'^  ^"^^^^egnent  to  which  nXom 

..^^^■/\?''^'^  foIlow.s  that  avtcrrdevt  and  svbseawvt  are  opvo^ed 
J-2"/;?'};;"  """"'"^^  '  '''"■  ''''''''  -•^-•ryi"?^o4  before,  th^Kr 

n.^''^/?  w^'^'h'^"''  T'f  ^^'•"'f '•'y  '^«^1^*  "^^«  Of  to  express  interrogation  • 
f)t  '  ^  "^^"^^.'-  '^^  '^/n^-'  *''^""  '  ^'•'^^"^^^  ^"  h"t  it  is  now  seldom  u  °ed' 
the^interrogfif ive  ir/ueh  Mjpplying  its  place.  ' 

.i34.  W/nc/r,  n-hat,  nnd,  as  we  have  already  seen,  that  when  ioined 
;?velv:  tri'l,;:.'' "'^^'"'"  ^'""^""^^'  ««'  "^"^«  -hi^'^omii'ru' 
tmtif"..^^'"'"  W/r./'  nnd  «•//,,>//  are  joined  to  nouns  in  askin<^  nues- 
S  dldCl^^e  ^^  -^errogative  ac^ective  pronouns  ;  as/^^S 

jeciion  ,  as,       What !  lake  my  money,  and  then  my  life?" 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  /  mill  leave  what  is  vsele^ay 

y61    What     ix^    the   example    above,    means    the   same   as   "  fhHf 

vh.ch,"  or  -the  thing  which,-"    we  will,  therefore      nnarsin^  it 

bear  in  m.nd  that    it    has  the   government  and   agreement   of  Iwo 

:rndU"S;..^^  ^^'m  first  parse   it  as  standi^  ibr  ^L^  Zl 

What   IS   a   coMPOTT^D   kelativ.c   pbonoun,    and    is   equivalent   to 
•that    M'h.ch,"    or   "the   thing  which."     la    representing  X..i    i? 
may  be  considered  a  tronoun  of  the  thiru  pkrson  sinJ;  L  neSe 
Tw  Vm         "''"'"'^  "^^^"'  ^"^  ^^^'^--"^^  ^y  /.«.e,  acco'rding  " 

/*  is  a  NICUTER  VBRB,    in  the  INDICATIVE  MOOD.   PRKSKNT  TFXSK—"  1 

am;  2,  You  are;  3,  He  or  which  is"-made'in  the  thik;  peTso; 
sixGULAR,  and  ogrees  with  .;/,ie7,,  the  relative  part  of  Ueprorroua 
what,  according  to  Rule  Vlf.    "  i      i  ui  mc  pronoun 

Why  so  Called?  431.  lli^j  .  "^30^^^^    ^^"^'^    '^    -^''''^ 

see"'' ''l^'''■^7'l"  ^'^T  '1''^  y^\'  ^"  ^^'«  ^^^"tence,  "  I  will  leave 

see?     ^^.*.  -John -'which  word  what    is    useless,"    how    do    vou 

>8  the  subsequent  ?   431  parse  vrhat  ?  is  ?  nseh^?  437' 

When  -areirhat,  which,. nd  that  What  does  u'haf  stand  for '437 

'Jam nl?  IT""''"  '       ^^'"^    '"  ^"  y^"  ^-^^  '^  ^  one  word  or 

Which  0/  the  relatives  are  some-  j^-  Th,  pnptl  may  vow  parse 

When7sny".-.Wh.t'robmeof    ^'-•— ^^''t- 


64  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

Useless  is  an  adjectiye,  in  the  positive  degree,  and  belongs  to 
what,  by  Rule  IV. 

exercises  in  syntax  continued. 
"James  will  do  what  is  proper."       '-William    demands    what   I   can 
"  You  heard  what  I  .said."  not  give."    ' 

"Whatever     improves      delights     "They  advocate  what   is  excel- 
him."  lent." 


;  XXXVII.    OF  THE  VERB. 

43S.  A  VERB  is  a  word  that  expresses  action  or  being.  Verbs  are 
of  three  kind.s — active,  passive,  and  neuter. 

439.  An  active  verb  e»i>resse3  action,  and  the  actor  is  always  the 
nominative  case;  as,  "John  runs.'"  Active  verbs  are  either  transi- 
tive or  intransitive. 

440.  An  active  verb  is  transitive,  when  it  either  has  or  may  have 
an  object  alter  it,  on  which  the  action  terminates;  as,  "John  beats 
William." 

441.  An  active  verb  is  intransitive,  when  it  neither  has  nor  can 
have  an  object  after  it. 

442.  Passive  means  suffeving  or  recevviug. 

443.  When  I  say,  "John  is  beaten  by  Wiilliam,"  is  heatcn  is  a  verb, 
because  it  expresses  action  ;  and  it  is  a  passive  verb,  because  it  ex- 
presses the  action  received  by  John  ;  and  if  John  receives  the  action, 
then  he  is  the  object  of  it:  hence, 

444.  A  passive  verb  expresses  action  or  eflect  received. 

445.  The  object  is  always  its  subject  or  nominative  case. 

446.  Active  nominative  or  actor — "John  strikes  William." 

447.  Passive  nominative  or  object — "  William  is  struck  by  John."  ' 
44S.  By  examining  the  foregoing  examples,  you  will  see  that  when 

the  verb  is  active,  its  nominative  is  likewise  active;  and  when  the 
verb  is  passive,  its  nominative  is  likewise  passive. 

449.  The  passive  voice  is  a  convenient  mode  of  expression  on  oc- 
casions when  we  wish  to  state  tohat  has  been  done,  without  exposing 

XXXVII.  What  is  the  meaning  What  is  the  meaning  of^ passive  ? 

of  verb  ?*  442. 

Why  so  called  ?  143.  In  the  example,  ".John  is  beaten 

What  is  a  verb?  438.  by  William."  which  is  the  verb? 

What  is  an  active  verb?  439.  Why?     What  kind  ?     Why?    443. 

What  is  always  its  nominative?  Which    word     is    the    object? 

Give  an  example.  439.  Why?  443. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  transi-  What,  then,  is  a  passive  verb  ? 

tive  .?f   of  intransitive  f"^  444. 

How  may  active  verb.'*  be  di-  Which   is  the  nominative  to  a 

vided  ?  439.  passive   verb,    the   agent,  or   the 

When  is  an  active  verb  transi-  object?  445. 

tive?     Give  an  (Example.  410.  Is  the  nominative  to  an  active 

When  is  an  active  verb  intran-  verb  active  or  passive?     Give  an 

sitive  ?     Give  an  example.  441.  example.  448. 

*  Sec  <inostion  to  142.   f  Sec  question  to  150.    J  Sec  question  to  152. 


Verb — mood. 


m 


the  author;  thus,  instead  of  saying,  "William  struck  John,"  I  can, 
to  avoid  alluding:  to  William,  say,  "John  was  struck." 

4.50.  A  neuter  verb  is  one  that  is  neither  active  nor  passive,  ex- 
pressing  simply  either  being-  or  existence  in  a  certain  stale  ;  as,  '''  He 
sits,"  "  He  in  at  home." 


XXXVIir.    MOOD,  OR  MODE. 

451.  Mood,  or  Modr,  is  the  manner  of  reoresenting  action  or  being-. 

4o2.  The  INDICATIVE  mood  is  used  simply  for  indicating  or  decla'r- 
mg^a  thing,  or  a^kii-ig  a  question';  as,  "  I  walk;"  ^  Do  I  walk?" 

453.  The  potential  mood  is  used  for  expressing  possibility,  liberty, 
poM'er,  will,  or  obligation,  either  with  or  without  askinff  a  question  • 
as,  ^"  I  may  go  ?"  "  May  I  go  ?"  "  He  must  read,"  etc.  ' 

45^  Of  the  SUBJUNCTIVK  MOOD.  The  term  anhjunctivc  signifies  auh- 
joined  or  added  to. 

455.  When  I  say,  "T  will  go,  if  he  desire  it," -the  phrase,  "if  he 
desire  it,"  is  added  on  to  the  one  before  I't :  hencn,  we  say  "If  he 
desire  it,"  is  in  the  subjunctive  mood.  The  term,  however,  is  limited 
to  such  sentences  as  are  preceded  by  the  conjunctions  if,  unless, 
aHiowjh,  except,  lest,  etc.,  which  imply  doubt  or  some  uncertainty. 

456.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  tor  expressing  doubt  or  uncer- 
tainty. 

457.  A  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood  may  be  expressed  in  two  dif- 
ferent- forms.  It  is  equally  correct  to  say,  "If  he  is  poor,  he  is 
respected,"  and,  "If  he  be  studious,  he  will  excel."  The  verbs  he 
and  ?s  are  both  in  the  present  tense  ;  and  since  each  has  the  conjunc- 
tion ?/  before  it,  each  is  in  the  subjunctive  mood. 

45S.  The  phrase,  "If  he  be  studious,"  means  the  same  as,  "If  he 
will  be  studious;"  it  therefore  plainly  implies  future  time. 


Is  the  nominative  to  a  passive 
verb  active  or  passive?  Give  an 
example.  44S. 

In  what  particular  is  the  passive 
voice  a  convenient  form  of  expres- 
sion ?     Give  an  example.  449. 

What  is  the  meaningof  uew/er.?* 

What  is  a  neuter  verb?  Give 
an  example.  450. 

How  many  kinds  of  verbs  are 
there,  and  whiil  are  they?  43S. 

XXXVIH.  What  is  the  meaning 
of  mood  ?  J  06. 

What  is  mood?  451. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  indica- 
tive? 16S. 

What  is  the  indicative  mood 
used  for?     Give  an  example.  452. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  poten- 
tial? 212. 


What  is  the  potential  mood  used 
for?     Give  an  example.  453. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  swA/uuc- 
tive  ?  454. 

In  what  mood  i^,  "If  he  desire 
it?"  455. 

How  is  the  term  subjunctive 
limited?  455. 

What  is  the  subjunctive  mood 
used  for?  456. 

How  many  different  forms  has 
it?  457.  Give  an  example  of 
each  ?  457. 

In  what  tense  are  the  verbs  be 
and  is?  457. 

In  what  mood  is  each  with  the 
conjunction  if  before  it?  457. 

What  does  "  If  he  be  studious," 
mean,  as  it  respects  time?  45S. 

What  tense,  then,  is  referred 
to?  45s. 


*See  qtU'Ptiou  to  IS?. 


66  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

'Ifj9.  On  the  contrary,  in  the  phrase,  "  W  he  is  poor."  the  sen«o 
plainly  it*,  "  If  he  i<i  now,  at  the  present  time,  poor,"  without  any  ref- 
orence  to  future  time. 

4G0.  H(Mice  it  ai)pears  that,  in  one  form  of  the  verb,  doubt  only  Is 
implied,  and  in  the  other,  both  dcnibt  and  fitture  tiinc. 

401.  The  verb  is  L-orrespouds  with  the  common  form  of  the  verb  to 
be,  in  the  indicative  mood,  presient  teii:?e  ;  as,  ''  I  am,  you  are,  he  is:" 
we  will,  therclore..  when  the  verb  is  varied  as  usual,  call  it  the 
i^ommon  form  of  the  subjunctive  mood;  and  when  the  verb  is  not 
varied  in  the  different  person?,  we  will  call  it  the  suhjxmciive  form, 
eince  this  form  is  peculiar  to  this  mood.  You  should  here  be  informed 
that  this  dirrtinclioii  relates  only  to  the  present  tense,  it  being  tni.'-tom- 
ary  to  vary  the  terminations  of  the  verb  in  the  remaining  tenses  an 
usual. 

462.  The  following  general  rules  will  direct  you  in  the  proper  use 
of  the  subjunctive  mood: 

463.  When  any  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  present  tense,  has  a 
r^'ference  to  future  time,  we  should  use  the 

SrBJDNCriVT!     FORM. 

Present    Tenwe. 

464.  Singular.  Plural. 

1.  If  I  love.  1.  If  we  love. 

2.  If  (hou  or  \"0U  love.  2.  If  ye  or  you  love. 

3.  If  he  love.'  3.  If  ihey  love. 

46.'5.  When  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  present  tense,  has  no 
reference  to  future  time,  we  should  use  the 

COMMON  FORM. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  If  I  love.  1.   If  we  love. 

2.  If  thou  lo  vest,  or  )  2.   Ifye  love,  or) 
If  you  love.            j  If  you  love,     j 

3.  If  he  loves.  3,  If  they  love. 

466.  Other  conjunctions,  b(?.cides  if,  are  used  before  the  subjunctive 
njood.  //  is  perhaps  used  most  frequently,  because  it  implies  doubt 
more  strongly  than  most  others. 

467.  By  the  foregoing,  you  may  perceive  that  when  the  verb  is  in 

What   does    "If    he   is    poor,"  When   do  we  use  the  subjunc- 

me!\n,  in  respect  to  time?  459.  tive  form  ?     403. 

What   idea,  then,  is   implied   in  Will    yon    conjup;Qte   the  verb 

the  one  form?  400.  love  in    this   form,  in   the  present 

What   two  ideas  in   the  other  tense?  4(34. 

for.ii  ?  4G0.  -When  do  we  use  the  commop 

With  -what  does  the  verb  is  cor-  form  ?  46r). 

respond?  401.  Why  is  the  conjunction  //used 

How  is  the  verb  varied  in  the  most  frequently  in  the  su[)junctivo 

common  form  of  the;  subjunctive  mood  ?  4(j6. 

mood  ?  461.  What  does  "  He  will  not  be  par- 
Why   called    common?      How  doned    unless  he  repent,'' mean  ? 
varied   in   the  subjunctive   form?  407. 
Why  called  subjunctive?  401.  What  then,  is  understood?  407, 

How  is  this  distinction  limited?  "If    thou    ever    return,    thou 

461.  shouldst  be  thankful;''  what  does 

How  are  the  remaining  tenses  this  mean  ?  467. 
varied ''  4C1. 


MOOD.  07 

the  subjunctive  form,  some  auxiliary  verb  is  always  understood  ;  as. 
He  win  not  be  pardoned  unle.ss  he  repent ;"  that  is,  ''  unless  he  will 
repent;"  '' If  thou  ever  r<*uirn.  thou  shonld.st  be  thankful:"  that  is, 
"i/ Ihou  shouldst  ever  lelnrn.'' 

•168.  A  verb  in  the  indicative  mood  is  converted  into  the  subjunctive, 
common  form  simply  by  placing  a  conjunction,  implying  doubt,  before 
It;  as,  "1  walk,'  the  indicative  mood,  becomes  subjunctive  bv  pre- 
fixiMjr  ;/y  ih„s,  ^-If  [  walk."  ^ 

1(39.  In  like  manner,  a  verb  in  the  potential  may  be  changed  to  the 
subjunctive,-  as,  '•  I  can  go/'  is  the  potential;  ''If  I  can  go,"  the  sub- 
junclive.  »   ' 

'170.  Of  (he  IMPHRATIVE  MOOD.  When  I  say,  "John,  mind  your 
book,  1  command  John  to  do  something;  and  because  imperative 
means  commanding,  we  say  that  mind,  in  the  phrase  above,  is  in  the 
imi)erative  mood. 

471.  This  mood,  for  reasons  assigned  before,  (214)  eiYibraces  the 
KJllowmg  particulars: 

1.  Cnmmnnd:  as,  "  John,  sit  up." 

2.  Entrcatij  :  as,  '' Do  visit  me." 

3.  Exhorting  :  a?,  <'  Remember  my  counsel." 

4.  Permitting:  as,  "Go  in  peace." 

<!72.  The  imperative  mood,  then,  is  used  for  commanding,  entreat- 
ing, exhorting,  or  permitting. 

'm  The  application  of  this  mood  is  limited  to  the  second  person  ; 
as,  -John,  come  to  me;"  because,  in  uttering  a  command,  making 
an  entreaty,  etc.,  we  must  necessarily  address  some  one;  hence,  you 
^^"-?^v*'  '■*^'^^°"  why  this  mood  has  but  one  person,  viz  :  the  second. 

4/4.  We  can  not,  with  any  propriety,  command  a  person  to-day,  or 
in  present  tune,  to  do<nnything  in  past  time:  yeslt-rday,  for  instance: 
consequently  a  verb  in  this  mood  can  not  have  any  past  tense. 

475.  When  I  command  a  person  to  do  anything,  the  performance  of 
the  command  must  take  place  subsequent  to  (he  command:  that 
IS,  in  future  time  ;  but  the  command  itself  must,  from  the  very  nature 
ol  the  case,  take  place  in  pre<ent  time;  this  mood,  therefore,  can  not, 
strictly  speaking,  have  any  future  tense:   hence, 

476.  A  verb  in  the  imperative  mood  must  be' in  the  present  tense 
and  in  the  second  person. 


A\  hat,  then,  is  understood  ?  407.  example  of  commandins?  one  of 

What  IS  always  under^^tood   in  entreatinff?  one  of  exhorting?  one 

this  form  ?  467.  of  permitting  ?  471. 

How  may  a  verb  in  the  indica-  How   many   persons    has    this 

live  mood    be  converted  into  the  mood  ^  473 

suVyunclive  ?  468.  What  person  is  it  ?  473. 

How    can      (he      potential    be  Has  this  mood  any  past  tense? 

changed  to  the  subjunctive?  Give  Why '^474 

an  example.     409.  When    I    command    a    person, 

Jn  What   mood    IS  ".fohn,  mind  when,  if  at  all,  must  the  perform- 

yo.ir  studies?"     Why?  470.  ance  of  the  command  takL  place? 

U  hat  IS  the  meaning  of  m2:>era-  475. 

tn^e?   470.  When,  or  in  what  time,  must  the 

Mow  many  particulars  does  this  command  itself  be  given  ?  475. 

mood    embrace?    471.      Why   so  Has  this  mood,  then,  any  future 

many?  214.  tense  ?  475.                           ^ 

VV  hat,  then,  IS   the    imperative  How  many  tenses,  then,  has  it  ? 

mood    used   for  ?   472.       Give   an  How  many  persons  ?  476. 


()8 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


477.  Of  the  ixfinitivr  mood.  In  llie  phrases,  "John  begins  to 
sing,"  '-The  boys  beg-in  to  sing-,"  "Thou  beginnest  to  sing,"  you  per- 
ceive thnt  the  verb  to  sinrj  is  not  varied  to  cctrrespond  -u'ith  the  number 
and  person  of  its  diflerent  agents,  JuJui,  the  boyn,  ^nd' thou ;  hence,  to 
sing  is  said  not  to  be  limited  either  by  person  or  number. 

478.  This  mood,  then,  is  properly  denominated  injDiitivc,  signifj'ing 
not  limited :  hence, 

479.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action  not  limited 
either  by  person  or  number. 

4S0.  To^  the  usual  sign  of  this  mood,  is  sometimes  understood;  as, 
"  Let  me  go,"  instead  of-  Let  me  to  go ;"  "  I  heard  him  say  it,"  for  "  I 
heard  him  to  say."  This  little  word  <o,  when  used  before  verbs  in  this 
manner^  is  not  a  preposition,  but  forms  a  part  of  the  verb,  and,  in 
parsing,  should  be  so  considered. 

4SL  From  the  foregoing,  it  appears  that  there  are  five  moods — the 
indicative,  the  imperative,  the  potential,  the  subjunctive,  and  the  in- 
finitive. 


•  XXXIX.  OF  TENSE. 

482.  The  present  tense  expresses  what  is  no-w  taking  place;  as, 
"John  swims." 

483.  This  tense  is  often  employed  to  express  the  actions  of  persons 
long  since  dead;  as,  "Seneca  reasons  and  moralizes  well." 

484.  The  [)resent  tense,  preceded  by  the  words  toJien,  he/ore,  nfter^ 
an  soon  as.  etc.,  is  sometimes  used  to  point  out  the  relative  time  of  a 
future  action;  as,  "When  he  arrives,  he  will  hear  the  news." 

48.5.  This  tense  is  elegantly  applied  to  qualities  and  things  which 
are  in  their  naturij  unchangeable;  as,  "Truth  is  eternal;"  "William 
boldly  asserted  there  was  no  God;"  properly,  "  is  no  God." 

48f3.  In  animated  (1)  historical  narrations  (2)  this  tense  is  some- 
times used  for  the  imperfect;  as,  "He  enters  the  territory  of  the  peace- 


Whal  is  the  meaning  of  infini- 
tive? 478. 

In  what  mood  is  sincj,  in  the 
phrases,  "John  begins  to  sing," 
"  The  boys  begin  to  sing,"  "  Thou 
beginnest  to  sing?"  477,  478. 

In  what  particulars  is  this  mood 
reckoned  not  to  be  limited  ?  477. 

What,  then,  is  the  infinitive 
mood  used  for?  479. 

What  is  the  n^ual  sign  of  this 
mood?  480. 

Is  it  always  expressed?  Give 
an  example  ?  450. 

How  is  the  sign  to  to  be  parsed  ? 
480. 

Why  parsed  with  the  verb  ?  480. 

How  many  moods  are  there, 
and  what  are  they?  48L 

XXXIX.  What  is  the  meaning 
o(  present?  173. 


What  does  the  present  tense 
express?  482.  Give  an  example. 
482. 

"Seneca  reasons  well."  What 
tense  is  employed  here?  Why? 
483. 

In  the  phrase,  "When  he  ar- 
rives," future  time -is  alluded  to; 
why,  then,  is  the  present  employ- 
ed ?  4b4. 

Do  we  say,  "There  is,"  or 
"there  was  no  God?"     Why?  485. 

What  is  the  meaning  oi aninxat' 
ed?  486. 

Meaning  o^  narrations  ?  486. 

"  He  enters  the  territory,"  etc, 
AVhy  is  the  present  tense  used  ? 
486. 

What  is  the  meaning  of  imper- 
fect?    181. 


(1)  Lively, 


(2)  Poacriptions,  or  telling  Avhat  has  beoii  done. 


TENSES. 


fid 


able  inhabitant?,*  he  fights  and  conquers,  takes  an  immense  booty, 
which  lie  divides  among  his  soldiers,  and  returns  home  to  enjoy  an 
empty  triiimpli." 

487.  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  what  took  place  in  time  past, 
however  distant  j  as,  "John  ilied." 

4S8.  The  perfect  tense  expresses  what  has  taken  place,  and  conveys 
an  allusion  to  ihe  present  time;  as,  "I  have  finished  my  letter." 

489.  When  any  particular  period  of  past  time  is  specified  or  alluded 
to,  we  use  the  imperfect  tense;  as,  "John  wrote  yesterday;"  but 
when  no  particular  past  time  is  specified,  we  use  the  perfect  tense; 
as,  "  I  have  read  Virgil  many  times." 

490.  The  perfect  tense  and  the  imperfect  tense  both  denote  a  thing 
that  is  past;  but  the  former  denotes  it  in  such  a  manner  that  there  is 
still  actually  remaining  some  part  of  the  lime  to  slide  away,  wherein 
we  declare  the  thing  has  been  done;  whereas  the  imperfect  denotes 
the  thing  or  action  past,  in  such  a  manner  that  nothing  remains  of  that 
time  in  which  it  was  done.  If  we  speak  of  the  present  century  we 
say,  "Philosophers  have  made  great  discoveries  in  the  present  centu- 
ry ;"  but  if  we  speak  of  the  last  century  we  say,  "  Philosophers  made 
great  discoveries  i\\  the  last  century."  "lie  has  been  much  afllicted 
this  year."  "I  have  this  week  read  the  king's  proclamation."  "I 
have  heard  great  news  this  morning."  In  these  instances,  He  has 
heev,  T  have  read^  and  Jicard,  denote  things  that  are  past;  but  they  oc- 
curred this  year,  in  this  week,  and  to-day;  and  still  there  remains  a 
part  of  this  year,  week,  and  day,  whereof  I  speak. 

4'JO — I.  In  general  the  perfect  tense  may  be  applied  wherever  the 
action  is  connected  M'ith  the  present  time,  by  the  actual  existence, 
either  of  the  author  or  of  the  work,  though  it  may  have  been  perform- 
ed many  centuries  ago;  but  if  neither  the  author  nor  the  work  now 
remains,  it  can  not  be  used.  We  may  say,  "Cicero  has  written  ora- 
tions," but  we  can  not  say  "  Cicero  has  written  poems:"  because  the 
orations  are  in  being,  but  the  poems  are  lost.  Speaking  of  priests  in 
general  we  may  say,  "They  have^  in  all  ages,  claimed  great  powers," 
because  the  general  order  of  priesthood  still  exists  ;  but  if  we  speak 


How  came  this  term  to  be  used, 
to  denote  an  action  past  and  fin- 
ished ?* 

What  does  the  imperfect  tense 
express?  487.  Give  an  exanijile. 
487. 

Meaning  oiperfect?-\ 

What  (ioes  the  perfect  tense  ex- 
press?    Give  an  example.  4SS. 

"John  wrote  yesterday."  What 
tense  is  the  verb  in  here?  489. 

Why  is  this  tense  used  ?  489. 

"  1  have  read  Virgil  many 
times."  Why  is  the  perfect  tense 
used  here?  489. 

What  do  both  the  perfect  and 
imperfect  denote ?  490. 

How  does  the  former  denote  it  ? 
490. 

How  does  the  latter?  490. 


Do  we  say,  "Philosophers  made," 
or,"7tat;emo"'^e,  great  discoveries  in 
the  present  century  ?"  Why?  490. 

Which  tense  do  we  use  in  speak- 
ing of  the  last  century?  490. 
Give  an  example.  490. 

"I  have  this  week  read  the 
king's  proclamation."  "I  have 
heard  great  news  this  morning." 
Which  are  the  verbs  used  in  these 
two  sentences  ?  490. 

What  do  they  denote?  When 
did  these  things  occur?  490. 

To  what  may  the  perfect  tense 
in  general  be  applied  ?  What  e.K- 
ceplion  is  mentioned?  490 — I. 

Do  we  say,  "  Cicero  lorote,^'  or, 
"/<oj»  written  orations  ?"  "  Cicero 
wrote,^' ov,  " has  written  poems?" 
Why?  490—1. 


■See  qncatian  to  182. 


fFinislifil,  or  coniiilete. 


70  EN'0LI8H    GRAMMAR. 

of  the  Druids  as  nny  particular  orJer  of  priests,  which  does  not  now 
exist,  we  can  not  use  this  tense.  We  can  not  say,  "  The  Druid  priests 
hiive  claimed  great  powers,"  but  mu^^t  say,  "The  Druid  priests  c/ai/H- 
eJ  ffreat  powers:"  because  that  order  is  now  lotally  extinct. 

491.  The  pluperfect  tense  expresses  what  had  taken  place  at  some 
past  time  mentioned  ;  a.«<,  "  I  had  fini:<hed  my  letter  before  my  father 
returned." 

492.  The  first  fvture  feme  expresses  what  will  take  place;  as,  "  John 
will  come,"* 

493.  The  second  future  expresses  what  will  have  taken  place,  at  or 
before  some  future  time  metuioned;  as,  "1  shall  have  finished  my 
business  before  the  steamboat  starts." 

494.  Tense  is  the  diHtinclion  of  time,  and  admits  of  six  variation!?, 
namely — the  present,  the  imperfect,  the  perfect,  the  pluperfect,  an«l 
the  first  and  .second  future  tense."*. 


XL.     OF  PARTICIPLES. 

495.  In  the  phrase,  "  I  found  a  man  laboring-  in  the  field,"  the  word 
laboring  shows  what  the  man  was  doing,  and  therefore  resembles  a 
verb.  When  I  say,  "The  laboring  man  should  not  be  wronged," 
laboring  is  joined  to  the  noun  iniui  to  describe  it,  and  therefore  re>eni- 
bles  an  ndjeclive. 

496.  The  word  laboring,  tl)en,  partakes  of  the  nature  of  two  ditfer- 
enl  parts  of  speech  ;  and  since  participle  signifies  2:tartu1ciinj  of,  we 
will  call  such  vt-ords  as  laboring^  participles, 

497.  All  participles  are  derived  from  verbs;  thus,  from  labor  comes 
laboring  ;  from  beat,  beating ;  rejoice,  rejoicing,  etc.:  hence, 

49S.  The  partici|)le  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb,  and  partakes  of 
the  nature  of  a  verb  and  adjective. 

In  speaking  of  priests  in  gener-  In  what  mood  is,  "He  runs?"' 

al,  why  do  we  say,  "  They  have,  in  Why  ^452.  "  Does  he  run  ?"  Why? 

all  ages,  claimed  great  powers?"  452.     "I   may  run?"   Why?  'l.O.'J. 

490—1.  "Should  I  have  studied?    Why? 

Can  we  say,  "The  Druid  priests  4.''>3.  "  If  he  accept  ?  "  Why  ?  4.'36. 

haoc     claimed     great      powers?"  "  If  he  accepts  ?  Why?  456.  *' To 

What  should  we  say?     Why?  490  sing?  "  Why  ?  479, 

— 1.  In  what  tense  is,  "He  sings?" 

What  is  the  meaning  of  jjluper-  Why?  482.  "Did  he  sing?"  Why? 

feet  r  ISO.  487.  "  He  has  read  ?  "  4bS.     Why  ? 

What  does  the  pluperfect  tense  "  Had  he  written  ?"  491.     Why? 

express?  491.  Give  an  example.  "  Shall  he  go  ?"  492.  "  I  shall  have 

491.  gone?"  Why?  493. 

Meaning  of /)/<?/re?  177.  XL.  What  pai^t  of  speech  does 

What  doe*  the  first  future  ex-  laboring  reseml)le  ?   Give   an  ex- 
press?   Give    an     exam|>le,    492.  ample.  49.5. 
Why  called  first  future?*  What   is  the  meaning  o(  parti- 

What  does   the   second    future  ciple?  490. 

express?  Give  an  example.  493.  From  what  are  all  participles  de- 

ilow  many  tense.s  are  there  in  rived?497.  Give  an  example.  497. 

all,  and  what  are  they?  494.  What  is^  a  participle?  498. 


*  See  qaestlon  to  191. 


499.  When  I  soy,  "John  Is  wriiing,'"  the  participle  xnitivg  t>hows 
\rhal  .lohu  is  now  dciiig:,  but  hns  not  finished  :  irriiivg^  then,  may  I'o 
cftlled  n  present  participle:  hence, 

500.  Tht;  present  participle  expresses  what  is  now  taking  pinoe, 
but  not  fujishetl. 

501 — 1.  This  participle  alvvnys  ends  in  ing  ;  as,  sinvlng,  fighting, 
u>ee2)i»g,  loving,  etc.  There  ore  many  words  of  this  lerminatiuti 
which  are  not  participles;  as,  morning,  evening,  which  ore  nouns; 
viiintereativg,  unsatisfying,  which  ore  adjectives.  The  fnct  that  these 
cnn  not  be  tbrmed  ironi  Verba  will  furnisn  you  with  a  certain  rule  for 
distinguishing  the  pr.rticiple  from  all  other  words  of  the  same' termi- 
nation ;  as,  tor  i n St u ace,  «7j?"«ft7-c»f /?»(/,  we  know,  is  not  a  participle, 
because  there  is  i\o  such  vcrh.as  ttmiitercnt,  from  which  to  ibrm  it. 

501.  "The  letter  is  writtt:n."  HiiV^  the  participle  written  .shows 
that  the  act  of  writing  is  past  and  finished;  it  may,  then,  be  called  a 
perfect  participle:  hence, 

002.  The  perlecl  participle  er.tu'e.sses  what  (s  past  and  finished. 

502—1.  This  participle  may  always  be  distinguished  by  its  making 
PeUL-e  with  haring  ;  thus,  haviug  icritlcu,  haying  tsung,  cct.  Here  writ- 
ten  and  .9iaig  are  perfect  participles. 

503.  "John,  havins  written  his  letter,  scaled  it."  Here  you  doubt- 
less perceive  that  the  act  of  writing  took  place  before  that  of  seal- 
ing-; also  that  the  participle  is  composed  of  two  words,  Aav/»gr  and 
written;  it  may  then  be  called  a  cowpoupcl  participle.,  and  because  it 
denotes  al.^o  an  action  past  and  fini^lu■d,  it  may  very  properly  bo 
calU;d  a  compound  perfect  participle:  hence, 

504.  The  compound  perfect  ))articiple  expresses  what  took  place 
before  something  cl^e  mentioned. 

504 — 1.  This  participle  is  formed  by  placing  the  preisent  participle 
^oi'/«.y  before  the  perfect  participle  of  any  verb;  as,  having  /oiig?it, 
having  ciphered. 

When  I  say,  "John  is  writing,"  Having     written,     having    simg. 

what  does  icritivg  show?  499.  Which  are  the  perfect  participles 

What,  then,  may  it  be  called?  here?  W2. 

499.                                      .  "John,  havingwritten  his  letter, 

What,  then,  is  a  present  partici-  sealed  it  "    Which  took  place  first, 

pie?  500.  the  writing  or  the  sealing?  503. 

VVhatdocsthisparticiplealwavs  Of  what  is  this  partici})le  coni- 

end    in.?    500—1.      Give    an    ex-  posed  ?  603. 

ample.  500—1.  What,  then,  may  it  be  called?  503. 

Are  all  words'cnding  in  i)tg  par-  What  does  having  written  denote 

ticiples?    Glxi^    an     example    of  in   reference  to  time  and  action? 

nonn.i  of  this  termination  ?  of  ad-  503. 

jectives?  500 — 1  What  may  it  thence  be  called* 

How,  then,  can  the  participle  503. 

be  distingin^hed  ?     Give   an  ^x-  What  does  a  compound  perfect 

ample.  500 — 1.  participle  express  ?  504. 

"The  letter  is  written."     WHiat  How  is  this  participle  formed? 

does   the   participle   ivritten  show  504.     0\vo  an  example.  504. 

here?     What,    then,    may     it    be  XLl.  Striking.     f.irnrl\      having 

called?  501.  strtak-.     Here  are  three  diflerent 

What  is  a  perfect  participle?  502.  participles:  can  you  tell  which  Is 

How  may  this  participle  always  the  pre>ent  ?  Why?  500.  Perfect  ? 

be    known?    Give     un    examp'e.  Why?  502.     Compound    perfect? 

502—1.  Why?  503. 


7/J  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

XLI.     FORMATION  OF  THE  PASSIVE  VERB. 

J505.  Stnic/c  is  a  perfect  participle,  from  the  verb  strike,  and  this  you 
know,  because  it  makes  sense  joined  with  Juiriyuj  ;  as,  having  struck. 

506.  i.y,  you  doubtless  recollect,  is  a  variation  of  the  verb  to  be ;  as, 
''I  am,  you  are,  he  is:"  now,  l)y  joining  is  with  strttc^-,  we  can  form 
the  passive  verb  is  struck.    "John    strikes  Joseph,"  is    active;  but 

'"Joseph  is  struck  by  John,"  i.s  passive. 

507.  In  these  two  examples  you  perceive  that  the  sense  of  each  is 
the  same  :  hence,  by  means  ot  the  passive  verb,  we  are  enabled  to 
express,  in  a  different  form,  the  precise  meaning  of  the  active,  which, 
you  will  oftentimes  find,  contributes  not  a  little  to  the  variety  and 
harmony  of  thte  language. 

508.  By  examining  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  to  be^  you  will  dis- 
cover that  it  has,  in  all,  ten  variations,  viz.,  om.,  art,  is,  are,  icas,  toast,  , 
were,  been,  be,  and  bei?ig.  Every  passive  verb  must  be  composed  of, 
one  of  these  ten  variations,  and  the  perfect  participle  of  any  active 
transitive  verb.  Thus,  taking  ivas,  and  joining  it  with  the  perfect 
participle  of  the  verb  Ae«/;,  namely  beaten,  we  form  the  passive  verb 
was  beaten;to  which  prefixing  an  object,  or  nominative  case,  we  have 
the  phrase,  "  William  was  beaten." 

509.  It  is  a  fact  worthy  to  be  remem!)ered,  that  the  passive  verb 
always  retains  the  same  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person,  that  the 
verb  to  be  has  before  it  is  incorporated  with  the  participle  ;  thus, 
"  He  has  been,"  is  the  indicative  perfect,  third  person  singular  ;  then, 
"He  has  been  rejected,"  is  likewise  the  indicative  perfect,  third  per- 
son, singular,  passive.  It  can  not,  therefore,  be  dirtioult  to  tell  the 
mood,  tense,  number,  and  person  of  any  passive  verb,  if  you  are 
familiar  with  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  to  be. 

From  the  foregoing  particulars  we  derive  the  following  general  rule  : 

510.  AH  passive  verbs  are  formed  by  adding  the  perfect  participle 
of  any  active-transitive  verb  to  the  neuter  verb  to  be. 


X-LII.    OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

511.  Auxiliary  verbs  are  those  by  the   help  of  which  the  principal 
verbs  are  conjugated. 

What   kind   of  a    participle   is  What  will  always  compose  one 

struck?'  505.    How  do  you   know  part    of    a   passive     verb?    503. 

this?  50.5.  What  the  other  part?  508. 

Of  what  verb  is  the  verb  is  a  Wliat    fact    is     mentioned     as 

variation?  506.  worthy  of  notice  ?  509. 

Will  you  form  a  passive  verb  What  mood,  tense,  number,  and 

■with  is  and  struck?  506.  person  is  "  He  has  been?"  509.  Is 

"John   strikes  Joseph."     How  "  He  has  been  rejected  ?"  509. 

may  the  sense  of  this  sentence  l)e  A^Jhat  will  make  the  mood,  tense, 

expressed  by  a  passive  verb?  50(5.  etc.,  of  passive    verbs    familiar? 

What  advantage  does  the  use  of  509. 

the  passive  verb  often  afford  us?  How     are    all     passive    verbs 

507.  formed?  510. 

Towhat  does  it  contribute?  507.  XLII.    What  is  the  meaning  of 

How  many  variations    has  the  avxHiary?  196. 

verb  to  he  in  all?  508.     What  are  What  are  auxiliary  verbs?  511. 
they?  50S. 


VERBS.  73 

512.  The  auxiliary  verbs  are  yuay^  can^  viust^  might,  could,  would, 
should,  and  shall.  The' following  are  sometimes  auxiliaries,  and  some- 
times principal  verbs:  do,  be,  have.,  a.i\d  ivili. 

513.  When,  in  {ho  formation  of  any  tense,  we  use  an  auxiliary 
verb,  thai  tense  is  called  a  compound  one;  and  the  tense  formed  by 
the  principal  verb  alone  is  called  a  simple  tense. 


XLIII.  SIGNS  OF  THE  MOODS. 

514.  The  indicative  mood  may  be  known  by  the  sense,  or  by  its 
having  no  sign  except  in  asking  a  question  ;  as,  "  Who  comes  here  ?" 

515.  The  potential  mood  has  lor  its  signs  the  auxiliaries  7na7/,  can, 
7nust,  7fnght,  could,  would,  and  should;  as,  "  I  could  love,"  etc. 

516.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  usually  for  its  signs  the  conjunc- 
tions if,  though,  unless,  except,  whether,  and  lest ;  as,  "  Unless  he 
repent,"  etc. 

M7.  The  infinitive  mood  has  usually  for  Its  sign  the  word  to;  as, 
"  To  sing." 

518.  The  imperative  mood  may  be  distinguished  by  its  always 
being  in  the  second  person,  and  by  its  agreement  with  thou  or  ye,  or 
you  ;  as,  "  Depart  thou,"  etc. 

XLIV.  SIGNS  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

519.  The  present  tense  has  for  its  sign  the  first  form  of  the  verb  ; 
as,  weep,  remaift,  etc.;  excepting  the  occasional  use  of^do  ;  as,  "  I  do 
learn." 

520.  The  imperfect  tense  has  no  auxiliary  for  a  sign,  except  did, 
which  is  sometimes  used.  If,  however,  the  verb  is  not  in  the  present 
tense,  and  has  no  auxiliary,  it  follows  that  it  is  in  the  imperfect;  as, 
"  J  fought." 

521.  The  perfect  tense  has  for  its  sign  the  word  have;  as,haveloved. 

522.  The  pluperfect  has  for  its  sign  had;  as,  had  loved. 

523.  The  first  future  has  for  its  sign  shall  or  toill;  ns,-shalloT  will  love. 

524.  The  second  future  has  for  its  sign  shall  have  or  will  have  ;  as, 
shall  have  loved,  or  will  have  loved. 

525.  The  indicative  mood  has  six  tenses. 

Will  you  name  them  ?  512.  ative   mood  ?   518.    Give  an   ex- 

What  verbs  are  used  both  as  ample.  518. 

auxiliary    and   principal    verbs  ?  XLIV.  What  is  the  sign  of  the 

512.  present  indicative  ?  519.  Give  an 

XLIII.  What  is  the  sign  of  the  "  example.  519. 

indicative  mood  ?   514.   Give  an  Sign    of   the    imperfect  ?   520. 

example.  514.  Give  an  example.  520. 

What  is  the  sign  of  the  potential  Sign  of  the  perfect?  521.  Give 

mood  ?    515.    Give   an   example,  an  example.  521. 

515.  Sign   of  the   pluperfect  ?    522. 
What  isthesign  of  the  subjunc-  Give  an  example.  522. 

tive  mood?  516.  Give  an  example.        Sign  of  the  first  future?   523. 

516.  Give  an  example.  523. 

What  is  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  Sign  of  the  second  future  ?  524 
mood?  517.  Give  an  example.  517.     Give  an  example.  524. 

What  is  the  sign  of  the  imper-        How  many  tenses  has  the  in 

dicative  mood  ?  525. 


74  ENGLISH    GRAMMARo 

526.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  six  tenses. 

527.  The  potential  mood  has  four  lenses. 

528.  The  infinitive  mood  has  two  tenses. 

529.  The  imperative  mood  has  one  tense. 


XLV.     CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 

530.  When  I  aslc  you  to  raise  your  voice,  in  reading,  you  readily'' 
understand  what  I  mean   i)y  mice  j  l»nt  in  grammar  its  application  is 
somewhat  peculiar.     Granmiatictally  considered,  it  relers  to  the  ac- 
tivt^  and  passive  nature  of  verbs. 

531.  The  co.\ji;gation  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  eombibation  and 
arrangement  of  its  several  numbers,  persons,  moods,  and  tenses. 

532.  The  conjugation  of  an  active  verb  is  styled  the  active  voice, 
and  that  of  a  passive  verb  the  passive  v<»ice. 

533.  Verbs  are  «-aIled  begui.ar,  when  they  form  their  imperfect 
tense  of  the  iiulicalive  mood,  and  their  perfect  participU'  by  the  ad- 
dition of  ed  to  the  verb  in  the  present  tense,  or  d  only  when  the  verb 
ends  in  ej  as, 

Preit.  Tense,  Imp.  Tense.  Per/.  Participle. 

I  favor.  I  favored.  Favored. 

1  love.  I  loved.  Loved. 

534.  When  a  verb  does  not  form  its  imperfect  tense  and  perfect 
participle  in  this  manner,  it  is  called  an  ikkkgih-ar  verb;  as, 

Pres.  Te7ise.  Imp.  Teiiae.  Perf.  Participle. 

1  am.  I  was.  Been. 

535.  The  regular  verb  love,  and  the  irregular  verb  to  U,  are  conju- 
gated as  follows : 

CONJUGATION. 

TO  LOVE  AND  TO  BE. 

AOTITK  AND  PASSIVE  VOICE   CONTRASTBD. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
present  tense, 
active  voice."  passive  voice.  neuter. 

Singular.  Singular.  Singular. 

1  Pers.  I  love.  1  Pers.  I  am  loved.  1  Pers.  I  am. 

2  Peru.  You  love.       2  Pe.rs.  You  sire  loved.     2   Pers.  Yon  are. 

3  Pers.  He  loves.       3  Per.s.  He  is  loved.  3  Pers.  He  is. 

How    many    the    subjunctive?  W  lien  are  verb>  called  regular? 

526.  533.  Give  an  example.  533. 

How  many  the  potential  ?  527.  Will  you   repeal   after  ine  the 

How  many  the  infinitive?  528.  present  tense,  and  name  the  im- 

How  many  the  imperative?  .529.  perfeet  tense  and  perfect  partici- 

XLV.   What  does  voice  mean  in  [)le  of  the  verbs  favor  ?  love?  533. 

grammar?  530.  When  is  a  verb  called  irregu- 

Meaning  of  CO?/; i/^flrf ?{;?*.?   217.  lar?534.     Give  an  exMmple.  534. 

What  is  the  conjugation  of  au  Will  you  conjugate  love  in  the 

active  verb  styled  ?  532.  pre>ent  tense,   active  voice,    in- 

What  the  conjugation  of  a  pas-  ditative  mood?  535.     In  the  ira- 

aiveverbl  532.  perleci?  perlecl?  pluperfect?  first 


TENSES. 


TfS 


Pliirah 

1  Pers.  We  love. 

2  Pers.  You  love. 

3  Pers.  They  love. 


Si7tgular. 

1.  I  loved. 

2.  You  loved. 

3.  He  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  loved. 

2.  You  loved. 

3.  They  loved. 

Sing7ilar. 
3.  I  have  loved. 

2.  You  have  loved. 

3.  He  has  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  have  loved. 

2.  You  have  loved. 

3.  They  have  loved. 

Singular. 

1.  I  had  loved. 

2.  You  had  loved. 

3.  He  had  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  had  loved. 

2.  You  hftd  loved. 

3.  They  had  loved. 

Singular. 

1.  I  shall  or  will  love. 

2.  You   shall  or  will 

love. 

3.  He    shall    or  will 

love. 

Plural 

1.  We   shall  or  will 

love. 

2.  Yon   shall  or  will 

love. 

3.  They  shall  or  will 

love. 


Plural. 

1  P*»r.».  We  are  loved. 

2  P«r.y.  You  are  loved. 

3  Pers.  They  are  loved. 

IMPERFECT   TEN3B. 

Singular. 

1.  I  was  loved. 

2.  You  were  loved. 

3.  He  was  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  were  loved. 

2.  You  were  loved. 

3.  They  were  loved. 

PERFECT    TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  I  have  been  loved. 

2.  You  have  been  loved. 

3.  He  has  been  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  have  been  loved. 

2.  You  have  been  loved. 

3.  They  have  been  loved. 

PLUPERFECT   TENSE. 

Sifigular. 

1.  I  had  been  loved. 

2.  You  had  been  loved. 

3.  He  had  been  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  had  been  Ibved. 

2.  You  had  been  loved. 

3.  They  had  been  loved. 

FIRST  FUTURE   TENSE. 
Singular. 

1.  I  shall  or  will   be 
loved. 

2.  You  shall  or  will 
be  loved. 

3.  He    shall    or  will  . 
be  loved. 

Plu  ral. 

1.  We   shall   or  will 
be  loved. 

2.  You    shall  or  will 
be  loved. 

3.  They  ^hall  or  will 
be  loved. 


Plural 

1  Pers.  We  are. 

2  Pers.  You  are.  - 

3  Pers.  They  are. 

Sl7igular. 

1.  I  was. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  He  was. 

Plural. 

1.  We  were. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  They  were. 

Singular. 

1.  I  have  been. 

2.  You  have  been. 

3.  He  has  been. 

Plural. 

1.  We  have  been. 

2.  You  have  been. 

3.  They  have  been. 


Singular. 

1.  I  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been. 

3.  He  had  been. 

Plural. 

1.  We  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been. 

3.  They  had  been. 


Sin  gular. 

1.  I  shall  or  will  be. 

2.  You  shall  or  will 

be. 

3.  He   shall  or  will 

be. 

Plural 

1.  We  shall  or  will 

be. 

2.  Y'ou  shall  or  will 

be. 

3.  Ttley  shall  or  will 

be. 


future?    second  future?    present     perfect?  first  future^  second  fu- 
passive?  imperfect?  perfect?  plu-    ture? 


•iT 


76 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


Singnlar. 

1.  I  shall  have  loved. 

2.  You  will  have  lov- 

ed. 

3.  He  will  have  lov- 

ed. 

Plural. 

1.  "We  shall  have  lov- 

ed, 

2.  You  will  have  lov- 

ed. 

3.  They     will     have 

loved. 


Singular. 
i.  I  may  or  can  love. 
•      2.  You    may    or    can 
love. 
3.  He    may    or    can 
love. 

Plnral. 

1.  We    may-   or    can 

love. 

2.  You   may    or    can 

love. 

3.  They  may  or  can 

love. 

Singular. 

1.  I     might,      could, 

would,  or  should 
love. 

2.  You  might,   could, 

would,  or  should 
love. 

3.  He   might,    could, 

would,  or  should 
love. 


iSECONl)  FUTURE   TENSE. 
Sifigular. 

1.  I  shall  have  been 

loved. 

2.  You  will  have  been 

loved. 

3.  He  will  have  been 

loved. 
Plural. 

1.  We     shall     have 

been  loved. 

2.  You  will  have  been 

loved. 

3.  They    will     have 

been  loved. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT   TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  I   may   or    can   be 

loved. 

2.  You  may  or  can  be 

loved. 

3.  He  may  or  can  be 

loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  may  or  can  be 

loved. 

2.  You  may  or  can  be 

loved. 

3.  They  may  or   can 

be  loved. 

IMPERFECT   TENSE. 

Singidar. 

1.  I      might,      could, 

would,  or  should 
be  loved. 

2.  You  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
be  loved. 

3.  He   might,    could, 

would,  or  should 
be  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  I  shall  have  been. 

2.  You      will      have 

been. 

3.  He  will  have  been. 


Plural. 

1.  We     shall     have 

been. 

2.  You      will      have 

been. 

3.  They    will     have 

been. 


Singular. 

1.  I  may  or  can  be. 

2.  You  may  or  can  be. 

3.  He  may  or  can  be. 


Plural. 

1.  We  may  or  can  be. 

2.  You  may  or  can  be. 

3.  They  may  or  can 

be. 


Singular. 

1.  I      might,      could, 

would,  or  should 
be. 

2.  You  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
be. 

3.  He   might,     could. 

Would,  or  should 
be. 


Will  you  conjugate  the  verb 
to  be,  or  am,  in  the  present  ?  the 
imperfect?  perfect?  pluperfect? 
iirst  future  ?  second  future  ? 

Will  you  nalne  the  first  person 
singular,  of  the  present  indicative, 
active,  and  passive  of  love,  and 
the  first  person  singular  of  the 
verb  to  he  ? 

The  second  person  in  like  man- 


ner? the  third  ?  the  first  person 
plural  ?  second  person  plural  ? 
third?  first  person  singular,  im- 
perfect ?  second  person  ?  third  ? 
first  person  plural  ?  second  person 
plural?  third  ?  first  person  singu- 
lar, perfect  ?  second  person  ? 
third  ?  first  person  plural  ?  sec- 
ond ?  third  ? 


TENSES. 


tr- 


Plural.  Plural. 

1.  Wo  might,   could,  1.  We  might,   could, 

would,  or  should  would,  or  should 

love.  be  loved. 

2.  You    might,   could,  2.  You  might,  could, 

would,  or  should  would,  or  should 

„    _,i°^e.  be  loved. 

3.  They  might,  could,  3.  They  might,  could, 

would,  or  should  would,  or  should 

Jove.  be  loved. 

PERFECT   TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  I  may  or  can  have 
been  loved. 

2.  You    may  or    can 
have  been  loved. 

3.  He     may    or    can 
have  been  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  may  or  can 
have  been  loved. 

2.  You  may  or  can 
have  been  loved. 

3.  They  may  or  can 
have  been  loved. 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  T  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
have  been  loved. 

2.  You  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
have  been  loved. 

3.  He  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
have  been  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  I  may  or  can  have 

loved. 

2.  You    may    or   can 

have  loved. 

3.  He    may    or    can 

have  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We   may    or    can 

have  loved. 

2.  You   may    or    can 

have  loved. 

3.  They  may  or  can 

have  loved. 


Plural. 

1.  We  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
be. 

2.  You   might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
be. 

3.  They  mfght,  could, 

would,  or  should 
be. 


Singular. 

1.  I  may  or  can  have 

been. 

2.  You   may 'or    Can 

have  been. 

3.  He    may    or    can 

have  been. 

Plural. 

1.  We    may    or    can 

have  been. 

2.  You    may    or   can 

have  been. 

3.  They  may   or  can 

have  been. 


Singular. 

1.  I     might,      could, 

would,  or  should 
have  loved. 

2.  You  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
have  loved. 

3.  He   might,    could, 

would,  or  should 
have  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  We  might,    could, 

would,  or  should  • 
have  loved.. 

2.  You  might,   could, 

would,  or  should 
have  loved. 

3.  They  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
have  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  I  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
have  been. 

2.  You  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
have  been. 

3.  He  might,  could, 
would,  or  should 
have  been. 


Plural. 

1.  We   might,   could, 

would,  or  should 
have  been  loved. 

2.  You  might,  could, 

would,  o?-  should 
have  been  loved. 

3.  They  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
have  been  loved. 


Plural. 

1.  We   might,  could, 

M^ould,  or  should 
have  been. 

2.  You  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
have  been. 

3.  *rhey  might,  could, 

would,  or  should 
have  been. 


Will  you  conjugate  love  in  like     second  futures  ?  present  potential 


manner  through  each  person  and     imperfect  ?  perfect  ?   pluperfect 
voice  of  the  pluperfect?  first  and     present      siibjunctive;     ?ommo 


78 


£^&LISH    eH^MIdAK. 


Singtdar. 

1.  If  Hove. 

2.  If  you  love. 

3.  If  he  love. 

Plural, 

1.  If  we  love. 

2.  If  you  love. 

3.  If  Ihey  love. 

'(Singular, 

1.  Ifl  love. 

2.  If  you  love. 

3.  If  he  love. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  love. 

2.  If  you  love. 

3.  If  ihey  love. 


Singular, 

1.  Ifl  loved. 

2.  If  you  loved. 

3.  If  he  loved. 

Plural. 
1.  If  we  loved. 
'2.  If  you  loved. 
3.  If  ihev  loved. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT   TENSE. 

Common  Form. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  am  loved. 

2.  If  you   are    loved. 

3.  If  he  13  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  are  loved. 

2.  If  you    are   loved. 

3.  'If  ihey  are  loved. 

Subjunctive  Form. 
Singular. 

1.  Ifl  be  loved. 

2.  If  you  be  loved. 

3.  If  he  be  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  be  loved. 

2.  If  you  be  loved. 

3.  If  Ihey  be  loved. 

IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

Common  Form. 

Singular. 

1.  Ifl  was  loved. 

2.  If  you  were  loved. 

3.  If  he  was  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  were  loved. 

2.  If  you  were  loved. 

3.  If  they  were  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  Ifl  am. 

2.  If  you  are. 

3.  If  he  IS. 

Plural, 

1.  If  we  are. 

2.  If  you  are. 

3.  If  Ihey  are. 

Singular. 

1.  Ifl  be. 

2.  If  you  be. 

3.  If  he  be. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  be. 

2.  If  you  be. 

3.  If  they  be. 


Singular. 

1.  Ifl  was. 

2.  If  you  were. 

3.  If  he  was. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  were. 

2.  If  you  were. 

3.  If  ihey  were. 


form?  sulvjun dive  form?  imper- 
fect, common  form?  subjunctive 
form  ?  perfect  ?  pluperfect  ?  firsl 
and  second  futures? 

Will  you  conjugate  love  in  the 
present  indicative  active?  imper- 
fect ?  perfect?  pluperfect?  first 
and  second  futures  ?  present 
passive  ?imperfec.t  ?  perfect  ?  plu- 
perfect ?  fir.st  and  second  futures  ? 
present  indicative  o\' to  be'i  imper- 
fect ?  |)erfect  ?  pluperfect  ?  first 
and  second  futures? 

Will  you  coiijiia:ate  love  Xhrowsh. 
each  person  of  the  present  indica- 
tive active?  passive?  the  neuter 
verb  to  he?  also  in  the  imperfect  ? 


perfect?  pluperfect?  first  and  sec- 
ond futures?  present  potential? 
imperfect?  perfect?  |)lui)erfecl? 
present  subjunctive?  in  botli 
forms?  perfect?  pluperfect?  first 
and  second  futures  ? 

What  is  the  present  infinitive 
active  of  love?  present  passive? 
present  o(  fo  he  ?  perfect  active  of 
lone  f  perfect  passive  ?  perfect  of 
lo  he?  present  participle  active  of 
love?  present  passive?  present  of 
to  h*^?  perfeL't  of  Inve?  perfect  of 
to  be?  compound  perfect  of  love? 
in  the  active?  in  the  passive  of /o 
hef 


TENSES. 


79 


Singular. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

If  I  loved. 
If  you  loved. 
If  he  loved. 

Plural 

1. 
2. 
3. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

If  we  loved. 
If  you  loved. 
If  they  loved. 

1, 
2, 
3. 

Suhjitnctive  Form. 

Singular. 
If  I  were  loved. 
If  you  were  loved. 
If  he  were  loved. 

Plural. 

If  we  were  loved. 
If  you  were  loved. 
If  Ihey  were  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  were. 

2.  If  you  were. 

3.  If  he  were. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  were. 

2.  If  you  were. 

3.  If  ihey  were. 


Tice  remaining  tenses  are  all  of  the  Comvio7i  Form. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  have  loved. 

2.  If  you  have  loved. 

3.  If  he  has  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  have  loved. 

2.  If  you  have  loved. 

3.  Ifuhey  have  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  had  loved. 

2.  If  you  had  loved. 

3.  If  he  had  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  had  loved. 

2.  If  you  had  loved. 

3.  If  ihey  had  loved. 


PERFECT  TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  havebeen  loved. 

2.  If  you   have  been 

loved. 

3.  If  he  has  been  loved. 

Plural 

1.  If  we    have   been 

loved. 

2.  If  you   have  been 

loved. 

3.  If  they  have  been 

loved. 

PLUPERFECT  TENSK. 

4 

Singular. 

1.  If  I  had  been  loved. 

2.  If  you  had  been 

ioved. 

3.  If  he  had  been  loved. 


1. 
2. 
3. 


If 


Plural. 
we    had    been 


loved.- 
If   you    had    been 

loved. 
If  they   had   been 

loved. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  have  been. 

2.  If  you  have  been. 

3.  If  he  has  been. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  have  been. 

2.  If  you  have  l»een. 

3.  If  they  have  been. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  had  been. 

2.  Ii"you  had  been. 

3.  If  he  had  been. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  had  been. 

2.  If  you  had  been, 

3.  If  they  had  been. 


In  what  voice  and  mood  is,  '  I 
love?"  "They.  love?"  -  They  are 
loved?"  ''Are  they  loved?"  'i  I 
do  love?"  What  is  the  force  ofdoj 
In  what  voice  and  mood  is,  "The 
man  loved?"  "He  has  loved?" 
''He  has  been  loved?"  "Plas  he 
been  loved?"  "She  had  loved?" 
"She  had  l)t'en  loved?"  "  We  shall 
love?"  "We  shall  be  loved?" 
"Shall  I  have  been  loved ?"  •'  May 
I   love?"     -'May   I    be    lOved  ?" 


"She  may  have  loved?"  "She 
may  have  been  loved?"  "If  I 
love?"  "If  he  be  loved?"  "If 
he  is  loved?"  "If  I  love?"  "If 
we  were  loved?"  "If  I  was 
loved  ?" 

In  what  tense  is,  "They  lov- 
ed ?"  "Ye  are  loved?"  "She  did 
love?"  "We  were  loved?"  "They 
shall  love  ?"  "  They  shall  be  lov 
ed?"  "I  may  be  loved?"  "If  she 
has  been  loved  ?" 


m 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I   shall   vr   will 

love. 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will 

love. 

3.  If  he  shall  or  vi^ill 

love. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  shall  or  will 

love. 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will 

love, 

3.  Ifthey  shall  or  will 

love. 


Singular. 

1.  Ifl  shall  have  loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  have 

loved, 

3.  If   he   shall    have 

loved. 


Plural. 

1.  If  we   shall   have 

loved, 

2.  If  you  shall  have 

loved. 

3.  If  ihey  shall  have 

loved. 


FIRST  FUTURE  TENSE. 

Singular. 

1.  Ifl  shall  or  will  be 

loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will 

be  loved. 

3.  If  he  shall  or  will 

be  loved. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we  shall  or  will 

be  loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will 

be  loved. 

3.  If  ihey  shall  or  will 

be  loved. 

SECOND  FUTURE  TENSE. 
Singular. 

1.  Ifl  shall  have  been 

loved. 

2.  If  you  shall  have 

been  loved. 

3.  If  he    shall    have 

been  loved. 

Plural. 
1.    If  we   shall   have 
been  loved. 
'2.    If  you  shall  have 

been  loved. 
3.  If  they  shall  have 
been  loved. 


Singular. 

1.  If  I  shall  or  will  be, 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will 

be. 

3.  If  he  shall  or  will 

be. 

Plural. 

1.  IX  we  shall  or  will 

be. 

2.  If  you  shall  or  will 

he. 

3.  If  ihey  shall  07  will 

be. 


Singular. 

1.  Ifl  shall  have  been. 

2.  If  you  shall  have 

been. 

3.  If  'he   shall  Jiave 

been. 

Plural. 

1.  If  we   shall   have 

been. 

2.  If  you  shall  have 

been. 

3.  If  they  shall  have 

been. 


In  what  number  and  person  is, 
"I  love?"  "We  love?"  "He 
does  love  ?"  "  The  man  did 
love?"  "The  men  were  loved?" 
^- If  he  love?"  'If  I  was?"  "If 
I  were  ?"  "  If  ye  have  been  ?" 
"  If  ye  have  loved  ?"  "  You  may 
be  loved  ?" 

Is  love^  as  ''  They  love,"  a  regu- 
lar or  irregular  verb?  why?  .'333, 
active  or  passive?  439,  What 
mood  is  it  in  ?  why?  452,  tense  ? 
why  ?  482,  number  ?  person  ? 
"What  does  ('ot-e agree  with?  Rule 
VII, 

Is  «re,  as,  "They  are,"  a  regu- 
lar or  irregular  verb?  why?  534. 
passive  or  neuter?  why?  450. 
What  mood  is  it  in?  why?  452. 
tense?  why?  482,  number?  per- 
son ?  Rule  for  its  agreement  ? 
VII. 


What  is  the  present  imperative 
oilove?  present  infinitive? 

What  mood  and  tense  is,  "  Love 
you?"  is  "To  have  been  loved?" 

Will  you  conjugate  learn  in  the 
present  indicative  active?  pas- 
sive? perfect  active?  perfect  pas- 
sive? present  potential  active? 
passive  ?  imperi'ect  active  ?  pas- 
sive? imperative  present  active? 
passive?  perfect  infinitive  active? 
passive?  present  subjunctive  ac- 
tive in  both  forms?  passive?  per- 
fect infinitive?  i'uture  active?  pas- 
sive"^ 

"What  kind  of  verb  (that  is,  regu- 
lar or  irregular),  what  voice,  mood, 
tense,  number,  and  person  is,  "t 
sing?"  "We  are  Jbrmed?"  "He 
is?"  "You  are  determined?"  "It 
rains  ?"  "  It  has  happened  ?" 
''  The  man  was  respected  ?"  " The 


TENSES. 


»1 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT   TENSE. 

Singular.     '  Singular. 

2.  Love  you,  or  do  you    2.  Be  ^ou  loved,  or  do    2. 
love.  you  be  loved. 

Plural.  Plural. 


Singular. 

Be  you,  or  do  you 
be. 

Plural. 


2.  Love  you,  or  do  you    2.  Be  you  loved,  or  do    2.  Be  you,  or  do  you 
love.  you  be  loved.  be. 


Pres.  To  love. 

Per/.  To  have  loved. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Prc8.  To  be  loved.  Pres.  To  be. 

Per/.   To    have    been     Per/.  To  have  been, 
loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  Loving.  Prcs.  Being  loved.  Pros.  Being. 
Per/.  Loved,  Per/.  Loved.  Per/  Been. 
Compound  Per/  Hav-  Compound  Per/  Hav-  Compound  Per/  Hav- 
ing loved.  ing  been  loved.                 ing  been. 

536.  For  the  benefit  of  those  who  wish  to  retain  the  pronoun  thouy 
in  the  conjugation  of  verbs,  the  following  synopsis  is  given.  The 
])upil  can  take  it  separately,  or  be  taught  it  in  connection  with  the 
other  persons  of  the  verb,  by  substituting  thou  for  you,  in  the  forego- 
ing conjugation. 

Si/nopsis  with  Tjiou. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Free.  Thou  lovest. 
Imp.  Thou  lovedst. 
Per/  Thou  hast  loved. 
Plup.  Thou  hadst  lov- 
ed. 

1  Fut.  Thou  shall  or 

wilt  love. 

2  Fvt.  Thou  wilt  have 

loved. 


Thou  art  loved. 

Thou  wast  loved. 

Thou  hast  been  loved. 

Thou  hadst  been  lov- 
ed. 

Thou  shalt  or  wilt  be 
loved. 

Thou  wilt  have  been 
loved. 


Thou  art. 
Thou  wast. 
Thou  hast  been. 
Thou  hadst  been. 

Thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Thou  wilt  have  been. 


boys  did  study?"  "If  he  im- 
prove?" "Unless  he  repent?" 
"Although  she  be  disappointed?" 
"  He  may  depart  ?"  "  Depart 
now?"  "To  love?"  "To  sing?" 
"To  be  sung?"  "To  rejoice?" 
"To  have  wept?"  "To  have  been 
seen?"     "  To  have  been  found  ?" 

Will  you  give  the  synoj-sis  of 
love  joined  with  thou  through  the 
indicative  active?  passive?  neu- 
ter verb  to  he  ? 

Will  you  name  the  synopsis  of 


learn  in  the  first  person  in  the  ac- 
tive voice,  through  each  mood  and 
tense?  Will  you  repeat  the  two 
tenses  of  the  infinitive  and  the 
three  participles?  Synopsis  of 
honor  in  like  manner  through  the 
jiassive?  also  the  synopsis  "of  the 
verb  to  be?  Give  the  synopsis  of 
desire  in  the  active  like  love;  in 
the  passive  :  verb  to  he  ;  lirst  per- 
son plural  active;  passive;  to  he; 
third  person  active;  passive;  to 
be. 


ENGLISH    OKAMMAH. 


537.  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 


Pre*.  Thou  may  St  or 

canst  love. 
Imp.    Thou     mightst, 

couldst,  wouldst, 

or  shouUlst  love. 
Per/.  Thou   niayst  or 

canst  have  loved. 
Phtp.   Thou    mio;lust, 

couldst,  wouids't, 

or  shouldst  have 

loved. 


Thou  mayst  or  canst 

be  loved. 
Thou  inightst, couldst, 

M'ouId-*t,yrsliouldst 

be  loved. 
Thou  niayst  or  canst 

have  bc-en  loved. 
Thou  inightst, couldst, 

would!>t,o/'shouldst 

have  been  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Thou  mayst  or  canst 

be. 
Thou  nn'ghtst, couldst, 

wouldat,  orshouldst 

be. 
Thou  mayst  or  canst 

have  been. 
Thou  mighlst, couldst, 

wouldst,  'j>'shouldst 

have  beeu. 


Prea.  If  thou  lovest. 
Imp.  If  thou  lovedst. 

Prea.  If  thou  love. 
Imj).  If  thou  loved. 

Perf.  If  thou  hast  lov- 
ed. 

Plup.  If  thou  hadst 
loved. 

1  Fat.  If  ihou  shalt  or 

wilt  love. 

2  Fat.   If  thou   shalt 

have  loved. 


538.   Common  Form. 

If  thou  art  loved. 
If  thou  wast  loved. 

539.  Subjunctive  Form. 
If  tlion  be  loved. 
If  thou  Wert  loved. 

540.   Common  Form. 

If  thou  hast  been  lov- 
ed. 

Ifthou  hadst  been  lov- 
ed. 

If  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be 
loved. 

If  thou  shalt  have 
been  loved. 


Ifthou  art. 
Ifthou  wast. 


Ifthou  be. 
Ifthou  wert. 


Ifthou  hast  been. 
Ifthou  hadst  been. 

If  thou   slialt   or  wilt 

be. 
If    thou     shalt     have 

been. 


Interrogative  Form. 
541.  INDICATIVE  PRESENT. 


I. 

2. 
3. 

Singular, 

Do  I  love? 
Do  you  love  ? 
Does  he  love? 

Plural. 

Slugnhtr. 

1.  Am  I  loved? 

2.  Are  you  loved  ? 

3.  Is  he  loved  ? 

Plural. 

Singular. 

1.  Am  I? 

2.  Are  you  ? 

3.  Is  he? 

Plural. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

Do  we  love? 
Do  you  love? 
Do  tliey  love? 

1.  Are  we  loved  ? 

2.  Are  you  loved  ? 
.3.  Are  they  loved? 

1.  Are  we  ? 

2.  Are  you  ? 

3.  Are  ihey  ? 

th 

542.  You  will  fii 
e  tenses  of  the 

:ul, 
su 

on  examination  of  the 
bjunf'.tive  are  in  every 

foregoing  conjugation, 
respect  similar  to  the 

that 
cor- 

What  mood  does  the  suiijunc- 
tive  roeiuble  in  its  teri'ses?  512. 

Wiuit  exceptions  ?  :yl2. 

How  <loes  the  second  future  dif- 
fer ?  542. 

Will  you  explain  the  diflereuce  ? 
542. 


What  is  the  sign  of  the  su  injunc- 
tive mood  .'  51(5.  fs  it  always  ex- 
pressed ?  ^)[l.  Give  an  example. 
542.  Will  you  supply  t!ie  con- 
junct ion  ? 


544. 


T£Nsiils.    .  S^ 

regpondin^  ones  of  the  indic«tive,  except  the  following,  namely  :  the 
present  and  Imperfect  of  the  verb  to  be ,-  the  present  and  imperfect  of 
the  passive;  the  present  and  the  second  future  active.  The  last,  how- 
ever,  corresponds  in  termination,  but  not  in  formation  Amonjr  the 
exceptions  should  be  reckoned  the  use  of  the  conjunction  if.  There 
are  instances,  however,  of  the  subjunctive  form,  when  no  conjunction 
is  expressed,  but  in  all  such  cases  it  is  plainly  understood  :  as,  "  Were 
I  to  go,  he  would  not  follow;"  "Had  he  known  me,  he  would  have 
treated  me  diflerenily ;"  that  is,  "If  1  were  to  go,"  and,  ■' Tf  he  had 
known. '     Examples  of  this  description  are  conjugated  as  follows  ; 

SUBJUNCTIVE  FORM. 

643.    IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  Were  I.  1.  Were  we. 

2.  Were  you.  2.  Were  yon. 

3.  Were  he.  3.  "Were  they. 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 
Singular.  '  Pluraf. 

1.  Had  I  loved.  1.  Had  we  loved. 

2.  Had  you  loved.  2.  Had  you  loved. 

3.  Had  he  loved.  3.  Had  they  loved. 
The  second   person  singular  of  all  verbs=>^  formerly  (1)  ended 

in  St;  as,  ''Thou    hast,"    '-Thou  wast,"  etc.     This  form  is  siill  re- 
tamed  l)y  that  respectable  class  of  persons  denominated  (2)  Friends 
and  in  the  Sacred  (3)  Scriptures,  (ti)  ' 

54.'!.  Eth,  for  the  termination  of  the  third  person  sins-nlar,  obtained 
(4)  very  generally  till  within  a  recent  (r))  period,  especially  on  urave 
(6j  and  didactic  (7)  subjects:  as,  "  He  that  hntli  ears  to  hear,  let  him 
huar;-^  "Simple  multiplication  teacheth  to  repeat,"  etc.  Jiut  the  cus- 
tom of  the  present  day  is  det-idedly  (S)  against  the  usage.  (0) 

54G.  The  Scriptures  abound  (10)  with  instances  of  the   use  of  the 

Will  you  conjiigHte  the  verb  ^f)  By  whom  is  this  termination 
he  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  im-  still  retained  ?  544.  In  what  writ- 
perfect  tense,  without   its    usual  injrs?544. 

sign  ?     In  like  manner  conjugate  Meaning  of  Sacred  Scriptures? 

/ouc  in  the  j)luperlect  ?  f)44. 

Will  you  conjugate  love  in  the  What  form  of  the  third  person 

present  active,  interrogative  form?  singular   ol)lained     till    recently '* 

passive?  neuter  verb  ^o  Ae?  54.').     Give  an  example.  51-5. 

In  what  voi«'e,  mood,  tense,  Meaning  of  obtained?  Of  re- 
number,   and    person    is,    "Do    I  cent^  545. 

study?"  ''Did  sheistudy?"  ''Were  On  what  subjects  was  the  ter- 

they  dismissed  ?"     "Are  we?"  mination  eth  u>ed  in  writing  ?  545. 

In  what  did  the  second   person  Meaning  of  oraoeJ  of  didactic  f 

Singularof  all  verbs  formerly  end?  545. 

544.     (live  an  example.  .')44.  In  what  writings  do  we  find  ye 

Meaning  oC  formerf,/  y  .54  4.  used  fir  you  ?  54(i. 

*  Excpi»ting  art. 

(1)  buiiio  time  ago.  (2)  Called.  (3)  The  Rible.  (4)  Prevailed.  (5)  Late.  (6)  Serious. 

(<)  Aljouudiug  lu  precepts  or  iuatructive.    (8)  Positively.    (9)  Use.    (10)  Have 


84 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


pronoun  ye  for  yoxt,:   as,  "Ye  are  the  salt  of  the  earth;"  but  it  is 
scarcely  to  be  met  with  in  any  standard  works  of  modern  date.. 

547.  'the  following  conjugation  accords  with  the  ancient  usage  of 
the  verb. 

INDICATIVE  PRESENT. 

Singular.  Singular. 

1.  I  am  loved.  1.  I  am. 

2.  Thou  art  loved.  2.  Thou  art. 

3.  He  is  loved.  3.  He  is. 


Singular. 

I  love. 

Thou  lovest. 

He  loveth  or  loves. 


Plural. 

1.  We  love. 

2.  Ye  or  you  love. 

3.  They  love. 


Plural. 

We  are. 

Ye  or  you  are. 


Plnral. 

1.  We  are  loved^. 

2.  Ye  or  you  are  loved. 

3.  They  are  loved.  3.  They  are. 

548.  j^*"For  a  further  illustration  of  these  obsolete  conjugations, 
the  learner  is  referred  to  those  treatises  on  grammer  in  our  schools, 
which  profess  to  furnish  him  with  a  sure  and  infallible  guide  to  the 
true  and  proper  use  of  the  English  language. 

RULE  VI. 

The  nominative  case  governs  the  verb  in  number  and  person. 

EULB  VII. 

jx  verb  must  agree  with  its  nominative  case  in  number  and  person. 

RULE  VIII. 
Active-transitive  verbs  govern  the  objective  case. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 
"  William  was  admired  for  his  prudence."" 

549.  William  is  a  proper  koun,  of  the  third  person,  singular 
NUMBER,  MASCULINE  GENDER,  and  in  the  NOMINATIVE  CASE  to  ioas  ad- 
mired, agreeably  to  Rule  VI. 

Was  admired  is  a  regular  passive  verb,  from  the  verb  to  admire — 
*^Pres.  admire;  Imp.  admired;  Perf.  part,  admired.  1,  I  was  admired; 
2,  You  were  admired;  3,  He  or  William  was  admired" — made  in  the 
indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense,  third  person,  singular  number, 
and  agrees  with  William^  according  to  Rule  VII. 

For  is  a  preposition. 


Is  it  common  in  modern  works  ? 
546. 

Will  you  conjugate  love  in  the 
present  active,  according  to  the 
ancient  usage  ?  547.  passive?  neu- 
ter verb  to  he  ? 

In  what  number  and  person  is 
"He hath?''  "He  hates?"  "Thou 
lovest?"  "Thou  hast?"  ''He 
learneth  ?  "  "  Ye  learn  ?  "  "  He  re- 
joicelh?"  "Thou  art  rejoiced?" 
"Thou  art?"  "He  weepeth?" 
"Addition  teachelh?"  "He  that 
hath  ears  ?  "  "  He  that  sinneth  ?  " 
"  Thou  loved?t  ?  "  "  Thou  mightst, 


couldst,  wouldst,  or  shouldst  have 
lamented  ?" 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  agree- 
ment of  the  verb?  rule  for  the 
nominative?  rule  by  which  verbs 
govern  the  objective  case  ? 

"William  was  admired  for  his 
prudence."  Will  you  parse  Wil- 
Was  admired?  549. 
His?    549.    Prudence? 


Ham?    549. 
For?  549. 
549. 

What  is 
How  lormed?  510 
wiiVeci  regular  ?  533 

Why  is  for  a  preposition  ?  246 


a  passive  verb?  444. 
Why  is   ad- 


VERBS.  85 

Iti9  is  a  PERSONAL  PRONOtTN,  Of  the  THIRD  PERSON,  SINGULAR  NUM- 
BER, MASCULINE  GENDER,  and  agrees  with  William,  according'  to  Rule 
V — '^JVom.  he ;  Poas.  his  " — made  in  the  possessive  case,  and  governed 
hy  prudence,  by  Rule  I. 

Prudence  is  a  COMMON  NOUN,  of  the  third  person,  siNGUL^fR  number, 
NEUTER  gender,  OBJECTIVE  CASE,  and  govcmed  by /or,  byl^luLE  X. 

EXERCISES    IN  PARSING  CONTINUED. 
1. 

''John  was  applauded  for  liis  "The  girl  was  ridiculed  by  her 
eloquence."  companions." 

"The  king  was  crowned  at  West-  "Susan  was  respected  for  her 
minster  Abbey."  virtuous  conduct." 

".Thomas  has  been  esteemed."  "James  will^be  rewarded  by  his 

"  The  business  will  be  regulated."  instructor."   ' 

2, 
"  We  may  be  esteemed."  "  The  task  must  be  performed." 

"He  might  have  been  promoted."     "  We  should  not  (1)  be  easily  (1) 
"William  would    have   been  de-  <lisheortened    in    a  good 

throned."  cause." 

"Justice  may  have  been  stayed." 

"  If  he  be  learned.'''' 

550.  If  is  a  COPULATIVE  conjunction. 

Be  learned  is  a  regular  passive  verb,  from  the  verb  to  learn — 
"  Pres.  learn  ;  Imper.  learned  ,*  Perf.  part,  learned.  1 ,  If  I  be  learned  ; 
2,  If  you  be  learned;  3,  If  he  be  learned" — made  in  the  subjunc- 
tive aiooD,  subjunctive  form,  present  tense,  third  person,  sin- 
gular number,  and  agrees  with  he,  according  to  Rule  VII. 

exercises   in  syntax  continued. 
1. 
"If  John  be  rewarded.'^  "Although   you    will   be    disap- 

"If  I  am  noticed."  pointed." 

"  Unless  he  be  punished."  "  If  the  man  had  been  elected." 

"Although   they  are  respected."     "  Except  he  repent." 
"  Columbus  discovered  America."     "  Susan  assisted  the  little  girl." 
"America     was    discovered    by     "The  little  girl  was  assisted  by 

Columbus."  Susan." 

"John  woun<!ed  his  brother."  "  Pain  follows  pleasure." 

"John's  brother  was  wounded  bv  "Pleasure  is  followed  by  pain." 
him." 

2. 

"  An  obedient  son  is  deservedly    "  Unless  great  labor  had  been  be- 

respected.by  his  friends."  stowed  on  William,  he  would 

"  An  idle  boy  will  be  punished."  have    disappointed    the    ex- 

"  Without  knowledge,  a  man  is  pectations  of  his  parents." 

commonly  (1)  despised."  "  He  will  not   (1)  mind  without 

corporal  punishment." 

Why  is  hia  a  pronoun?  parse  if?  550.    Be   learned"?  550. 

Will  you  now  parse  the  remain-  Why  in   the  subjunctive  mood? 

ing  exercises?  456. 
"  If  he  be  learned."     Will  you 

(1)  Adverb. 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


3. 


'•  The  boy  who  visited  me  in 
Septemher.  died  in  the  city  of 
Richmond." 

**  The  inah  whom  I  found,  perish- 
ed in  a  storm  of  snow." 

4 

"  I  found  (1)  John  nnd  William 
(2)  in  the  garden  with  iheir 
father  and  mother.  (2) 


"  They  that  seek  knowledge  will 

find  it." 
"Tliai  lion  which  was  exhibited 
in  ihi.**  town  has  been  killed 
•    by  his  keeper." 

**  I   have   asjisted    him   and   his 

sister  in  n)any  difficulties,  to 
no  (3)  purpose." 


XLVI.  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

551.  Irregular  verbs  are  those  which  do  not  form  their  imperfect 
tense  and  perfect  participle  by  adding  to  the  present  tense  fd  or  d  only 
when  the  verb  ei.ds  in  e;  as, 

Pr^/f.   Tense.  Imperf.  Tense.  Perf.  Participle, 

Go.  Went,  Gone. 

Begin,  Began,  Begun. 

LIST  OF  IRREG.ULAR  VERBS. 
Those  marked  r  admit  likewise  a  regular  form. 

TperffxA.       Perf.  or  Pass. 
Part. 


Present. 

Imperfect: 

Perf.  or  Pass. 
Part. 

Present. 

Abide, 

abode, 

abode. 

Cast, 

Am, 

was, 

been. 

(  atch. 

Arise, 

arose, 

arisen. 

Cliide, 

Awake, 

awoke,  r. 

awaked. 

Choose, 

Bear,  to 
bring  forth, 

1  bare. 

born. 

Cleave,  to 
stick  or 

Bear,  to 
carry. 

■  bore, 

borne. 

adhere. 
Cleave,  to 

Bejit, 

bent. 

beaten,  beat. 

split, 

Begin, 

began, 

begun. 

Cling, 

Beud, 

bent. 

bent. 

Clothe, 

Bereave, 

bereft,  r. 

bereft,  r. 

Come, 

Befieech, 

besought, 

besought. 

Cost, 

J5id, 

bid,  bade. 

bidden,  bid. 

Crow, 

Bind, 

bound, 

bound. 

Creep, 

Bite, 

bit. 

bitten,  bit. 

Cut, 

Bleed, 

bled. 

bled. 

Dare,  to 

Blow, 

blew, 

blown. 

venture. 

Break, 

broke. 

broken. 

Dare.  tf> 

Bned, 

brfd, 

bred. 

challtUMe^ 

Bring, 

bnmnht, 

brought. 

U»-al, 

Build, 

built, 

built. 

Dig, 

Burrtt, 

burnt. 

buret. 

Do, 

Buy, 

bought, 

bought. 

Di.iw, 

} 


cast, 

caught,  r. 
chid, 
chose. 

cast. 

caught,  r. 
chidden, chi 
chosen. 

rcgvXar. 

clove  or  cle 

ft,  cleft,  cloven 

clung, 
clothed, 
came, 
.cost, 
crew,  r. 
crept, 
cut, 

clung. 

dad.  r. 

come. 

coat. 

crowed. 

crept. 

cut.    . 

durst, 

dared. 

r. 

dealt,  r. 
dug,  r. 
dill, 
drew, 

dealt,  r. 
dug.  r. 
done, 
diawn. 

Why  iu  the  tubjunciive  form  ? 
46.3. 

Will  you  parse  the  remaining 
exercises  in  these  lessons  ? 

XLVI.  When  is  a  verb  called 
irregular?  651. 


Will  you  name  the  present  and 
imperl'ect  tenses,  also  the  perfect 
participles  of  (jo  ?  hcgiuf  <xmf 
an\s&,  ?  awake?  bear  (to  carry)? 
bidf  hitef  break  ?  chtiosef  dot 
driitkt  eat  f forget  f  have?  k?ioionf 


(1)  Irregular  verb.    (2)  For  William  tind  mother  f^i>p\y  JiixXfi  XI.  (3)  Adjective. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


87 


Present. 


InxperffjcU 


Drive, 

drove. 

Drink, 

drank, 

Dwell, 

dwelt. 

Eat, 

eat  or  ate, 

Fall, 

fell. 

Feed, 

fed, 

Feel, 

felt. 

Fight, 

fought, 

Find, 

found, 

Fleo, 

fled, 

Fling, 

flung, 

Fly, 

flew, 

Forget, 

forgot. 

Forsake, 

forsook, 

Freeze, 

froze. 

Get, 

got. 

Gild, 

gilt,  r. 

Gird, 

girt,  r. 

Give, 

gave, 

Go, 

went. 

Grave, 

graved, 

Grind, 

ground. 

Grow, 

grew, 

Have, 

had. 

Hiinp, 

hung,  r. 

Hear, 

lieard. 

Hew, 

hewed. 

Hide, 

hid, 

Hit. 

hit, 

H.»ld, 

held, 

Hurt, 

hiirt. 

Keep, 

kejit, 

Knit, 

knit,  r. 

Know, 

knew. 

Lt\de, 

laded. 

Lay, 

laid. 

Lead, 

led. 

Leave, 

left, 

Lend, 

lent, 

Let, 

let, 

Lie,  to  lie 
down, 

}  lay, 

Load, 

loaded, 

Loae, 

lost, 

Make, 

made. 

Jleet, 

met, 

Mow, 

mowed, 

I'-iy, 

paid, 

I'ut, 

put, 

Fead, 

read. 

Rend, 

rent. 

Rid, 

rid, 

IHde, 

rode. 

Ring, 

rung,  rang. 

Rise, 

rose. 

Rive, 

rived. 

Run, 

ran. 

Saw, 

sawed, 

Per/,  or  Pats. 

Part. 
driven, 
drunk, 
dwelt,  r. 
eaten, 
fallen, 
fed. 
felt, 
fought, 
fdund.  .'j' 
fled, 
flung, 
flown, 
f  forgotten, 
I     forgot, 
foreiiken. 
frozen, 
got.  gotten.* 
gilt.  r. 
girt.  r. 
given, 
gone, 
graven,  r. 
ground, 
grown, 
had. 
hung.  r. 
heard.  , 

hewn.  J*, 
hidden,  hid. 
hit. 
held, 
hurt, 
kept, 
kuir.  r. 
kixnvn. 
laden, 
laid, 
led. 
left, 
lent, 
let. 

lain. 

laden,  r, 

lost. 

made. 

mot. 

mown,  r. 

paid. 

put. 

read, 

rent. 

rid. 

rodeyridden.f 

rang. 

risen. 

riven. 

run. 

sawn."  r. 


Preient. 

Say, 

See, 

Seek, 

Sell, 

Send, 

Set, 

Shake, 

Shape, 

Shave, 

Shear, 

Shed, 

Shine, 

Show, 

Shoe, 

Shoot, 

Shrink, 

Shred, 

Shut, 

Sing, 

Sink, 

Sit, 

Slay, 

Sleep, 

Slide, 

Sling, 

Slink, 

Slit, 

Smite, 

Sow, 

^  i)eak. 

Speed, 

Spend,  .' 

Spill, 

Spin, 

Spit, 

Split, 

Spread, 

Spring 

Stand, 
Steal, 
Stick, 
Sting, 
Stink, 

Stride, 

Strike, 

String, 
Strive. 
St  row  or 
Btrew, 
Swear, 
Sweat. 
Swtdled, 
Swim, 
Swing, 
Take, 


Imperfect. 

.  said, 
saw, 
sought, 
sold, 
sent, 
set, 
shook, 

shaped, 

shaved, 
sheared, 
shed, 
shone,  r. 
showed, 
shod, 
shot, 
shrunk, 
shred, 
shut, 

auai£,  sang, 
sunk,  sank, 
sat, 
slew, 
slep^ 
slid, 
slungy 
slunk, 
slit.  r. 
smote, 
sowed, 
spoke, 
sped, 
sjjent, 
spilt,  r. 
spun, 
spit,  spat, 
split, 
spread, 
f  sprung, 

stood, 

stole, 

stuck, 

stung, 

stunK, 
[  strode  or 
I      Mtrid, 

struck, 

strung, 

strove. 
1^  St  rowed  or 
'     strewed, 

swore, 

swft.  r. 

swelled. 

swtini,  swam,  swum. 

swung,  swung. 

took,  taken. 


Perf.  or  Pata. 

Part. 
said, 
seen, 
sought, 
sold, 
sent, 
set. 
shaken. 

{shaped, 
shapen.  r. 
shaven, 
shorn, 
shed, 
shone,  r. 
shown, 
shod, 
shot, 
shrunk, 
shred. 
Bhut. 
Bung. 
sunk, 
sat. 
slain, 
slept, 
slidden. 
slung, 
slunic. 

slito/'slitted, 
smitten, 
sown.  r. 
spoken, 
sped, 
spent, 
spilt,  r. 
spun. 

s])it,  spitten.J 
split,  r. 
spread. 

I  sprung. 

stood. 

stolen. 

stuck. 

stung. 

stunk. 

1^  stridden. 

(  struck  or 
(     stricken. 

strung. 

striven. 
(  slrowitjfltrow- 
i     ed,  strewed. 

sworn. 

swet.  r. 

swollen,  r. 


lie  (lo  lie  down)?  mowf  ri$e?  seeT     throto?  toeavef  von'U  ? 


*  Gotten  is  nearly  ohsoleto.    Its  compound,  forgoUr.n.  is  still  in  good  n». 
t  Ridden  is  nearly  obsolete.  %  Spitten  U  nearly  obeol«te. 


88 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


Prcsml. 

Imperfect. 

Ftrf.  or  Fuss. 
Part. 

Teach, 

taught, 

tawglit. 

Tear, 

tore, 

torn. 

Toll, 

told, 

told. 

Think, 

thought. 

thought. 

Thrive, 

throve,  r. 

thriven.     • 

Throw, 

threw, 

thrown. 

Thrust, 

thrust, 

thnipt. 

Tread, 

trod. 

trodden. 

Wax, 

waxed. 

waxen,  r. 

Present. 

Iinperjecl. 

Per  f.  or  Pass 

Pari. 

Wear, 

wore, 

worn. 

Weave, 

wove. 

woven. 

Weej), 

wept, 

wept. 

Win, 

won, 

won. 

Wind, 

wound. 

wound. 

Work. 

wrought, 

wrought  or 
work(>d. 

Wring, 

wrung, 

wrung. 

Write, 

wrote. 

written. 

5r)3.  We  say,  "  I  have  seen,"  "  I  had  seen,"  and  "  I  am  seen," 
using  the  participle  seen,  instead  of  tlie  verb  saw:  hence, 

Note  VI.  We  should  use  participles  only  after  have  and  /tad,  and 
the  verb  to  he. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  John  has  loritten  his  copy."'' 

554.  Bos  written  is  an  ibrroui^u  active-transitive  verb,  from 
the  verb  to  write — "  Prcn.  write  ;  Impcrf.  wrote  ;  Per/,  part,  written. 
1,  I  have  written  ;  2,  You  have  written  ;  3,  He  or  Jokyi  has  written" 
— found  in  the  inpicativk  mood,  pkufkct  tense,  third  person, 
si.voiiLAR  NUMBER,  aud  agrees  with  John^  by  Rule  VII. 

John.,  copy,  and  his,  are  parsed  a^s  before. 

EXERCISES    IN   SYNTAX    CONTINUED. 
1. 

"  Job  has  struck  John." 

*'John  has  been  struck  by  Job." 

*'  The  nien  caught  the  thfef  in  the 

tavern." 
"The   thief  was   caught   by   the 

men  in  the  tavern." 
"A   wise  son    will  make  a  glad 

father." 
"  The  act  was  done  by  Wiliam." 


"James  found  his  little  brother  in 

the  boat."  ;. 

"The     instructor     makes     good 

pens." 
"  The  farmer  ploughs  tlte  ground 

in  spring." 
"  I  may   spend   my   time   in   the 

country." 


Will  you  correct,  in  accordance 
with  Note  VI,  «he  following  ex- 
amples froin  \\\c  list  above? 
"John  has  wrote." 
"  He  done  it  well." 
"The  sun  has  rose." 
"The   sun   risen   yesterday  in  a 

cloud." 
"  I  see  him  yesterday." 
"  He  has  did  his  task." 
"The  birds  have  Hew  away." 
"  The  birds  flown  or  flew." 
"The     post    is     drove    into    the 

ground." 
"  He  began  or  begun  to  write." 
"The  task  is  began." 
"I  had  went  with  him," 
"  My  brother  has  not  spoke." 
"  The  cloth  is  wove." 


"The  boys  run  swiftly." 

"  The  thief  has  stole  my  watch." 

"  His  copy  was  wrote  well." 

"  He  was  smote  on  his  cheek." 

"  John  was  awoke  by  the  noise." 

"'My  father  has  came." 

"  He  come  yesterday." 

"  Mary     has     chose     the     bettor 

part." 
"  He  drunk  to  excess." 
"  The  book  was  gave  to  me." 
"  His  friends  have  forsook  him." 
"  He    was    not    forsook     by    liis 

children." 
"  The    laborer    worked    for    me 

forty  days." 
"  He  was  took  and  bound." 
"  John    has    written    his    copy." 

Will  you  parse  *'  has  written  ?" 


EXERCISES. 


89 


2. 

"John  is  nt  home."  "  He  abode  in  pesrce." 

"  Riifus  rode  into  ihe  country."  "  They  would  be  cruel." 

"The  sun  will  t^hine."  "  We  may  have  been  negligent." 

"The  iliief  was  confined  in  jail."  "The    boys    should    have    been 

"The  horj^e  ran  with  great  vio-  studious." 

lencc."  "  William  was  in  town." 

3. 

"  If  he  will  assist  me,  I  shall  be  faults,    still     he    would    not 

much  (I)  obliged  to  him."  recompense  me." 

"  If  he  be  virtuous,  jhen  he  will  "  I  will  write  him,  lest  he  neglect 

be  happy."  my  b^l^iness." 

"If  he  is  happy,  then  I  am  con-  "Should  1  be  disappointed,  I  shall 

leiUed,m.  despair." 

"  Had  he  inentioned  that  circum-  "Unless  he  repent,  he  will  not  be 

stance,  I  should  have  avoided  pardoiuul." 

my  present  calamities."  "Were  I*  in  your  place,  I  would 

"  Although  he  acknowledged  his  relieve  him." 

4. 

"Thon  hast  benefited  me."  "  Hath  he  many  advisers?" 

"Ye  make  no  pretensions."  "  Ye  do  a  ways  err."' 

'•  This  doctrme  hiith  no  followers."  "Thou  shalt  surely  die  ?" 

"  If  thou  love  me."  "If  thou   hadst  obeyed  me,  thou 

"If  thou  an  more  comfortable,  I  wouldst  not  have  been  dis- 

heartjly' rejoice."  appointed." 
"Dostjhou  hear  me  ?" 

^  5.  ,         ,         , 

"If  Thomas,  who  Is  at  school,  re-  imposed  was  performed  with 

turn  in    season,   I    will  visit  reluctance." 

you."  "The   measure  which   he  adopts 

"The    lioya  whom  I  admonished  will  succeed." 

have  reformed."  "  I  have  known  a  little  child  that 

"The  man  whose  life  was  in  dan-  exhibited  the  prudence  of  ma- 

ger  returned   in  safety."  ture  years." 

"  The  task  which  the  instructor 

XLVir.     GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

555.  "When  I  say,  "John  begins  to  read,"  to  read  is  a  verb  in  the 
infinitive  "mood  ;  and  it-follows,  as  you  perceive,  the  verb  begins: 
hence  we  say  that  it  is  governed  by  betjhift. 

"  He  IS  beginning  to  read."  Here  the  infinitive  follows  the  parti- 
ciple hffjinnhKj ;   it  is,  therefore,  governed   by  her/inning. 

"He  is  eajjer  to  learn."  Here  the  infinitive  follows  the  adjective 
tarjrr  ;  we.  therefore,  say  that  it  is  governed   hy  emjer. 

»     Why  is  luiH  writlKu.  an  irregular  "  He     is    beginning    to    read." 

verb  <    51.').    Why    active  ?     43i.».  Wlint    governs    to    read  in    tiiis 

Wliv  transitive  .'  4-l'J.  case?  5-')5. 

XLVlI.  "John  begins  to  read."  "He  is  eager  to  learn."   Wliot 

In    what    mood    is   tu    read ^  5-')5.  governs    to    ham    'n\    thi.i    case? 

Whv?    \l'^.    By  whnt   is  it  gov-  S.-JO.  Why.'  555. 
eriied?  5.05.  WhyV  555. 

(1)  Advoxb.  *  S«o  M:j. 

b 


90  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

««  He  has  an  opportunity  to  learn."     Here  the  infinitive    to  learn 
is  governed  by  the  noun  opjjorhmihj,  because  it  follows  the  noun. 

In   like  manner,  the  infinitive  may  be  governed  by  pronouns;  as, 
"  There  is  a  fine  opportunity  for  him  to  learn  :"  hence, 

RULE  XII. 
The  ivfnitive  mood  may  he  governed  by  verbs,  participles,  adjectives, 
nouns,  and  pronouns. 
EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"  James  begins  to  learn.'''' 
506.   To  learn  is  a  regular  transitive  verb—"  Pres.  learn  ;  Impcrf. 
learned  ;  Perf. part,  learned"— made  in  the  infinitive  mood,  present 
tense,  and  governed  by  begins,  agreeably  to  Rule  XII. 
James  and  begins  are  parsed  as  before. 

EXERCISES    IN    SYNTAX    CONTINUED. 

"  George  desires  to  learn."  "  A    knowledge   of    the   r»les   of 

"  He  IS  eager  to  learn."  grammar^  teaches  us  to  wnte 

"  He  has  a  desire  to  study."  correctly.  ,      ■     ,  , 

"  It  seems  to  please  John."  "He  should  seek  to  obtain  knowU 

"  William  has  come  to  see  us."  edge." 

"  They  are  determined  to  excel."     ''  We  may  be  taught  to  wnte,  read, 

and  spell. 
Omission  of  to,  the  tisval  sign  of  the  iH^iitive. 
''  John  saw  the    man  strike  (I)       "  The  tutor  bade  him  do  it." 

the  bov  "  "  The  soldiers  dare  not  rebel." 

''  The  instructor   made  him  sub-       "  My  uncle  let  the  boys   play  m 

jy,it )'  the  garden. ' 

"They  need  not  proceed  in  such     "See     (2)     the     blind     beggar 

haste."  dance." 

"  I  heard  the  clock  strike." 

Note  VII.  The  infinitive  mood  is  sometimes  governed  by  conjunc 
tions  or  adverbs  :=as,  "The  summit  of  a  mountam  so  high  as  to  be 

invisible."  ^^^  „„ 

EXAMPLES. 

"  They  are  about  to  (3)  depart."      ;'  He    desired  no  more   (4)  than 
«'  He  is  wise  enough  (3J  to  study."  (5)  to  know  his  lesson.       , 


XLVIII. 
557.   We  have  before  seen  that  participles  partake  of  the  nature  of 

»He    has    an    opportunity    to  What,  then,  may  be  regarded  as 

learn."  What  part  of  speech  gov-  a  rule  for  the  government  of  the 

erns   to   learn    in   this   example?  infinitive  ?Xil.                    ,           ,, 

Knr.    whxr'?  'i'^5  "  James  beguis  to  learn.        Will 

—  '^opportunity    for    him    to  you    parse   to' learn?   James?   he- 

learn."    What  does  the  infinitive  f/m*  ?  556.                 ,  ,  .on 

here  follow  ?  By  what,  then,  is  it  Is  to  ever  omitted  ?  4b0. 

governed  ?  555.  "                                             _______ 


„<^^^ssssjt^sfs  [i^i^«rsi'="s^^Kf 


PARTICIPLE^.  91 

two  parts  of  speech,  namely:  verbs  and  adjectives.  One  point  of  re- 
semblance which  participles  have  to  adjectives,  is  in  referring  to 
some  noun  in  the  sentence  in  which  they  are  used:  as,  "The  sun  is 
setting;"  here  the  participle  setting  is  said  to  refer  to  the  noun  sun: 
hence, 

KUIiE  XIII. 

Participles  refer  to  notms. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  The  wind  is  rising^ 

558.  Rising  is  a  present  active  participle,  from  the  irregular 
verb  to  rise — "  Free,  rise  ;  Imp.  rose  ;  Perf.part.  risen  " — and  it  refers 
to  wind,  according  to  Rule  XIIT. 

exercises  in  syntax  continued. 
1. 
"The  moon  is  setting."  "  Mary  was  playing." 

*'The  sun  is  rising."  "I  have  been  writing." 

"The  trees  are  growing."         "  I  found  him  crying." 
"John  was  riding."  "I  left  him  rejoicing." 

PARTICIPIAL  ADJECTIVES. 
"  The  rising  sun  cheers  us." 

559.  jRising  is  a  participial  adjective,  from  the  verb  to  rise — "Pres. 
rise  ;  Imji.  rose;  Per/,  part,  risen" — and   belongs  to  aim,  by  Rule  IV. 

exercises  in  syntax  continued. 

2. 

"The  setting  sun  reminds  us  of    "We    view  with    pleasure    the 

declining  years."  twinkling  stars." 

"The  roaring  winds  alarm  us."  "The  roaring  cataract  strikes  us 
"  The    rippling    stream    pleases  with  awe." 

us."  "  The  laboring  man  should  not  be 

"  The  singing-master  visited  me."  defrauded." 

3. 
"Having  dined,   I    returned    to     "Having  slept,  he  recovered  his 

school."         '  strength." 

"Having    fought    bravely,    they    "Having  retired  to  rest,  he  was 

were  at  last  (1)  overcome."  seized  with  violent  pain." 

"John,  having  exercised  too  vio-     "The  thief,  having  escaped,  was 
lently,  fainted."  never  afterwards  seen  in  that 

region." 

Will  yon  now  parse  the  exer-  does     setting    refer?    557.     Rule 

cises  in  the  lessons  which  follow  ?  XIII. 

What  is  the  infinitive  mood  used  Will  you  now  parse  setting  in 

for  1  479.  full  ? 

"They  are    about   to   depart."  Will  you  parse  the  next  lesson? 

By   what   is    the    infinitive    here  Will   you    parse  rising,  in   the 

governed  ?     What  is  the  note  for  sentence,  "The  rising  sun  ?"  559. 

this  1  VII.  Why  is  it  called  a  participial  ad- 

XLVIII.     What  is  a  participle?  jective  ?      Ans.    Because    it    de- 

49S.  scribes,  like  an  adjective,  and  im- 

"  The  sun  is  setting."     What  is  plies  action,  like  a  participle. 
setting  ?    557.      To     what,   then, 

(1)  At  last  is  an  adverbial  phrase. 


92 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


"  William  returned,  mortified  at 

his  loss." 
"The    stream,    swollen    by  the 

rains,  overflowed  its  banks." 
"The    man    accustomed    to    his 

glass  seldom  reforms." 


"A  child  left  to  follow  his  own 
inclinations  is  most  common* 
ly  ruined." 

"Admired  and  applauded,  he  be- 
came vain." 


5. 


"A   dissipated    son    grieves   his 

parents." 
"  We  must  not  neglect  any  known 

duty." 
"  My   lather  took    the    forsaken 


youth  into  his  own  house,  and 
rendered  to  him  deserved  as- 
sistance." 
"  William  befriended  the  deserted 
man." 


6. 


"The  men,  being  f.itigued  by 
labor,  souyht  rest  in  sleep." 

"  William,  being  dismissed  Irom 
college,  retired  to  the  coun- 
try." 

''Thomas,  after  having  been  re- 
peatedly  admonished   to   no 


eflect,  was  severely  and  just- 
ly punished." 
''The  tree,  having  been  weighed 
down  for  a  long  lime  by  abun- 
dance of  fruit,  at  last  (I)  fell 
to  the  ground."    • 


RULE  XIV. 

*^ctive  participles  J  from  active  transitive  verbs,  govern  the 

objective  case. 

'^^  James  is  heating  John." 

56D.  John  is  a  proper  noun,  of  the  third  person,  singular  num- 
ber, MASCULINE  GENDER,  OBJECTIVE  CASE,  and  governed  by  heating,  by 
Rule  XIV. 

Ik 

EXERCISES   IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 


1. 


"John  is  striking  William." 
"Susan  is  studying  her  lesson." 
"Mary  has*  been    repeating  her 

lesson  to  her  mother." 
"The  teamster,  seeing  the  stage 

upsetting,  ran  and  prevented 

it." 
"Having  obtained  my  request,  I 


immediately  set  off  for  Sa- 
vannah." 

"I  spied  the  cat  watching  a 
mouse." 

"Having  given  directions  to  his 
servants,  he  left  his  family 
and  took  the  stage  for  Knox- 
ville." 


Will  you  now  parse  the  next 
lesson  .<* 

WhiU  kind  of  a  participle  is, 
"Having dined?"  .004.   Why?  501. 

Who  dined,  in  the  i)I)rase, 
"Having  dined,  I  returned  to 
school?" 

To    what,    then,    does    having 


dined   refer?      Rule    XUi.     Will 
you  now  parse  the  remaining  les 
sons  ? 

"  HentingJohn."  Will  you  parse 
John?  500.     Beating?  55S. 

Will  you   parse  the   remaining 
exercises  in  the  lesson  above? 


PARTICIPLES. 


93 


'*  He  deli  gilts  infighting.^* 
C61.  Fighting  is  a  partjcipial  noun,  in  the  objective  cask,  and 
governed  by  ihe  preposition  in,  accordinj?  to  Rule  X. 

EXERCISES    IN   SYNTAX   CONTINUED. 
1. 

"Job  was  exhausted  by  wrest-    "Job  practises  fencing  daily." 

Ii„g."  "The. instructor  teaches  reading, 

"Mary  acquired  a  livelihood  by  writing,  and  spelling  in   his 

sewing."  school." 

"Walter  excels  in  writing."  "Whispering     is    forbidden     in 

"  Fishing  delights  me."  school." 

2. 
562.  "  You  icill  much  oblige  me  hy  sending  those  hoohsy 
Sending  is  a  participiai.  noun,  in  the  objectivk  cask,  and  governed 
by  the  preposition  %,  according  to  Rui>e  X. 

Books  is  a  common  nottn.  of  the  third  person,  plural  nttiwber, 
NEUTKR  GENDER,  oBJiXTivE  CASE,  and  govcmed  by  the  active  parti- 
ciple sending,  according  to  Rule  XIV. 

EXERCISES    IN   SYNTAX    CONTINUED. 

"James   derives    pleasure    from  '•  Mary's  reading  has  been  useful 

reading  useful  books.  in  improving  her  taste  in  com- 

"  John  is  above  doing  a  mean  ac-  position." 

(ion."  "I  am  discouraged    from  under- 

"  Parents  are   pleased  at  seeing  taking  this  study." 

the   progress    of   their   chil-  "A  good  instruclor  takes  no  de- 

dren."  light  in  punishing." 

The  present  participle,  when  used  as  a  noun,  often  has  the  definite 
article  the  before  it,  and  the  preposition  of  after  it:  as,  "By  the 
observing  of  truth,  you  will  command  respect."  With  equal  pro- 
priety, however,  it  may  be  said,  *'  By  observing  truth,"  etc.,  omitting 
both  the  arlicle  and  the  preposition.  If  wc  use  Ine  article  willioul 
the  preposition,  or  the  preposition  without  the  article,  the  expression 
will  appear  awkward  :  hence. 

Note  VIII.  The  definite  article  the  should  be  used  before,  and 
the  preposition  of  after,  participial  nouns,  or  they  should  both  bo 
omitted. 

•  EXERCISES   TO   BE  PARSED   AND   CORRECTED. 

"By  the  observing  these  rules,  he     "In  the  regarding  his  interests, 
will  avoid  mistakes."  he   neglected   the  public  af- 

"  He  prepared  them  for  the  event-  fairs." 

"  In  tighiing."     Will  you  parse  you    parse  sending?  r)G2.  Books? 

fi<fJiti))g?    5f31.      Why    is    fighting  6t3'2, 

called  a  participial   noun?     Aus.  Will  you   parse  the  remaining 

Bci-aiise  it   implies  action,  'ike  a  exercises  in  this  lesson  ?  • 

parlicii)le,  and  has,  also,  the  sense  From   what   are    present   parti- 

of  a  noun.  ciples  formed  ?  497, 

Will  you  parse  the  rest  of  the  How  imiy  participles  in  ing  be^ 

exercises  in  this  lesson?  distinguished  from  other  parts  of 

"By  sending  those  books."  Will  speech  of  the  same  lermiuntion  "? 

500. 


94  ,  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

by  the  sending  to  them  proper  "  He  was  sent  to  prepare  the  way 

information."  by  preaching  of  repentance." 

"  In  writing  of  his  letter,  he  made  <'  Keeping  of  one  day  in  seven  (1) 

soifte  mistakes."  is  required  of  christians." 

PROMISCUOaS  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

."  William  calls  George."  "John  will  be  punished  for  his 

". John's  father  will  reward  his  in-  insolence." 

dustry."  "  We  may  improve  under  our  in- 

"  George's  father's  carriage  passed  structor,  if  we  choose." 

the  tavern."  "He  who  would  excel  in  learn- 

"If   William  return,  he    will  be  ^    ing,  must  be  attentive  to  his 

disappointed."  books." 

•'  John  has  beaten  hisJillle  brother  "  She  begins  to  improve." 

most  shamefully." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

563.  Will  you  compose  a  sentence  containing  an  active-transitive 
verb  ?  One  containing  a  neuter  verb  ?  One  containing  a  passive  verb  ? 
One  expressing  the  same  sense  as  the  last  in  an  active  form  ?  Will 
you  compose  a  sentence  having  a  verb  in  the  potential  mood?  One  in 
the  siibjunctive  mood?  One  in  the  imperative  mood?  One  in  the 
infinitive  mood  ?  One  having  an  adjective  in  the  superlative  degree  ? 
One  having  the  article  an  correctly  used  before  a  vowel  '^  One  having 
an  adjective  in  the  positive  degree  that  has  in  itself  a  superlative  sig- 
nification? One  containing  the  relative  whose?  One  containing  w/iz'cA.? 
One  with  what  used  as  a  compound  pronoun  "^  One  having  ivho  used 
as  an  interrogative  pronoun?  One  having  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive 
mood,  common  form? 

Will  you  construct  one  or  more  sentences,  which  will  make  sense 
with  the  word  tr7ith  contained'  in  them  ?  One  with  the  word  wisdom 
contained  in  it  ?  One  with  the  word  knowledge?  One  with  the  word 
learning?  One -w'Mhihewordi  science? 

Will  you  construct  a  sentence  a.hoin  jjritdetice?  One  about  history? 
One  or  more  on  the  [following  subjects,  namely  :  geography^  garden- 
ing, farms ^  orchards  ? 

Will  you  fill  up  the  following  phrases  with  suitable  words  to  make 

sense  ?  namely :  '^Industry health  ;"  "  By we  acquire ;" 

"  In  youth characters f  '<■  Arithmetic business  ;" 

"  Washington live hearts  of  bis ." 

XLIX.  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

564.  The  verbs  have,  be,  will,  and  do,  when  they  are  unconnected 
with  a  principal  verb,  expressed  or  understood,  are  not  auxiliaries, 

*'  Instead  of  saying,  "  By  the  ob-  XLIX.  Which  are  the  auxiliary 

serving  these  rules,"  what  should  verbs?  512. 

I  say  ?  Wliy  ?  Note  VIII.  What  is  an  auxiliary  verb?  511. 

Will  you  now  parse  and  correct  What  a  principal  one?* 

the  exercises  under  Note  VIII?  When  are  have,  he,  loill,  and  do 

Will  you  parse  the  promiscuous  principal  verbs?  564.  Give  an  ex- 
exercises  in  Syntax?  Next  take  ample  of  each.  564. 
those  to  be  written. 


(1)  ISevem  is  a  numeral  adjective,  belonging  to  days,  nnderetood,  by  Note  I. 
*  See  question  to  197.  • 


AUXILIARY    VERBS.  95 

but  principal  verbs  :  as,  "  We  have  enough  j"  "  I  am  grateful ;  "  He 
wills  it  to  be  so ;"  '^  They  do  as  they  please."'  In  this  view  they  also  have 
their  auxiharies  :  as,  '•  I  shall  have  enough  ;"   "  I  zfill  be  grateful,"  etc. 

565.  The  peculiar  force  of  the  several  auxiliaries  will  appear  from 
the  following  account  of  them. 

56^>.  Do  and  didmnxk  the  action  itself,  or  the  time  of  it,  with 
greater  energy  and  positiveness:  as,  ''  1  do  speak  truth  ;"  I  did  respect 
him  ;"  "  Here  am  T,  for  thou  didst  call  ine."  They  are  of  great  use  in 
negative  (1)  sentences:  as,  "I  do  not  fear;"  "I  did  not  write." 
They  are  almost  universally  employed  in  asking  questions  :  as, 
•'  Does  he  learn  '?"  '•  Did  he  not  write  ?"  They  sometimes  also 
supply  (2)  the  place  of  another  verb,  and  make  the  repetition  of  it,  in 
the  same  or  a  subsequent  sentence,  unecessary  :  as,  "  You  attend  not 
to  your  studies  as  he  does  (i.  e.,  '*  as  he  attends"),  etc.  "I  shall 
come,  if  I  can  ;  but  if  1  do  not,  please  to  excuse  me"  (i.  e.  "  if  I  come 
not"). 

567.  May  and  mirjht  express  the  possibility  or  liberty  of  doing  a 
thing  ;  caii  and  could,  the  power:  as,  "  It  may  rain  ;"  "  I  may  write  or 
read  ;"  "  He  might  have  improved  more  than  he  has  j"  "  He  can  write 
much  better  than  he  could  last  year." 

568.  Must  is  sometimes  called  in  for  a  helper,  and  denotes  necessity: 
as,  "We  must  speak  the  truth,  whenever  we  do  speak,  and  must  not 
prevaricate."  (3) 

569.  Will,  in  the  first  person  singular  and  plural,  intimates  (4) 
resolution  and  promising;  in  the  second  and  third  person  it  only  fore- 
tells: as,  "I  will  reward  tho  good,  and  will  punish  the  wicked;" 
"  We  will  remember  benefits,  and  be  grateful ;"  "Thou  wilt,  or  he  will 
repent  of  that  folly ;"   "  You,  or  they,  will  have  a  pleasant  walk." 

570.  Shall,  on  the  contrary,  in  the  first  person,  simply  foretells;  in 
the  second  and  third  persons,  it  promises,  commands,  or  threatens: 
as,  "  I  shall  go  abroad  ;"  "  We  shall  dine  at  home  ;"  "  Thou  shalt,  or 
you  shall,  inherit  the  land  ;"  **  Ye  shall  do  justice,  and  love  mercy;" 
*'  They  shall  account  for  their  misconduct."  The  following  passage  is 
not  translated  (5)  according  to  the  distinct  and  proper  meanings  of 
the  words  shall  and  will:  "Surely  goodness  and  mercy  shall  follow 
me  all  the  days  of  my  life;  and  I  will  dwell  in  the  house  of  the  Lord 
for  ever."  It  ought  to  be,  ^^loill  follow  me,"  and,  "■  I  shall  dwell." 
The  foreigner  who,  as  it  is  said,  fell  into  the  Thames,  and  cried  out. 

What  effect  have  do  and  did  in  What  does  shall  intimate  in  the 

sentences?  566.  Give  an  example,  first  person?  570.  Give  an  exam- 

56g.  pie.  570. 

Will  you  give  an    example  in  In  what  particular  is  tlie  trans- 

which  the  repetition  of  the  princi-  lation  of  the  following  passage  in- 

pal  verb  is  unnecessary  ?  566.  correct?  "Surely   goodness    and 

What  do  may   and  might   ex-  mercy  shall  follow  me  all  the  days 

press?  567.  of  my  life;  and  I  will  dwell  in  the 

What  is  the  use  of  7niist?  568.  house  of  the  Lord  for  ever."  570. 

What  does  will  intimate  in  the  In  what  consists  the  mistake  in 

first  person  singular?  plural?  569.  the  exjjression  which  the  foreign- 

Give   an   example.     569.    In   the  er   made  when    he   fell    into  the 

second  and  third  persons?   569.  Thames.^  570. 
Give  an  example.  569. 

(1)  Denying.   (2)  To  fill  up.    (3)  To  shun  the  truth.    (4)  ShoAvs.    (5)  Expressed. 


96  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

« I  tctU  be  drowned  !  nobody  shall  help  me!"  made  a  8nd  misapplica- 
tion  of  these  auxiliaries. 

571.  These  observations  respecting  the  import  (I)  of  the  verbs  will 
and  shall,  tuiist  be  understood  of  expiicniive  seiiieuces  ;  lor  when  the 
sentence  is  iiiterrogalive,  just  the  reverse,  (2;  for  the  most  part,  takes 
place:  thus,  "1  shall  go,"  -'You  will  go,^^  express  event  (3)  only;  but 
•'  Will  you  go?"  imports  intention;  and,  ''  iSkalll  go?"  refers  to  the 
will  of  another.  But  "  He  shall  go,"  and  "  Shall  he  go  ?  "  both  imply 
will — expressing  or  referring  to  a  command. 

572.  When  the  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  the  meaning 
of  these  auxiliaries  likewise  undergoes  (4)  sonic  alteration,  as  the 
learners  will  readily  perceive  by  a  few  examples:  •'  Hes7/«^^  proceed;" 
"If  he  shall  proceed;"  "You  shall  consent;"  "  If  you  Kkall  con- 
sent." These  auxiliaries  are  soiiielinies  interchanged  (5)  in  the  in- 
dicative and  subjunctive  moods,  to  convey  the  same  meaning  of  the 
auxiliary  ;  as,  "  He  loilL  not  return  ;  "  "  If  he  shall  not  return  j"  *•  He 
shall  not  return  ;"  *'If  he  toill  not  return." 

573.  Would  primarily  (6)  denotes  inclination  of  will;  and  should, 
obligation;  but  they  both  vary  their  import,  and  are  often  used  to 
express  simple  event. 

574.  Do  and  have  are  sometimes  used  as  principal  verbs,  according 
to  the  following 

SYNOPSIS. 
INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  I  do.  I  have. 

Imp.    I  did.  I  had. 

Per/.  I  have  done.  I  have  had. 

Pli/p.  I  had  done.  I  had  had. 

1  Fut.l  shall  or  will  do.  I  shall  or  will  have. 

2  Fut.l  shall  have  done.  I  shall  have  had. 


575.  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

Pres.   I  may  or  can  do.  I  may  or  can  have. 

Imp.    I    might,  could,   would,  or  I  might,  could,  would,  or  s 

should  do.  have. 

Per/.    I  may  or  can  have  done.  I  may  or  can  have  had. 

Plup.   I   might,  could,   would,   or  I  might,  could,  would,  or  8 

should  have  done.  have  had. 

576.  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Pres.   1.  If  1  do.  If  I  have,  etc. 

576—1.  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  Do  you,  or  do  you  do.  Have  you,  or  do  you  have. 


What  do  sknfl  and  will  denote  Will  you  repeal  the  synopsis  of 

in    iiUeiTOgHtive    sentences;    as,  (/<>  throu^-h  all  the  moods?  of  Aaye.^ 

"Shall   1  go?"  "Will   you   go?"  Will   you   conjugate   d,  in   the 

571.                                                  <  present  lense?  /iftfc  in  the  perfect 

What  do  would  and  should  pri-  tense? 
marily  deiiofo  ?  573. 


(1)  Meaning    (2)  ConMary.    (0)  What  hapjions.    [i)  Suffors.     (b)  Tu  «Ti:chaiig« 
ODt>  far  tlia  otiier.       (6)  la  the  first  placa. 


AUXILIARY    VERB.^.  97 


577.  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  To  do.  To  have. 

Per/,  To  have  done.  To  have  had. 

^'^'^a  PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.Dohx^.    ■  Having. 

Per/.  Done.  Had. 

<7o7»p.;;er/.  Having  done,  Havinj?  had. 


L.    OF  DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

579.  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  used  only  in  some  of  the 
moods  and  tenses.  • 

58t).  The  following  are  the  principal  ones  ■ 
Pres    Tenne.  Lnp.  Tense.  Perf.  Participle, 

f^'f^  Might,  (Wanting.) 

Can.  Could,  !_ 

Will,  Would,  :_ 

Sliall,  Should, 

Must,  Must,  

<^uglit.  Ought,  

— : Quoth,  . . 

r%\'  2!  \h«se,  oMf/^<  and  yrmsf,  you  perceive,  are  not  varied, 
os^.  Unght  and  quoth  are  always  used  as  principal  verbs.  Oaaht 
IS  he  same  in  the  imperfect  tense  as  in  the  present,  and  is  always 
followed  by  an  mhnitive:  as, '•  He  ought  to  siudv;"  '' He  ou-ht  to 
have  read  In  this  last  example,  our/Ju  is  in  the  imperfect,  a°nd  in 
the  first.  It  IS  in  the  present.  This  we  determine  by  the  infinitive 
which  folows  the  verb,  thus:  when  the  present  infinitive  follows 
might,  ought  is  m  the  present  tense ;  but  when  the  perfect  infinitive 
follows  It,  It  IS  in  the  imperfect  tense. 

583.  In  English,  verbs  are  often  used  both  in  a  transitive  and  in-' 
ransi  ive  or  neuter  signification.     Thus,  to  flatten,  when  it  signifies 

to  make  even  or  leoel,  is  an  active-transitive  verb  ;  but  when  it  signifies 
to  grow  dial  or  tneipid,  it  is  an  intransitive  verb. 

584.  A  neuter  or  intransitive  verb,  by  the  a'cidition  of  a  preposi- 
tion,  may  become  'a  compound  active-transitive  verb:  as,  to  smile  is 
intrans.tive;  it  can  not,  therefore,  be  followed  by  an  objective  case 

\Z  "' f u  T  '"'°  '^f  ^.^TJ^  ^°'"^-  ^«  ^'^"  "°«^  «av  ''  She  smiled 
on  him  '  ^S''^^'  '""'"'^f  ',  ^"i  "^^  'f^'  ""^'y  properly,  "She  smiled 
on  him;'     'He  was  smiled  on  by  her." 

What  is  the  perfect  participle     in  the  present  tense  ?  582. 

T     wru^,  j^      .  ,     „     tense .'  db^.     Cnve  an  example  of 

U   What  are  defective  verbs?     each  tense.  582. 

-liriii  ,               ..        ,          .  When    is   <o/?fl;^/e»   transitive. 

Will  you  mention  the  principal  and  when  intransitive  ?  583. 

ones,  with  their  imperfect  tenses?  How,    then,    are    verbs    often 

used'  583 

Which  are  not  varied?  .'>81.  How  can  an  intransitive  verb 

i^7  <foo^  "'^^    *"^  ^"°'*  always  become  transitive  ?  584.     Give  an 

used  f  r.S^  example.  584. 
How  can  you  tell  when  onqht  is 


98 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


ft85.  Preposition)*  afieol  tlie  meaning  ol  verbs  in  tlifTe rent  ways.  To 
cast  means  to  throw:  as,  "  He  cast  a  ir^tone  at  her."  To  cos*^  w/>,  how- 
ever, means  to  compute  :  as,  "He  oasts  np  liis  accounts."  In*all  in« 
stances  in  whiili  the  prepoi^iiion  folknv  s  the  verb  and  modifies  its 
meaning-,  h  should  be  considered  a  port  olihe  verb,  and  be  so  treated 
in  pursing. 

586.  There  are  some  verbs  which,  although  they  admit  an  objec- 
tive case  after  tliem,  still  do  not  indicate  the  least  degree  of  action  : 
as,  "I  resemble  my  father."  This  seeming  inconsistency  may  be 
easily  reconciled  by  reflecting  thai,  in  ail  such  cases,  the  verb  has  a 
dire<-t  reference  to  its  61>ject.  Of  this  nature  are  the  verbs  retain,  re- 
eei)ihli\  own,  hate,  etc. 

.087.  S'-uue  neuter  or  intransitive  verbs  admit  of  a  passive  form,  and 
are  thence  called  neuter  passive  verbs :  "as,  "John  goes  home  to- 
night." Here  goes  is  an  inti'ftnsitive  verb.  But  in  ihe  sentence, 
".John  is  gone  home,"  is  govp  is  a  neuter  passive  verb.  Again,  in  the 
phrase,  "  VViltiam  comes,"  comes  is  an  intransitive  verb;  and  in  th»^ 
pll^a^c.  '•  "VVillinm  is  come."  is  come  iii  a  neuter  passive  verb. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
1. 


"■  William  had  had  many  advan- 
tages before  lie  improved 
them  in  a  pro})er  manner." 

"A  good  scholar  will  not  do  (1) 
what  is  forbidden  by  his  in- 
■  structor." 


''  He  has  had  many  precious  op- 
portunities." 

"John  will  do  as  his  instructor 
directs." 

"He  may  have  had  time." 


"  I  own  this  book." 

*' Charles  resembles  his  parents." 

"He  retains  his  place." 

"The  farmer  casts  seed  into  the 
ground." 

"The  merchant  casts  up  his  ac- 
counts often." 

"The  instructor  ha»  come."' 
"Our  instructor  has  come." 
"William    hns   gone  to   visit 

parents." 
"  Susan  has  «rone."  -  ^ 


i. 


"  I  can  not  believe  him." 
"His  father  docs   not  hesitate  Jo 
.trust  him." 

"She  smiles  sweetly." 
"  She  smiled  on  John." 
"John  Mas  smiled  on  by  fortune  in 
every  undertaking." 

"  Mary  was  gone  before  her  moth- 
er came." 

"When  they  came  to  town,  they 
made  many  purchases." 


What  does  to  c'atit  mean?  585.  There  are  several  verbs  of  this 

Meaning  of  ^)  r«>(<  K/)  /  ^Sb.  class;    will   you    name    some   of 

When   may  the  preposition  be     them  ?  586. 


reckoned  a  part  of  the  verb?  585. 

How  should  it  he  lonsidered  in 
parsing?  585. 

Is  recentbff,  strictly  speaking,  a 
transitive  verb  f  58G. 

Why  does  it  admit  an  object 
after  it?  r.&6. 


What  is  a  neuter  passive  verb? 
587.     Give  an  example.  .'387. 

Will  you  now  parse  the  next 
lessons  ? 

LI.  What  is  the  mraning  of  o(/- 
verb  ?  228. 


(1)   What  Klaiids  for  -'thut  which,"  or  '•  thf>  tiling  whicli."     Ajiplr  RiiU-s  V.  VI. 
au'l  VTir. 


ADVERBS.  .  99 

LT.  OF  ADVERBS.  "     . 

588.  Adverbs  are  words  joined  to  verbs,  participles,  adjectives,  and 
other  adverbs,  to  qualify  them. 

589.  Expressions  like  the  following,  namely:  a  fexo  daijH  ago,  long 
since,  none  at  all,  at  length,  in  vain,  by  no  means,  a  great  deal,  etc.,  are 
denominated  adverbial  phrases,  when  they  are  used  to  qualify  verbs  or 
participles,  by  expressing  the  manner,  time,  or  degree  of  action. 

590.  The  definite  article  the  is  frequently  placed  before  adverbs  of 
the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  to  give  the  expression  more 
force  :  as,  "  The  more  he  walks,  the  hefter  he  feels.".  When  the  article 
is  used  in  this  sense,  both  the  article  and  adverb  may  be  reckoned  an 
adverbial  phrase,  and  be  so  considered  in  parsing. 

591.  You  have  doubtless  noticed  that  most  words  ending  in  hi  are 
advarbs.  The  reason  of  this  is  that  ly  is  a  contraction  of  the  adverb 
li-ke ;  thus,  from  manlike  we  foriu  wanly  ;  gentlemanli/ i^  a  voutrnclion 
o( gentlemanlike  ;  hence, 

592.  If  you  meet  with  a  word  ending  in  ly,  implying  in  its  significa- 
tion the  idea  of  like,  you  may  conclude  at  once  that  it  is  an  adverb. 

•       ■  RULE    IX. 

Adverhn  qualify  verbs,  participles,  adjectives,  and  other  adverli.-i. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

'■  Ah  vain  we  look  for  perfect  happiness.'' 

593.  In  vain  is  an  adverbial  phrase,  and  qualifies  look,  according 
to  RULK  IX.  ^ 

EXERCISES  IN  Sr.NTAX  CONTINUED. 

«Mohn  has  come  again,  but  VVil-  "  Wilbara  acted  yery  nobly" 

liam  has  not."  "  I  will  by  no  means  consent." 

"Very  many  persons  fail  of  hup-  -^He   wrote  a  long  letter  a   few 
piness.^"  days  ago."  (1) 


588 


To  what  is  the  adverb  joined  ?         When  are  they  to  be  considnred 


atlverbial  phrases?  589. 


For  What  purpose?  oSS.  Is  the  article  the  ever  joined  to 

How    many    diflerent    parts    of  an  adverb?  S90.     For  what  pur- 

sppech  does  it  qiialify?  588.  pose?  590. 

Which  are  they  ?  58S.  What  do  the  article  and  adverb 

■  \V  ha^t  is  the  definition  ol  an  ad-  form  in  such  cases  ?  590. 

verb?  5S.S.  How  is  it  to  be  considered  in 

Are  adverbs  compared  ;*  parsing?  590. 

Will  you  compare  widely?  235.  flow  came  most  words  ending 

soonf  234.  in  i^  to  be  considered  adverbs'? 

How  are  they  compared  ?  230.  591.     Give  an  example.  591. 

Will  you  compare  the  adverbs  ■  How  can  wedetermine  between 

mnch^  irel//  had?  ill?  237.  words  ending  iiWy,  whether  or  not 

vSomr  adverbs  are  not  regular  in  (hey  are  adverbs"?  592. 

their  c.OMiparison ;  will  you  name  Wha:   rule  do  you  apply  when 

""*' ;   •-^'^-  v<ni  parse  an^adverb?  IX. 

Will  you  name  four  oi  live  ad-  "In  vain  we  look."      Will  you 

verbial  phrases?  589.  parse  in  vain?  593. 


(1  ,  .1  few  'I'lyx  a()'i—nn  arlverl.ijil  plnaM.  *  .«(.(•  question  t*^  234. 


100  •ENGLISH   (;rammar. 

"  A  vast  many  evils  are  incident  "John  was  writing  carelessly." 

to    man-    in    his    wearisome  "  I    have   admonished    her  once 
journey  through  life."  and  again." 

'The  instructress   has  at  length  "  A  few  days  ago  there  was  much 
arrived."  excitement  in  town.'' 

Note  IX.  To  qualify  verbs,  participles,  adjectives,  and  other 
adverbs,  we  should  use  adverbs,  but  to  qualify  nouns,  we  should  use 
adjectives. 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED.   ' 

"  William  writes  good."*  "  On   conditions    suitably   to   his 

•' Susan  studies  diligent."  rank." 

"He  speaks  fluently  and  reasons  *' He  speaks  correct." 

correct."  "  Mary  sings  admirable."       • 

"John  writes  tolerably  well,  but  "  He  writes  elegant." 

readsf  miserable."  "  He  reads  and  spells  very  bad." 
"  Harriet  dresses  neat." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

594.  Will  you  \Vrite  down  a  sentence,  containing  a  compound 
active-transitive  verb  ?  One  having  a  neuter-passive  verb  ? 

Will  you  compose  two  or  more  sentences  about  a  lionl  Two  or 
more  about  shee})  ?  Two  or  more  about  a  cow  f  One  about  an  ox  ?  One 
aboirl  (t  dog?  One  about  a  cat?  One  about  Africans?  One  about 
Indians?  One  about  fishen?  One  about  steamboat  disasters  1  One 
about  stage  ace i doits  ? 


LU.    OF  PREPOSITIONS. 

595.  Prepositions  are  used  to  connect  words,  and '"to  show  the  re- 
lation between  them. 

596.  We  not  unfrequently  meet  with  verbs  compounded  of  a 
preposition  and  verb:  as,  "to  «^jhold,"  "  to  uivest,"  "  to  overZoo/c/"  and 
this  composition  sometimes  gives  a  new  sense  to  the  verb:  as,  "to 
unc^erstand,"  "to  «)?7Adraw."  But  th«;  preposition  more  frequently 
occurs  after  the  ver]),  and  separate  from  it  :  as,  •'  toj^ast  I'p,"  "  to  fall 
on-"  The  sense  of  the  verb,  in  this  case,  is  also  materially  affected 
by  the  preposition. 


Will  you  next  parse  the  remain-  What  are  prepositions  ?  595. 

ing  exercises'?  Will  you   repeat  the  list '^  247. 

When  should  we  use  adverbs?  With   what   are  verbs   not   un- 

Nole  IX.  frequently     compounded  ?       596. 

"When  adjectives?  Note  IX,  Give  an  example.  59G. 

"  William  writes  good."  Where-  Where  is  the  preposition  more 

in  is  this  sentence  incorriict  V*  frequently  |)laced  ?    596.    Give  an 

Will  you  parse  and  correct  the  example.  596. 

remaining  exercises  ?  Will   you    name    four    preposi- 

LIL   What   is   the   meaning  of 
'preposition  ?  244. 


=^-  B'or  tlie  adjective ^roorf,  we  should  use  the  adverb  weK,  according  to  Note  IX. 
r  Pea(?s agrees  with  John  understood,  and  i.s,  therefore,  connected  wit.n  vn-it^^  by 
I  tie  cnni unction  but,  aj^neenlily  to  Bule  XI. 


PREPOSITIONS.  101 

598.  The  prepositions  after,  before,  above,  beneath.,  and  several 
others,  sometimes  appear  to  be  adverbs,  and  maybe  so  considered: 
as,  "They  had  their  reward  soon  after  ;"  "He  died  not  long  before;" 
"  He  dwells  above  ;"  but  if  the  noun  time  or  place  be  added,  they  lose 
their  adverbial  form  :  as,  "  He  died  not  long  before  "  [that  time],  etc. 

599.  There  is  a  peculiar  propriety  in  distinguishing  the  correct  use 
of  the  diderent  i)repositions.  For  illustration  we  will  take  the  fol- 
lowing sentences:  "  He  walk's  witJi  a  staff i^  moonlight ;"  "  He  was 
taken  bi/  stratagem,  and  killed  with  a  sword."  Put  the  one  preposi- 
tion for  the  other,  and  say,  "  He  walks  iy  a  staff  m^A  moonlight;" 
"  He  was  taken  with  stratagem,  and  killed  by  a  sword,"  and  it  will 
appear  that  they  diflier  in  signification  more  than  one,  at  first  view, 
would  be  apt  to  imagine.   , 

RULE  X. 

Prepositions  govern  the  objective  case. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"  John  Uvea  within  his  income." 

600.  Within  is  a  PREPOSITION. 

Income  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  third  person,  singular  number, 
NEUTER  GENDER,  OBJECTIVE  CASE,  and  governed  by  withi7i,  according  to 
Rule  X.  . 

EXERCISES    IN    SYNTAX   CONTINUED. 

"  Thomas  made  his  fortune  by  in-  He  made  the  sun  to  shine  by 

dustry."  day,  and  the  moon  (1)  to  give 

"  Susan'Iabors   with   her  needle  light  by  night." 

foi*&  livelihood."  "Beneath  the  oak  lie  acorns  in 

"Respecting    that    affair,    there  great  abundance." 

was  a  controversy."  "John,  who  is  at  all  times  watch- 

"  In  six  days  God  made  the  world,  ful  of  his  own  interest,  will 

and  a'll  things  that  are  in  it.  attend  to  that  concern." 

SENTENCES  TO  BJE  WRITTEN. 

601.  Will  you  fill  up  the  following  sentences  with  suitable  prepo- 
sitions to  make  sense?     "John  was the  house-when  he  was 

seized a  fit."     "  The  busy  bee summer  provides  food  —  the 

approaching  winter  —  the  prudence  —  a  rational  being." 

Will  you  supply  the  objects  to  the  following  ?  "James  was  catch- 
ing   .".    "  He  was  beating ."     He  supports ." 

Will  you  supply  agents  or  nominative  cases  to  the  following.* 
" was  running."     " was  singing." 

lions  which  in    many    instances  specting  the  government  of  nouns 

appear  to  be  advorbs  ?  598.  by  prepositions'?  X: 

How  may  they  be  converted  in-  "John  lives  within  his  income." 

to  prepositions  again?  598.  Will  you  parse  within^   600.    /;»- 

"  Ho  walksby  astafi'with  moon-,  com^?  600. 

light."     Will  you  correct  this  sen-  Will  you  now  take  the  remain- 

tence,  and  then  repeat  the  phrase  ?  ing  exercises  to  be  parsed;  after 

Will    you    repeat    the    rule    re-  which,  those  to  lie  written  ? 

(1)  The  sense  is,  '•  He  made  the  moon."  Moon,  then,  Is  in  the  objective  case,  gov- 
erned by  made  understood,  and  connected  with  sun,  by  Rule  XI. 


102 


KNGLiaH    QRAMMA^R. 


Will  you  supply  the  verbs  in  ili©  following?     •'  A  dutiful  child 

his  parents."     "  Grammar jlij**- correctly," 

Will  you  compose  two  or  more  sentences  about  hoys?  One  about 
whales?  One  about  «»iai-e8?  One  about /oa;e«  /  One  aboni  joarenf.v? 
One  about  brothers?  One  about  sisters?  One  about  uncles?  One 
about  aunts? 


LIII.    OF  CONJUNCTIONS. 

602.  A  CONJUNCTION  is  a  word  that  is  chiefly  used  to  connect  sen- 
tences, so  as,  out  of  two  or  more  sentences,  to  make  but  one. 

603.  Relative  pronouns,  as  well  as  conjunctions,  serve  to  connect 
sentences:  as,  "Blessed  is  the  man  loho  feareth  the  Lord." 

604.  Conjunctions  very  often  unite  sentences  when  they  appear  to 
unite  only  words,  as  in  the  following  sentences:  "Duty  and  inter- 
est forbid  vicious  indulgences."  "Wisdom  or  folly  governs  us." 
Each  of  these  forms  of  expression  contains  two  sentences,  namely  : 
the  first,  "Duty  forbids  vicious  indulgences;"  ''Interest  forbids 
vicious  indulgences  J  "  the  second,  "  Wisdom  governs  us;''  "Folly 
governs  us.''  , 

KUIiE  XI. 

Conjunctions  connect  verbs  of  the  same  mood  and  tense^ 
and  nouns  or  pronouns  of  the  same  case. 


605. 


EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
"  William  writes  and  ciphers." 


And  is  a  copulative  conjunction. 

Ciphers  is  a  regular  active  intransitive  verb,  from  the  verb  to 
cipher — ''•  Pres.  cipher;  .Imperf.  ciphered;  Per.  part,  ciphered" — 1, 
1  cipher;   2,  You  cipher;  3,  He  or  William  ciphers" — made  in  the 

INDICATIVE     MOOD,     PRESENT     TENSE,     THIRD      PERSON     SINGULAR,      and 

agrees  with  William  understood,  and  is  connected  to  xorites  by  the 
conjunction  and,  agreeably  to  Rule  XI.  ^ 


What  is  a  simple  sentence  ?  253, 
Give  an  example.  A  compound 
sentence  ?  256.    Give  an  example. 

Why  called  compound?  254. 

LIII.  Meaning  o(  conjunction  f 
257. 

What  is  a  conjunction?  602. 

Meaning  of  copulative?  264. 

What  is  the  use  of  the  copula- 
tive conjunction?  265. 

Will  you  repeat  the  list  of  copu- 
lative conjunctions  ?  266. 

What  does  disjunctive  signify? 
271. 

What  does  the  disjunctive  con- 
junction connect?  274.' 


Willyou  repeat  the  list  of  tHem? 
275. 

What  is  the  rule  for  donnecting 
words  by  conjunctions  ?  XI. 

What  other  words^besides  con- 
junctions and  prepositions,  con- 
nect? 603. 

Do  conjunctions  ever  connect 
sentences  when  they  appear  to 
connect  words  only?  604.  Give 
an.  example.  604. 

'•  William  writes  and  ciphers." 
Will  you  parse  and?  605.  Ci;pheraf 
605. 


INTKUJRCTIONS.  lOlJ 

EXERCISES    IN    SYNTAX    CONTINUED. 

"John  cipliers  rapidly,  and  reads  ''Though   he  is   lively,  yet   he  is 

correctly."  not  too  volatile.'' 

'' If  we  contend  about  trifles,  and  "  If  he   has   promised,   he  should 

violently  maintain  our  opin-  act  accordingly." 

ions,  we  shall  gain   hut  few  ••  He    denied    that    he    circulated 

friends."  the  report." 

SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

(506.  Will  you  compose  a  sentence  coutainiug  the  conjunction  i/? 
One  containing  aiidf  As  many  sentences  as  there  are  conjunctions 
which  follow — each  sentenced  cont;iiniag  one?  Although  Jjnlcaa 
For.      Because.      Therefore.      Or.      Neither.      Nor. 

Will  you  compose  a  .sentence  about  Jackson  f  One  about  Clay  ^ 
One  aijuiit  Monroe?     One  about  yfadison  ? . 


LIV.    OF  INTERJECTIONS. 

607.  Imterjkctions  are  words  thrown  in  between  the  pans  of 
sentences,  to  express  the  passions  or  sudden  feelinjjs  ot  the  sfiealcer. 

60S.  We  do  not  say,  "Ah,  I!"  "ph.  I !  '  but.  "Ah,  me'"  -'Oh  me!" 
using  thf^  objective  case  after  the  interjection.  The  pronoun  here 
spolcen  of,  you  perceive,  is  of  the  first  person:  hence, 

NoTR  X.  Prcmouns  of  the  first  person  are  put  in  the  objective 
case,  after  the  interjections  Oh!   0!  Ah!  etc. 

609.  We  say,  "O  thou  persecutor !""  "Oh,  ye  hypocrites!"  "O 
thou  who  dwellest,"  etc.  :  hence, 

Note  XL  The  interjections  0!  oh!  and  ah!  require  the  nomina- 
tive case  of  pronouns  in  the  second  person. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

610.  ''Ah,m<.'!   I  mast  perish." 

Ah  is  an  interjectio.n. 

3fe  is  a  personal  pronoun,  of  the  first  person,  singular,  objec 
TiVE  CASE,  and  governed  by  ah,  agreeably  to  Note  X. 

exercises  in  syntax  continued. 

"  0,  thou  (1)  who  hast  murdei'ed  "Ah!     unhappv    (2)    thou,    who 

thy  friend."  art   deaf  (3)  to   the  calls  of 

"O,  thou  who  hearest  prayer!"  duty  and  honor." 

"Ah,    me!    must    I    endure    all  "Oh!   happy   (4)    us,  surrounded 

this?"'  with  so  many  blessings." 


Will  you,  in  the  next  place,  take  "  Ah  me  !  "  In  \^hat  case  is  me? 

the   exercises  to   be   parsed    and  f)10.     ^ 

written,  and  tlispose  of  them  ?  What    rule   or  note   applies   to 

LIV.  What  is  the  meaning  ot  me  ?  X. 

intcrJrctioH  ?  283.  "O   thou,"  etc.     What  note  aj)- 

What  are  interjections?  607.  plies  to  tkoa?  XL 

Will   you  repeat   from  the   lisf  "Ah,  me!''     Will  you  parse  a/*  .!*. 

si.v  interjei'lions  ?  QS3.  mc  !^  310. 

How  may  an  interjection  gener- 
ally be  known  ?  286. 

(1)  Vor  thou,  apply  Note  XT.  (2)  Agrees  with  thou,  by  Rulo  IV. 

(3;  Bolonga  to  who.  by  ]\n\n  IV.  (4)  Apply  Rulo  IV. 


104 


KNOLISH    GRAMMAR. 


SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN; 
(ill.  Will  you  compose  a  sentence  containing  alna?     One  contain- 
ing- uh  !    One  about  volcanoes  7  One  about  lohcs  ?    One  about  islande  ? 
One  about  Welster,  the  statesman  ?     One  about  a  good  scholar  ?     One 
about  a  poor  scholar  ?     One  about  a  good  ivstructor  ? 


LV.     OF  THE  AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS. 

612.  Apposition,  in  grammar,  signifie.n  the  putting  of  two  nouns  in 
the  same  case. 

613. 'When  I  say,  "John  the  mechanic  has  come,''  I  am  speaking 
of  only  one  person  ;  the  two  nouns,  John  and  mechanic,  both  mean- 
ing or  referring  to  the  same  person;  consequently  they  are  i)ut,  by 
apposition,  in  the  same  case  :  hence, 

KULE  XV. 

When  two  or  more  iio^ats^  in  the  same  sentence,  signify  the  same  things 

they  are  put,  by  apposition,  in  the  same  caise. 

EXERC7SES  IN  SYNTAX. 
614.  "  Webster^  the  statesman,  has  left  us.^^ 

Statesman  is  a  common  noun,  masculine  gender,  third  person,  sin- 
gular NUMBER,  NOMINATIVE  CASE,  and  put  in  apposition  with  Wehater^ 
by  Rule  XV. 

EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX  CONTINUED. 
1. 
"  John  the  Baptist  was  beheaded."     "  Cicero,  the  orator,  flourislied  in 
"  David,  the  thief,  was  apprehend-  the  time  of  Catiline,  the  con- 

ed." spirator." 

"Joiiiison,     the    bookseller,  has     "  I  visit  Thompson,  the  professor, 

failed  in  business."  often." 

'' I  consulted  Williams,  the  law-     '<John,   the   miller,    died   yester- 
ver."  .  day."' 

2. 

"■  If  John  will   not  go,  I  will  go  *'  We  will  inspect  the  goods  our- 

myself"  (1)  selves." 

"  You  yourself  are  in  fault."  "  I,  I  am  the  man  who  commilled 
''They  themselves  were  mistak-  the  deed." 


Will  you  now  take  the  remain-         What  i.s  the  rule  for  this  agree- 
ing exercises    t*o   be  parsed    and  ment  ?  XV. 
■written?                                   •  -'Webster,      the      statesman." 

LV.  Meaning     of    ajiposition  ?  "U'ill  you  parse  sUtienmav  f  614. 

612.  Will   you  now   parse  the  suc- 
"  John    the    mechanic."     How  ceeding  exercises  ? 

many    jiersons    are   here    spoken         "  1  will  go   myself"     Will  you 

of?     613.     Should,  then,  the  two  parse  «i_(/.se(/'f 
nouns,   Jc<7i3i  and  wechmvic,  be  in         How  is  the  compound  personal 

the    same,    or    a   difl'erent   case?  pronoun. formed  in  the  singular  ? 

613.  3S6.     How  in  the  plural?     386. 

(1)  il/^«e?/ IB  a  compound  peisonal  proiioini.  first  person,  siugnlar,  nominative 
case,  and  put  in  apposition  ^vith  I,  by  Eule  XT. 


EXERCUF.S.  105 

Remark  1. — For  the  same  reason  that  uiie  noun  agrees  with  anoth- 
er in  case,  it  agrees  M'iifc  it  in  number  and  person  also. 

''  I,    Alexander,  by  the   grace  of    "  We,  the  re^presentatives  of  the 
God.  Emperor  of  all  the  Rus-  people  of  these  colonies,  do 

sias,  promulgate  this  law.''  make  this  declaration." 

Hemark  2. — When  one  noun  describes  or  qualifies  another,  the  one 
so  qualifying  becomes  an  adjective  in  sense,  and  may  be  so  consid- 
ered in  parsing.  Accordingly,  7'reiuont,  in  the  phrase,  -'Tremonl 
House,"  is  an  adjective  belonging  to  House,  by  Rule  IV. 

015.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  The  Marlborough  Hotel   is   situ-     ''  John  Dobson  was  in  town  yes- 

ated  in  AVashington  street."  terday." 

''  The  lirm  of  Messrs.  Williams  &     "  John  Johnson,  the  blacksmith, 
Sons  has  failed.*'  has  broken  his  leg." 

Remark  3. — When  the  nouns  which  refer  to  the  sa/jiie  person  or 
thing,  are  separated  by  verbs,  as  "  Webster  is  a  statesman/'  it  is 
customary  to  apply  one  or  more  of  the  following  rules  : 

1.  Ani/  verb  may  have  the  same  cane  after  it'as  be/ore  it,  tchen  both  words 
refer  to  the  same  thing. 

2.  The  verb  to  bk,  throiir/h'aU  its  variations,  has  the  same  case  after  it 
as  that  which  next  precedes  it. 

3.  Passive  verbs  of  numiny,  judging,  etc.,  have  the  same  case  after  them 
as  before  them. 

4.  Neuter  verbs  have  the  same  case  after  ihem  as  before  them. 

(31(5.  The  foregoing  rules,  in  the  opinion  df  the  writer,  are  wholly 
unnecessary,  tending  merely  to  confuse  the  mind  of  the  learner  by 
requiring  him  to  make  a  distinction  in  form,  when  there  exists  none 
in  principle.  In  corroboration  of  this  fact,  Mr.  Murray  has  the  fol- 
lowing   remark: 

(317.  "  By  these  examples,  it  appears  that  the  verb  to  be  has  no  gov- 
ernment of  case,  but  serves  in  all  its  forms  as  a  conductor  to  the 
cases:  so  that  the  two  cases  which,  in  the  construction  of  the  sen- 
tence, are  the  ne.rt  before  and  after  it.  must  always  be  alike.  Per- 
haps this  subject  will  be  more  intelligible  by  obs£)rving  that  the 
■words,  in  the  cases  preceding  and  following  ihe  verb  to  be,  may  be 
said  to  be  in  apposition  toeach  other.     Thus,  in  the  sentence,  'I  un- 

When  one  noun  i'fe  put  in  appo-  In  the  same  sentence,  do  Web- 

sition  with  another,  in  what   par-  ster  and  statesman    both  mean    or 

ticulars   does    it   agree  witli   it?  refer   to   the   same    person?     In 

Remark  1.  what    case,  then,  ought   they   to 

Will  you  now  perse    the   next  be?  613.  By  what  rule  ?    XV. 

exercises  ?  What  office  does  the  verb  to  be 

"Tremont  House."'    What  part  perform  between  cases  ?  G17. 

of  speech  is  Tremont?  Remark  2.  Are  the  cases  next   before  and 

How  used  here?  Remark  2.  Will  after  it   alike,  or  different?     617. 

you  parse  it  in  full?  What    is    the    opinion    of    Mr. 

Will  you  now  parse  all  the  ex-  Murray   respecting  the  cases  be- 

ercises  under  Remark  2?  fore  and  after  to  br,  ?  617. 

What  is  the  rule  or  rules  usual-  How  does  he   think  it  and    Itim 

ly  given  for  parsing  statesman,  in  should    be  parsed    in   the   phrase 

the  phrase,  "  Webster  is  a  stales*  "I  understood  it  to  be  him?"  617. 
man  ?"    Remark  3,  1,2,  3,  4. 


10()  r.NOUSH    GRAMMAR,      . 

derstoocl  it  Uj  i-o-  him,'  liie  words  //  and  him  are  in  apposiliou  :  that  i$, 
they  refer  to  the  same  thing,  and  are  in  the  same  case." 

618.  EXERCISES   IN  SYNTAX. 

1, 

'' Webster  is  a  statesman."  '•Julius  CfB.sar  \va.s  that  R-onian 
"John  is  a  good  .■'cholar."  general   who   conquered    the 

"  William  will   be(':ome   a  dist.n-  Gauls." 

gnished  and  valuable  cili/en."  "  Tom  struts  a  soldier."  (1) 

"She  walks  a  queen."  (1)  '■  Will  sneaks  a  scrivener." 

"  He  is  styled  Lord  (J)  Mayor  (1)  "Claudius  Nero,  Caligula's  uncle, 

of  London."  a  senseless  fellow,  obtained 

"He  was  named  John."  (i)  the  kingdom." 

"She  moves  a  queen."  (1; 

2- 

"Susau  look  her  to  be  Mary."  is   the    sou  of  Mr.    (2)  John 

"i  took  him  to  be  John  (2)  Og-  Quincy  Adams,"  (1) 

den."  •  She    is    not     now    the    pursou 

"  We  at  lirst  took  it  to  be  her,  but  whom  they  represented  her 

afterwards   were"    convinced  (I)  to  have  been." 

that  (3)  it  was  not  she."     "  "  Whom  (5)  do  you  fancy  them  to 

"  He  is  not  the  {)erson  who  (4j  it  be?" 

seemed  he  was."  '-The    professor    was     appointed 

"I  understood  it  to  him  (1)  who  tutor  to  the  prince." 

Remark^. — It  not  frequently  haj)pens  that  the  connecting  verb  is 
omitted ;  as,  "  They  macle  him  captain  ;  that  is,  to  he  captain. 

3. 

"  They  ndmed  him  John."    '  "  flis  countrymen  crowned   him 

"  The  soldiers  made  him  general."  emperor," 

"They  proclaimed  him  king," 

G19.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PAUSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"It  might  have  been  him,  (6)  but  "She  is  the  person  who  I  under- 
there  is    no  proof  (7)  of  it."  stood  it  to  have  been." 

"  Though  I  was  blamed,- it  could  "  Who  do  you  think  it  to  be?" 

not  have  been  me,"  "  Whom  do  men  say  that  I  am?" 

"  I   saw   one   who   I  look   to   be  "  Whom  think  ye  that  I  am  ?" 
she." 

620,  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compos'e  a  sentence  having  nouns  in  a|)posiiion  ?  One 
having  nouns  in  apposition,  but  separated  by  a  verb?  One  having 
a  noun  used  us  an  adjective  ''. 

Will  you  now  parse  lessons  I,  Will  you  nowtake  the  sentences 
2,  3  ?  to  be  parsed  and  corrected;  also 

Is  the    verb    to   be   always   ex-     those  to  be  written? 
pressed?  Remark  3.  Give  an  ex- 
ample. Remark  3. 

Q)  Apply  Rule  XV.    (2)  Remark  2.    (3) 'Conjunction. 

(t)   Who  is  put  in  apposition  with  he.,  by  Rule  XV  ? 

(&)   Whom  agrees  with  them,  by  Rule  XV  ? 

(0)  Him  should  be  h&  to  agree  with  it,  according  to  Rule  XV. 

a)  Apply  Rule  XV. 


NOUNS. 


107 


Will  you  uoustruct  a  sentence  having  in  ii  tlie  word  who  }  One 
having  whose  ^  One  having  whom?  One  having  what  f  Owg  having 
that  f  One  having  man  ?  One  having  woman  f  One  having  hoy  ?  One 
having  yifh  f  One  having  parentu  ? 


LVl.    OF  NOUNS   USED  INDEPENDENTLY. 

621.  To  address  s'x^mfies  lo  spea/;  to  :  as,  "  James,  your  father  has 
come."  The  name  of  the  person  addressed  must  always  be  of  the 
second  person  ;  and  a  noun  in  this  situation,  when  it  has  no  verb  to 
agree  with  it,  and  is  wholly  disconnejcted  with  the  resi  of  the  sen- 
tence, is  said  to  be  independent:  hence, 

RULE  XVI. 

When  an  aiMresx  Is  nuide^  the  name  of  the  person  or  thing  addressed 
is  in  the  nominative  case  indefeiident. 


022. 


EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 
'■'■  John^  will  you  assist  me?'''' 


John  is  a  proper  noun,  of  the  second  person,  singular  uUiViBKR, 

MASCULINE  GENDER,    and  NOMINATIVE   CASE  INDEPENDENT,    according-  tO 

Rule  XVI. 


EXERCISES    IN   SYNTAX    CONTINUEJ). 


1. 


"  My  lords,  (1)  the  time  has  come 
when  we  must  take  some  de- 
cisive measures." 

"In  making  this  appeal  to  you, 
my  fellow-citizens,  I  rely  en- 
tirely on  your  candor." 


"  Rufus,  you  must  improve  your 
time." 

"Gentlemen  of  the. jury." 

"•James,  (1)  study  (2)  your  book." 

"  William,  do  try  to  get  your  les- 
son to-day." 


2. 


"  Boys,  attend  to  your  lessons." 

'•'Girls,  come  into  school." 

''  Did  you  speak  to  me,  girls  V 


"  iVly  dear  children,  let  no  root  of 
bitterness  spring  up  among 
yau." 


LVI.  "James,  your  father  has 
come."  Whicli  word  here  is  the 
name   of  the    person   addressed  ? 

What  is  the  meaning  of  to  ad- 
dress ^  621. 

Of  what  person  is  a  noun  when 
an  address  is  made  ?  621. 

VVlien  is  a  noun  independent.? 


What  is  the  rule  for  a  noun  put 
independently  ?  XV"I. 

In  the  sentence,  "John,  will  you 
assist  me?"  will  you  parse  Johnl 
622. 

Will  you  next  parse  the  rest  of 
the  exercises  in  this  rule  ? 


(1)  Rule  XVI. 

(2)  Imperative  mood,  and  agrees  with  thou  or  you  understood,  by  Rule  YII. 


1(>8  ENGI.TSH    ORAMMAR. 

LVII.  OF  NOUNS  IN  THE  CASE  ABSOLUTE. 

623.  Ill  the  phrase,  "The  sun  being  risen,  we  set  sail,"  the  first 
clause  of  the  sentence,  namely,  "The  sun  being  risen,"  has  nothing 
to  do  with  the  remainder;  the  noun  and  participle  may,  therefore, 
when  taken  together,  be  said  to  be  in  the  nominative  case  indepen- 
dent; but  as  we  have  already  one  case  of  this  nature,  we  will,  for  the 
sake  of  making  a  distinction,  call  this  (the  noun  joined  with  a  parti- 
ciple) the  nominative  case  absolute:  hence, 

RULE    XVII. 

A  noun  or  pronoun  before  a  participle  .^  and  independent  of  the  rest  of  the 
sentence,  is  in  the  nominative  case  absolute. 

624.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"The  sun  (1)  being  risen.  (2)  we  "Wellington  having  returned  to 

departed,"  England,  tranquillity  was  re- 

"  Egypt  being  conquered,   Alex-  stored  to  France." 

ander  returned  to  Syria.'"  "Bonaparte  being  conquered,  the 

"  Shame  being  lost,  all  virtue  was  king  was  restored." 

lost."  "The  conditions  being  observed, 

*'  The  soldiers  retreating,  victory  the    bargain   was    a    mutual 

was  lost."  benefit." 

625.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED.  " 
"  Him  (3)  only  excepted  who  was     "Him   being   destroyed,   the    re- 

a  HTurderer."  maining  robbers  made  their 

"Her  being  dismissed,  the  rest  of  escape." 

the  scholars  behaved  well." 


LVIII.  OF  THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 
Note  XII.     A  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood  is  sometimes  placed  in- 
dependently: ns,  "To  be  frank,  i  own  I  have  injured  you." 

626.        ■  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  To  confess  the  truth,  I  was  in     "  To   tell    the  plain  truth,  I  per- 
fault."  suaded  him  to  stay." 

LVII.  "The  sun   being   risen,         LVIII.  "To  confess  the  truth, 

we  set  sail."     How  many  words  I  was,"  etc.     How   is  to  confess 

in    this  sentence,  used    indepen-  used?     Note  XII. 
dently,  are  taken  together?  023.  What  is  the  rule  for  it?     Note 

Why  is  this  case  denominated  XII. 
the  case  absolute?  623.  What   is   the    infinitive    mood 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  ca>e  used  for?  479. 
absolute  ?  XVII*  How  many  tenses  has  it?  528. 

Will  you  now  lake  the  parsing        What  is  its  usual  sign?  517. 
exercises  under  Rule  XA^II,  and         Will  you  now  i)arse  the  exer- 

then    the    sentences   lo   be   cor-  cises  under  Note  XII? 
rected  ? 

(1)  In  tha  nominative  case  absolute  with  leing  risen,  by  Rule  XVII. 

(2)  Rule  XIII. 

(3)  When  a  noun  is  in  the  case  absolute,  it  should  be  in  the  nominatiTe  case. 
Him  should,  therefore,  be  he,  hy  Eule  XVII. 


MOOP,  109 

"To  display  his  power  he  op-  "To  convince  you,  I  will  continue 
pressed  his  soldiers."  here  till  you  return." 

"To  play  is  pleasant."  "What  is  pleasant  ?  "To  play."  The  infini- 
tive io play  is,  then,  the  nominative  case  to  in.  "Thou  shall  not  kill, 
is  required  of  all  men."  What  is  required?  "Thou  shalt  not  kill." 
The  verb  is  required,  then,  agrees  w^lh  "Thou  shalt  not  kill,"  as  its 
nominative:  hence, 

626 — 1.  Note  XIII.  The  iniinitive  mood,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  is 
frequently  put  as  the  nominative  ca^:e  to  a  verb  of  the  third  person 
sing-uhip. 

627.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"To  excel   requires   much   exer-     "Thou  shalt  not  kill,  is  the  coin- 

tion."  mand  of  God." 

"To  abandon  friends  will  sink  a     "Honor  thy  fnther  and  thy  moth- 
man's  character."  er,  is  required  of  all  men." 
"To  practice  religion  is  our  duty."     "To   write   a  fair  hand  requires 

practice." 

Remark  1. —  To  excel  is  the  nominative  case  to  required^  by  Note  XIII, 
and  requires  agrees  with  to  o.rce^,  by  Rule  VII.  In  parsing  "Thou 
shalt  not  kill,"  we  first  apply  Rules  VI,  VII,  and  IX.  The  whole 
phrase  is  considered  the  nominative  to  /s  required,  by  Note  XIII. 

2.  The  infinitive  mood,  or  a  part  of  a  sentence,  is  frequently  the  ob- 
ject of  a  transitive  verb:  as,  "Boys  love  to  play."  What  do  boys 
love  ?  "  To  play."  The  object  oi'  love,  then,  is  tojyla,)/.  "  Children  do 
not  consider  how  much  has  been  done  for  them  by  their  parents." 
Consider  %vhat?  "  How  much  his  been  done  for  them  by  their  parents" — 
including  for  the  object  of  the  verb  the  whole  phrase  in  italics. 

Note  XIV.  The  infinitive  mood  or  part  of  a  sentence,  may  have  an 
adjective  or  participle  agreeing  with  it,  when  there  is  no  npun,  either 
expressed  or  understood,  to  which  the  adjective  may  belong. 

628.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"To  see  the  sun  is  pleasant."  "Defraud    not    thy    neighbor,    is 

"To  practice  virtue  will  be  pro-  binding  on  all." 

dnctive.  of  happiness."  -"To  do  good  to  our  enemies,  is 

"  To  be  ridiculed  is  unpleasant."  not  natural  to  our  hearts." 

Remarks. — Pleasant  agrees  with  "  To  see  the  sun,"  by  Note  XIV. 
Binding-  agrees  with  "Defraud  not  thy  neiglibor,"  by  the  same  au- 
thority. To  is,  apply  Rule  VII  ;  to  sun^  Rule  VIII ;  to  the  infinitive  to 
see,  Note  XIII. 

"To  play  is  pleasant."     What  as  a  verb,  there  is  no  necessity 

is  pleasant?     What,  then,  is  the  for  considering   it   the  object   in 

nominative  to  is?  626—1.    Rule?  parsing;  what  rule,  then,  will  you 

Note  XIII.  apply  to  it?  XII. 

"Thou  shalt  not  kill,  is  required  Will  you   name  an  example  in 

of  all  men."     What  is  required  ?  which  there  is  part  of  a  sentence 

What  is  the  nominative  to  is  re-  used  a.s  the  object  of  a  verb  ?  627. 

quired/  626—1.  Rule?  NoteXIII.  Remark  2. 

Will  you  now  parse  the  remain-  "To  sec  the  sun  is  pleasant." 

ing  exercises  under  this  rule?  Will  you  par.se  pleasant^'  to  see? 

"  Hoys  love  to  ptey."     What   is  the  sun  ?   is/ 

the  object  n(  love/  627.  Remark  2.  Will  you  now  pyrse  the  remain- 


Since  M'e  have  a  rule  for  fo  lore,     ins  exercises  ander  Note  XtV? 


( 


110  KNGI.ISH    GRAMMAK. 

629.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compose  one  or  more  sentences  having  an  infinitive  gov- 
erned by  a  participle?  One  using  an  infinitive  after  a  noun?  One 
describing  the  manner  of  playing  ball?  One  or  more  on  the  manner 
o( playing  fngl  .One  on  the  duly  of  children  lo  mind  their  parents  ? 
One  or  more  on  industiy  ?  One  on  the  btmneis  you  intend  to  pursue 
for  lile? 

LIX. 

630.  In  the  phrarie  "John  and  James  are  here,"  the  sense  is,  that 
"John  and  James  are  bothhere;  two  persons  are,  therefore,  spoken 
of,  vi^hich  renders  it  necessary  to  use  the  plural  verb  are,  lo  agree 
with  two  nouns  which  individually  are  singular:  hence, 

KULE  XVIII. 

Two  or  f/iore  vouvh  or  pronoinis,  of  the  Hvgular  vvmber,  connected  to- 
gether by  ANP.  either  expressed  or  T.nd'er.'<tnod,  muvd  liave  rerhi>.  nouns, 
and  pro7?o?e/tf!  agreeing  with  thttn  in  the  plural  v umber. 

631.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  William  and  James  run."  "  John  and  Joseph  can  get   their 

*'  Mary    and    Harriet    study,   and  lessons." 

they  will  therefore  excel."  "Time    and     tide    wait    for     no 

"  You  and  I  are  in  fault."  man." 

"  John  and  Thomas  say  they  in-  .'"  My  coat  and   pantaloons  were 

tend  to  study  Lat-in."  made  by  Watson." 

ReviHrJcs,: — William  is  one  of  the  nominatives  lo  the  verb  run. 
JaincH  is  in  the  nominative  case  to  the  verb  rw-H,  and  is  connected 
with  the  noun  ]F^j7?('a?»,  by  Rule  XL  Run  agrees  with  ir(7^V/wj  and 
J.i.m'.y,  by  Rule  XVIII. 

032.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  ANI^  CORRECTED. 
'•  Mary  and  her  cousin  has  come."     "The   farmer   and    his  son    is  \\\ 
"  You  aTid    I   makes  progress    in  town." 

our  studies."  "  Susan  and  her  sister  is  deceit- 

"  Life  and   health  is  both    uiicer-  fnl." 

tain."  "  William  and  John  both  writes  a 

good  hand."' 

RemarJca. —  For  has  come,  we  should  read  have  come,  that  the  verb 
may  be  pltirnl  wiien  it  lias  two  nonn'natives  connected  by  and,  ac- 
cording; to  Rule  XVIII. 


LIX.     When  I. say,  '"Johnan^l  "Mary    and     her    cousin    has 

James  are    here,"  of  how    many  come."     Why    is  this   incorrect? 

j)ersons  do  I  sjx.'ak?  632. 

Should  we,  then,  use  /*•  or  are?  Will  you  |);irse   the  succeeding 

630.  exercises?                                                 < 

What  is  the  rule  for  m-p/^  XVIII.  "Pliny,   the    philosopher     and 

Will    you   now    parse  thi^exer-  naturalist,    has    greatly   enriclied- 
ciset.  utider  RuleXVlU?                 -science."      Why    should    we   use 

"William  and  James  run."   Will  has,   in   this  .sentence,  instead  of 

you  parse  f'F///>V'/)*  in  full  ?    and/,  have,'     Exceplionl. 

Juiiir-e  f  run  ■  "That  sup*rlicial    scholar  and 

Will    von    purse  1  he  next 'exer-  critic  have  given."      Why  is  Aorr 

ciNe?*?  f^ir^ii  incorrrcl  y      Kxi-eption  I. 


^EXERCISES.  1  I  1 

Exception  1. — "WJieii  and  coiinects  two  or  more  notins  in  the  sfngu- 
iflr.  which  refer  to  the  same  person  or  thing,  tlie  verb  must  be  sin- 
gnhir  :  as,  ''  Pliny,  the  philosopher  and  natiirah'st,  has  greatly  enriched 
science." 

<i33.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PAESED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  That    superficial    scholar    and     "  In  that  house  live  a   great  and 

critic    have    g:iven    new    evi-  distinguished      scholar      and 

dence  of  hivS  misguided  jndg-  statesman." 

ment."  "  Mr.  Cooper,  tlte  sailor  and  nov- 

"  There  go  a  benevolent  man  and  -elist,   visit    La   Fayette,    the 

scholar."  patriot  and  philanthropist." 

Exceptio7i  2. — When  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  singular,  connected 
by  nr)?iy,  have  rack  or  e*e^.;/ joined  with  them,  the  M'lb  must  be  in  the 
singi'lar  number  :  as,  "Every  person,  every  hcuse^  and  every  blade  of 
gras.*.  was  destroyed." 

(-34.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  Every  man,  and   every  woman,  "  Each    man     imd    each    woman 
and  every  child,  were  taken.  were  particularly  alluded    to 

*'  Tvvery    tree,    stii^k,   and     twig,  in  the  report  of  thf  affair." 

were  consumed." 

Remark. —  Were,  in  the  first  of  these  example.'^,  f-hould  be  changed 
for  was,  because  reference  is  had  to  each  person,  individually  consid- 
ered, which,  in  respect  lo  llie  verb,  is  the  same  in  etlbct  us  if  one  per- 
son only  was  spoken  of. 

NoTR  W.  h'cert/  is  sometimes  associated  with  a  plural  nonn,  in 
which  case  the  verb  must  be  singular:  as,  "Every  hundred  yenrs  con- 
stitutes a  century." 

<)35.  SENTENCES  TO  RE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 

"  Every  twenty-four  h'lurs  afford     ''  Every  fotir  years  add    another 
to  us  the  vicissitudes  of  day  day   to  the  ordinary   number 

and  night."  of  days  in  the  year." 

Rcmarh. — Afford,  in  the  example  above,  is  a  violation  of  the  note  j 
it  should  be  a(fordn,  in  the  singular  number.  The  reason  of  this  is, 
that  '' every  twenty-four  hours  "  signifies  a  sin<j!f'.  period  o/  time,  and 
is.  therefore,  in  reality,  singular. 

Note  XVI.     A  verb  in  the  plural  will  agree  with  a  collective  noun 


What   is  the  rule  for  Jms  vome?  wrong,    then?     Why?    (330.     Re- 
Exception  1.  mark.                                                    • 

Will  you  correct  and    parse  the  What  is  the  rule  for  this  /  Note 

remaining  exercises  ?  XV. 

In  the  lirsi  example,  under  Ex-  Will  you  ci.rrect  and   ))arse  the 

ception  2,  why  use  was  destroyed^  other  exam[)lc  ? 

rather  than    icere  destroyed?  Ex-  "The    council    were  divided." 

ceiilion  2.  Why   not  icns  ?  Note  XVI.     Rc- 

Will   you  purse  the    remaining  marks.     Rule?  Note  X^I. 

exercises   under  this    exception,  When   is  a  nonn  called   roUeo" 

after  having  corrected  them  ?  f'vi-  .'  306. 

'Every  twenty-four  hours  afford  In  what  circumstance  would  it 

inus."     What  does  "every  twen-  be   proper    lo   use    the   si-ngnlar 

ty-four»hours  ■■  >1gnify — one  peri-  verb?     Note  XYl.     Give  an  ex- 

nd  rff   lime,    or    morp  '     Wit-*    is  aniph- ? 


112 


ENGLISH    GRAM»}AK 


in  the  singular,  when  a  part  only  of  the  individuals  are  meant;  as, 
"Thecouncil  were  divided  in  their  sentiments,"  When  the  noun  e»» 
presses  the  idea  of  unity,  the  verb  >liould  be  singular:  as,  "The 
council  was  composed  wholly  of  farmers." 

Remarks. — In  the  foregoing  example,  we  use  the  plural  verb  were 
dii-ided.  because  we  refer  to  the  individuals  composing  the  council ; 
but  if  no  allusion  of  liiis  sort  had  been  made,  and  we  had  spoken  of 
it  as  one  entire  body,  we  should  have  used  the  singular  verb,  accord- 
ing lo  the  common  rule  :  as,  ''Thecouncil  is  (composed  wholly  of 
farmers." 

We  apply  toco»«ci7,  in  the 'first  example,  Notic  Xyi ;  to  were  divid- 
ed, the  same  note;  and  to  cohhciV,  and  tvas  comjmsed,  in  the  second  ex- 
ample, Rules  VI  and  VII. 


EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX, 
were  divided    in     "  My  people  do  not  consider.'* 


63t5. 

The  CO  unci 

their  sentiments." 

A  part  of  the  men    were  mur- 
dered." 


The  multitude   eagerly    pursue 
pleasure  as  tfteir  chief  good." 


637.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTED. 


"  My  people  doth  not  consider." 
•'The     people     rejoices     in    that 

which  should  give  it  sorrow." 
"The  multitude  rushes  to  certain 

destruction." 


"  Thecomtuittee  was  divided  in 
their  sentiments,  and  has  re- 
ferred the  business  to  a  gen- 
eral meetin"-." 


XL. 

63S.  Negative  meSins  dcni/iny;  and  a^nnative^  asserting  or  declaring 
positively.  A  sentence  in  which  something  is  denied.is  a  negative 
one  ;  and  a  sentence  in  which  something  is  alllrmed  or  positively 
asserted,  is  an  affirmative  one.  "  Vice  degrades  us,"  is  an  affirmative 
sentence,  and  "Labor  does  not  injure  us,"  is  a  negative  one.  Not^ 
notkivq,  none  at  all,  hy  no  means,  no,  in  no  wise,  neither,  no,  none,  etc.,  are 
negative  terms. 

The  phrase,  "I  have  nothing."  has  one  negative,  and  means  "I 
have  not  anything."  The  phrase,  "[have  not  nothing,"  can  not 
mean  the  same  as  "I  have  nothing,"  but  mu.?t  mean,  on  the  con- 
trnry,  "I  have  something."  This  last,  you  perceive,  is  an  affirma- 
tive sentence,  and  signifies  the  same  as  the  foregoing  one,  "I  have 


How  do  you  parse  council? 
Note  XVI.  Remarks.  Were  di- 
vided /  Note  XVI.  Remarks. 
Was  composed,  in  the  second  ex- 
ample?    Note  XVI. 

Will  you  now  parse  and  cor- 
rect the  remaining  exercises  un- 
der this  note  ? 

LX.  What  is  the  meaning  of 
negative  ?  638.     a^lrmatice  ?  633. 

What  is  a  negative  sentence? 
638. . 


An  affirmative  one?  638.  Give 
an  example  of  each. 

Will  you  name  a  few  negative 
terms?  638. 

How  many  negatives  has  the 
phrase  "  [  have  nothing,"  and 
what  does  it  mean  ?  638. 

Mefuiing  of  "  I  have  not  noth- 
ing?" 63S. 

How  many  negatives  has  it? 

^yhdt  kind  of*a  sentenoe  is,  "  I 
haf»o  somethinof  ?  "  638.  * 


EXERCISES.  *»" 

not  nothing."    Two  negatives,  therefore,  are  equal  to  an  affirmative : 
hence, 

RULE  XIX, 
Two  negatives  in  the  same  sentence  are  equivalent  to  an 

normative. 

639.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  PARSED  AND  CORRECTIirD. 

"He  spends  all  the  day  in  idle-     "Be  (I)  honest,  nor  (2)  take  (3) 

ness,  and  1  can  notprevail  on  no  shape    nor   semblance  of 

him  to  do  nothin'g."  disguise." 

♦' He  can  not  get  no  employment     "He   is   so   (4)   indolent   that  he 

in  town."  will  not  do  nothing." 

"  I  can  not  by  no  means  consent."     "  I  did  not  say  notliing." 
"I  shall   not  take  no  interest  iii     "He  can  not  do  nothing  accepta- 

the  aflair."  ^  ble  to  John." 

"  I  never  studied  no  grammar." 

Remarks. — For  nothing,  in  the  above  examples,  read  anything,  in 
accordance  with  Rulk  XIX. 

640.         PROMISCUOUS  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"Deep   river.s    move  with   silent  "The  hog  never  looks  up  to  him 

majesty;    but     small    brooks  who     threshes     down      the 

are  noisy."  acorns." 

"Deeds  are  (Vuits;  words  are  but  "Add  not  trouble  la  the  grief- 
leaves."  worn  hearl." 

"It  is  a  bad  hor-*e indeed  that  will  "  If  tlie  counsel  be  good,  it  is  no 

not  carry  his  own  provender."  matter  who  gives  it." 

What  is  "I  have  not  nothing"  When  transitive  ?  440.     When 

equal  to  in  expression?  63S.  intransitive?  441.      How   may   it 

What,  tlien.  can  we  say  of  two  be  known  ?  154 

negatives?  Rule  XIX.  Will  you  decline  I?  thou'^  he? 

Will  you   next    take   the  exer-  ahe?  it?  127. 

cises  tinder  Rule  XIX.  Of  what  person  i-^  T ?  my?  us? 

What  is  a  noun?  4.     article?  their?  you?  127. 

.^•50.     adjective?   363.     pronoun?  What  is  mood  ?  451.  the  indica- 

3S1.    verb?43S     participle?  4'^S.  tive?  4V2.  potential?  453.  subjunc- 

adverb?   5S*^.     preposition?    59r>.  tive?  45(5.  infinitive  ?  479.  impera- 

conjunction?    602.     interjection?  tive?  472.  How  many  tenses  has 

607.  common   noun?  301.  proper  the  indicative  ?  525.  subjunctive? 

noun?  302.    definite    article?   80.  526.     potential?    527.    infinitive? 

indefinite  article?  S3.  52S.  imperative  ?  529.    What    are 

How  many  properties  in  gram-  tlie   signs  of  the  present   lense? 

mar  have  nouns?  30S.    How  many  519.  iinperlect?  520.  perfect?  521. 

have  verbs  ?=H=  pluperfect?  522.  fir.si  future?  523. 

How     many  •  pnriiciples     are  second  future  ?  524. 

there?*     What    are    they?    500,  Will  you  now  parse  the  promis- 

502,  501.  cuous  exercises? 

When  is  a  verb  active  ?  439. 


(1)  B".  agrees  with  thmior  you  understood,  by  Rule  VII. 

(2)  For  ntrr  read  and. 

(:^)  Take,  is  in  the  iuii)orative  mood,  and  agrees  with  thou  or  you  understood,  and 
Is  therefore  connected  to  be,  according  to  Rule  XI.. 
(4)  Adverb. 
*  Mood,  tense.  immht»r,  Kiid  peison.         I  ThrfP. 

10 


114  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

"By  others'  laults  wise  men  cor-  "  In  yoiiili  and  slreno:ih,  think  of 

reel  their  own."  old  age  and  weakness." 

"When  tlie  world   says  you   are  "All    n^o    not   saints  -vvho  go  to 

wise   Hnd   good,  ask  yourself  church." 

it'  it  he  true."  '■  To  say  wt-U  is  good,  but  to  do 

•'  Sin    and    misery   are    constant  well  is  better." 

companions."  "No  fear  should  deter  us    from 

"Power  discovers  the  dispo.sition  doing  good." 

of  man."  "  Pride,  perceiving  humility  hon- 

" Quarrels  are  easily  begun,  but  orable,    often    borrow.s     her 

with  difficulty  ended."  cloak." 

"Force    without    forecast    is   of  "Say  what  is  well,  but  do  what 

little  worth."  is  belter." 
"  Rome  was  not  built  in  one  day." 

♦Ml.  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  yf)u  compose  one  sentence  describing  the  business  of  an 
iiisfructor  ?  One  the  i)Usiness  of  a  HovUir^  One  the  business  of  a  law- 
j/er?  One  of  a  dctitisf  ?  One  of  k  hurf/c<m  f  One  of  n  fnr.mrv  ?  On«  of 
a  hlnrksmithf  One  of  a  miller?  One  of  a  mirvhonff  One  of  k  yro- 
err  y  Chie  of  an  npot/iecnri/  ?  One  of  a  lp<pdnt«v?  One  of  a  jitdf/c  ' 
One  of  a  colonel /  One  of  a  captain?  One  of  Hr/eucral?  One  of  an 
ac/ciif  iu  n  factory  1     One  of  the  directors  of  a  bank :' 


LXL 

642.  When  1  sny,  "  He  taught  megran)mnr,"  I  mean,  '  He  taught 
grammar  to  me,"  grammar,  then,  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  and  me  is 
governed  by  the  preposition  to,  understood.  In  the  first  example,  we 
have  two  objective  cases  after  the  verb  taught:  and  since  there  are 
many  instances  like  the  preceding,  in  which  transitive  verbs  are  fol- 
lowed by  two  objective  cases — hence  the  following: 

BULE  XX^. 

2ioo  objective  cases,  the  o)te  of  a  person^  and  the  other  of  a  thing,  may 
folloio  transitive  verbs  of  asking.^  teaching,  giving,  etc., — aprej^osition 
beijig  understood. 

"  He  taught  me  grammar.^' 
liemarl:  I. — In  tlie  foregoing  example,  mc  and  grammar  arc  both 
governed  by  tavght,  according  to  Rui,e  XX. 

643.  EXAMPLES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"He  taught  me  grammar."  "  My  mother  wrot<^  me  a  precious 

"  William  asked  me   some  ques-  letter  in  the   month  of  May." 

lions." 

Will  you  nexttakethesenlences  How    many     objective     cases, 

to  be  written  ?  then,  follow  the  vevhtai/ght?  64i2. 

IjXI.  "He    taught    n)e    gram-  What  rule  is  given  for  cases  of 

mar."  AVhal  does  this  mean  ?  042.  this  description  ?  XX. 

What,  then,   is   the  object   of  l.he  By  whoi  are  vie  and  grammar 

verli,    and    by    what    is   gronimar  governed?  042.    Remark  1. 

governed  ?    642.    By    what    is   me  Will   you  next  parse   the  exer- 

gdverncd?  042.  cises  under  Rule  XX  ? 


EXERCISES. 


115 


"They  allowed  him  his  seal   in  ble  book  for  my  attention  to 

Congress."  study." 

"John  gave  me  a  detailed  account     "  She  forbade  him  the  presence  of 

of  the  whole  transaction."  ,    the  emperor." 

"My  instructor  gave  me  a  valua;     "The  French  denied  him  the  privi- 
lege of  an  American  citizen." 


LXII. 
614.  The  natural  construction  of  the  passive  voice  requires  the  ob- 
ject of  the  active  verb  to  become  the  nominative  to  llie  passive  verb: 
as,  "He  taught  mo  grammar;"  "Grammar  was  taught,  me."  In 
some  few  instances  just  the  reverse  takes  place:  as,  "I  was  taught 
grammar;"'  here  the  objtJct,  grammar,  is  placed  after  the  verb.  We 
therefore  derive  the  foUow'ing  : 

RULE  X3il. 

An  objective  case  jnai/  /'of foic  passive  verbs  of  asking,  teaching;  and  some 
others:  as,   "  I  was  taught  grammar."  " 

^^  Apply  to  /,  Rule  VI ;  to  was  taught,  Rule  VII ;  to  grammar, 
.Rule  XXI. 

645.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 


"John  taught  me  music." 
"Music  was  taught  me  1-y  John." 
"A  question  was  asked  me." 
"  Theresa  was  forJ;)idden  the  pres- 
ence of  the  emperor." 


"I  was  taught  grammar." 

"The    preservce   of  the   emperor 

was  forbidden  Theresa." 
"Reading   is    taught    in    almost 

every  school."  » 


LXIII. 

646.  When  I'  say,  "  He  came  home  last  May,"  the  sense  is,  when 
fully  expressed,  "  He  came  ^o  his  home  in  last  May."  "John  con- 
tinued four  years  at  the  university:"  that  is,  '■'•during  four  years." 
"The  horse  ran  a  mile;"  that  is,  "  over  the  space  of  a  mile.''  "John 
went  that  way  :"  that  is,  '•^  over  that  way."  From  these  facts  we  de- 
rive the  following : 


RUJjE  XXII. 

Home,  and  nouns  signifying  which  way,  how  far,  how  long,  or  time 
when,  etc.,  are  in  the  objective  case — a  prepositiofi  being  7inderstood. 

.     647.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"  He  came  home  last  May."  "Charles  studies  six  hours  every 
"John  continued  four  years  at  the  day." 

university."  ".John  rode  that  way." 

".Tohn  M'ent  home  once  a  month.".  "  He  ran  a  mile." 


LXII.  Whafis  the  natural  con- 
struction of  the  passive  voice  in 
reference  to  the  object  ?  644. 
Give  an  example.  644.  Give  an 
example  where  the  reverse  takes 
place.  04^. 

Where  is  the  object  placed  ?  644. 

"  I  was  taught   srrammar."  Will 


you  parse  I?  was  taught  ?  gram- 
mar ? 

Will  you  ^  next  take  the  exer- 
cises under  Rule  XXI. 

LXIII.  "  He  came  home  last 
May."  What  does  this  mean, 
when  more  fully  expressed?  646. 
Will  you  parse  home?  May? 


H6  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

"  Susan  rides  out  every  day."  "  Jolui  was  absent  from  home  six 

"  William  sleeps  comfortably  all  years." 

night."  "James  lived  six  years  at  Mobile, 

twelve  years  at  Richmond." 

Note  XVII.  After  the  words  like  and  unliie,  the  preposition  to  or 
inHo  is  frequently  understood:  as,  "  He  is  like  his  father:"  that  is, 
"like^o  his  iaiher."  "She  i.^  nnlilce  her  sister :"  that  is,  "  unlike  ^o  her 
sister." 

648.  EXERCISES  IN  SYNTAX. 

"He  is  like  his  brother."    _  '*  John  l)ehaves   like  a  man  in  a 

"  William,  unlike  his  father,  fa^si-  violent  rage." 

fied  his  word,"  "He  is  unlike  any  other  mortal." 

Note  XVIII.  Nouns  signifying  duration,  extension,  quantity, 
quality,  or  valuation,  are  in  the  objective  case,  without  any  governing 
word.     The  following  are  examples  :  , 

"The     Atlantic    pcean    is   three     "  The  cart  weighs  fifteen  hundred 

thousand  mile^t  (I')  wide."  pounds." 

"William's  knife  is  worth  eigh-     "The  wall  which  separates  Chi- 

teen     pence,    or    twenty-five  na   from    Tarlary,  commonly 

cents."  called  the  great  Cliinese  wall, 

"Por  that  article,  which  is  richlv        .     is  fifteen  hundred  miles  long, 

worth    a   dollar,   (2)   \te  can  and    from   twenty    to   thirty. 

not  always  get  fifty  cents."  feet  in  height." 

"  The  chasm  is  fifty  feet  broad." 

Remm-hs. — (I)  The  noun  mUen  is  governed  according  to  Note  XVfll. 
(2)  Apply  Note  XVIII. 

Note  XIX.  The  conjunction  as,  after  such^  maui/,  and  «a?He,  is 
generally  considered  a  relative  pronoun;  as  in  the  following  exana- 
ples  : 

"  He  receives  into  his  school  as  "  He  took  such  booties  as  pleased' 

many  scholars  as  (1)  apply."  him." 

"Our  ins^tructor,  who  is  scrupu-  "He  exhibited  the  same  course 

lously  exact  in  the  execution  of  conduct  as  was  once  be- 

of  justice,  punishes  severely  fore  exhibited    on   the    same 

aJl  such  as  disobey    his  com-"  occasion." 

niands." 

Remarks. — (I)  An  is  a  conjunction,  used  here  as  a  relative,  accord- 
ing to  the  Note  preceding  ;  of  the  third  person  plural,  masculine  gen- 
der, agreeing  with  scholars,  according  to  Rut.>E  V  ;  and  in  the  nomina- 
tive case  to  applT/i  according  to  Rule  VI. 

"John  continued  four  years  at  Will  you  next  lake  the  remain- 

the  university."     "  The  horse  ran  ing  exercises  under  Note  XVII? 

a  mile."    What  do  these  sentences  When  is  the,conjiiaiction  nr*  used 

mean,  when  fully  expressed  ?  as  a  relative  pronoun  ?  Note  XIX. 

Will  you   parse   the   exercises  Will  you  parse  a»,  in  the  phrase 

under  Rule  XXII?      '  "  He  received    into  his  school  as 

What  is  the  note  respecting /zj{-<9  many  scholars  as  applied?"   Note 

and  unlU-e?  XVII.  XIX. 

"  He  is  like  his  father."  How  is  Will  you  parse   the,  remaining 

father  parsed?  Note  XVH.  exercises  under'this  Note? 


EXERCISES.  117 

Note  XX.    The  conjunction   than  seems   to  have  the    force  of  a 
preposition  before  the  relative  xohom,  ixx  a  sentence  where  a  compari- 
son IS  made— as  fol/ows  :  ^ 

"Which  when  Beelzebub  per-  -Alfred,  than  whom,  Solomon 
chived,  than  whom,  (J)Satan  excepted,  a  wiser  kin^  never 

-    (2)  excepted,  (3)  none  higher  reigned,  was  one  of  Ihe  ear- 

■^^^-  lie'st  English  kings." 

Remarks.— {{)  Vinwm.  is  governed  by  the  conjunction  than,  used 
as  a  preposition,  according  to  Note  XX.  (2)  ^pply  RuleXVIII  r3^ 
Partic.ple  agreeing  with  Satan,  hy  Km.^XWL  It  is  somewhat  re- 
markable that  If,  in  the  last  two  examples,  the  personal  pronoun  he 
were  substituted   for  ■whom,  it  would   be  in  ahe  nominative  case  :  as, 

A  wiser  kuig  never  reigned  than  he;''  that  is,  ''than  he  was." 

'649.  SENTENCES  TO  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compose  a  sentence  having  a  proper  example  under 
RulkI?    H?    III?    IV?    V?    VI?    VII?    VIII?    IX?    X?  XI?  XTF? 

XIII?  XIV?  XV?  XVI?  XVII?  XVIII?  XIX?  XX?  XXI?  xlii? 

Will  you  construct  a  sentence  descriptive  of  the  calamities  arisinq 
from  fire?  one  on  losses  h^j  sea  f  one  on  tha  fatal  effects  of  linhfninqf 
one  on  the  character  of  our  forefathers  ?  one  on  each  of  the  'seasons  ? 
one  on  the  efiects  of  rain  ?  one  on  the  manner  of  making  ha7f  ?  one  on 
the  appearance  of  soldiers  when  traimnrj  ?  one  on  the  celebration  of  the 
Joiirth  o/  July  ?  one  on  the  ntility  of  fire  f  one  on  the  ntilitu  of  wood  ? 
one  oi\  the  usefulness  of  the  coio  f  one  onfrnit  ?  .     ^  ■ 


When  is  <;m)i  cortsiderad  a  pre-  names     be     used     as     common 

position?      Note   XX.      Give    an  names?  30,3. 

^'\U"'^'f  ■         , ,    ,        ,         „.  How  may   common    names  be 

What    would    be  the   eflect  of  used    to   represent   individuals  "? 

using   the  personal   pronoun    in-  30 i 

•stead  of  the  relative  ?     OlTserva-  What  is  a  collective  noun  ?  SOb. 

tion   under   Note  XX.     Give   an  What    four   things     belong    to 

example.  nouns?     308. 

Will    you   now  take   the    sen-  What  is  gender  ?  312      Ma.scu- 

tences  to  be  parsed  and  written  ?  line  gender?    314.   Feminine  -en- 

or,,     'LmI'"'^'"'^"''*''^''^  ^'^^'^-  ^^''^  315.    Common  gender?  316. 

ool.     Will   you  name  them?  351.  Neuter  gender  '  317 

When    do  we    use    a?    87,    357.  .How  may  nouns,  naturally  neu- 

wT'  r!     '■  1.     ,•  u  *^^'  '^«  <^""^-^''ted  into  tlje  mascu- 
.       ,  ,     oc^o^'^    Tr"'          grammar  Mine  or  feminine  gender?  318. 

teach  .     2b^       How    many   parts  What    is    the  feiniuino    corres- 

r  .T^'too  ^'^  ^'^ereare   in   Eng-  ponding   to  bachelor?  319.     How 

!\;.    7  ,  •           ,           •  '*;  ihe  leminine  here  formed  ? 

What  does  or/Ao^rra.;,;^^  include?  AVill  you  spell  the  feminine  cor- 

What  does  It  teach  us?     291.  tor?    319.     How   is  the  feminine 

What    does    etymoloijy     teAch  ?  here  formed  ?• 

^^?,V,    .  Will  you  spell  the  femi?.ine  cor- 

What  are  proper  nouns  ?     302.  respondin-to/.«raH ?  poet  t  priest  ? 

What  are  common  nouns  ?  301.  Jen)  t  votary  t  tutor  f  hero  ?  dnke^ 

In    what    mani-iT   mny    proper  inofruetnr  >'  M9. 


118 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


LXIV.     OF    WORDS    USED    AS    DIFFERENT    PARTS    OF 

SPEECH. 

650.  That  is  a  relative, 

When  tcho  or  which  may  be  substituted  for  it,  and  make  sense  ;  as, 
■'  The  man  that  [who]  arrived  yesterday." 

651.  That  is  a  demonstrative  pronoun, 

When  it  fs  joined  with  a  noun  to  point  it  out :  as,  ^'  That  man  is  in- 
telb>ent." 

652.  That  is  a  conj'unctionf 

In  all  cases  when  it  is  neither  a  relative  nor  a  demonstrative  pro- 
noun ;  as,  "  He  studies  that  he  may  learn." 

653.  But  is  n.  jjrejm^itiou,' 

When  it  has  the  sense  of  except;  as,  "  All  but  [except]  John  camo. 

654.  But  is  an  adverb, 

When  it  has  the  sense  of  onlij ;  as,  "  This  is  but  [only]  doing  our 
duty."  . 

6.5{>.  But  is  a  conjunction, 

In  all  oases  when  it  is  neither  an  adverb  nor  preposition;  as,  '*Hc 
called,  but  1  refused  to  go." 

650.  As  is  a  relative, 

When  it  follows  many,  tiicli,  or  same;  as,  "Let  such  as  hear  take 
heed." 

657.  As  is  an  adverb, 

When  it  is  joined  to  an  adverb  or  adjecti^ve  in  lEe  sense  of  so ;  as, 
"  He  does  as  well  as  he  can-." 

658.  As  is  a  conjunction, 

In  all  cases  except  when  it  is  an  adverb  or  relative  ;  as,  "■  Ke  did 
as  I  directed  him." 

6.59.  Either  is  a  conjunction,  .  ,  * 

When  it  corresponds  to  or  ;  as,  "  Either  the  one  or  the  other." 

660.  Eitheh  is  a  distribittive  pronoun, 

When  it  means  "one  of  the  two;"  as,  ''You  can  take  either  road." 

661.  Both  is  a  conjunction, 

When  it  is  followed  by  and  ;  as.  "Wo  assisted  him  both  ibr  his  sake 
and  our  own,"' 

662.  Both  is  an  adjective  pronoun. 

When  it  means  "the  two;"  as,  "  Both  the  men  are  guilty." 

663.  Yet  is  a  conjunction, 

When  it  follows  though ;  as,  "Though  he  reproves  me,  yet  I  esteem 
him."  In  all  other  cases  it  is  an  adverb  ;  as,  "  That  event  has  yet  to 
come." 


LXIV,  When  is  that  a  relative  ? 
650.  Give  an  example.  A  de- 
monstrative pronoun  ?  651.  Give 
an  example.  When  a  conjunc- 
tion ?  6.52.     Give  nn  exam|)le. 

When  is  btit  a  preposition  ?  663. 
Give  an  example.  When  an  ad- 
verb? 654.  Give  tin  example. 
When  a  conjunction?  655.  Give 
an  example. 

When  is  as  a  relative  ?  656. 
Give  an  example.  When  an  ad- 
verb ?     657.     Give   an     example. 


When  a  conjunction  ?  65S.  Give 
an  example. 

When  is  either  a  conjunction? 
659.  Give  an  example.  When  a 
distributive  pronoun  ?  660.  Give 
an  example. 

When  is  both  a  conjunction? 
661.  '  Give  an  example.  When 
an  adjective  pronoun  ?  602.  Give 
an  example. 

When  is  yd  a  conjunction  ?  663. 
Give  an  example.  When  an  ad- 
verb? 663.     Give  nn  example. 


PARTS    OF    SPEECH.  119 

CG4.  For  is  a  conjutiction, 

When  it  means  the  same  as  becav/te ;  as,  "He  trusted  liim,  for  he 
knew  that  he  would  not  deceive  him." 

065.  For  is  a  preposition. 

Ill  all  instances  except  when  it  is  a  conjunction  ;  as,  "  He  works 
for  me." 

666.  What  is  a  cnmpovud  relative,  « 

When  it  stands  for  -'that  which;"  as,  "I  will  take  whiil  [that 
which]  you  send  me." 

667.  What  is  an  intq^rogative  relative  pronoun., 

When  used  in  asking  questions  ;  as,  "What  do  you  want?'' 

66S.  What  is  an  arljrctivc  'pronovv, 

When  joined  witli  a  noun  ;  as,  ''What  strange  tilings  he  said  I" 

669.  What  is  a  coinponnd  adjectirr  prnnovn, 

When  joined  with  nouns,  and  has  the  sensi^  of  two  or  more  vi'ords ; 
as,  "  In  what  niannerjie  succeeded,  is  unknown  to  me"^ — that  is,  "The 
manner  ///  lidnch  he  sjiCceeded,  is  unknown  to  me." 

670.  What  is  an  interjection^ 

When  used  to  express  wonder;  a.s,  "What!  take  my  money?" 

(i7I.  Thkn  is  a  conjunrtion, 

When  it  has  the  sense  of  therefore;  as,  "If  he  has  commanded  it, 
then  I  must  ol^ey." 

672.  Then  is  an  adverb, 

When  it  refers  to  time  ;  as,  "  Did  you  hear  it  Ihunder  tlien  ?" 

()73.   Mitch  is  a  nonn, 

When  it  stands  lor  quantity;  as,"  Where  much  is  given,  much  will 
be  required." 

674.  Much  is  an  adjective, 

When  it  is  joined  to  nouns;  as.  "Much  labor  fatigues  us." 

675.  Mtch  is  an  adverb, 

When  it  qualifies  the  same  parts  ofspeech  that  the  adverb  does;  as, 
"Thou  art  much  mightier  than  I." 

670.  More  is  a  noim. 

When  it  implies  quantity;  as,  "The  more  we  have,  the  more  we 
want." 

677.  More  and  :aiost  are  adjectives. 

When  they  qualify  a  noun  ;  as,  "Tlie  more  joy  I  have,  the  more  sorrow 
I  expect;"  "  Most  men  are  mistaken  in  their  pursuit  of  happiness." 

678.  More  and  most  are  adverbs, 

When  used  in  comparison;  as,  "This  boy  is  more  obedient  than 
that;"  "  The  soil  of  Cuba  is  most  fertile." 

When  is/or  a  conjunction  ?  664.  671.     Give   an    example.     When 

Give  an  exariiple.     When  a  prepo-  an  adverb?  672.  Give  an  example, 

silion  ?  665.     Give  an  exani)ile.  When    is   much    a    noun?    67.3. 

When  is  w^f<<  a  compound  rela-  Give  an  example.     \Vhen  an  ad- 

tive  ?     666.     Give     an     example,  jective?    674.     Give  an  example. 

When     an    interrogative    relative  When  an  adverb?  675.     Give  an 

pronoun?  667.     Give  an  fxample.  example. 

When  an  adjective  pronoun?  66S.  When    is    more    a    noun?    676. 

Give  an  example.     When  a  com-  Give  an  example, 

pound    pronoun?    669.     Give    an  When  are  7?(OJf  and  7?io8f  adjec- 

example.     When  an  interjection?  tives  ?    677.     Give    examples    of 

670.     Give  a|i  exam|)le.  each.    When  adverbs  ?  678.    Give 

When    is    then    a    conjunction?  exninples  of  each. 


120 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


679. 


PROMISCUOUS  EXERCISES  TN  SYNTAX. 


1. 


"They  perfume  their  garments." 
"A  perfume  is  a  sweet  odor." 
"  They  rise  early  in  the  morning." 
"A  rise  sometimes  signifies  the 

beginning." 
"  liufiis   speaks  the  language    of 

truth." 
"  James  performed  his  part  well." 
'•A  well  is  a  fountain  of  water." 
"A  well  man  is  one  who  enjoys  his 

health." 
"  We  frequently  wallc  in 'the  gar- 
den." 
'•  The  Jews  fast  often." 
*'  He  walks  very  fast." 
"The  refuse  signifies  the  worth- 
less remains." 
"  Desert  not  a  friend." 
"Joseph's  brethren  eame  and  bow- 
ed down  before  him." 
"William  went  after  his  slate." 


"  His  elder  brethren  came  before 
Benjamin  did." 

"John  left  after  William  came." 

"  Evil  communications  corrupt 
good  manners." 

"Corrupt  conversation  is  very 
foolish." 

"A  walk  in  the  fidds  in  the^ sum- 
mer season  is  delightful." 

'•A  true  fast  is  abstaining  from 
iniquity." 

"  Sin  is  a  moral  evil,  and  the  cause 
of  natural  evils." 

"  Protest  not  rashly,  lest  thou  have 
to  repent  of  it." 

'•'A  protest  is  a  solemn  declaration 
against  a  thing." 

"  Do  nothing  rashly,  lest  thou  pre- 
cipitate thyself  into  inextrica- 
ble ditliculiy." 

"  Hasty  promises  are  seldom 
kept." 


"The  man  that  I  saw  was  exe- 
cuted." 

"That  man  you  met  yesterday  in 
-  the  street  was  taken  and 
sent  to  Mobile,  that  he  might 
have  an  impartial  trial." 

"  We  assisted  him  both  for  your 
sake  and  our  own." 


"  Both  the  men  are  guilty." 

"  Although  he  reproves  me,  yet  I 

esteem  him." 
"  All  but  John  came." 
"This  is  but  doing  our  duty." 
"He  called  me,  but  I  refused  to 

go." 
"  Let  such  as  hear  take  heed." 


What  isn?/m6€r.?  5.  What  does 
the  singular  number  denote?  8. 
What  the  plural.'  10. 

What  nouns  have  the  singular 
form  only?  324.  What  the  plural? 
325.  What  are  the  same  in  both 
numbers  ?  326. 

How  is  the  plural  number  of 
nouns  generally  formed?  327. 

When  nouns  end  in  ch,  sh,  etc., 
how  do  they  form  the  plural  ?  32S. 

How  do  those  ending  in /or  fe? 
329. 

How  is  the  plural  formed  when 
the  singular  ends-in  ^,  with  no  oth- 
er vowel  in  the  same  syllable? 
330. 

What  is  case?  333.  The  nom- 
inative case  ?  335.  Possessive 
case?    .-^37.     How    formed?    338. 


How  formed  when  the  singular 
ends  in  ss  ?  341. 

What  does  the  objective  case 
express  ?  343. 

Will  you  decline  manf  hook? 
345.      Chair?  345. 

Will  you  parse  the  promiscuous 
exc rcises  ? 

What  is  an  adjective?  363. 
What  does  the  positive  state  ex- 
press? 365.  Comparative?  366. 
Superlative?  367.  How  is  the 
comparative  formed  in  monosylla- 
bles ?  369.  How  in  more  syllables 
than  one  ?  370, 

How  d'o  you  compare,  the  fol- 
lowing adjectives — ijoodf  had? 
wise  ?  little  ?  small  ?  xnrtuom  ? 
■mamj  ?  old  ?.   115. 


EXERCISES. 


121 


"He  did  as  I  directed  him." 

"  You  may  take  either  the  one  or 

the  other." 
"  Either  road  will  conduct  you  to 

the  right  place." 
"  If  he  has  commanded  it,  then  I 

must  obey." 
"Did  you  hear  the  report  of  the 

cannon  then  V 
'^  Where  much  is  given,  much  will 

be  required." 
"Future-time  is  yet  to  come." 
"He   trusted  him,   for   he   knew 

that    he   would  not    deceive 

him." 

"Susan  is  determined  to  learn." 

"  By  framing  excuses,  he  pro- 
longed his  stay." 

"  The  man  who  is  faithfully  at- 
tached to  religion,  may  b^  re- 
lied on  with  confidence." 

"  James,  do  visit  me." 


"  He  works  for  me." 
"  He  refused  what  was  sent  him." 
"  What  strange  things  he  saw." 
"In  what  manner  he  succeeded 

is  unknown  to  me." 
"  What !  will  you  take  my  life  ?'* 
"  The  more  we  have,   th^   more 

we  want." 
"  The  more  joy  I  have,  the  more 

sorrow  1  expect." 
"The  most  .dutiful   children  are 

the  happiest  children." 
"Much  labor  fatigues  me." 
"  Thou  art  much  mightier  than  I 

am." 


3. 


"  Virtue  and  vice  are  opposites.** 

"When  John's  father  asked  him 

that  qwostion,  he  heard  him, 

but  refused  to  answer  him."       ^5.. 

"  The  wall  is  sixty  feet  high."  ^ 

"To  meet  our  friends  after  a  long 

absence,  affords  us  much  joy." 


680. 


I^XV.    CONTRACTIONS. 

Of  the  Auxiliary  Have,  also  0/ Had. 

"  I  've  satisfied  myself." 
"They'd  determined  to  let  hira 
go." 


"  They  've  forsaken  him." 
"  1  'd  gone  when  you  came  " 
"They'd     just    returned     from 
town." 


When  does  an  adjective  become 
a  noun  in  parsing?  37S. 

Will  you  name  a  few  adjectives 
which  have  in  themselves  a  su- 
perlative signification  ?  374. 

What  is  a  pronoun  ?  381.  A 
personal  pronoun  ?  382.  Whv 
called  personal  ?  382. 

How  many  persons  have  pro- 
nouns in  each  number?  383.  How 
many  numbers  ?  384. 

To  which  of  the  pronouns  is 
gender  applied  ?  382. 

How  many  cases  have  pro- 
nouns? 3S4. 

Will  you  decline  /?  thouf  hef 
she?  it?  127. 

What  kind  of  a  pronoun  is 
myself  1    386.    How  formed  ?    386. 

What  is  a  relative  pronoun  ? 
409.  Why  called  relative  ?  408. 

What  is   said   of  the   relative 
what?  429. 
II 


How  ought  who  to  be  applied  ? 
412.  How  which?  413.  How  may 
that  be  used  ?  415. 

When  are  pronouns  called  in- 
terrogative ?  431. 

What  are  adjective  pronouns? 
390.  How  many  kinds  of  adjec- 
tive pronouns  are  there  ?  391. 

Which  are  the  demonstrative? 
398.  Why  so  called  ?  398.  The 
distributive  ?  393.  Why  so  called  ? 
393.  The  indefinite?  402.  Why  so 
called?  401. 

To  what  do  this  and  that  refer  ? 
400. 

Will  you  decline  one  *  404. 
other?  403. 

What  is  the  rule  by  which  pro- 
nouns agree  with  their  antece- 
dents ?  V. 

Which  words  in  sentences  are 
antecedents?  420.        * 

What  are  iubsequents  ?  431. 


122  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

fiSl.  Of  "Will  and  'SVorLD. 

"1  Ml  finish  my  work  firpt."  "IJf  is  still  determined  that  he'll 

*'  Tliey  M  Mi:g  >o\\^>  till  uiidniglit,  n<n  lorj-esu/'  " 

if  ihey  were  urged."  "  He  11  at  last  mind  me." 

682.                                     Of  Am  and  Is. 

''That  man 's  rich."  '"T  is  stran^re  that   she  will  not 

"  'T  is  true  J-be  "s  dead."  regard  the  kind  asbit-lance  oi' 

*' I 'ni  f-orry   that    y^n    have  mis-  her  friend." 
epeni  your  lime." 

6S3.  Oi  Can  Not  avd  Will  Not 

"  Hetan'l  endure  J-uchafflitiions."  "  H^  won't  disobey  me." 

"You    can'i    be   absent   al   such  ♦'Yon    v  on"t   mi&take   the   direc- 

times,"  lion." 

CH.     Cmisfiov.s  of  the  Piivcij^al  Verb  ojler  an  Intfrrogative  Sentfince. 

'»  "VYho  will  a^s'if^  ne  ?"    *'  John"  "What  will  make  me  re.<petlable 

[will  a^^i^l  me].  ^^"'^  hj.ppy?"  '-Virtue." 

"What    sent    our    forefathors    to  ""Who    tan-ilit     him     grammar?" 

this  country  V  "  The  love  of  "  Mr.  "Williams." 
liberly." 
6S5.          Cmisaiovs  of  the  Pri^,cij^al  Verb  after  an  Auxiluny. 

"Sti  i^hf  n  will   go  if  John  will"  "He  leceived    me    in    the   same 

[go].  manner  that  1  would  you." 

"  Susan  shall  walk,bul  John  shall  •'  I  w  ill  do  it  h>  soon  as  1  can." 

lioi."  "The  work  i>  not  completed,  but 

"  1  have  recited  ;  have  you  V  soon  will  be." 

C86.      Cmissioris  of  Ihc  Prindpal  Verb  after  Than 

and  As. 

"Thrmas  is  n  better  scholar  than  "Johnson  is  richer  than  James." 

"Willian)*'  [is].  "^us-an    is    not    so    beautiiul    as 

"He was  more  beloved  than  Cyn-  Wary." 

tliia,   but   not   so    njuch    ad-  "She    is   more  playful   than  her 

%      mired."  brother." 

AVill   you   parse   the  exercises  "  What  belong  to  verbs  ?* 

marked  2?  Ihw  many  numbers  have  they  ? 

What  is  a  verb  '?  438.  How  many  i»er>ons?f 

"What  is  an  active  verb?  439.  What     is    mood  ?     451.      How 

When  is  an  active  verl)  iransi-  mnny    are  they?    4S1.    Will  you 

live*?    440.    When    intransitive?  name  them? 

44],  What  is   the    indicative   mood 

What  is  a   passive  verb?  444.  used    frr  ?    4.'')2.    The   potential? 

How  formed  ?  .'JIO.  4r3.  The  imperative?  A'%    Sub. 

How  may  a  transitive  verb  be  junctive?  4Ct>.  Infinitive?   479. 

known?   154.  What     are     juirticiples  ?     408. 

How  an  intransitive?  154.  How  may  the  pnrticiples  ending 

What  is  a  neuter  veib?  450.  in  ??/^'  be  d'stingni.-«hed  fr(ni  other 

"Will  you   next   lake  the  exer-  words  of  like  teruiiuation  ?  500. 

cises  marked  3  ? 


CONTRACTIONS.  123 

687.  Omissions  of  the  Verb  To  Be. 

"Sweet  the  pleasure,  rich  the  "Delightful  taslc,  to  rear  the  ten- 
treasure."  der  thought, 

"A  child  of  freedom  thou."  "  To  teach  the  young  idea  how  to 
"Sweet  the  music  of  birds."  shoot." 

"  Dear  the  >chool-boy's  sport." 

688.  Omissions  of  May,  Might,  Could. -Would, 

and  Should. 

"  Live  long  and  be  happy."  "He  mJ.o:ht  not  weep,  nor  laugh, 

"Who  will  entreat  the  Lord  that  nor  sing." 

he  spare  our  lives?"  "  Should  I  forgive  you,  and  allow 

"1  could  not  think,  nor  speak,  nor  you  to  depart,  you  would  not 

hear."  reform." 

689.  Omissions,  of  the  Conjunction  before  the  Verb 

in  the  Subjunctive  Mood. 

"  If  he  will  repent  and  reform,  I  "Had  I  improved  my  time  as  I 
will  assistt  him."'  ought  to  have  done,  1  should 

"  Unless  good  order  be  restored,  have  been  well  qualified  for 

and  the  former  officers  be  re-  business." 

elected,  there  will  be  an  end  "Were   there    no    alternative,    I 
to  the  administration  of  JUS-  ,  would  not  do  that." 

tice." 

690.  Omissions  of  For  after  a  Verb,  implying  the 

idea  of  serving. 

"  Make  me  a  pep."  "  Bring  me  some  water." 

"Order  me  a  carriage."  "Purchase  him  a  knife." 

69 L  Omissions  of  the  Interjection. 

"Sweet  child!  lovely  child!  thy  "  Thou  Preserver  and  Creator  of 
parents  are  no  more."  all  mankind." 

"Sweet  blossom!  precious  to  my  "My  beloved  Ulrica!  hast  thou, 
heart."  too,  forgotten  me?" 

How  ma'ny,  and  which,  are  tTie  we  use  the  present  for  the  past 

participles?*      What     does     the  tense?  486. 

present   express?   500.    Perfect?  What  is  the  coni'ugation  of  a 

502.  Compound  perfect?  504.  verb?  531. 

LXV.     Will  you  next  parse  the  What  is  the  conjugation  of  an 

contractions?  bSO.  active  verb  styled  ?  532.     A  pas- 

What  is-  tense?. 494.     What  is  give  verb?  532. 

the  present  used  for?  4»2.     The  How  manv  tenses  has  the  fn-- 

perfect?  imperfect?  4SS.    Pluper-  dicative?    525.     Potential?   527? 

feet?. -491.      First    future?    492.  Subjunctive  ?  520.      [mperative? 

Second  future?  493.  529.     Infinitive?  528. 

Under  what   circumstances   do  What  is  the  sign  of  the  present 

we  use  the  present  tense  to  de-  indicative  ?  519.     The  imperfect  ? 

note  the  relative  time  of  a  future  520.     Perfect?   521.     Pluperfect? 

action  ?4S4.  522.     First  future  ?  523.     Second 

In  what  sort  of  descriptions  do  future?  524.    The  polentiril  mood  ? 


*  Tbra^— -tb*  praatiati'Tibrfaot,  and  ocaaj^imiid  perft?ct. 


124  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

692.  Omissions  of  the  Relative. 

''Several    men    are    there   come     "  I  trust  that  he  I  desire  to  see  so 
from  Europe."  much,  will  speedily  return." 


^         — ^^CXVI.    INVERTED  SENTENCES. 

693.  7Vie  Nominative  Case  placed  after  the  Verb. 

"Smack  went  the  whip,    round  guished  for  his  learning  and 

went  the  wheels."  '  politeness." 

"Were  ever  folks  so  glad  ?"  "And  in  soft  ringlets  waved  her 

"There  goes  a  man  alike  dislin-  golden  hair." 

694.  The  Objective  Case  before  the  Verb. 

"Tyrants  no  more  their  savage  "  Me  glory  summons  to  the  mar- 
nature  kept,  tial  scene." 

And  foes  to  virlue  wondered  how  "  The  rolls  of  fame  I  will  not  now 
the  wept."  explore." 

695.-  SENTENCES  TO  BE  WRITTEN. 

Will  you  compose  a  sentence  exemplifying  Rule  VIII?  One, 
Rule  IX  ?  X  ?  Xn  XTI  ?  XIII  ?  XIV  ?  Will  you  compose  a  sentence 
on  the  use  of  the  dog  ?  One  on  the  clouds  f  One  on  night'i  One  on 
wind  f  One  on  snow?  One  on  haill  One  on  ice?  One  on  skating? 
One  on  fishing?  One  on  courage?  One  on  cowardice?  One  on  filial 
duty?     Owe  on  indolence  ?     Ona  on  schools  ? 

6%.  SENTENCES  TRANSPOSED. 

'*  Here  I'ests  his  head  upon  the  lap  of  earth 
A  youth,  to  fortune  and  to  fame  unknown. 

TrciJisposed. 
"A  youth,  unknown  to  fortune  and  to  fame,  rests  here  his  head 
upon  the  laj)  of  earth." 

515.  Infinitive?  517.  Subjunctive?     feet?     Pluperfect?    First  future? 

516.  How  many  persons  has  the     Second  future  ? 

imperative?  OlS.  How  many  tens-  In   what   voice,    mood,    tense, 

es?  529.     How  many  forms   has  number,  and  person  is,  "  I  love?" 

the  subjunctive  mood?   4*61.     In  "  We  love  ?  "    "They  are  loved?" 

what  do  they  differ?  461.  "You   are?"      "I    did    learn?" 

Will  you  now  parse  the  omis-  "John   was    instructed?"     "He 

sions?  684,  etc.  was?"     "They  have  returned  ?" 

Howis  the  passive  vorb  formed?  "Have  they  gone?  "    "They  have 

510.  been?"     "I  had  had?"     "They 

Will  you  decline  love  in  the  in-  had  been  distinguished  ?  "  "Thou 

dicative    present,    passive?    and  hadst     been?"      "You    shall    be 

the  verb  <o   be  in  the  imperfect?  taught?"    "Shall  I  bei)unished  ?  " 

Perfect?     Pluperfect?     First  fu-  "  F»le  shall  have  been  ?  " 

lure?     Second  fwture?     Present  LXVI.   Will  you  parse  the  in- 

potejitial  ?     Imperfect?    Perfect?  veried  sentences  ?  693,  etc. 

Pluperfect?  Present  subjunctive.  In   what   voice,    mood,    tense, 

common  form?    Imperfect?   Per-  number,  and   person,   is   "Love 


SENTENCES    TRANSPOSED.  125 

e 

"  When  young,  life's  journey  I  began, 

The  ghttering  prospect  charmed  my  eyes, 
I  saw  along  the  extended  plain, 
Joy  after  joy  successive  rise  : 
But  soon  I  found  't  was  all  a  dream.  " 

And  learned  the  fond  pursuit  to  snun, 
Where  few  can  reach  the  purposed  aim, 
And  thousands  daily  are  undone." 

Transposed. 
"I  began  life's  journey  when  young,  and  the  glittering  prospect^ 
charmed  my  eyes;  I  saw  joy  after  joy  successive  rise,  along  the  ex-*" 
tended  plain:  but  soon  I  foiftid  it  was  all  a  dfbam  ;  and  learned  to 
shun  the  fond  pursuit,  where  fewtsan  reach  the  purposed  aim,  and 
thousands  are  daily  undone." 

"  Needful  austerities  our  wills  restrain, 
i^s  thorns  fence  in  the  tender  plant  from  harm." 

Transposed. 
"Needful  austerities  restrain  our  wills,  as  thorns  fence  in  the  ten-  "^ 
der  plant  from  harm." 

"On  some  fond  breast  the  parting  soul  relies. 
Some  pious  drops  the  closing  eye  requires; 
E'en  from  the  tomb  the  voice  of  nature  crieis, 
E'en  in  our  ashes  live  their  wonted  fires." 

Transjwsed. 
"The  parting  soul  relies  on  some  fond  breast;  the  closing  eye  re- 
quires some  pious  drops;  the  voice  of  nature  cries,  even  from  the 
tomb;  and  their  wonted  fires  live  even  in  our  ashes." 

"From  lofty  themes,  frem  thoughts  tlftt  soared  on  high 
And  opened  wondrous  scenes  above  the  sky, 
My  Muse!  descend  ;  indulge  my  fond  desire. 
With  softer  thoughts  my  melting  soul  inspire, 

thou  ? "  "I  may  go  111     "  You  may  Will  you  repeat  the  present  and 

be  regarded?"     "  W)u    might  be  imperfect  tenses,  also  the  perfect 

rejoiced?"    "She  may  have  been  participle  of  am  ?  see?  hear?  do? 

refused?"      "We    should    have  we^t  sink?  swim? 

been?"     "  If  I  have  ?  "    "If  thou  Will  you  next  takelhe  sentences 

have?"     "If  thou    hast?"     "To  to  be  written? 

have  ?  "     "  To  have  been  ?  "  What  are  auxiliary  verbs  ?  511. 

Will  you  give  the  synopsis  of  How  many  and  which  are  they"? 

learn,  through  all  the  moods,  tens-  512. 

es,  etc.,  in   the    first    person,    in-  What  are  defective  verbs  ?  579. 

eluding  the  participle?     Learn, '\n  What  is  an  adverb?  588.     Why 

like  manner,  in  the  passive?     The  so  called ?  228. 

verb  <o  6e  in  the  same  manner  ?  In  what   manner   are   adverbs 

Will  you  give  the  synopsis   of  compared?  230,231. 

denire  in  the  active  voice,  with  the  What  are  the  phrases  wliich  do 

participles?     Of  the  same  in  the  -the  oflice  of  adverbs.called  ?  589. 

assive?     Of  do   in    the    active?  Will  you  name  a  few  ?  5S9. 


•?, 


n  the  passive?      ^  What  is  a  prepo.'^ition  ?  595. 

When  is  a  verb  balled  regular?         Will  you  repeat  the  list  ol  pre- 
633?     When  irregular?  53-i.  positions  ?  247. 


VZ(S  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

And  smooth  my  numbers  to  a  female's  praise; 
A  partial  world  will  listen  to  my  lays. 
Wliile  Anna  reigns,  and  s^ets  a  female  name 
Unrivalled  in  the  glorious  lists  olfame." 

Transjwaed. 

"O  my  Muse!  descend  thou  from  lofty  themes,  and  from  thoughts 
that  soared  on  high,  and  opened  wondrous  scenes  above  the  sIvy ;  in- 
dulge thou  my  Ibnd  desire;  and  do  ihou  inspire. my  melting  soul  with 
goiter  thought^,  and  smooth  my  numbers  to  a  female's  praise:  a  par- 
tial world  will  listen  to  my  lays,  while  Anna  reigns,  and  sets  a  female 
name  unrivalled  in  tli#glorious  lists  of  ^iinje." 

» 

What   is   a  conjunction  ?  "G02.     ticiples  ?     XIII.     Agreement     of 
Conjunction      copulative?      2^35.     verb  ))lural  with  two  nouns  sin- 
Why  so  called?    2G4.     Cohjunc-    gular?     XVlil.     Adjective     pro- 
tion   disjunctive?   274.     Why   so     nouns  and  numerals  ?  Note  I. 
called?  271.  What  is  the  rule  by  which  a  verb 

Will  you  repeat  the  list  of  copa-  agrees  with  ihe  noun  of  multitude, 
lative  conjunctions?  266.  Ofdis-  or  collective  noun?  Note  XVI. 
junctive  conjunctions?  275.  Rule  for  the  objective  case  after  a 

What    is   an    interjection?   607.     transitive  verb?  VIII. 
Why  so  called?  2S3.     Mention  a         What  is  the  rule  for  the  objec- 
few  ?  2S5.  tive  case  alter  a  preposition'  X. 

What  is  syntax?  296.  What  is  After  a  participle?  XIV.  Rule 
a  sentence?  252.  A  simple  sen-  for  the  adverb?  IX.  •  Rule  re- 
tence?  253.  '  specting  the  interjections  0/  oh! 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  agree-     ah  !  etc.?  Note  X. 
ment  of  nouns?  XV.     Ariicles?        Will  you   par<e  the  sentences 
II,    in.     Adjev'tives  ?    IV.     Pro-    marked  transposed  ? 
nouns?    V.    Verbs?    TIL    Par- 


m 


GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS. 


SYNTAX. 

That  part  of  Grammar  which  treats  of  the  formation  and  sound  of 
the  letters,  the  coinbinatioii  of  letters  into  syllables*,  and  syllables  into 
words,  is  called  Orlhography. 

That  part  which. treats  of  the  different  sorts  of  words,  their  various 
changes,  and  their  derivations,  is  tilled  Etymology. 

That  part  whiclh^tWSKt#  of  the  union  and  rijht  order  of  words  in  the 
formation  of  sentences,  is  called  Syntax. 

Gkamm^tIi  may  be  considered  as  consisting  of  two  species.  Universal 
and  Particular.  Universal  Grammar  explains  the  principles  which 
are  common  to  all  lan<rua«res.  Particular  Grammar  applies  those 
principles  to  a  particular  laui^uage,  modifying  them  according  to  the 
genius  of  that  tongue,  and  the  established  practice  of  the  best  writers 
and  speakers  by  whom  it  is  used. 

^"  Langtjage,  in  tie  proper  sense  of  the  word,  signifies  the  expression 
or  our  ideas,  and  their  variou-s  relations,  by  certain  articulate  sounds, 
which  are  used  as  the  signs  of  those  ideas  and  relations.  An  articu- 
late sound  is  the  sound  of  the  human  voice,  formed  by  the  organs  of 
speech. 

Lrtters  are  the  representatives  of  certain  articulate  sounds,  the 
elements  of  the  language. 

The  letters  of  the  Entrlish  Language,  called  the  English  Alphabet, 
are  twenty-six  in  number,  each  of  which  constitutes  the  first  principle, 
or  least  part  of  a  word. 

Letters  are  divided  into  vowels  and  consonants.  ^ 

A  vowel  is  a  letter  that  can  be  perfectly  sounded  by  itself.  The 
vowels  are  n,  e.  i,  o,  u,  and  sometimes  >a  and  y.  IF  and  y  are  con<*o- 
nants  when  they  begin  a  word  or  syllable;  bui  in  every  other  situa- 
tion they  are  vowels. 

A  consonant  is  a  letter  that  can  not  be  perfectly  sounded  without 
the  aid  of  a  vowel;  as,  b,  d,/,  I.  All  letters  except  the  vowels  are 
consonants. 

Consonants  are  divided  into  mutes  and  semi-vowels. 

The  mutes  can  not  be  sounded  at  all,  without  the  a'd  of  a  vowel. 
They  are  A,  7;,  t,  d,  k,  and  c  and  7  hard. 

The  semi-vowels  have  an  imperfect  sound  of  themselves.  They 
are,/.  L  »>,  n,  r,  r,  .v,  z,  x,  and  c  and  (j  soft. 

Four  of  the  st^mi-vowels,  namely.  /,  m,  lu  ?•,  are  cslled  liquids,  be- 
cause they  readily  unite  with  6ther  consonants,  and  How,  as  it  were, 
inid  their  sounds, 

A  diphthong  ir-  the  union  of/«)f)  vowels,  pronounced  by  a  single  im- 
pulse ot  the  voice:  as,  oi  in  voic'?,  on  in  ounce. 

A  lri|)hihong  is  the  union  of  three  vowels,  pronounced  ia  like  man- 
ner: as,  eau  in  beau,  ietc  in  vimo. 


128  KNOLI^H    GRAMMAR. 

A  proper  diphthong  i»  liiat  in  which  both  the  vowels  are  sounded: 
as  oi  in  totce,  ou  in  ouuce. 

An  improper  diphthong  has  but  one  of  the  vowels  sounded  :  as,  ea 
in  (Oijle.  on  in  buat. 

A  SYLI.ABI.K  is  a  sound,  either  simple  or  compounded,  iTliered  by  a 
single  inipui!-e  ol  tlie  voice,  and  cont-liliiting  a  word  or  part  of  a  word; 
88,  a.  an,  ant, 

A  word  of  one  syllable  is  called  a  Monosyllnble ;  a  word  of  two 
syllables^  a  Dissiyllable  ;  a  word  of  three  syllables  a  Trisyllable;  a 
word  m  four  or  more  syllables,  a  Polysyllable. 

Words  are 'articulate  sounds,  used  by  common  consent  as  signs  of 
our  ideas. 

Words  are  of  two  sorts — primitive  and  derivative. 

A  primitive  word  is  that  which  can  not  be  reduced  to  a  simpler  word 
in  the  language:  as,  man,  good. 

A  (ieriraiire  word  is  that  which  may  be  reduced  to  a  simpler  word: 
as.  maufitl,  goodueas.  '    J 

The  elementary  sounds,  under  tlieir  smallest  combination,  produce 
a  tyllahU ;  Kyllables,  projierly  combined,  produce  a  word;  words, 
duly  combined,  prcduce  a  nciitence  ;  and  Sentences,  properly  combined, 
produce  an  uration,  or  discourne. 

A  sentence  is  an  assemblage  of  words,  forming  complete  senne. 

Sentences  ore  o(  two  kinds — simple  and  conipound. 

A  simple  sentence  has  in  it  but  one  subject,  and  one  finite*  verb: 
as,  "  Life  is  short." 

A  com))ound  sentence  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  sentences 
connected  together:  as,  "Life  is  short,  and  art  is  long." 

As  sentences  themselves  are  divided  into  simple  and  compound,  so 
the  members  of  sentences  may  l)e  divided  likewise  into  simple  and 
compound  members;  for  whole  sentences,  whether  simple  or  com- 
pound, may  become  members  of  other  sentences  by  meanx  of  some 
additional  connection;  as  in  the  following  example:  "The  ox  know- 
elh  Ins  owner,  and  the  ass  his  master's  crib:  but  Israel  doth  not 
know,  my  people  doth  not  consider."  This  sentence  consists  oT  two 
compounded  meriibers,  each  of  which  is  subdivided  into  two  simple 
members,  which  are  properly  called  clauses. 

A  phrase  is  two  or  more  words  rightly  put  together,  making  some- 
times a  part  of  a  sentence,  and  sometimes  a  whole  sentence: 

The  i>rincipal  y;irts  of  a  simple  sentence  are  the  suliject,  the  attri- 
bute, and  the  object. 

The  subject  is  the  thing  chiefly  spoken  of;  the  attribute  is  the 
thing  or  action  affirmed  or  denied  of  it;  and  the  object  #  the  thing 
affected  by  such  action. 

Tlie  nominative  case  denotes  the  subject,  and  usually  goes  before 
the  verb  or  attribute;  and  the  word  oi-  phrase  denoting  thi*  object 
follows  the  verb:  as,  "A  wise  man  governs  his  passions."  Here  a 
u-ine  tnou  is  the  subject;  yoiervt,  the  attribute  or  thing  iifliriiicd;  and 
^ij^a«4t'o7;#,  the  object. 

J^yntax  princij)al!y  consists  of  two  parts — Concord  and  Government. 
Coiicord'is  the  nf^reement  which  one  word  has  with  another  in  gen- 
der, number,  case,  or  person.  Government  is  that  powder  which  one 
part  ol  speech  has  over  another,  in  directing  its  mood,  tense,  or  case. 


♦Finite  Torbs  Hie  ilioBe  t(i  which  minibfr  niiil  jn'r.-iii  nppertftin.    Veibs  In  the 
infinitive  mood  bine  no  rope  ct  to  nimibtr  uml  peraon. 


-^ 


SYNTAX.  l5J9 

What  is  Uithograpliy  ?  Eiymulogy  ?  Syntax  f  How  many  kinds  of 
grammar  are  there  ?  What  are  lliey  ?  "What  is  universal  grammar  ? 
Particular  grammar  ?  What  is  language  ?  What  is  an  articulate 
sound?  "What  are  the  letters  of  the  English  language  called?  "What 
does  each  constitute  ?  How  are  letters  divided  ?  What  is  a  vowel  ? 
Which  are  they?  How  many  do  they  maW^?  When  are  w  and  y 
consonants?  When  vowels  ?  "What  is  a  consonant  ?  Give  an  ex- 
ample. Which  letters  are  consonants  ?  How  are  the  consonants 
divided  ?  What  is  a  mute  ?  Which  are  they  ?  What  is  a  semi-vowel  ? 
Which  are  they?  Which  of  the  semi-vowels  are  called  liquids,  and 
why?  What  is  a  dij)hlhong  ?  Give  an  example.  What  is  a  triphthong  ? 
Give  an  example.  What  is  a  proper  diphthong?  Give  an  example. 
What  is  an  improper  diphthong?  Give  an  example.  What  is  a  syllable  ? 
monysyllable  ?  dissyllable  ?  trisyllable  ?  pollysyllable  ?  What  are 
words?  Of  how  many  sorts  are  they?  "What  is  a  primitive  word  ? 
Give  an  example.  What  is  a  derivative  word?  Give  an  example. 
What  does  an  elementary  sound  produce?  What  do  syllables  pro- 
duce? Words?  Sentences?  What  is  a  sentence  ?  How  are  sentence's 
divided?  What  is  a  simple  sentence?  Compound  sentence?  Give  an 
example  of  each.  How  are  the  members  of  sentences  divided?  Give 
an  exam^jle.  What  is  a  phrase  ?  What  are  the  principal  parts  of  a 
simple  sigjitence  ?  What  is  the  su])ject?  the  attribnte?  the  object? 
What  does  the  nominative  case  denote  ?  and  where  is  it  usually 
placed  in  a  sentence?  Give  an  example.  Of  how^  many  parts  does 
Syntax  consist  ?    What  are  they  ?    What  is  concord  ?    Govecnment  ? 

The  right  construction  of  sentences  may-  perhaps  be  best  learned 
by  correcting  examples  of  wrong  construction.  Exercises  in  false 
syntax  for  the  pupil,  assisted  by  rules  and  notes  to  parse  and  correct, 
will  therefore  now  be  given. 

The  following  contain  all  the  notes  and  observations  in  Murray's 
large  Grammar,  together  with  all  his  exercises  in  false  syntax : 

RULE  VII.  ^^  V    . 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar,  ^^sfi\J 

RULE    I. 

A    verb  viuat   agree  with  its  nominative  case  in  ti umber  a7id  person. 

The  following  are  a  few  instances  of  the  violation  of  this  rule: 
"What  signifies-  good  opiniotw:,  when  our  practice  is  bad?"'  "what 
signify  .*"  "  There  's  two  or  three  of  us,  who  have  seen  the  work  :" 
*'  there  are.^^  "  We  may  suppose  there  was  more  impostors  than  one  :" 
"  there  were  more."  "1  have  considered  what  have  been  said  on'both 
sides  in  this  controversy."  "what  has  been  said."  "If  thou  would 
be  healthy,  live  temperately:"  "thou  wovldsty  '^Thou  sees  how  little 
has  been  done:"  "thou  Aee*/."  "Though  thou  can  not  do  much  for 
the  cause,  thou  may  and  should  do  something:*'  ^^  canst  not,  mayst, 
and  shouldn't.''''  "Full  many  a  flower  are  born  to  blush  unseen  :" 
"  is  born."'  "  A  conformity  o/  inclinations  and  qualities  prepare  us  for 
friendship:"  ^'  pr^parfs  us."  "  A  variety  of  ble^sinps  have  been  coii- 
fened  upon  U!«  :"  "  has  been."  ''  !«  piety  and  virtue  consist  the 
happiness  of  nian  :"  ^'  consists.'^  "To  these  precepts  are  subjoined  a 
copious  selection  of  rules  and  maxims  :"'  "  is  subjoined."' 


I3U 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


•'Ifihou  would  be  healthy,  livf  lemperaiely."  Which  word  is 
wrona  in  this  exrtmple  ?  In  wh.it  piniiMiUr  wronj^?  Wljy  ?  Whut 
is  the  Kiile  for  it?  How,  then,  \vo(iM^  ynii  correct  the  example? 
*'  There  was  more  eqiiivDCiUorH  ?'  Which  word  is  wr  ju^  here  ? 
What  correction  ^lu)uld  be  made?  Why  ? 

pS*  The  pupil  M  fir9t  to  nnttptr  the  qncntiont  on  eicli  Rule  or  yot^  ^ 
then  III  correct  and  p-trnf  the  ^u'lncju'iit  exercl^en.  ft  j"»  nnj le^trd  to  the 
tetchcr  t/i'nt  the  pipiU  yhonlil  dlre^'t  their  att^nli'iti  Jirit  dt  the  liilen  and 
exercieen  under  thfm,  exclii'iire'y,  onitrinj  the  N^otei.  vtc, /or  a  review. 


when  ail  m  ly  be  taken  in  cour$(t. 

"  Disappointments  v/w/.t  the  heart 
of  in:in;   but    the  renewal  of 
.    Uope.give  consblaiinn." 

"The  smiles  ilial  (I)  encoiira-fe 
_,      severity    of   judi^ment    hidft 
mrthce  and  insiiiceriiy." 

*'  He  dare  not  act  (2j  coiiirary  (3) 
to  his  insiructionH." 

"  Fifty  pounds  of  wlieat  contains 
foriy  pounds  of  tloiir." 

"  The  mechauism  of  clo(;ks  and 
watches  were  totally  un- 
known (4)  a  few  ceoluries 
ago."'  (r)) 

"The  number  of  inlial>itantH  in 
Great  iiritain  and  Ireland  do 
not  exceed  sixteen  millions.'' 

"Nothing  (ti)  but  vain  And  foolish 
piirtmiia  ^)  dt:liffht  some  per- 
sons." 

"A  v.ir'ety   of    pleasing'   objects 
charm  the  eye." 
o  (b)    much    (U)  both    (10)    of 
ability  and  merit  (11)  are  .sel- 
dom (I -J)  found." 

"In  the  conduct  of  Parmenio  a 
mixfure  of  wisdom  and  folly 
(I I)   were  very   (5)  conspio 

UOUK." 

"He  is  an  author  (13)  of  more 
credit  than  Plutarch,  (14)  or 

f my  other  fl.'j}  that   (II)  write 
ives  too  {V^)  hastily." 
"  The  inqui>ilivc  (10>  anil  eurioin 
(U)  is  generally  lalkative."  (17) 


"Gre.U  piins  h!»s  been  taken  to 
reconcile  the  p.irties." 

"The  sincere  (IG)  is  always  es- 
teemed." 

*'  Has  the  sfoods  been  sold  to  J^d- 
vaniasfe?  and  did  thou  em- 
brace the  proper  season." 

"There  is  many  occasions  (6)  in 
life  in  wiiich  silenctfpnd  sim* 
pliciiy  (II)  is  irue^^isdom." 

''The    generous    (10)    never     re- 
counts   minutely    the  actions 
.they  have  done;  nor  the  pru- 
dent  (7)  those  (15)  they  will 
do." 

''  He  need  not  proceed  (2)  in  sucli 
haste." 

"Th^  business  that  (1)  related  to 

ecclesiuslical  meetings,  mat- 

*ters,  (II)    and    persons, .( 1 1) 

were  to  be  ordered  r.ccordins' 

(1^)  to  the  kin^s  direiiu)n." 

"In  hnn  were  happily  blended 
true  di:^niiy  with  softness  of 
manners," 

'*  Tlu*  support  of  so  (19)  many  (20) 

of  his  relations  were  a  heavy 

lax    ("21)  upon  his  industry; 

but    thou    knows    he   ))aid  il 

*  cheerfully." 

"  What  (22)  avails  the  best  senti- 
ments (23)  if  persons  do  not 
live  suitably  to  them  ?' 

"  Not  one  (24)  olthem  whom  thou 
sees  clothed  (2-''i)  in  purple 
are  completely  happy." 


^l)  .?«e  6.-)!).  (2)  Ap;)ly  Rule.XIf.  Sho4S).  (3)  A'ljottivo.  (4)  Rnlo  XITI.  (5) 
A  few  c-'Htiiriei  u^o  —  in  iilvorltiil  p'tpu.*— )S) ;  nr  uiipiv  Noto  XVIII,  010.  to 
centuries,  an  I  Kiilo  fX  to  ri,n.  /»i)  Riilu  Vt.  CTj  Ituie  .\l.  8)  'lit.  (J)  67:1.  (10)  «61. 
(11)  ilMlcsXI.  (l-Z)  AUvvb.  (l.J)  IluU-ICV— 'U3.  (U;  •  I'lut  ucli  it."  (10'  Note  1  — 
4'A>inl  Rule  XI.  (l(i)  :i78.  (17)  Rul.j  IV.  (IS)  211.  (ly)  •2i'i.  (20)  378.  (2\)  Kiilo 
XV.  613.  {21j  llulo  VIII.   (Jl)  Rub  VI.  (21)  Noto  I,  iOo,  auJ  l\alQ  VI,  ^26)  Rule 


^  •  SYNTAX.  131 

"  And  the  fame  of  this  person,  and     "Thou,  who  art  the  Author  (10) 
of  his  wonderful  aciioiis,  were  and  Bestower(ll)  of  hfe,  cari 

diffused    (1)    throughout    the  doul)lless  re.sto>e  it  also  ;  hut 

couiilry."  wlie-iher  thou  will    please  to 

"The  variety  of  the  productions  restore  it,  or  not,  that  Thou 

of  g'enius,  like  ("2)  that  (3)  of  only  Icnows." 

the  operations  of  ^tajure,  are     "Oihoii  my  voire  (12)  inspire, 
without  limit."  Who   touched    (13)    Isaiah's    hal- 

•'In  vain  (4)  our  floi-ks  and  fields  lowed  lips  with  fire." 

increase  our  store,  "Accept  (M)  the^e  grateful  tears  ; 

When  our  ahundance   makes  us  for  thee  they  flow  ; 

wish  (r))  for  more."  For  thee,  that  ever  felt  (10)  anolh- 

*'  Thou  shall  love  thy  neighbor  as  er's  woe." 

(0)  tu^icerely  as  (7)  thou  loves     "Just    to    thy    word,    in    every 
thys^^"  thought  sincere  ; 

"Has  iho4».no  better  reason   for     Who  knew  (U5)  no  wish  but  what 
censuhng  (8)  thy  friend  and  the  world  might  hear.'' 

companion  V  (9)  '# 

1.  The  inlinitive  mood,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  is  sometimes  put  as 
the  nominative  case  to  the  verb:  as,  "To  set'  the  sun  ?'«  pleasant  ;" 
"To  be  good  i«  to  be  happy;"  "A  desire  to  excel  others  in  learning 
and  virtue  »"'<  commendable  ;  "  "  That  warm  (rlimates  should  accelerate 
the  growth  of  the  human  body,  and  shorten  its  duration,  in  very 
reasonable  to  believe;"  "To  be  temperate  in  eating  and  drinking,  to 
Use  exercise  in  open  air,  and  to  preserve  the  mind  free  from  tumuliu- 
ous  emotions,  are  the  best  preservatives  of  health." 

"To  see  the  sun  are  pleasant."  VVhic;h  word  is  wrong  in  this  ex- 
ample? In  what  particular  vvrong?  ^ Wax  h  plea nant?  What,  then, 
is  the  nominative  case  to  is?  Js  there  one  thing,  or  more  than  o«je, 
here  spoken  of  as  being  pleasant?  .Why,  then,  should  we  use  ia 
in  preference  to  are  f  Wliat  is  the  rt^  (or  is?  (17)  Rule  for  "  To  see," 
or  "  To  see  the  >iin  ?  "  (IS) 

^^^  Wlinji  examplen  are  referred  to  without  heinrf  quoted,  the  teacher 
may  re(<d  them  to  the  pnpil. 

"To  be  temperate  in  eating,"  etc.  How  many  things  are  here 
spoken  of  as  being  the'  best  preservatives?  Should  we,  then,  use 
the  singular  or  pITiral  verb  ?     Rule  for  it?  (19) 

1. 

"Todountoall  men  as  we  would  "The  erroneous  opinions  wn;ch 

that  th-'y,  in  similar  circum-  we  form  concerning  (20)  hap- 

fetances,  should   do   unto   us,  piness  and  misery,  (jives  rise 

co/»«/iV(t/e  the  great  principles  to  all  the   mi^laken  (21)  and 

of  virtue."                             .  dangerous  pa>sious  that  em- 

"  From  a  fear  of  the  world's  ccn-  broils  our  life." 

wire,   to   be  ashamed  (IS)  of  "  To  live  soberly,  righteously,  and 

the     practice     of     precepts,  piously,   are   required   of   all 

which  the  heart  approves  and  men." 
'embraces,  mark  a   ferble  and 
im perfect  character." 

a)  .'ilO.-  (2)  fliilo  IV.  (.3)  "Th-ilnr*-/'/"— \  .t«  I.  4  t.'i.  Rn  I  Kii!o  X.  ?»?<'  Xoto 
XyiI047.'  ^4)  Alverbiil  phrno.  (6)  lliilo  XII.  :.o5.  Slh- 4^il  i<.)  A.Iv.tI..  (7) 
0)iijniicti.)n.  (8)  Puticipul  ii  .uiv.  (9)  Rule  XU.  (10)  Kule  .\V,  613.  (ll/Kule 
XI.  (12)  RuIp  Vlir.  fl.3)  •  \Vli..  foM-/i'-'/.s(  or  ri,(/</ //)iic'«."  (U) '•  Accept  «Aom"— 
Imp.  nv>  >  1.  (\^)  "  Didit  ffcL"'  (li'<)  •  \V'i'>  kmwM  -t  <Ud^l  know."  (17)  Huic'  VII. 
(18)  Note  Xin.  626,  or,  Not"  I,  thii  pjHfe.  (19)  Rale  XVIII.  (20)  Prepo«itlou. 
(21)  Rule  XIII. 


133 


ENGLISH    ORAMMAR. 


"That  (1)  ii  is  our  duly  to  pro- 
iiioie  iho  purity  of  our  minds 
and  bodies,  lo  be  jut-l  (2) 
and  kind  lo  our  rdlow-creat- 
ures,  and  lo  be  pious  and 
faithful  loUini  that  made  us, 
admit  not  of  any  doubt  in  a 
rational  and  well  (3)  in- 
formed mind." 

"To  be  of  a  pure  and  humble 
mind,  to  exercise  benevo- 
lence towards  others^  to  cul- 
tivate piety  ♦owards  God,  is 
the  sure  means  (4)  of  be- 
coming peaceful  and  happy." 

"It  is  an  important  truth  that 
religion,  vital  religion,  the 
—  religii)n  of  the  heart,  are  the 
most  pow^erful  auxiliaries  of 
reascJh  in  waging  war  with 
the  j)assions,  and  promoting 
.  that  sweet  composure  which 
constitute  the  peace  o^'^od." 


"The  possession  of  our  tenses 
entire,  of  our  limbs  unin- 
jured, of  a  sound  understand- 
ing, of  friends  and  compan- 
ions, are  often  overlooked  ; 
though  it  would  be  the  ulti- 
mate wish  (5)  of  many  who, 
as  far  as  we  can  judge,  de- 
■serves  it  as  much  as  our- 
selves." 

'All  (4)  that  make  a  figure  on 
the  great  theatre  of  thew^orld, 
the  employments  of  the  busy, 
the  enterjjrises  of  the  ambi- 
tious, and  the  exploits  of  the 
warlike;  the  virtues  which 
forms  the  happiness,  and  the 
crimes  which  occasions  the 
misery  of  mankind;  origi- 
nates in  that  silent  and  secret 
recess  of  thought  which  arm 
hidden  from  every  human 
eye." 


2.  Every  verb,  except  in  the  infinitive  mood,  or  the  participle,  ought 
to  have  a  nominative  ease,  either  expressed  or  implied  :  as,  "Awake, 
arise  ;"  that  is,  "Awake  ye;  arise  ye." 

We  shall  here  add  some  examples  of  inaccuracy,  in  the  use  of  the 
verb  without  its  nominative  case.  "As  it  hath  pleased  him  of  his 
goodness  to  give  you  safe  deliverance,  and  hath  preserved  you  in  the 
great  danger,"  etc.  The  verb  hath  prencrved  has  here  no  nominative 
case,  for  it  can  not  be  properly  supplied  by  the  preceding  word  him, 
which  is  in  the  objective  case.  It  ought  to  be,  "and  as  he  hath  pre- 
eerced  you  ;"  or  rather,  "and  to  preserve  you."  "If  the  calm  in  Which 
he  was  born,  and  lasted  so  long,  had  continued;"  and  ichich  lasted," 
etc.  ''These  we  have  extracted  from  an  historian  of  undoubted 
credit,  and  arc  the  same  that  were  practiced,"  etc;  "and  they  are  the 
same."  "A  man  whose  inclinations  led  him  to  be  corrupt,  and  had 
great  abilities  to  manage  the  business;"  '^andwho  had,"  etc.  "A 
cloud  gathering  in  the  north,  which  we  have  helped  to  raise,  and 
may  quickly  break  in  a  storm  upon  our  heads;"  "and  ichich  may 
quickly." 

"As  it  hath  pleased,"  etc.  What  correction  should  be  made  in  this 
example?     Why?     Recite  the  Note. 

2. 
"  If  the  privileges  to  which  he  has 


an  undoubted  right,  and  he 
has  long  enjoyed,  should  now 
be  wrested  from  him,  (6) 
would  be  flagrant  injusiice." 
These  curiosities  wt^  have  im- 
ported  from   China,  and   are 


similar  to  those  which  were 

sonlfe  time  ago  brought  from 

Africa." 
"Will  martial  flames  for  everfire 

thy  mind, 
And  never,  never  (7)  be  to  heaven 

resigned  ?" 


3.  Every  nominative  case,  except  the  case  absolute,  and  when  an 
address  is  made  to  a  person,  should  belong  to  some  verb,  either  ex- 


(1)   CODJUUCtiOD. 

(5)  Note  1,  405,  Kule 


(2)  '-Just  persons."    Rule  IV.     (3)  Adverb.    (4)  Rule  XV 
VI.    (6)  "  It  would."    (7)  "  And  wilt  thmi  never  he* " 


SYNTAX.  133 

pressed  or  implied  :  as,  "  Who  wrote  this  book  ? "  "James  ; "  'that  is, 
"James  M^rote  it."     "To  whom  thus  Adam,"  that  is,  "  spoke." 

One  or  two  instances  of  the  improper  use  of  the  nominative  case, 
without  any  verb,  expressed  or  iniplii^cyto  answer  it,  may  be  suffi- 
cient to  illustrate  the  usefulness  of  tlif^^fr'e^Cdfna  observations. 

"  Which  rule,  if  it  had  been  observed,  a  «^l|^ring  prince  would 
have  wanted  a  great  deal  of  that  incense  whi(jh?^d  been  offered  up  to 
him."  The  pronoun  it  is  here  the  nominative  case  to  the  verb  oAr 
served;  and  wkick  rule  is  left  by  itself,  a  nominative  case  without  any 
verb  following  it.  This  form  of  expression,  though  improper,  is  very 
common.  It  ought  to  be,  " //  this  rule  had  been  observed,"  etc. 
"  Man,  though  he  has  great  variety  of  thoughts,  and  such  from  which 
others  as  well  as  himself  might  receive  profit  and  delight,  yet  they 
are  all  within  his  own  breast."  In  this  sentence,  the  nominative  man 
stands  alone  and  unconnected  with  any  verb,  either  expressed  or  im- 
plied.    It  should  be,  ^'Though  man  has  great  variety,"  etc. 

"  Which  rule,  if  it,"  etc  What  is  the  nominative  case  to  observed? 
Has  the  noun  rule  any  verb  following  it,  to  which  it  may  be  the  nomi- 
native case?  Is  this  form  of  expression  much  used?  Is  it  not 
proper?     What  correction  should  be  made?    Why?    Recite  the  Note. 

3. 
"(1)  Two  substantives,  when  they     "Virtue,  however  it  may  be  neg- 
come   together,    and   do    not  lected  for  a  time,  men  are  so 

signify  the   same   thing,    the  constituted    as   ultimately  to 

former   (2)    must    be   in   the  acknowledge     and     respect 

genitive  case."  genuine  merit." 

(4)  When  a  verb  comes  between  two  nouns,  either  of  which  may 
be  understood  as  flie  subject  of  the  affirmation,  it  may  agree  with 
either  of  them:  but  some  regard  must  be  had  to  that  which  is  more 
naturally  the  subject  of  it,  as  also  to  that  which  stands  next  to  the 
verb:  as,  "  His  meat  was  locusts  and  wild  honey;"  "A  great  cause 
of  the  low  state  of  industry  were  the  restraints  put  upon  it ;"  "The 
wages  of  sin  is  death." 

"The  wages  of  sin  is  death,"  or,  "Death  is  the  wages  of  sin." 
What  rfe  the  nominative  case  to  is?  Is  this  nominative,  in  the  firgt 
example,  before  or  after  r«;  What  is  the  rule  for  7<^a«7««.?  (3)  Recite 
the  Note.     What  do  you  mean  by  the  subject  of  the  affirmation?  (4). 

4. 

"  The  crown  is  virtue  is  peace  and     "  His  chief  occupation  and  enjoy- 

honor."  ment  were  controversy." 

5.  When  the  nominotive  case  has  no  personal  tense  of  a  verb,  but 
is  put  before  a  participle,  independently  on  the  rest  of  the  sentence,  it 
is  called  the  case  absolute;  as,  "Shame  being  lost,  all  virtue  is  lostj" 
"That  having  been  discussed  Ions:  ago,  there  is  no  occasion  to  resume 

it."  ^      r 

As,  in  the  use  of  the  case  absolutefthe  i^se  is,  in  English,  always 
the  nominative,  the  following  example  is  erroneous  \\\  making  it  the 
objective.  "Solomon  was  of  this  mind;  and  I  have  no  doubt  he 
made  as  wise  and  true  proverbs  as  anybody  has  done  since  ;  him  only 
excepted,  who  was  a  much  greater  and  wiser  man  than  Solomon." 
It  should  be,  "  Ae  only  excepted."' 

(I)  "  WhAn  two  Bubstaniives  com4.  together."  (2)  "  The  firti  qf  therny  (3)  Rulft 
XV,  613.    C4)  The  nnminat1r«  CMe. 


134  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

What  fs  the  rule  for  ihp  case  abpohite?  (1)  '  He  only  excepted." 
\^'hicli  woni  is  wrong  in  ihis  exninple  .'  In  whal  pariicolar  wrong? 
What  correction  »hould  be  n)ade  ? 


0. 


Ilinafcgtroyed,  All  this  (3)  will  8onn  follow." 

Or  won  to  what  ^f  may  work "  Wlio>e  gray  top 

his  utter  io.<s,  Shall  lrenil>lt*,  him  Jc^cendiug." 

The  nominative  case  is  commonly  placed  .before  the  verb;  but 
ponu'tinies  it  i*  put  after  the  verb,  if  it  is  a  simple  tense  ;  nn'/beiween 
'the  nuxilinry  and  the  verb  or  parlic-iple,  if  a  (•<Miii»niind  Icnse:  a^ — 

Itit.  When  n  question  is  asked,  a  comnianii  jriven,  or  a  wish  ex- 
pressed :  as,  ••  Con(i(Iesi  tlioii  in  me?"  *•  Hr-ad  thou  I''  ''Miiysl  thou 
be  happy  I"     "  Lonpr  liye  tli*-'  King!" 

i?<l.  When  a  snppn.siiion  is  made  without  the  conjunction  if:  as, 
"  Were  it  not  for  this;  •*  Had  I  been  there." 

3d.  When  "a  verb  transitive  is  used  :  as,  "  On  o  sudden  appeared  the 
king." 

4lh.  When  the  verb  is  preceded  by  the  adverbs  herr,  there,  then, 
thrnre,  hence,  thu»,  ele. :  a>,  "Here  am  I;"  "There  was  he  slain;" 
"Then  comelh  the  end;"'  '•  Thence  nrist'lh  his  grief ;"  '*  Hence  pro- 
ceeds his  anger;"  '-Tlnis  was  the  aflair  settled." 

.''til.  When  a  sentence  depends  on  veilhcr  or  nor,  so  n»  to  be  coupled 
wiih  another  ^eMlenee:  as,  '•  Ve  shall  not  eat  of  it.  neither  shall  ye 
toneli  it,  lest  ye  die." 

Some  grnminaritins  assert  the  j>hrases  ok />ifli)ir.i,^M  ay>pfar»,  from 
what  are  called  impersonal  verl>s,  and  should,  thereliire.  i>e  conlined 
to  the  singular  number  :  as, '*  The  argiimenls  ad^aneed  \\  ere  nciirly 
at  fnUniiH  ,•"  "The  po^itions  were  f««  ojijunrH  ini-onirovertible  ;"  ihal 
i!>,  "as  il  follows,"  '•  as  it  api)ears."  "ll  we  give  (say  they)  ihe  sen- 
tence a  dilierent  turn,  and  instead  of  o«,  say  8uch  av,  the  verb  is  no 
longer  termed  impersonal,  l>ut  properly  a^jrces  with  its  nominative, 
in  the  jtlural  number:  as,  "The  arguments  advanced  were  nearly 
«»/c/t  fM /of/oio;"  "  The  positions  were  audi  ««  iii>penr  uncontrovert- 
ible."* 

They  who  doubt  the  accuracy  of  Home  Tooke's  statement,  "That 
<7«,  however  and  whenever  used  in  Kn^!li>h,  ujcans  the  same  as  it,  or 
thai,  or  n'hirh,  and  who  are  not- sati>(i«'d  whelh«r  the  verbs,  in  the 
senlenee  fir>t  mentioned,  should  be  iii  the  singular  or  the  |>lural  num- 
ber, may  vary  the  Ibrm  of  expression.  Thus,  the  sense  of  the  preced- 
ing sentences  may  l-e  conveyed  in  the  (ollowing  terms:  "The  argp- 
nients  advanced  were  nearly  of  the  following  nature;'  "The  follow- 
ing arc  nejirly  the  arguments  which  were  advanced;"  "The  argu- 
ments advanced  were  nearly  tho*e  wlii»h  follow;  "It  appears  that 
the  positions  were  incontroverlible ;"  "  TJiat  the  pobitions  were  in- 

(1)  Hu1*  XVII.  623..  (2)  "  That  whichV  437.  (3)  Note  I.  405. 

*  TIk'BO  fcrninfiiKriHn'fl  are  Piiitpoi  ted  l)y  p«ncntl  ii«npc8  mid  l>y  tlie  luitliority  of 
All  ciiiiufnt  cKiiicou  liiii^iji>f:c  and  ('4>n)]«>riiti()n.  "\\)i('ii  a  vorli  i"  iiKcd  iin|i«'if<(in- 
nlly."  H«yB  Dr.  Caiiiiil)i|l.  in  IMk  ILilcKo)  liy  of  iUictorio,  "itoujrlit  undduLtnllv  to 
bb  in  tlib  sJnKular  nunil'fr.  wlu'lliir  ilie  ii- iitrr  indiionn  be  txjnecHi'd  or  ut.Nr- 
Blorxl."  For  thiK  rtHscm.  iin;«lo(:y  and  ufHpe  tavor  this  iiiod<«  ot  cjcpifs'-ion  :  "-Tlie 
Ci'iiilitions  of  tbe  m:ni'iiienf  wer«>  '•«»  foltc^s"  and  not  "««  fr>H<  %o.''  A  IfW  lat« 
uriters  have  inconBidcratfly  adopted  tliiH  \u»t  form.  thr<  ufzh  *  niii*tuk»'  of  tbe  con- 
structloii.  For  tho  sjimo  rciinon  vt'  mifjit  to  fwy.  '•]  kbiill  coiibidi-r  bis  ouucuru* 
to  tut  ociy  at  omaamt  my  friibud'H  oouciucc^"  iiutl  uot  '^ao  tar  (u  ooMccrm" 


SYNTAX.  136 

confroverllhle  is  opparenl;"  "The  postilions  were  incontrovertible  is 
a]ipnrenl;"  *' Tlie  po^itions  wert*  appnrtnily  incontniverlihie." 

Wlitre  i.s  the  noininHlive  case  u:*ually  placed?  Mention  a  few  in- 
stuntes  in  wliicli  the  ncniinative  follows  the  verb.  What  do  some 
prnriiniarians  say  of  the  phrases  asfoUoicn,  as  appeare?  What  is  Dr. 
CHnipbelJ's  opinion  concerning  them  ? 

RULE  XVIII. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

.     RULK  II. 
Two  or  more  iiouvs  or  pronovvn  of  lite  *i)>gtdnr  number,  connected  togeth- 
er hy  A^P,  either  eT),rest-ed  or  vudcrsfood,  must  have  verbs,  nouns,  and 
jjriiuouns  (igrceiiiy  ivith  th<m  iu  the pUncil  nnniher. 
This  rule  is  often  violated;  tonie  instances  of  which  are  annexed. 
"And  so  was  also  .lames'  and  John,  the  sons  of  Zcbedee,  who  were 
partners  Willi   Simon;"  "and  so  were  also."     **AII  joy.  tranquillity, 
and   ))t'a(H,  even   for  ever  and  ever,  doth  dwell;"  "du-cU  for  ever." 
"  By  whose  power  all  pooil  and  evil  is  distributed;"  "are  distributed." 
*' Their  love,  and  their  haired,  and  their  envy,  is  now  pe^i^lled  ;"  "are 
perished."     "The  llioujihlless  and  intemperate  enjuynient  of  picas- 
VTf,  the  criminal  abuse  of  it,  and  the  fbrgetlulncss  of  our  being-  ac- 
countable creatures,  obliterates  every  serums  thought  of  the  proper 
business  of  life,  and  eflaces  the  sense  of  religion  and  of  God;"  it  ought 
to  be  ''■  ohlitcrale,"  and  '' (£'ace." 

"All  joy,  iranquillily,  etc.,  doth  dwell."-  Which  word  is  wrong  in 
this  example?  In  wha  paiticular  wrong  ?  What  correction,  tiien, 
should  be  made?     Why?     Kecite  the  H  ule.  * 

"Idleness    and    ignoriince    ?'«  the  "The  planetary  system,  boundless 

parent  of  many  vices."  space,  and  the  immense  ocean 

"  Wisdom,      virtue,      happiness,  aflects  the   mind  with  sensa- 

dicells -wiih  the  golden  medi-  tions  of  astonishment." 

ocrity."  "I^umility  and  love,  whalei^er(3) 

"  In  unity  ro»«j«r«  the  welfare  and  obscurities    may   involve    re- 

securily  of  every  society."  ligious  tenets,  consiiiules  the 

"Time  and  tide  7/-a?/.v  for  no  man."  essence  of  true  religion." 

"His  politeness  and  <:t)od  disposi-  "Religion    and    virtue,   our   Iiesl 

lion    uutii,  on   failure   of  their  support  (<J)  and   highest  hon- 

ef]'ect,  entirely  changed."  or,  confers  on  the  mind  prin- 

"  Patience  and  diligence,  like  (1)  ciples      of     noble      indepen- 

faith,     (2)     reipoves     iiioun.-  deiue." 

tains."                *  "What  (5)  signifies  the  counsel 

"Humility  and   knowledge,  with  and  care  of  preceptors,  when 

poor  apparel,  excels  pride  and  youth  think  they  have  no  (6) 

ignorance    under    cosily    at-  need  of  asbistance?" 
tire." 

1.  When  the  nouns  are  nearly  related,  or  scarcely  distinjjuishable 
in  sense,  and  sometimes  even  when  thty  are  very  different,  some 
authors  have  thought  it  allowalile  to  put  the  vt'rbs,  nouns,  and  pro- 
nouns in  the  singular  number :  as,  "  I'ranquillify  and  peace  dwells 
then',"  "Ignorance  and  negligence  has  produced  ihe  effect;"  the 
discomfiture  and  slaiichter  was  very  preni."     But  it  is  evidently  con- 

' — — —  -       ■  ■  "  ■  ^m 

(1)  AHvi-rb.        (2)  Uui«  i.     t-c.<>  Not«  XVII,  04?.        (3)  >?««  I.  40.5. 
Cil  KulQ  Xy.  (A>  U'oito  VUL  (,6)  2JA 


136  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

trary  lo  the  first  principles  of  frrammar  to  consiilor  two  distinct  ideas 
a»  one,  however  nice  rany  be  their  shades  of  difference  ;  and  if  there 
be  no  difference,  one  of  them  must  be  superfluous,  and>ught  to  be 
rejected. 

To  support  the  above  construction,  it  is  said  that  the  ver!)  may  be 
understood  as  applied  to  each  of  the  preceding  terms;  as  in  the  fol- 
lowing example  :  "  Sand  and  salt,  and  a  muss  of  iron,  w  easier  to  bear 
than  a  man  witiiout  understanding."  But  besides  the  confusion,  and 
the  latitude  of  application,  which  such  a  construction  would  intro- 
duce, it  appears  to  be  more  proper  and  analogical,  in  cases  where  the 
verb  is  intended  to  be  applied  to  any  one  of  theterms,  to  make  use  of  the 
disjunctive  conjunction,  which  griimiuatically  refers  the  verb  lo  one 
or  other  of  the  preceding  terms,  in  a  separate  view.  To  preserve  the 
distinctive  uses  of  the  copulative  and  disjunctive  conjunctions,  would 
render  the  rules  precise,  consistent,  ancl  intelligil)le  Dr.  Blair  very 
justly  observes,  that  "two  or  more  substantives,  joined  by  a  copula- 
tive, must  always  require  the  verb  or  pronoun  to  which  they  refer  to 
he  placed  in  the  |)lural  number.'* 

"  Tranquillity  and  jjcace  dwells  there."  "  What  dwells  ?  Is  it  not, 
then,  a  violation  of  Rule  XVII I  to  use  r/fr^//j  in  the  singular  number? 
When  do  some  writers  think  it  allowable  to  put  the  verbs,  nouns,  and 
pronouns  in  the  singular  number?  Is  this  usage  grauimnlical  ?  In 
what  does  the  incorrectness  consist?  If  there  be  no  difference  in  the 
meaning  of  tec/iis,  are  both  necessary?  What  ought  to  be  done  with 
the  superfluous  one?  How  do  some  attempt  to  support  the  above 
construction  ?  How  would  they  read,  on  this  principle,  the  example 
beginning  wit  h^*' Sand  and  salt,  and  a  mass  of  iron,  t.^  easier,"  etc.?  (I) 
In  examples  like  the  last,  what  conjunction  can  we  substitute  in  the 
place  o(  and,  which  will  better  express  the  sense?  What  does  Dr. 
Blair  say  on  this  subject  ?  "^ 

1. 

"  Much  tloex  human  pride  and  self-     '♦  Pride  and  self-sufficiency  stifles 
(♦»tn|)lacency  require  correc-  sentiments  of  dependence  on 

tion."  our  Oeator ;  levity  and  attach- 

"  Luxurious  living,and  high  pleas-  ment  to  wordly  pleasures  de- 

ures,   begets   a    languor   and  stroys  the  sense  of  gratitude 

satiety  that  destroys  all  enjoy-  to  him." 

mem." 
2.  In  many  complex  sentences  it  isdiflicult  for  learners  to  determine 
whether  one  or  more  of  the  clauses  are  to  be  considered  as  the  nom- 
inative case;  and,  consequently,  whether  the  verb  should  be  in  the 
singular  or  the  plural  number.  We  shall,  therefore,  set  down  a  num- 
ber of  varied  examples  of  this  .nature,  which  may  serve  as  some  gov- 
ernment to  the  scholar  with  respect  to  sentences  of  a  similar  construc- 
tion. "  Prosperity,  with  humility,  rttttd/rs  its  possessor  truly  amiable." 
"  The  ship,  with  all  her  furniture,  was  destroyed."  '  Not  only  his 
estate,  his  repvitation  too,  has  suffered  by  his  misconduct,"  "The 
general,  also,  in  conjunction  with  the  officers,  has  applied  for  redress." 
"  He  can  not  be  justified  ;  for  it  is  true  that  the  prince,  as  well  as  the 
people,  was  blameworthy."  "The  king,  with  his  life-guard,  ha»  just 
passed  through  the  village."  "  In  the  mutual  influence  of  body  and 
honl  there  I'.v  a  wisdom,  a  wonderful  wisdom,  which  we  can  not  fath- 
om."    "Virtue,  honor,  nay,  even  self-interest,  conspire  to  recommend 

(1)  "BAI^d  \i  •nflier,  and  salt  t'l  eMicr,  and  h  maM  of  iron  it  «n)ii(ir,"  «fr. 


SYNTAX. 


137 


the  measure."  "Patriotism,  morality,  every  public  and  private  con- 
sideratif  n,  damayid  our  stibmis«:ion  to  just  nnd  Inwfiil  i^overnment." 
"Noll)iiifr  ffelifrhts  !iie  so  inuch  a>  the  vvorics  of  nature.'" 

In  siii>|)ort  of  sucli  forms  of  e.Kpression  as  the  lollowing,  we  see  the 
authority  of  Hume,  Prie>tley,  and  other  writers;  and  we  annex  them 
for  the  reader's  consideration:  "A  long  course  of  time,  with  va- 
riety of  accidents  and  circumstances,  arc  requisite  to  produce  those 
revolutions."  "The  king,  with  the  lords  and  commons,  forni  an  ex- 
cellent frame  of  government.''  "  The  side  A,  with  the  sides  B  and  C, 
compose  the  triangle."  "  The  fire  communicated  itself  to  the  bed, 
which,  with  the  furniture  of  the  room,  and  a  valuable  library,  were  all 
entirely  consumed."  It  is.  however,  proper  to  observe  that  these 
modes  of  expi»ession  do  not  appear  to  be  warranted  by  the  just  prin- 
ciples of  construction.  The  words,  "'A  long  course  of  time,"  "The 
king,"  "The  side  A,"  and  "which,"  are  the  true  nominatives  to  the 
respective  verbs.  In  the  last  example,  the  word  all  should  be  ex- 
punged. As  the  preposition  with  governs  the  objective  case  in  English, 
and,  if  translated  into  Latin,  would  govern  the  ablative  case,  it  is 
manifest  that  the  clauses  following  with,  in  the  preceding  sentences, 
can  not  form  any  part  of  the  ?iomi?iative  case.  They  can  not  be  fit  the 
same  time  in  the  objective  and  nominative  cases.  The  following 
sentence  appears  to  be  unexceptionable,  and  may  serve  to  explain 
the  others:  "  The  lords  and  commons  are  essential  branches  of  the 
British  constitution:  the  Icing,  with  them,  forms  an  excellent  frame 
of  government."* 

"The  side  A,  with  the  sides  B  and  C,  compose  the  triangle."  In 
this  sentence,  what  is  the  nominative  case  to  compose?  Should  the 
verb,  then,  be  singular  or  plural?  What  difficulty  is  mentioned  in  the 
beginning  of  this  Note  ? 

2. 


"Good  order  in  our  affairs,  not 
mean  savings,  produce  great 
profits." 

"The  following  treatise,  together 
with  those  that  accompany  it, 
were  written  many  years  ago, 
for  my  own  private  satisfac- 
tion." 

"  That  great  senator,  in  concert 
with  several  other  emin<Mil 
persons,  werexhe  projectors  (1) 
of  the  revolution." 

"The  religion  of  these  people,  as 
well  as  their  customs  and 
manners,  were  strangely  mis- 
represented,." 

"  Virtue,  joined  to  knowledge  and 
wealth,  confer  ^reat  influence 
and  respectability.  Hut  knowl- 
edgi%  with   wealth   united,    if 


virtue  is  wanting,  have  a  very 
limited  influence,  and  are  of- 
ten despised  " 

"That  superficial  scholar  and  crit- 
ic, like  some  renowned  critics 
of  our  own,  have  (2)  furnished 
most  decisive  proofs  that  they 
(3)  knew  not  the  characters  of 
the  Hebrew  language." 

"Th«'  buildings  of  the  institution 
have  been  enlarged  ;  the  ex- 
pense of  which,  added  (4)  to 
the  increased  price  of  provi- 
sions, render  it  necessary  to 
advance  the  terms  of  admis- 
sion.'" 

"One,  added  to  nineteen,  make 
twenty." 

'•  What  (ri)  black  despair,  what 
horror,  fills  his  mind  1" 


*  TbonRh  the  construction  will  not  admit  of  a  plural  verb,  the  sentonca  would 
cortainly  stand  better  thu?  :  "The  king,  the  lonls,  and  the  common-s  form  an  «- 
cellont  crtiHtitution." 

(1)  RuloXV.  rti:'..    (2)  (W2  Except  ion  1.     (?^\  '' Hclprv:. 

M>  RnUXriI,  ."i:.?.     (.S)  434. 


188  INOLIiH    GRAMMAR. 

3.  If  the  ninsrular  nouns  and  pronounji,  which  are  joined  together 
by  a  oopiilntive  conjunction.  l>e  of  peveral  persons,  in  ntaking  the 
plural  pronouns  Rgree  with  them  in  per>on,  the  >econil  pcr>OM  takes 
the  place  of  the  third,  nnd  the  fir.-l  of  botli  :  as,  ••  Jaiiiei«,  and  thou,  and  I, 
ar«r  attached  to  o?/r  country,"  -Thou  and  lie  shared  it  l.etween  vol'." 
"  James,  and  thou,  and  I,  am  Httached  to  rur  country"  What  is 
wrong  in  this  example?  In  what  particular  wrong?  "VVliat  correction 
should  be  made?  Why?  '• '1  hou  and  he  shared  it  between  him." 
Will  you  correct  this  example  ?  Why  use  yo7i  instead  oi him?  Will 
you  repeal  the  Note  ? 

"Thou,    and    the  gardener,   and     «' My  sister  and  I,  as  well   as  my 
the    huntsman,     must    share  brother,    are  daily  employed 

the  blame    of  thia   business  in    tbeir    respective   occupa- 

amongst  them."  tions.' 

ETJLE  XXIII. 
CorreBponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

KULK  III- 
T^e  conjunction  diojunctive  han  an  (ffcct  contrary  to  that  of  the  conjunction 
copulative  :  for  a.\  the  terh,  nnnn,  or  pmnoim,  ii  rfferrtdtu  the  preceding 
termt  taken  eeparately,  it  nm at  be  in  the  eivgi/nr  nvniler :  an,  '' Igno- 
rance or  negligence  /taa  caused  this  mistake;"  "John.  James,  or 
Joseph  inteuda  to  accompany  me;"  "  There  :'«,  in  many  minds, 
neither  knowledge  nor  understanding." 

The  following  Bentences  are  variations  from  this  rule:  "A  man  may 
eee  a  metaphor  or  an  allegory  in  a  picture,  as  vreW  as  read  them  in  a 
description;"  "  read  it."  "  Neither  character  nor  dialogue  were  yet 
understood;"'  "  »rfi»  yet."  "It  mu?t  in(I«'cd  be  confessed  that  a 
lampoon  or  a  satire  do  not  carry  in  them  robbery  or  murder  ;"  "  doea 
not  carry  in  i7."  "  Death,  or  some  worse  mislortunc,  soon  divide 
them  ;"  it  ought  to  be  '*diviJis." 

"  Neither  character  nor  dialogno  were  yet  understood."'  What  is 
wrong  in  this  example  ?  Why/  Will  you  correct  it  ?  What  is  the 
Rule  for  this  correction  ? 

"Man's  happiness  or  misery  are,  "When  sickness,  infirmity,  or  re- 
in a  great  measure,  put  into  verse  of  forlune  aflt'ct  us,  the 
his  own  hands."  sincerity  of  friendship  is  prov- 

"Man  18  not  such  a  machine  as  a  ed." 

clock  or  a  watch,  whkh  move  "  Let    (1)  it  be   remembered     (2) 

merely  as  they  are  moved."'  that  (3)  it  is  not  the  uttering-, 

"Despise  no  infirmity  of  mind  or  or     the    hearing   of    certain 

body,    nor    any    condition   of  words,    that    constitute     the 

li/e  ;  for  they  are,  perhaps,  to  worship  of  the  Almighty." 

be  your  own   lot."  "  A  tiul   reply,  n  pronencss  to  re- 

"  Speaking     inipuiiently   to     ser-  btike.  or  u  captious  end  «  on- 

vants.  f.r    anything    that   bo-  triidiciions  spirit,  are  capable 

trays  inattention  or  ill-humor,  o(    imbittuiin:     (1)    domestic 

are  oerininly  criminal."  life,  (.'))  and  of  settuig  friends 

"There  are  many  fmilts  in  spell-  at  variance.'" 
ing    which     neither    aimldf^y 
nor  prontinciaiion  justify." 


(1)  Imperative  mood,  ngrecing  with  thou  or   von  iiiulerstood.  by  Rule  VI.    (i) 
Inflnitive.  iSO,    (3)  Cvcjuuction.     (4)  Kule  X.    </>;  Kulo  XIV,  660. 


1.  When  sfngiilar  pronouns,  rtr  a  noun  and  pronoun  of  different 
persons,  are  disjunctively  connected^  the  verb  must  agree  with  that 
person  which  is  placed  nearest  to  it:  as,  "lor  thon  art  to  blame  ;" 
'•Thou  or  I  am  in  fault;"  "1,  thou,  or  he  is  the  author  of  it;" 
"  Creorge  or  I  am  the  person."  But  it  would  be  better  to  say,  "  Eith- 
er I  am  to  blame,  or  ihou  art,"  etc. 

"  I  or  thou  am  to  blame."  How  should  this  be  altered  ?  What  w 
the  Rule  for  it? 

1. 
"  Either  (1)  thou  or  I  art  greatly     "  I  or  thou  am  the  person  (2)  who 
mistaken  in  our  juilgment  on  must  undertake  the  business 

the  subject."  proposed." 

2.  When  a  disjunctive  occurs  between  a  singular  noun  or  pronoun 
and  a  plural  one,  the  verb  is  made  to  agree  M'ith  the  plural  noun  or 
pronoun,  as,  "  Neither  poverty  nor  riches  ivcrc  injurious  to  him;"  "  I 
or  they  were  offended  by  it."  But  in  this  case  the  plural  noun  or  pro- 
noun, when  it  can  conveniently  be  done,  should  be  placed  next  to  the 
verb. 

''  I  or  they  was  ofiended."  What  is  wrong  in  this  example  ?  What  is 
the  Rule  for  the  correction  ? 

2. 

•'Both  (3)  of  the  scholars,  or  one  "Whether  one   person    or  more 

of  them  at  least,  was  present  was  concerned    in    the  busi- 

at  the  transaction."  ness,  does  not  appear." 

"  Some  parts  of  the  ship  nnd  car-  "  The  cares  of  this  life,  or  the  de- 
go  were  r^-covered;  liut  neith-  ceilfulness  of  riches,  has 
er  (4)  the  sailors  nor  the  choked  the  seed  of  virtue  in 
captain  was  saved."  many  a  promising  (5)  mind." 

NOTE  XVI. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE    IV. 

A  verb  ill  the  phiral  will  ac/ree  with  a  cnllective  noitn  in  the  singular, 
ic'hcn  apart  only  of  the  iudividuala  are  meant:  o9,  "The  council 
were  divided  in  their  sentiments."  When  the  noun  expresses  the 
idea of  ttnift/  the  verb  shovld  be  singular:  aa,  "The  council  was 
composed  wholly  of  farmers." 

We  ought  to  consider  whether  the  term  will  immediately  suggest 
the  idea  of  the  number  it  represents,  or  whether  it  exhit>its  to  the 
mind  the  idea  of  the  whole,  as  one  thing.  In  the  former  case,  the 
Verb  ought  to  be  plural;  in  tlie-latter,  it  ought  to  be  singular.  Thus, 
it  seems  improper  to  saj',  "The  peasantry  goes  barefoot,  and  the 
middle  sort  makea  use  of  wooden  shoes."  It  would  be  better  to  sny, 
"  The  peasantry  go  barefoot,  and  the  middle  sort  mahe  use,"  etc  ,  Ijc- 
cau»;e  the  idea,  in  both  these  cases,  is  that  of  a  number.  On  the  f  .n- 
trary.  there  is  a  harshness  in  the  following  senlences,  in  which  nouns 
of  number  have  verbs  plural,  because  the  ideas  they  represent  seem 
not  to  be  sufficiently  divided  in  the  mind:  "The  Court  of  Rome  were 
not  without  solicitude."  "The  house  of  commons  icere  of  suiall 
Weight."  "The  house  of  lords  trere  so  much  influenced  by  ihese- 
reasons."     "  Stephen's  party  were  entirely  broken  up  by  the  captivity 


(1)  669.    (2)  Rule  XV.  613.     {%)  407.     (4)  Conjunction  when  followed  by  nor, 
)  Role  Xni. 


(6)  RoI«  XT 


140 


ENGLISH    ORAMMAFl. 


of  their  leader."  "An  army  of  twenty-four  thousand  were  nssem- 
bled."  "What  renson  *arc  the  Church  of  Rome  for  proceeding  in 
this  manner?"  "  There  is  indeed  no  oonsiiiution  so  lame  nnd  care- 
less of  thcirown  defence."  "All  the  virtues  of  mankind  are  lohe  lount- 
ed  upon  a  few  fingers,  but  hiv  follies  and  vices  are  iniuinierable."  Is 
not  rnaukind,  in  this  place,  a  noun  of  multitude,  and  such  as  requires 
the  pronoun  referring:  to  be  in  the  plural  number,  their.l 

"The  peasantry  goes  barefoot,"  etc.     Whal  correction   is  necessa- 
ry in  this  example  ?     Why  ? 


"  The     people     rejoices    in     that 
which  should  pive  it  sorrow." 
"The  flock,  and    not  the   fleece, 
are,  or  ought  to  be,  the  objects. 
of  the  shepherd's  care." 
"  The  corporation  of  York  consist 
of  a  mayor,  aldermen,  and  a 
common  council." 
"The  British  parliament  are  com- 
posed of  king,  lord.-*,  and  com- 
mons." 
"When  the  nation  complain,  the 
rulers  should  listen  to  their 
voice." 
"  The  court  have  just  ended,  after 
having  sat   through  the  trial 
of  a  very  long  cause." 
"  The  crowd    irerc  so  great    that 
the    judges     with     difficulty 
made      their     way      through 
them." 
"  This  people  draueth  near  to  me 
with  their  mouth,  and  honor- 
eth    me    with"  their    lips,  hut 
their  heart  is  far  from  me." 
"  The   committee  loas  divided  in 
its  sentiments,  and  it  has  re- 
ferred   the    business    to    the 
general  meeting." 
"In  the  days  of  youth,  the  niulli- 
tude eagerly  pursues  pleasure 
as  its  chief  good." 

RULE  V. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE    V. 

t 

Pronouns  viuHt  agree  with  vouus  fur  irfilch   they  stand,   in  gcndrr, 
number,  and  jicrson. 

Of  this  rule  there  are  many  vit)lations  to  be  met  with;  a  few  of 
which  may  be  sullicient  to  put  the  learner  on  his  guard:  "  Eack  of 
the  sexes  should  keej)  within  its  particular  bounds,  and  content 
themselves  with  the  advantages  of  their'  particular  districts;"  better 

(l)RuloXTII.  (2)  Note  1, 405  (3)501.  (4)  Kulo  XI.  (5)  (>73.  (O)Advorb. 
(7)  '■  MVr«  infatuat>:d."    (8)  Itulo  XIII. 


"The  church  have  no  power  to 
inflict  corjioral  punishment." 

"  The  fleet  were  seen  sailing  (I) 
up  the  channel." 

"  The  regiment  consist  of  a  thou- 
sand (2)  men." 

"The  meeting  have  established 
several  salutary  regulations." 

"  The  council  was  rot  unanimous, 
and  it  separared  without  com- 
ing (3)  to  any  determination." 

"The  fleet  is  all  arrived  and 
moored  (4)  in  safety." 

"  The  committee  were  very  full 
when  this  point  was  decided  ; 
and  their  judgment  has  not 
been  called  in  question." 

"  Why  (6)  do  this  generation  wish 
for  greater  evidence,  when  so 
much  (5)  is   already  given?" 

"The  remnant  of  the  people  were 
persecuted  with  great  se- 
verity." 

"  Never  were  any   people  so  (6) 
much    infatuated    (7)    as  the 
Jewish  nation." 
"The  shoal  of  herrings'  were  of 

an  immense  extent." 
"  No  society  are  chargeable  with 
the  disapproved   (b)   miscon- 
duct of  particular  members." 


SYNTAX. 


141 


thus:  "The  sexes  should  keep  within  <A«t>  particular  bounds,"  etc. 
*'  Can  any  one,  on  their  entrance  into  the  world,  be  fully  secure  that 
they  shall  not  be  deceived  ?"'  "  on  his  entrance,"  and  "  that  he  shall." 
"One  should  not  think  too  favorably  of  ourselves ;"  ^^  of  one's  self^ 
"He  had  one  acquaintance  which  poisoned  his  principles;"  '■'•  who 
poisoned." 

Every  relative  must  have  an  antecedent  to  which  it  refers,  either 
expressed  or  implied  :  as,  "  Who  is  fatal  to  others,  is  so  to  himself;" 
that  is,  '•'•the  vian  who  is  fatal  to  others." 

irZ/y,  which.,  what,  and  the  relative  that,  though  in  the  objective 
case,  are  always  placed  before  the  verb  ;  as  are  also  their  compounds, 
whoever,  whosoever,  etc. :  as,  "  He  whom  ye  seek  ;"  "This  is  what,  or 
the  thing  which,  or  that,  you  want ;"  "Whomsoever  you  please  to 
appoint." 

What  is  sometimes  applied  in  a  manner  which  appears  to  be  ex- 
ceptionable :  as,  "  All  fevers,  except  what  are  called  nervous,"  etc. 
It  would  at  least  be  better  to  say,  "except  those  which  are  called 
nervous." 

"  One  should  not  think  too  favorably  of  ourselves."  How  should 
this  sentence  be  altered  ?  What  is  the  Rule  for  it  ?  Are  the  relatives 
placed  before  or  after  the  verb  ? 


"The  exercise  of  reason  appears 
as  (1)  little  (2)  in  these 
sportsmen,,  as  in  the  beasts 
whom  tliey  sometimes  hunt, 
and  by  whom  they  are  some- 
times hunted." 

"They  which  seek  Wisdom  will 
certainly  find  Aer." 

"The  male  amongst  birds  seem 
to  discover  no  beauty  but  in 
the  color  of  its  species." 

"Take  handfuls  of  ashes  of  the 
furnace,  and  let  Moses  sprin- 
kle it  towards  heaven  in  the 
sight  of  Pharaoh,  and  it  shall 
become  small  dust." 

"  Rebecca  took  goodly  raiment, 
which  were  with  her  in  the 
house,  and  put  them  upon 
Jacob." 

"The  wheel  killed  another  man, 
which  is  the  sixth  which  have 
lost  their  lives  by  this  means." 

"  The  fair  sex,  whose  task  is  not 
to  mingle  in  the  labors  of  pub- 
lic life,  has  its  own  part  as- 
signed it  to  act." 
"The  Hercules  man-of-war  foun- 
dered at  sea ;  she  overset, 
and  lost  most  (3)  of  her  men." 
"The  mind  of  man  can  not  be  long 


without  some  food  to  nourish 
the  activity  of  his  thoughts." 

"What  is  the  reason  that  our  lan- 
guage is  less  refined  than  those 
of  Italy,  Spain,  or   France?" 

"I  do  not  think  any  one  should 
incur  censure  for  being  (4) 
tender  (5)  of  their  reputation." 

"Thou  who  hast  been  a  witness 

(6)  of  the  fact,  can  give  an  ac- 
count of  it." 

"In  religious  concerns,  or  what 

(7)  is  conceived  to  be  such, 
(b)  every  man  must  stand  or 
fall  by  the  decision  of  the 
great  Judge." 

"Something  like  (9;  what  (10) 
have  been  here  premised,  are 
the  conjectures  ol  Dryden." 

"Thou    great    First    Cause,    (11) 
least  undei stood!  (1-2) 
Who  all  my  sense  confined.  (13) 

To  know  but  this,  that  thou   art 
good. 
And  that  myself  (11)  am  blind  ; 

Yet  gave  (14)  me  in  this  dark  es- 
tate," etc. 

"  What  (0)  art  thou,  ( 1 1 )  spea  k,  that 
(15)  on  designs  unknown,  (16) 

While  others  sleep,  thus  range  (I  7) 
the  camp  alone?" 


(■iJRnlelX.     [21  Aflvpvb.     fr>]  676.     [4J  .:"•.!.     [6] 
"  Thn$c  which:'  4v'.7.    |S]  ■' SucJi  w/»orr»s."  Unlo  IV. 
and  X.     Note  XVII.    [111  Hule  XV.    [121  '»»'e  XII 
"r/rt7VsV."    [ISlConjiinrtion.    [iq  Rule  .\HI.    [V,]  Do^t 


Rule  IV. 


[0]  Rule  XV.    [7] 
91  Rule  IV.     [101    1^"1p  ^'* 


[i:ij  "  ConMexhtr 
"  ranio. 


[14] 


1.  Personal  prononn*,  being  tiRcd  to  supply  the  place  of  nouns,  are 
not  employed  in  ihe  pame  part  of  a  sentence  as  the  noun  which  they 
ri-prestMit  ;  Cor  it  would  be  improper  to  hay,  "  Tlie  kin?  /ir  is  jn>t  ;"  '•  I 
gaw  /ler  the  queen  ;"  "The  men  t/ny  were  there  ;"  "  M:it.y  words  thrjf 
darken  f^peech  ;"  "  My  I)anks  t/iet/  are  furnished  with  bees."  These 
personals  are  finperfliioiis,  as  there  is  not  the  least  occasion  for  a  snb- 
siimie  in  the  same  part  where  the  principal  word  is  present.  The 
nominative  case  ///ry,  in  the  following'  sentence,  is  also  superfluous  : 
'•  Who.  instead  of  jroing  about  doing  good,  t/ity  are  perpetually  intent 
upon  doing:  mi.'chief" 

"The  king  he  is  ju.'-t."  Will  you  correct  this  sentence,  and  tell 
why  It  is  wrong  ? 

I. 
'•Whoever  (1)  entertains  such  an  lioweverdisa<rreeablc,/Ary of- 

opinion, /ir  judges  erroneous-  ten  improve  us." 

ly."  "The  cares  of  thi.s  world,  f/r^often 

"Disappointments  and  afflictions,  choke  tlie  jrrowth  of  virtue." 

2.  The  pronoun  that  is  frequently  applied  to  persons  as  well  as  to 
things  _;  but  pfter  an  adjective  in  the  superlative  degree,  and  after  the 
pronominal  adjective  xavir,  it  ip  generally  used  in  prt-fereiue  to  icho 
or  winch  :  as,  "  Charles  XII,  king  of  Sweden,  was  one  of  the  greatest 
madmen  that  the  world  ever  saw;*'  ''Catiline's  followers  were  the 
most  profligate  that  could  be  found  in  any  city;"  "He  is  the  same 
man  that  we  saw  before."  There  are  cases  wherein  we  can  not  con- 
veniently dispense  v/ith  this  relative,  a.s  applied  to  persons:  as,  first, 
after  tw/zo,  the  interrogative:  "Who,  that  has  any  sense  of  religion, 
wotild  h»ve  argued  thus?"  Secondly,  when  persons  make  but  a  part 
of  the  antecedent:  "The  woman,  and  the  estate,  that  becnme  his  jior- 
tion.  were  too  nitich  for  his  inodeniliun."  In  neither  of  these  exam- 
ples could  any  other  relative  have  been  used.  . 

To  what  is  the  pronoun  that  applied?  and  when  is  it  u.^ed  \n  pref- 
erence to  ivho  or  which?  (416 — I,  2,  3,  4,  5.)     Give  an  example. 

2. 
"  Moses  was    the    meekest    man     "  They  are  the  same  persons  icAo 

whovi  we  read  of  in  the  Ol«l  assisted  tis  yesterday.'' 

Testament."  "The    men   and   things  jc/ztc/i  he 

"Humility    i.s    one   of  the    most  has    studied    have     not     im- 

amiable  virtues  w/z/c/i  we  can  proved  iiis  morals." 

possess." 

3.  The  pronouns  xchichnoerer,  irhotoever,  and  the  like,  are  elegantly 
divided  by  the  interposition  of  the  correspondiinr  substantives:  thus, 
"On  whichsoevei  side  the  king  cast  his  eyes,"  would  have  sotinded 
better,  if  written.  "On  which  side  soever,"  etc. 

Will  you  give  an  example  in  which  the  compound  pronoun  which' 
$oever  may  be  divided  witli  pro|iriety  ? 

3. 

"Howsoever  beautiful   they   ap-  contemplated,  they  appear  to 

pear,  they  have  no  real  nier-  advantujie." 
it."                                                      "  However   much    he    might    de- 

"  In     whatsover     light   we    view  spise  the  maxims  of  the  king's 

him,    his   conduct    will   bear  admini.siraiion,  he  kept  a  to* 

inspection."  tal  siicnce  on  that  subjecrt." 

"On  whichsoever  side   they  are 

f  1]  "fl«  v^a" 


4.  Many  perjons  are  apt,  in  conversation,  to  put  the  objective  case 
of  the  personal  pronouns  in  the  place  of  ^^esc  and  those:  as,  "Give 
me  them  books,"  instead  of  "  those  books."  We  may  sometimes  find 
this  fanit  even  in  writing:  as,  '■  Observe  r//€J»  thr»*e  there."  We  also 
frequently  meet  with  those  instead  of  thei/,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence, and  where  there  if*  no  particular  reference  to  an  antecedent  : 
as,  *•  Those  that  sow  in  tears,  sometimes  reap  in  joy  ;"  "  They  that,  or 
they  who  sow  in  tears." 

It  is  not,  however,  always  easy  to  say  whether  a  personal  pronoun 
or  a  demonstrative  is  preferable  in  certain  constructions.  "We  are 
not  unacquainted  wiihthe  calumny  of  them  [or  those]  whoopenly  make 
use  of  the  warmest  professions." 

"  Give  me  ibem  books."    Why  is  this  sentence  incorrect? 

4. 

"  Which  of  them  two  persons  has  fer   injuries    than    those   (2) 

most  distinguished  himself?"  that  are  most  (3)  forward  (n 

"  None  (1)  more  impatiently  suf-  doing  (4)  them.''  (.')) 

6.  In  some  dialects,  the  word  uhat  is  improperly  used  for  t/itft,  and 
eomriimes  we  find  it  fn  this  sense  in  writing:  "  They  will  never  be- 
lieve but  trAof  I  have  been  entirely  to  blame."  "I  p.m  not  satisfied 
but  what,"  etc.,  instead  of  "but  that."  The  word  evmewhat,  in  the 
following  sentence,  seems  to  be  used  improperly:  "  These  puni.'^h- 
ments  seem  to  have  been  exercised  in  somewhat  an  arbitrary  man- 
ner." Sometimes  we  read,  "In  somewhat  of."  The  meaning  is, 
•*  in  a  manner  which  is.  in  some  respects,  arbitrary." 

Will  you  give  an  example  of  the  improper  use  of  uiJiat  instead  of 
that? 

5. 

"He  would  not  be  persuaded  but  "These  commendations  of  his 
what    (6)    I    wa.s   greatly    in  children  appear  to  have  been 

fault."  made  in  somewhat  (7)  an  inju- 

dicious })iaune>:" 

6.  The  pronoun  relative  icho  is  so  much  appropriated  to  persons, 
that  there  is  generally  iiarshncss  in  the  application  of  it,  except  to 
the  proper  names  of  persons,  or  the  general  terms  mav,  woviau,  etc. 
A  term  which  only  implies  the  idea  o(  persons,  and  expresses  them 
by  some  circumstance  or  epithet,  wjll  hardly  authorize  the  use  of  it : 
as,  "  That  faction  in  F-neland  ivho  most  powerfully  opposed  his  arbi- 
trary pretensions."  "That  faction  tr/ncA  "  would  have  been  better; 
and  the  same  remark  will  serve  for  the  following  examples:  "France, 
tc^o  was  in  alliance  Miih  Sweden."  '*Tlie  court  nho,"  etc.  "The 
cavalry  7t-Ao,"  etc.  *•  The  cities  u/^o  aspired  at  liiierly."  '"  That  par- 
ty among  us  tr//o,"  etc.     "The  family  ichi,m\\\vy  consider  as  U!-urpers." 

In  some  cases  it  may  be  doubtful  \\  helhcr  this  pronnun  is  proper- 
ly applied  or  not:  as,  "The  number  ol  substanlial  inhabitants  with 
vhoni  soine  cities  al)Ound."  For  when  a  term  directly  and  necessa- 
rily implies  persons,  it  uiiiy,  in  niany  cases,  claim  the  personal  rclMlive. 
'•  None  ol"  the  coirij^nuy  whom  he  most  aflet-ied  could  cure  him  of  the 
melancholy  nnd»^'r  which  he  labored."  The  word  acqnoiutuvce  may 
have  the  siime  construction. 

How  IS  the  relative  vho  used? 


[1]  Rule  VI.    [2]  Note  I.    [SI  f.77.    [4]  €51.  [fn  P.nle  XIV.    :61  "  rAio<"   Coo- 
i  UDcU  en     ,7j  "  ]v  u  wuMwrr  which  it,  im  I'  wic  rttptdi,  t*\judicio*t$ "' 


!44  "  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

6. 

"  He  instructed  and  fed  ilie  crowds  wliich    James   ever    posses- 

icho  (1)  surrounded  him.''  sed." 

"Sidney   was  one  of  the  wisest  "The  court,  who  gives  currency 

and     most    active  governors  to  manner.s,   ought   to  be  ex- 

trAi'cA  Ireland  had  enjoyed  for  emplary."     (2) 

several  years."  "I  am  happy  in  the  friend  which 

"He    was    the    ablest     minister  i  have  long  proved." 

7.  We  hardly  consider  little  children  as  persons,  because  that  term 
gives  us  the  idea  of  reason  and  reflection;  and,  therefore,  the  appli- 
cation of  the  personal  relative  who,  in  this  case,  seems  to  be  harsh: 
"A  child  who.''''  Il  is  still  more  improperly  applied  to  animals  :  "A 
lake  fre(juented  by  that  fowl  whom  nature  has  taught  to  dip  the  wing 
in  water." 

Do  we  say,  "  A  child  who,"  or  "  A  child  which?'*  Will  you  re- 
peat the  Note  for  this  ? 

7. 
'•  The  child  whom  we    have  just     "He   is   like  (2)    a   beasl   (3)   of 
seen  is  wholesomely  led,  and  prey,  who   destroys   without 

not   injured    by   bandages  or  P'ty*" 

clothing." 

8.  When  the  name  of  a  person  is  used  merely  as  a  name,  and  il 
does  not  refer  to  the  person,  the  pronoun  uj/jo  oug^ht  not  to  be  applied. 
"  It  is  no  wonder  it'  such  a  man  did  not  shine  at  the  court  of  (iueen 
Elizabeth,  xoho  was  but  another  name  for  prudence  and  economy." 
Better  thus  :  "  whose  nanie  was  but  another  word  lor  prudence,"  etc. 
The  word  whose  l)e;xins  likewise  to  be  restricted  to  persons;  yet  it  is 
not  done  so  generally  but  that  good  writers,  even  in  prose,  use  it 
when  speaking  of  things.  The  construction  i<  not,  however,  gener- 
ally pleasing,  as  we  may  see  in  the  following  instances  :  "  Pleasure, 
xcho^c  nature,"  etc.  "  Call  every  production,  tohose  parts  and  whose 
nature,"  etc. 

In  one  case,  however,  custom  authorizes  us  to  use  irhich,  with  re- 
spect to  persons,  and  that  is,  when  we  want  to  distinguish  one  per-, 
son  of  two,  or  a  particular  person  among  a  niMuber  of  others.  We 
should  then  say.  ■'  Which  o!"  the  two,"  or,  "Which  of  them  is  he  or 
she?" 

"The  court  i)f  Queen  Elizabeth,  who,"  etc.  Will  you  i-orrect  this 
sentence,  and  give  the  Note  for  it  ? 

8.  . 

*' Having  once  disgusted  (4)  him,  ilci^cive    and     betray,    should 

he  could  never  regain  the  fa-  be  avoided  as  the   poisonous 

vor  of  Nero,  wlio   wnn  indeed  adder." 

another  name  tor  cruelty."  "  Who  of  those  men  came  to  his 

"  Flattery,  whoae   nature  (T))    is   to  assi^iiance  'i' 

9.  As  the  i)r<)nuun  relative  has  no  distinction  of  number,  we  some- 
times find  an  aujbiguily  in  the  use  of  it  :  as,  when  we  say,  "  The  dis- 
ciples of  Christ,  whom  we  imitate,"  wo  may  mean  the  imitation  eith- 
er of  Christ  or  of  his  disciples.  The  accuracy  and  clearness  of  the 
sentence  depend  very  much  upon  the  proper  and  determinate  use  of 


(1)  '•  Thai."    (2)  Rule  IV.    (H)  Riilo  X.    Nofo  XVIl.      (i)  '■  Haviriff  dixgusted." 
Rnic  Xiri.     (;-i)  "  The  iinturr  nf  which:' 


SYNTAX.  145 

the  relative,  so  that  it  may  readily  present  its  antecedent  to  the  mind 
of  the  hearer  or  reader  without  any  obscurity  or  ambiguity. 

Wiiat  is  remarked  in  this  Note  on  tlie  use  of  the  relative  pronoun? 

9. 

"The  king  (1)  dismissed  his  niin-  "There  are  millions  of  people  in 

ister  without  any  inquiry;  who  the  empire  (2)  of  China  whose 

had   never  before  committed  support  is  derived  almost  en- 

so  unjust  an  action."  tirely  from  rice." 

10.  It  is  and  it  loas  are  often,  after  the  manner  of  the  French,  used 
in  a  plural  construction,  and  by  some  of  our  best  writers:  as,  "it  is 
either  a  few  great  men  who  decide  for  the  whole,  or  it  is  the  rabble 
that  follow  a  seditious  ringleader;"  " /c  is  they  that  are  the  real 
authors,  though  the  soldiers  are  the  actors  of  the  revolution;"  "  fd 
was  the  heretics  that  first  began  to  rail,"  etc.;  "  'Tis  these  that  early 
taint  the  female  mind."  This  license  in  the  construction  of  it  is  (ir 
it  be  proper  to  admit  it  at  all)  has,  however,  been  certainly  abused 
in  the  following  sentence,  which  is  thereby  made  a  very  awkward 
one  :  It  is  wonderful  the  very  few  accidents  which,  in  several  years, 
happen  from  this  practice." 

How  are  it  is  and  it  was  often  used?  Give  an  example  in  which 
they  are  used  incorrectly  in  this  sense. 

10. 

"It-is  remarkable  his  continual     '' It  is  indisputably  true  his  asser- 
endeavors   to   serve  us,   not-  tion,  though  it  is  a  j)aradox." 

withstanding  our  ingratitude."  (4 ) 

(3) 

11.  The  Interjections  Of  oh.'  and  ah.'  require  the  objective  case 

of  a  pronoun  in  the  first  person  after  them:  as,  "O  me!  Oh  me!  Ah 
me!"  but  the  nominative  case  in  the  second  person:  as,  "Oh  thou 
persecutor  !"  "  O  ye  hypocrites !"  "  Oh  thou  who  d  wellest,"  etc. 

The  neuter  pronoun,  by  an  idiom  peculiar  to  the  English  language, 
is  frequently  joined,,  in  explanatory  sentences,  with  a  noun  or  pro- 
noun of  the  masculine  or  feminine  gender  :  as,  "It  was  I;"  "It  was 
the  man  or  woman  tlial  did  it." 

The  neuter  pronoun  it  is  sometimes  omitted  and  understood:  thus 
we  say,  "  As  appears,  as  follows,"  for  "  As  it  appears,  as  it  follows ;" 
and  "  May  be,"  for  "  It  may  be." 

The  neuter  pronoun  it  is  sometimes  employed  to  express — 

1st.  The  subject  of  any  discourse  or  inquiry  :  as,  "7<  happened  on  a 
summer's  day."    "  Who  is  it  that  calls  on  me?" 

2d.  The  slate  or  condition  of  any  person  or  thing:  as,  "  How  is  i4 
with  you  ?" 

3d  The  thing,  whatever  it  be,  that  is  the  cause  of  any  eflect  or 
event,  or  any  person  considered  merely  as  a  cause;  as,  "  We  heard 
her  say  it  was  not  he;"  "The  truth  is,  it  was  I  that  helped  her." 

Why  is  it  incorrect  to  say,  "Oh  I?"  Why  incorrect  to  say,  "Oh 
thee  ?" 


(1 )  "  Thr.  Ain^  who  had  »cv/t,"  etc.  (2)  ''  There  are  in  thr,  empire"  etc 
(3)  "  i/w  contiiiitat,"  etc.;  ending  the  sentence  with,  "  trr*  remark 
^ble."  (4)  "  His  assertin)},  thoiiffh  pnrn/fo.-ricat,"  etc. 

13 


\ 


146  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

11. 

"  Ah  !  unhappy  thee,  who  art  deaf    "  Oh  !  happy  we,  surrouiuled  with 
to   the    calls  of  duty  and  of  so  many  blessings." 

honor." 

RULE  XXIV. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE  VI. 

The  relative  is  the  nomtvative  case  to  the  verb,  when  no  nominative  case 

comes  bettveeyi  it  and  the  verb  :  as,  "The  master  who  taught  usj" 

"  The  trees  which  are  planted." 
When  a  notnimative  case  comes  between  the  relative  and  the  verb,  the 

relative  is  governed  by  some  ivord  in  its  otv7i  member  of  the  sentence  : 

as,  "  He  who  preserves  me,  to  whom  1  owe  my  being,  whose  I  am, 

and  whom.  I  serve,  is  eternal." 

In  the  several  members  of  the  last  sentence  the  relative  performs 
different  offices.  In  the  first  member,  it  marks  the  agent;  in  the 
second,  it  submits  to  the  government  of  the  preposition  ;  in  the  third, 
it  represents  the  possessor ;  and  in  the  fourth,  the  object  of  an  action  : 
and  therefore  it  must  be  in  the  three  different  cases  correspondent  to 
those  ofl5ces. 

AVhen  both  the  antecedent  and  relative  become  nominatives,  each 
to  different  verbs,  the  relative  is  the  nominative  to  the  former,  and 
the  antecedent  to  the  latter  verb :  as,  "  True  philosophy,  which  is  the 
ornament  of  our  nature,  consists  more  in  the  love  of  our  duty  and 
the  practice  of  virtue,  than  in  great  talents  and  extensive  knowl- 
edge." 

A  few  instances  of  erroneous  construction  will  illustrate  both 
branches  of  the  sixth  rule.  The  three  following  refer  to  the  first 
part :  "  How  can  we  avoid  being  grateful  to  those  whom,  by  repeat- 
ed kind  offices,  have  proved  themselves  our  real  friends  V  "  These 
are  the  men  whom,  you  might  suppose,  were  the  authors  of  the 
work."  "  If  you  were  here,  you  would  find  three  or  four  whom  you 
would  say  passed  their  time  agreeably."  In  all  these  places  it 
should  be  who,  instead  of  whom.  The  two  latter  sentences  contain 
a  nominative  between  the  relative  and  the  verb;  and,  therefore, 
seem  to  contravene  the  rule  ;  but  the  student  will  reflect,  that  it  is 
not  the  nominative  of  the  verb  with  which  the  relative  is  connected. 
The  remaining  examples  refer  to  the  second  part  of  the  rule  :  "  Men 
of  fine  talents  are  not  always  the  persons  who  we  should  esteem." 
*'  The  persons  who  you  dispute  with  are  precisely  of  your  opinion." 
"Our  tutors  are  our  benefactors,  who  we  owe  obedience  to,  and 
who  we  ought  to  love."  In  these  sentences  tvhom  should  be  used 
instead  oi  toho. 

"  These  are  the  men  whom,  you  might  suppose,  were,"  etc.  Will 
you  correct  this  example,  and  give  the  rule  for  it  ? 

"  We  are  dependent  on  each  oth-  friend,  whom  shall  be  sent  to 

ers'  assistance;  tohom  is  there  admonish  him?" 

that  can  subsist  by  himself?"  "They  «<'/*o  (1)  much  is  given  to 

"  If    he   will    not    hear   his    best 

(1)  «  To  whom." 


.SVMAX.  147 

will  have  much  (I)  to  answer  '      respect,  and  who  we  oiiglit  to 

for."  (2)  be  grateful  to." 

"It  is   not   to   he   expected   that  "The    persons    who   conscience 

they,  whom  in  early  life  have  and  virtue  support,  may  smile 

been  dark  and  deceitful,  should  at  the  caprices  of  fortune.'' 

afterwards  become  fair  and  in-  "From    the   character    of   those 

genuous."  who  you  associate  with,  your 

*'  They  who  have  labored  to  make  own  will  be  estimated." 

us  wise  and  good,  are  the  per-  "That  (3)  is  the  student  who   I 

.sons  who  we  ought  to  love  and  gave  the  book  to,  and  whom, 

I  am  persuaded,  deserves  it." 

1.  When  the  relative  pronoun  is  of  the  interrogative  kind,  the  noun 
or  pronoun  containing  the  answer  must  be  in  the  san\e  case  as  that 
which  contains  the  question  :  as,  "  Whose  books  are  these  ?"  "  They 
are  John's."'  "  TI7io  gave  them  to  him?"  "We."  "-Of  whom  did 
you  buy  them?"  "  Of  a  bookselTer;  him  who  lives  at  the  Bible  and 
Crown.''  "  Whom  did  you  see  there?"  "Both  him  and  the  .'^hop- 
man."  The  learner  will  readily  comprehend  this  rule,  b^  supplying 
the  words  which  are  understood  in  the  answers.  Thus,  to  tjxpress 
the  answers  at  large,  we  would  say,  "  They  are  John's  books  ;"  "  We 
gave  them  to  himr'  "  We  bought  them  of  him  who  lives,"  etc. 
"  We  saw  both  him  and  the  shopman."  As  the  relative  pronoun, 
when  Tised  interrogatively,  refers  to  the  subseqiient  word  or  phrase 
containing  the  answer  to  the  question,  that  word  or  phrase  may 
properly  be  termed  the  subsequent  to  the  interrogative. 

"  Of  whom  did  you  buy  them  ?  "  "  Of  a  bookseller ;  he  who  lives," 
etc.  What  is  wrong  in  this  sentence,  and  how  may  it  be  corrected? 
What  is  the  Note  lor  it  ? 

1. 

"Of    whom    were    the     articles  "  Who  was  the  money  paid  to?" 

bought?"     "Of  a  mercer ;  he  "To    the    mercer    and     his 

(4)  who  resides  near  (fj)  the  clerk." 

mansion-house."  "Who  counted  it?"     "  Both  the 

*'  Was  any  person  besides  (5)  the  clerk  and  him." 

mercer      present?"'    "Yes, 

both  him  and  his  clerk." 

KULB  XXV. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RIILK    VII. 

When,  the  relative  is  2)receded  by  two  nominatives  of  different  persons ,  the 
relative  and  verb  may  agree  in  person  with  eitlier^  according  to  the  sense: 
as,  "I  am  the  man  who  command  you;"  or,  "I  am  the  man  who 
conwiands  you." 

The  form  of  the  first  of  the  two  preceding  sentences  expresses  the 
meaning  rather  obscurely.  It  would  be  more  perspicuous  to  say, 
"I,  who  command  you,  am  the  man."  Perhaps  the  difference  of 
meaning  produced  by  relerring  the  relative  to  different  antecedents, 
will  be  more  evident  to  the  learner  in  the  following  sentences :  "  I  am 
the  general  who  gives  the  orders  to-day  ;  "  "I  am  the  general,  \<'ho  give 

(1)673.         (2)596.         (3)  Note  1-105.         (4)  Rule  XV.        (.S)  247. 


148  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

the  orders  to-day; "  that  is,  "I,  who  give  the  orders  to  day,  am  the 
general." 

When  the  relative  and  the  verb  have  been  determined  to  agree  with 
either  of  the  preceding  nominatives,  that  agreement  must  be  pre- 
served throughout  the  sentence  ;  as  in  the  following  instance  :  "  I  am 
the  Lord,  that  maketh  all  things;  that  stretcheth  forth  the  heavens 
alone." — ha.  xliv.  24.  Thus  far  is  consistent:  the  Lord,  in  the  third 
person,  is  the  antecedent,  and  the  verb  agrees  with  the  relative  in  the 
third  person ;  "  I  am  the  Lord,  which  Lord,  or  Ke,  that  maketh  all 
things.''  If  I  were  made  the  antecedent,  the  relative  and  verb  should 
agree  with  it  in  the  first  person;  as,  "i  am  the  Lord  that  make  all 
things ;  that  stretch  forth  the  heavens  alone."  But  should  it  follow, 
^'that  spreadeth  abroad  the  earth  by  myself,"  there  would  arise  a  con- 
fusion of  persons  and  a  manifest  solecism. 

"I  am  the  man  who  command  you."  "I  am  the  man  who  com- 
mands you."  What  is  the  nominative  to  command  in  the  first  sen- 
tence ?  What  to  commands  in  the  second  ?  Rule  for  each  ?  Why  is 
the  verb  of  a  dilTerent  person  in  diflerenl  sentences? 
«'I  acknowledge  that  (1)  I  am  the  ''I  perceive  that  thou  art  a  pupil 
teacher,  (5)  who   adopt   that  who  possesses  bright  parts, 

sentiment,  and  maintains  the  but  who  hast  cultivated  them 

propriety  of  such  measures."  but  (.3)  little."  (4) 

(2)  "Thou  art  he  (5)  who  breathest 

"Thou  art  a  friend  (5)  that  hast  on  the  earth  with  the  breath 

often  relieved   me,  and  that  of  spring,  and  who  covereth 

has  not  deserted  me  now,  in  it  with  verdure  and  beauty." 

the  time  of  peculiar  need."         "I  am  the  Lord  (5)  thy  God,  (5) 
"I  am  the  man  who  approves  of  who  teacheth  ihte  to  profit, 

wholesome     discipline,    and  and  who  lead  thee  by  the  way 

wMio  recommend  it  to  others;  thoii  shouldst  go." 

but  I  am   not  a  person  who     "Thou    art    the    Lord   who   did 
promotes  useless  severity,  or  choose  Abraham,        and 

who  object  to  mild  and  gener-  broughtest  him  forth  (4)  out 

ous  treatment."  of  (6)  Ur  of  the  Chaldees." 

KULE  IV. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RTTLE    VITI. 

Adjectives  belong  to  the  nouns  which  they  describe. 

NoTK  I.  Adjective  pronouns  and  numerals  must  agree  in  number 
with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

1.  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

A  few  instances  of  the  breach  of  this  rule  are  here  exhibited:  "I 
have  not  travelled  this  twenty  years;"  "  <7<e8c  twenty."  "I  am  not 
recommending  these  kind  of  snflerings  ;  "  "  z:/;,?*  kind."  '' Those  set 
of  books  was  a  valuable  present ;  "  *Hhat  set." 

"I  have  not  travelled  this  twenty  years."  How  should  this  be 
altered?     Why? 


(1)  6.52.  (2)  "Adopts  and  maintains,"  or  "adopt  and  maintain.' 

(3)654.  (4)  Adverb.  (5)  Rule  XV.  (6)247. 


SYNTAX.  149 

^^  lliese  kind  of  indulgences  soft-  'The  chasm    majle  (5)    by    the 
en  and  injure  the  mind."  earthquake  was  twenty  fool 

"Instead    (1)    of    imj)roving    (2)  (6)  broad,  (7)    and    one   hun- 

yourselves,   you    have    been  dred  fathom  (8)  in  depth." 

playing  (3)   this  two  hours."  "  How  many  a  sorrow  (9)  should 
(4)  we  avoid,  ii'  we  were  not  in- 

"  Those  sort  of  favors  did  real  in-  dustrious  to  make  them  !  " 

jury,    under   the  appearance  '*  He  saw  one  or   more  persons 
of  kindness."  (10)  enter  (11)  the  garden." 

1.  The  word  means,  in  the  singular  number,  and  the  phrases  "  6y 
tJiis  means"  "  ^jy  that  meafis,"  are  used  by  our  best  and  most  correct 
writers  :  namely,  Bacon,  Tillotson,  Atterbury,  Addison,  Steele,  Pope, 
etc.*  They  are,  indeed,  in  so  general  and  approved  use,  that  it  would 
appear  awkward,  if  not  affected,  to  apply  the  old  singular  form,  and 
say,  "  by  this  mean  ;  "  "  by  that  mean  ;  "  "  it  was  by  a  mean  /"although 
it  is  more  agreeable  to  the  general  analogy  of  the  language.  "The 
■word  means  (says  Priestley)  belongs  to  the  class  of  words  which  do 
not  change  their  termination  on  account  of  number;  for  it  is  used 
alike  in  both  numbers." 

The  word  amends  is  used  in  this  manner  in  the  following  sentences: 
"Though  he  did  not  succeed,  he  gained  the  approbation  of  his  coun- 
try;  and  with  this  amends  he  was  content."  "Peace  of  mind  is  aa 
honorable  amends  for  the  sacrifices  of  interest."  "In  return,  he  re- 
ceived the  thanks  of  his  employers,  and  the  present  of  a  large  estate  *. 

(1)  247.  (2)  5G1.  (3)  Rule  XIII.  (4)  Rule  XXII.  G46.  (5)  Rule  XIII. 
(6)  Note  XVIII,  C48.  (7)  "  C7irtsm— ftroatZ."  Rule  IV.  (8)  Rule  IX.  {9) ''Many 
sorroios."     (loj  "  One  person,  or  more  than  one."    (11)  Rule  XII. 

**'By  this  means  he  hnd  them  the  more  at  vantage,  being  tired  and  harassed 
w|th  a  long  march.'*— Baoon. 

"  By  this  means  one  great  restraint  from  doing  evil  would  be  taken  away." 
"AudfAis  is  an  admirable  means  to  improve  men  in  virtue."  ''•By  that  means 
they  have  rendered  their  duty  more  difficult." — Tillotson. 

"It  renders  us  careless  of  api)roving  ourselves  to  God,  and  by  tJuU  means 
securing  the  continuance  of  his  goodness."  "A  good  character,  when  established, 
should  not  be  rested  in  as  an  end,  but  employed  as  a  means  of  doing  still  further 
good." — Atterbury. 

"By  tins  means  they  are  happy  in  each  other."  "He  by  that  means  preserves 
his  superiority." — Addison. 

"Your  vanity  by  this  m^ans  will  want  its  food." — Steele. 

"  By  this  mea7i§  alone,  their  greatest  obstacles  will  vanish." — Pope. 

"  Which  custom,  has  proved  the  most  effectual  m^eans  to  ruin  the  nobles." 

Dean  Swift. 

"  There  is  no  means  of  escaping  the  persecution."  "  Faith  is  not  only  a  means 
cf  obeying,  but  a  principal  act  of  obedience." — DR.  Young. 

"  He  looked  on  money  as  a  necessary  7nean5  of  maintaining  and  increasing  pow- 
er."— Lord  Lyttleton's  Henry  II. 

".Tohn  was  too  much  intimidated  not  to  embrace  every  7nea7is  afforded  for  his 
safety." — Goldsmith. 

"  Lest  this  means  should  fail."    "By  means  of  ship-money,  the  late  king,"  etc. 
"The  only  means  of  securing  a  durable  peace." — Hume. 
•"By  this  means  there  was  nothing  left  to  the  parliament  of  Ireland."  etc. 

Blackstone. 

"  By  this  Tneans  so  many  slaves  escaped  out  of  the  hands  of  their  masters." 

Dr.  Robertson. 

"By  this  means  they  bear  witness  to  each  other." — Burkk. 

"  By  this  means  the  wrath  of  man  was  made  to  turn  against  itself" — Dr.  Blair. 

"A  magazine,  which  has,  by/7n'.s  wieans,  contained,"  etc.  "Birds,  in  general,  pro- 
cure their  food  by  means  of  their  beak." — Dr.  Paley. 


J  50  KNGLIHH    nliAMMAR. 

* 

these  were  aniple  anieudt  for  all  hi"<  labors."  "  We  have  descrihed 
the  rewards  of  vice;  the  good  man's  aiticnila  are  of  a  diflercQt  na- 
ture." 

Il  can  scarcely  be  doubted  that  this  word  nmc.vda  (like  the  word 
means)  had  formerly  its  correspondent  form  in  the  singular  number,  as 
il  is  derived  from  the  French  <nueti(i> ,  though  now  it  is  exclusively 
established  in  the  plural  form.  If,  therefore,  il  be  alleged  thai  mean 
Bhould  be  applied  in  tlie  singular,  because  it  is  derived  from  the  French 
moyen,  the  same  kind  of  argument  may  be  advanced  in  favor  of  the 
singular  amende;  and  the  general  analogy  of  the  language  may  also 
be  pleaded  in  support  of  il. 

Campbell,  in  his  Philosophy  of  Rheloric,  has  the  following  remark 
on  the  subject  before  us  :  ''  No  persons  of  lasie  will,  I  presume,  vent- 
ure so  far  to  violate  the  present  usage,  and  consequently  to  shock 
the  ears  of  the  generality  of  readers,  as  to  say,  •  By  this  mean,  by  that 
mean. 

Lowih  and  Johnson  seem  to  be  against  the  use  of  Ni«aM«  in  the  sin- 
gular number.  They  do  not,  however,  speak  decisively  on  the  point, 
but  ralhcr  dubiously,  as  \i'  thi;y  knew  that  they  were  questioning 
eminent  authorities  as  well  as  general  practice.  That  they  were  not 
decidedly  against  the  application  of  this  word  to  the  singular  number, 
appears  from  their  own  language:  "  Whole  sentences,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  may  become  members  of  other  sentences  by  vteanit 
of  some  additional  connectionJ^ — Ur.  Lowth's  Introduction  to  Enyliah 
Grammar. 

"There  is  no  other  method  of  teaching  that  of  which  any  one  is 
ignorant,  but  by  nuaiia  of  something  already  known." — Db.  Johnson. 
IdUr. 

It  is  remarkable  that  our  present  version  of  the  Scriptures  makes 
no  use.  as  far  as  the  compiler  can  discover,  of  the  word  mean,  tli^jugii 
there  are  several  instances  to  be  found  in  it  of  the  use  of //jcu««,  in  the 
sense  and  connection  contended  for.  '' By  fAjs  mta/KV  thou  shall  have 
no  portion  on  this  side  the  river." — Ezra  iv,  16.  "That  by  meaim-ot 
death,^^  etc. — Heb.  ix,  10.  It  will  scarcely  be  pretended  that  the  trans- 
lators of  the  sacred  volumes  did  not  accnralely  understand  the  Eng- 
lish language,  or  that  they  would  have  admitted  one  form  of  this 
word  and  rejected  the  other,  had  not  their  determination  been  con- 
formal)le  to  the  best  usage.  An  attem})t,  therefore,  to  recover  an  old 
word,  so  long  since  disused  by  the  most  correct  writers,  seems  not 
likely  to  be  successful:  especially  as  the  rejection  of  il  is  not  attended 
with  any  inconvenience. 

The  practice  of  the  best  and  most  correct  writers,  or  a  great  ma- 
jority of  them,  corroborated  by  general  usage,  forms,  during  its  con- 
tinuance, the  standard  of  language;  especially  if,  in  particular  in- 
stances, this  |)ractice  conliniie  alter  objection  and  due  consideration. 
Every  connection  and  application  of  words  and  phrases,  thus  support- 
ed, must  therefore  be  proper  and  entitled  lo  respect,  if  not  exceptiona- 
ble in  a  moral  point  of  view. 

^' Si  volet  ttaua 

Quern  penea  urbitriaiii  eat,  etjus,  el  norma  loqaendi^ — HoR. 

On  this  principle  many  forms  of  expression,  not  less  deviating  from 
the  general  analogy  of  the  language  than  those  before  meiftioned,  are 
to  be  considered  as  strictly  proper  and  justifiable.  Of  this  kind  ar« 
the  following:  "  JS^ohc  of  them  nrc  varied  to  express  the  gender  j"  and 


SVNTAX.  151 


yet  none  originally  signified  no  one.     "  He  him^el/  shall  do  the  work  •' 
here,  what  was  at  first  appropriated  to  the  objective,  is  now  properlV 
used  as  the  nominative  case.     "  You  have  behaved  yourself  well ;"  iii 
this  example,  the  word  you  is  put  in  the  nominative  ca^e  plural   with 
strict  propriety  ;  thoii^  ,  forj-nerly  it  was  confined  to  the  objective  case, 
and  yc  exclusively  used  for  the  nominative. 
-      The  reader  will  perceive  that,  in  the  following  sentences,  the  use 
oMhe  word  mean  in  the  old  form  has  a  very  uncouth  appearance: 
liy  the  mean  of  adversity  we  are  often  instructed."     "  He  prrfServed 
his  health  by  mean  of  exercise."     "  Fru^^ality  is  one  mean  of  acquiriuir 
a  competency."     They  should   be,  "By  means  of  adversity,"  etc  • 
By  means  ol  exercise,"  etc. ;  "  Frugality  is  one  means,''  etc.  ' 

(jrood  writers  do,  indeed,  make  use  of  the  substantive  (1)  mean  in 
the  singular  number,  and  in  that  number  only,  to  signify  mediocritv 
middle-rate,  etc.,  as,  "This  is  a  mean  between  the  two  extremes" 
J3ut  in  the  sense  of  instrumentality,  itiius  long  been  disused  by  the 
best  authors,  and  by  almost  every  writer. 

This  means  and  that  tneans  should  be  used  only  when  they  refer  to 
what  is  singular;  these  means  and  those  means,  when  they  respect 
I  'ifu  ;,'!:Vu^^''  \'''?'^  temperately,  and  by  t/us  means  preserved  his 
neaithj  ihe  scholars  were  attentive,  industrious,  and  obedient  to 
their  tutors,  and  by  these  means  acquired  knowledge." 

We  have  enlarged  on  this  article,  that  the  young  student  may  be  led 
to  rellect  on  a  point  so  important  as  that  of  ascertaining  the  standard 
o/  propriety  in  the  use  of  language. 

In  what  number  is  the  word  means  used?  What  does  Dr  Priestley 
remark  eoncexning  the  use  of  this  word  ?  What  other  word  is  used 
m  this  manner?  What  does  Dr.  Campbell  remark  in  regard  to  the 
use  of  the  phrase,  "  By  this  mean  ?"  Do  Dr.  Lowth  and  Dr.  Johnson 
approve  ol  the  use  of  means  in  the  singular  number?  Do  good  M'riters 
make  u^~e  ol  the  siibslanlive  (1)  mean  in  the  singular  number?  Give 
an  «xampe.  When  should  "This  means"  and  "That  means"  be 
used .'     When  "  These  means  "  and  "  Those  means  ?" 


r 


"Charles  was  extravagant,   and  "  This  person  embraced  every  oiT- 

^      by //i?»  wiean  became  poor  and  porlunity  to   display  his   tal- 

^        despicable."  ents ;    and    by   th.se    means 

It  was  by  that  ungenerous  mean  rendered  himself  ridiculous  " 

that  (2)  he  obtained  his  end."  "  .Toseph  was  industrious,  frugal, 

"Industry  IS  the  mmn   of  obtain-  and    discreet;    and    by   thi«. 

u^ru'"^  competency."  means  obtained  property  and 

1  hough  a  promising  measure,  it  reputation." 
is  a  mean  which  I  can  not  adopt." 

2.  When  two  persons  or  things  are  spoken  of  Ui  a  sentence,  and 
there  i8  occasion  to  mention  thein  again,  lor  the  sake  of  distinction, 
that  IS  used  in  reference  to  the  former,  and  this,  in  reference  to  the 
latter:  as,  "SelMove,  which  [><  the  spring  of  action  in  the  houI,  is 
ruled  by  reason;  but  for  that,  man  would  be  inactive;  and  but  for 
thts,  he  would  be  active  to  no  end." 

How  are  the  pronouns  t/ieu  and  this  used  ? 


0)  youm  Kn  nometimoit  ca\\e<i  tubstaTUivci.  (2)  M8. 


lo'4 


KNCJLISH    OiiAiVlAlAK. 


upon  the  earlh  in  those  than 
in  t/ie.^e  ;  because  there  is  a 
much  slower  evaporation." 
"Rex  and  Tyrannus  are  of  very 
diflerent  characters.  The  one 
(1)  rules  his  people  by  laws 
to  which  they  consent ;  the 
other,  (3)  by  his  absolute  will 
and  power  :  this  is  called  free- 
dom, t/iat  (3)  tyranny." 


"  Religion  raises  men  above  them- 
selves ;  irreligion  sinks  them 

beneath  the  brutes  :  that  (1) 

binds  them  down  (2)  to  a  poor, 

pitiable   speck    of  perishable 

earlh ;  this  opens  for  them  a 

prospect  to  the  skies." 
"More  rain  falls  in  the  first  two 

summer  months,  than  in  the 

first  two  winter  ones  ;  but  it 

makes  a  much  greater  show 

3.  The  distributive  adjective  pronouns  each,  every,  either,  agree 
with  nouns,  pronouns,  and  verbs  of  the  singular  number  only  :  as, 
"  The  king  of  Israel,  and  Jehoshaphat,  the  king  of  Judah,  sat  each  on 
7m' throne ;"  "  £ve?7/ tree  ?*  known  by  its  fruit;"  unless  the  plural 
noun  convey  a  collective  idea  :  as,  "  Every  six  months  ;"  Every  hun- 
dred years."  The  following  phrases  are  exceptionable:  "■  Let  ««cA 
esteem  others  better  than  themselves;"  it  ought  to  be  '■'•  himsdf.^'' 
"The  language  should  be  both  perspicuous  and  correct:  in  propor- 
tion as  either  of  these  two  qualities  are  wanting,  the  language  is  ini- 
perfect ;"  it  should  be, ''*25  wanting."  Everyone  of  the  letters  bear 
regular  dales,  and  contain  proofs  of  attachment ;"  ''  hears  a  regular 
date,  and  contains^  '■'■  Every  town  and  village  were  burned ;  every  ^voye 
and  every  tree  were  cut  down  ;"  '■^was  burned,  and  was  cut  down." 

Either  is  often  used  improperly,  instead  of  each  :  as,  "  The  king  of 
Israel,  and  Jehoshaphat,  the  king  of  Judah,  sat  either  of  them  on  his* 
throne;"  "  Nadab  and  Abihu,  the  sons  of  Aaron,  took  either  of  them 
his  censer."  Each  signifies  both  of  them  taken  distinctly  or  separate- 
ly; either  properly  signifies  only  the  one  or  the  other  of  them,  takea 
disjunctively. 

•'  The  king  of  Israel,  and  Jehoshaphat,  ihe  king  of  Judah,  sat  either 
of  them  on  their  throne."  Will  you  correct  this,  and  give  the  rule 
for  it  ? 

3. 
"Each  of  them,  in  their  (4)  turn,     "  Every  leaf,  every  twig,  (9)  every 


receive  the  benefits  to  which 
they  are  entitled." 

"My  counsel  to  each  of  you  is, 
that  you  (5)  should  make  it 
your  endeavor  to  come  to  a 
friendly  agreement." 

"By  discussing  what  (6)  relates 
to  each  particular,  in  their 
order,  vve  shall  belter  under- 
stand the  feubject." 

"  Every  ])erson,  whatever  (7)  be 
their  station,  (8)  «■/■«  bound  by 
their  duties  of  morality  and 
religion." 


drop  of  water,  teem  with 
life." 

"  Every  man's  heart  and  temper 
is  productive  of  much  (10) 
inward  joy  or  bitterness." 

"  Whatever  (11)  he  undertakes, 
either  (12)  his  pride  or  his 
folly  disgust  us." 

"  Every  man  and  every  woman 
were  numbered." 

''Neither  of  those  men  seem  to 
have  any  idea  that  their  opin- 
ions may  be  ill  founde^. 


(1)  407.     Rule  VI.  (2)  Adverb.  (3)  Rule  XI. 

"Ai*."         (5)  "/;e."         (fi)  437.        (7)RuleXV.        (8)  Rule  .VI. 
(9)  Rule  XI.      (10)  Adjective.     (11)  Rule  VIII.     (12)  669. 


(4) 


SYNTAX.  151:$ 

"  When  ]>eriigiHiy  anJ  genilene."<s  beheUl  iu  ihe  luost  lavorable 

reign   within,  (1)  we  are  al-  light." 

ways  (1)   least  (1)  in  hazard  "  On  either  side  of  the  river  was 

from  without:  (2)  every  per-  there  the  tree  of  lil'e." 
son  and  every  occurrence  are 

4.  Adjectives  are  sometimes  improperly  applied  as  adverbs:  as, 
"  Indifl'erent  honest;  excellent  well;  miserable  poor;"  instead  of 
"  Indiflerenlly  honest ;  excellently  well  ;  miserably  poor."  "  He  be- 
haved himself  conformable  to  that  great  example  ;"  ^'  coiifurmahty." 
"Endeavor  to  live  hereafter  suitable  to  a  ))erson  in  thy  station  ;" 
^^  sititabli/."  "lean  never  thinic  so  very  mean  of  him;"  '*  meanly.''^ 
"  He  describes  this  river  agreeable  to  the  common  reading;"  '•'  agrte- 
ably."  ''Agreeable  to  my  promise,  1  now  write;"  '■-agreeably.''^ 
"Thy  exceeding  great  reward  ;"  when  united  to  an  adjective,  or  ad- 
verb not  ending  in  /y,  the  word  exceedi?>g  has  ly  added  to  it:  as, 
"  exceedingly  dreadful,  exceedingly  great  ;"  "  exceedingly  well ;  "  ex- 
ceedingly more  active  ;"  but  when  it  is  joined  to  an  adverb  or  ad- 
jective, having  that  termination,  the  ly  is  omitted:  as,  "  Some  men 
think  exceeding  clearly,  and  reason  exceeding  forcibly  ;"  "  She  ap- 
peared, on  this  occasion,  exceeding  lovely."  "  He  acted  in  this  busi- 
ness huhler  than  was  expected."  "  Tluiy  behaved  the  nohhst,  be- 
cause they  were  disinterested."'  They  should  have  been,  '■'viore 
hohUy.  taost  noblyy  The  adjective  pronoun  such  is  olten  niisapplied  : 
as,  "He  was  such  an  extravagant  young  man,  that  he  spent  his 
whole  patrimony  in  a  few  years  ;"  it  should  be,  '•'■  so  extravagant  a 
young  man.''''  "  I  never  before  saw  such  large  trees  ;"  ^^  saw  trees  so 
targeP  When  we  refer  to  the  species  or  nature  of  a  thing,  the  word 
svch  is  properly  applied  :  as,  "  Such  a  temper  is  seldom  found;"  but 
when  degree  is  signilied,  we  use  the  word  ao  :  as,  "  So  bad  a  temper 
is  seldom  found." 

Adverbs  are  likewise  improperly  used  as  adjectives:  as,  "The 
tutor  addressed  him  in  terms  rather  warm,  but  suitably  to  his  of- 
fence ;"  '■'■suitable.''^  "They  were  seen  wandering  about  solitarily 
and  distressed:"  '^  solitary. ^^  "He  lived  in  a  manner  agreeably  to 
the  dictates  of  reason  and  religion;"  ^' agreeable.^'  "The  study  of 
syntax  should  be  previously  to  that  of  punctuation  ;"  '^  previous.^' 

Young  persons  who  study  grammar  find  it  diflicull  to  decide,  in 
particular  constructions,  whether  an  adjective  or  an  adverb  ought 
to  be  used.  A  few  observations  on  this  point  may  serve  to  inform 
their  judgment,  and  direct  their  determination.  They  should  care- 
fully attend  to  the  definitions  of  the  adjective  and  the  adverb;  and 
consider  whether,  in  the  case  in  t]ue»tion,  quality  or  m ami er  is  indi- 
cated. In  the  former  case  an  adjective  is  proper  ;  in  the  latter,  an 
adverb.  A  number  of  examples  will  illustrate  this  direction,  and 
prove  useful  on  other  occasions: 

"  She  loi)ks  cold — She  looks  coldly  on  him." 
"He  feels  warm — He  feel.s  warmly  the  insult  ofl'ered  to  him." 
"  Hebecame  sincere  and  virtuous — He  became  sincerely  virtuous." 
"  She  lives  free  from  care — He  lives  freely  at  another's  expense." 
"  Harriet  always  appears  neat — She  dresses  neatly." 
"  Charles  has  groMMi  great  by  his  wisdom — He  has  grown  greatly  ' 
in  reputation."  » 

"  They  now  appear  happy — They  now  appear  happily  in  earnest." 

(1.)  Adverb.     (2.)  '' From  without  "  i.  e.,  '■''  externally y  589. 


154  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

*' The  statement  seems  exact — The  statement  seems  exactly  in 
point." 

The  verb  to  be,  in  all  its  moods  and  tenses,  g-en«irally  requires  the 
word  immediately  connected  with  it  to  be  an  adjective,  not  an  ad- 
verb; and  consequently,  when  this  verb  can  be  substituted  for  any 
other,  without  varying  the  sense  or  the  construction,  that  othef  verb 
must  also  be  connected  with  an  ndjective.  The  following  sentences 
elucidate  these  observations:  "This*  is  agreeable  to  our  interest." 
"  That  behavior  was  not  suitable  to  his  station."  "Rules  should  be 
conformable  to  sense."  "  The  rose  smells  [is]  sweet."  "  How 
sweet  the  hay  smells  [is] !"  "How  delightful  the  country  appears 
[is]!"  "How  pleasant  the  fields  loolc  [are]!"  "The  clouds  look 
[are]  dark."  "How  black  the  sky  looked  [was]!"  "The  apple 
tastes  [is]  sour!"  "How  bitter  the  plums  tasted  [were]!"  "He 
feels  [is]  happy."  In  all  these  sentences,  we  can,  with  perfect  pro- 
priety, substitute  some  tenses  of  the  verb  to  he  for  the  other  verbs. 
But  ill  the  following  sentences  we  can  not  do  this  :  "  The  dog  smells 
disagreeably."  "George  feels  exquisitely."  "How  pleasantly  she 
looks  at  us." 

The  directions  contained  in  this  Note  are  offered  as  useful,  not  as 
complete  and  unexceptionable.  Anomalies  in  language  everywhere 
encounter  us  ;  but  we  must  not  reject  rules,  because  they  are  attend- 
ed with  exceptions. 

Why  is  "  indiflerent  honest"  an  incorrect  expression  ?  Do  we  say, 
"  exceeding  dreadful,"  and  "exceeding  great?"  What,  then,  da  we 
use  in  the  place  of  exceeding  ?  When,  then,  do  we  use  exceediiigly  ? 
When  exceeding?  "The  tutor  addressed  him  in  terms  rather  warm, 
but  suitably  to  his  offence."  Why  is  thissentence  wrong?  Correct 
it.  How  can  we  tell  whether  an  adjective  or  an  adverb  ought  to  be 
used  ?  Which  do  we  use,  when  quality  is  indicated  ?  Which,  when 
manner  is  indicated?  Which  does  the  verb  ^o  be  generally  require 
to  be  connected  with  it,  the  adjective  or  adverb?  To  illustrate  the 
distinct  and  proper  use  of  both  the  adverb  and  adjective,  I  will  give 
you  some  examples.  Would  you,  then,  say,  "  He  is  diligently  and 
attentively,"  or  "diligent  and  attentive?"  "She  will  be  happy,"  or 
"happily?"  "He  looks  cold,"  or  "coldly'^"  "She  looks  cold  on 
him."  Can  we  use  is  for  loo/cs^  and  make  sense  ?  Would  you,  then, 
say,  "She  looks  cold  on  him,"  or  "coldlj^on  him?"  "She  lives 
freely  [is]  from  care  ?"  Why  ?  "  He  lives  free  at  another's  expense  ?" 
"  He  ieels  warmly  ?"  "  He  feels  warm  the  insult  offered  him  ?"  "  He 
became  sincerely  and  virtuously?"  "  He  became  sincere  virtuous?" 
Why?  "Harriet  always  appears  neatly — She  dresses  neat?" 
"Charles  has  grown  great  by  his  wisdom — He  is  grown  great  in  his 
reputation?"  "They  now  ap,pear  happily — They  now  appear  happy 
in  earnest?"  "  The  statement  seems  exactly — The  statement  seems 
exact  in  point?"  "  How  sweetly  the  hay  smells  !"?  •'  How  delightful 
the  country  ap|)ears!"'?  "How  pleasant  the  fields  look!"?  "The 
clouds  look  darkly  ?"     "  The  apples  taste  sourly  ?" 

4. 

"  She   reads   jxroper,   writes  very  they  lived  conformable  to  the 

7ieat.  and,  composes  accurate.^^  rules  of  prudence." 

"  He  was   extreme   prodigal,    and     "  We     may    reason     very    clear 

his  property  is  now  near  ex-  and  exceeding  strong,  without 

hausted."  knowing  that  there  is  such  a 

"They  generally  succeeded;  for  thing  as  a  syllogism." 


» 


SYNTAX. 


155 


"  The  amputation  was  exceeding 
well  performed,  and  saved  the 
patient's  life." 
*'  He  came  agreeable  to  his  prom- 
ise,   and    conducted    himself 
suitable  to  the  occasion." 
"He   speaks   verv   fluent,    reads 
excellent,  but  does  not  think 
very  coherent." 
"He  behaved  himself  submissive, 
and    was    exceeding    careful 
,.  rp°°^  ^°  S'v«  (1)  offence." 
•  They  rejected  the  advice,  and 
conducted  themselves  exceed- 
ingiy  indiscreetly." 
"  He  is  a  person  of  great  abilities, 
and  excecdinff  upright  j  and  is 
like  to  be  a  very  useful  mem- 
uT.         ^^^  °^  ^'^*^  community." 
'The  conspiracy  was  the  easier 
(3)   discovered,   from    its    {A) 
being  known  (5)  to  many." 
"  Not  being  fully  acquainted  with 
the  subject,  he  could  a(nnn  no 
stronger  (6)  than  he  did." 

f).  Double  comparatives  and  superlatives  should  be  avoided-    such 
Der-"''Tir?''T^"'^'     "'^^  ^^''^'  ^°»>-«j"  ''amorrse  cner   em 

perr  "thestraitests^ctrV.,,^;-.^^^^^^^^^^  -o-  serene  teu. 

the  RuTe'Srit^"^'"'""     ''''"   y°"  ^^^••'^^^  ^'"-^   -"^--«>  -'^  S-e 


with  the  subject,  that  few 
could  speak  nobler  upon  it." 

"  We  may  credit  his  testimony, 
for  he  says  express  that  he 
saw  the  transaction." 

'*  Use  a  little  wine  for  thy  stom- 
ach's  sake,   and    thine   often 

(7)  iniirmities." 

"From  these  favorable  begin- 
nings, we  may  hope  for  a  soon 

(8)  and  prosperous  issue." 

*'  He  addressed  several  exhorta- 
tions to  them  suitably  to  their 
circumstances." 

'*  Conformably  to  their  vehemence 
of  thought,  was  theif  vehe- 
mence of  gesture." 

"We  should  implant  in  the  minds 
of  youth  such  seeds  and  prin- 
ciples of  piety  and  virtue  as 
(9)  are  likely  to  take  soonest 
and  deepest  root," 

"  Such  (10)  an  amiable  disposition 
will  secure  universal  regard." 

•'Such  distinguished  virtues  sel- 
dom occur." 


"The  nightingale  sings:  hers  is 
the  most  sweetest  voice  in 
the  grove." 

"  The  most  Highest  hath  created 
us  for  his  glory,  and  for  our 
own  happiness." 

"  The  Supreme  Being  is  the  most 
wisest,  and  most  powerfulest, 
and  the  most  best  of  beings." 


"'T is  wore  easier  to  build  two 
chimneys  than  to  maintain 
one." 

"The  tongue  is  like  (11)  a  race- 
horse, (12)  which  runs  the 
faster  (13)  the  leaser  weight  it 
carries." 

"The  pleasures  of  the  under- 
standing are  7nore  preferaUc 
than  (14)  those  of  the  imagina- 
tion, or  of  sense." 

6.  Adjectives  that  have  in  themselves  a  superlative  signification  do 
de  K'::^\:'Tf  '\'  -'Penative  or  comparative  ilnrsuPad- 
ae  .  such  as  chief,  extreme,  perfect,  right,  umoersal,  supreme  etc  • 
wh.ch  are  so^netunes  improperly  ^nneLiicfest,  extre.Jt,  Trf^ctllt, 


156  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR, 

righteat,  most  universal,  most  supreme,  etc.  The  following  expressions 
are,  therefore,  improper:  "He  sometimes  claims  admission  to  the 
chiefest  offices."  "The  quarrel  became  so  universal  ami  national." 
"A  zuethod  of  attaining  the  riijhtest  and  greatest  happiness."  The 
phrases,  -'so  perfect,"  "so  right,"  "so  extreme,"  "so  universal," 
etc.,  are  incorrect ;  because  they  imply  that  one  thing  is  less  perfect, 
less  extreme,  etc.,  than  another,  which  is  not  possible. 

Is  it  proper  to  say,  "  The  most  perfect  work?"    Why  not  ? 

G. 

"Virtue  confers  the  *tipre?ne*<  (1)  "His    work   is   perfect;    (4)    his 

dignity  on  man,    and    should  brother's   more  perfect ;    and 

be  his  chiefest  desire."  his  father's  the  most  perfect 

"  His  assertion  vfB.s  more  true  (2)  of  all." 

than    that   of    his    opponent;  "He  gave  the  fullest   and    most 

nay,  the  words  of  the  latter  sincere    proof  of   the   truest 

were  most  untrue."  (3j  friendship." 

7.  Inaccuracies  are  often  found  in  the  way  in  which  the  degrees  of 
comparison  are  applied  and  construed.  The  following  are  examples 
of  wrong  construction  in  this  respect :  "This  noble  nation  hath,  of 
all  others,  admitted  fewer  corruptions."  The  word  fewer  is  here 
construed  precisely  as  if  it  were  the  superlative.  It  should  be, 
"  This  noble  nation  hath  admitted  fewer  corruptions  than  any  other." 
We  commonly  say,  "  This  is  the  weaker  of  the  two,"  or,  "the  weak- 
est of  the  two ;"  but  the  former  is  the  regular  mode  of  expression, 
because  there  are  only  two  things  compared.  "The  vice  of  covet- 
ousness  is  what  enters  deepest  into  the  soul  of  any  other."  "  He 
celebrates  the  Church  of  England  as  the  most  perfect  of  all  others." 
Both  these  modes  ot  expression  are  faulty:  we  should  not  say,  "  the 
best  of  any  man,"  or,  "the  best  of  any  other  man,"  for,  "the  best  of 
men."  The  sentences  may  be  corrected  by  substituting  the  com- 
parative in  the  room  of  the  superlative:  "The  vice,  etc.,  is  what 
enters  deeper  into  the  soul  than  any  other."  "  He  celebrates,  etc., 
as  more  perfect  than  any  other."  Jt  is  also  possible  to  retain  the 
superlative,  and  render  the  expression  grammatical:  "  Covelous- 
ness,  of  all  vices,  enters  the  deepest  into  the  soul."  "  He  celebrates, 
etc.,  as  the  most  perfect  of  all  churches."  These  sentences  contain 
other  errors,  against  which  it  is>  proper  to  caution  the  learner.  The 
words  deefjer  and  deepest,  being  intended  for  adverbs,  should  have 
been  more  deeply,  most  deeply.  The  phrases  more  perfect  and  most 
perfect  are  improper;  because  perfection  admits  of  no  degrees  of 
comparison.  We  may  say,  nearer  or  nearest  to  perfection,  or  more  or 
less  imperfect. 

In  speaking  of  two  persons,  should  we  say,   "  The  weaker  of  the 
two,"  oj;,  "  The  weakest  of  the  two  ?"     Why  ? 

7. 

"A  talent  of  this  kind  would,  per-     "  He  spoke  with  so  much  propri- 
haps,  prove   the    likeliest  of  ety,   that  I    understood    him 

any  other  (5)  to  succeed."  the  best  of  all  the  others    (6) 

"  He  is  the  strongest  o^  ihe   two,  to/io  spoke  on  the  subject." 

but  not  the  icisest.'"  "  Eve   was  the  fairest  of  all   her 

daughters." 


(1) '' The  supremest— supreme."        ■    (2)  ^' Better  founded."  (S)"  Not  true. 

(4)  «  Well  executed— still  better— best."  (5)  «'  All."  (6)  "  Of  all  who." 


SYNTAX.  157 

8,  In  some  cases  adjectives  should  not  be  separnted  from  their 
substantives  even  by  words  which  modify  their  meaning:,  and  make 
but  one  sense  with  them  :  as,  "A  large  enough  number,  surely."  It 
shouhl  be,  "A  number  large  enough  surely."  "The  lower  sort  of 
people  are  good  enough  judges  of  one  not  very  distant  from  them." 

The  adjective  is  usually  placed  before  its  substantive:  as,  *'A  gPM- 
erons  man  ;"  "  How  amiable  a  woman  !"  The  instances  in  which  it 
comes  after  the  substantive  are  the  ibllowing  : 

1st.  When  something  depends  upon  the  adjective  :  and  when  it 
gives  a  better  sound,  especially  in  poetry:  as,  "A  man  generous  to 
his  enemies  ;"  "  Feed  me  with  food  convenient  for  me  ;"  "A  tree  three 
feet  thick  ;'^  "A  body  of  troops  fitly  thousand  strong  ;"  "The  torrent 
tumbling  through  rocks  abnqU.'' 

2d.  When  the  adjective  is emjihatical :  as,  "Alexander  the  (F/-^a<y" 
"  Louis  the  i?oZc?/"  '' Goodness  i«yint7e;"  "Wisdom  unsearchable." 

3d.  When  several  adjectives  belong  to  one  substantive  :  "as,  "A 
man  just,  wise,  and  charitable,*"  "A  woman  modest,  sensible,  and 
virtu  Otis." 

4th.  When  the  adjective  is  preceded  by  an  adverb:  as,  "A  boy 
regularly  studious;"  "A  girl  unaffectedly  modest." 

5th.  When  the  verb  to  be,  in  any  of  its  variations,  comes  between 
a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  the  adjective  may  frequently  either 
precede  or  follow  it :  as,  "The  man  is  happij,"  or,  '^flajjpi/  is  the  man 
w^ho  makes  virtue  his  choice;"  "  The  interview  was  delightful ;'"'  or, 
'^Delightful  was  the  interview." 

6th.  When  the  adjective  expresses  some  circumstance  of  a  sub- 
stantive placed  after  an  active  verb:  as,  "Vanity  often  renders  its 
possessors  desjnrnhle.''  In  an  exclamatory  sentence  the  adjective 
generally  precedes  the  substantive:  as,  "How  despicable  docs  vani- 
iy  often  render  its  possessor  !" 

There  is  sometimes  great  beauty,  as  well  as  force,  in  placing  the 
adjective  before  the  verb,  and  the  substantive  immediately  after  it :  as, 
"  Great  is  the  Lord  !  just  and  true  are  thy  ways,  thou  King  of  saints  !" 

Sometimes  the  word  all  is  emphatically  put  after  a  number  of  par- 
ticulars comprehended  under  it.  "Ambition,  interest,  honor,  «^^  con- 
curred." Sometimes  a  substantive,  which  likewise  comprehends  the 
preceding  particulars,  is  used  in  conjunction  with, this  adjective:  as, 
"  Royalists,  republicans,  churchmen,  sectaries,  courtiers,  alt  parties, 
concurred  in  the  allusion." 

An  adjective  pronoun,  in  the  plural  number,  will  sometimes  prop- 
erly associate  with  a  singular  noun :  as,  "  Our  desire,  your  intention, 
their  resignation."  This  association  applies  rather  to  things  of  an 
intellectual  nature  than  to  those  which  are  corporeal.  It  forms  an 
exception  to  the  general  rule. 

A  substantive  with  its  adjective  is  reckoned  as  one  compounded 
word;  whence  they  often  take  another  adjective,  and  sometimes  a 
third,  and  so  on  :  as,  "An  old  man  ;  a  good  old  man;  a  very  learned, 
judicious,  good  old  man." 

"Though  the  adjective  always  relates  to  a  substanti-ve,  it  is,  in 
many  instances,  put  as  if  it  were  absolute  ,  especially  where  the  noun 
has  been  mentioned  before,  or  is  easily  understood,  though  not  ex- 
pressed :  as,  "I  often  survey  it." 

Is  it  correct  to  say,  "A  large  enough  number?"  How  should  it 
be  altered?  Wh;it  is  the  Note  for  it  ?  Should  the  adjective  be  placed 
tisunllv  before  or  after  the  noun  ? 


158  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


8. 


'•  He  spoke  in  a  distinct  enough  pair  of  gloves :  he  is  the  ser- 

manner   to  be  heard   by   the  vant  of  an  old  rich  (2)  man." 

whole  assembly."-  "The  ttco  Jirst  (3)  in  the  row  are 

"Thomas  is  equippe'd  with  a  new  cherry-trees,    the   two   others 

(1)  pair  of  shoes,  and  a  new  are  pear-trees." 

RULE  II. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE    IX. 

The  indefinite  article  a  or  an   belongs  to  nouns  of  the  singular  nnmher 

only. 

RULE  III. 

The  definite  article  the  hehngs  to  nouns  of  either  the  singular  or  plu' 

ral  number. 

The  articles  are  often  properly  omitted  ;  when  used,  they  should  be 
justly  applied,  accorcling  to  their  distinct  nature:  as,  "Gold  is  cor- 
rupting; the  sea  is  green  ;  a  lion  is  bold." 

It  is  the  nature  of  both  the  articles  to  determine  or  limit  the  thing 
spoken  of  A  determines  it  to  be  one  single  thing  of  the  kind,  leav- 
ing it  still  uncertain  which;  the  determines  which  it  is,  or,  if  many, 
which  they  are. 

The  following  passage  will  serve  as  an  example  of  the  different 
uses  of  a  and  the,  and  of  the  force  of  the  substantive  without  any  ar- 
ticle: "  Man  was  made  for  society,  and  ought  to  extend  his  good  will 
to  all  men  ;  but  a  man  will  naturally  entertain  a  more  particular  kind- 
ness for  the  men  with  whom  he  has  the  most  frequent  intercourse; 
and  enter  into  a  still  closer  union  with  the  man  whose  temper  and 
disposition  suit  best  MMlh   his  own." 

As  the  articles  are  sometimes  misapplied,  it  may  be  of  some  use  to 
exhibit  a  few  instances  :  "  And  I  persecuted  this  way  unto  the  death." 
The  apostle  does  not  mean  any  particular  sort  of  death,  but  death  in 
general ;  the  definite  article,  therefore,  is  improperly  used :  it  ought 
to  be,  "  unto  death,"  without  any  article.  ^ 

"When  he,  the  Spirit  of  truth,  is  come,  he  will  guide  you  into  all 
truth  ;  "  that  is,  according  to  this  translation,  "  into  all  truth  whatso- 
ever, into  truth,  of  all  kinds;" — very  different  from  the  meaning  of 
the  evangelist  and  from  the  original,  "into  all  the  truth:"  that  is, 
"  into  all  evangelical  truth,  all  truth  necessary  lor  you  to  know." 

"  Who  breaks  a  blitterfly  upon  a  wheel  ?  "  it  ought  to  be  "  the  wheel," 
used  as  an  instrument  for  the  particular  purpose  of  torturing  crim- 
inals. "The  Almighty  hath  given  reason  to  a  man  to  be  a  light  unto 
himj"  it  should  rather  be,  "to  man,'^  in  general.  "This  day  is  sal- 
vation come  to  this  house,  forasmuch  as  he  also  is  the  son  of  Abra- 
ham : "  it  ought  to  be,  "  a  son  of  Abraham." 

These  remarks  may  serve  to  show  the  great  importance  of  the 
proper  use  of  the  article,  and  the  excellence  of  the  English  language 
in  this  respect — which,  by  means  of  its  two  articles,  does  most  pre- 
cisely determine  the  extent  of  signification  of  common  names. 

{\)  ''A  pair  of  new  ilwes:'    (2)  >' Rich  old:'    (3)  Note  I.     Rule  VI. 


SYNTAX. 


159 


What  is  the  nature  of  the  articles? 
termine?     What  the  article  Me? 


What  does  the  article  a  de- 


**  The  fire,  the  air,  the  earth,  and 
the  water,  are  four  elements 
(!)  of  the  philosophers." 

"  Reaspn  was  given  to  a  man  to 
control  his  passions." 

"  We  have  within  us  an  intelli- 
gent principle,  distinct   from 

(2)  body  and  from  matter." 

"  A  man  is  the  noblest  work  of 

(3)  creation." 

"(4)  Wisest  and  best  men  some- 
times commit  errors." 

"Beware  of  drunkenness:  it  im- 
pairs understanding;  wastes 
an  estate;  destroys  a  reputa- 
tion ;  consumes  the  body ;  and 
renders  the  (5)  man  of  the 
brightest  parts  the  (5)  com- 
mon jest  (6)  of  the  meanest 
clown." 

"He  is  a  much  better  writer  than 
a  reader.'-' 

"The  king  has  conferred  on  him 
the  title  of  duke." 

"There   are   some   evils   of   life 


which   equally  affect   prince 
and  people." 

"  We  must  act  our  pail  with  a 
constancy,  though  reward  of 
our  constancy  be  (7)  distant." 

"  We  are  placed  here  under  a 
trial  of  our  virtue." 

"The  virtues  like  his  are  not  easily 
acquired.  Stich  qualities  hon- 
or the  nature  of  a  man." 

"Purity  has  its  seat  in  the  heart, 
but  extends  iis  influence  over 
so  much  of  outward  conduct, 
as  to  form  the  great  and  ma- 
terial part  of  a  character." 

"  The  profligate  man  is  seldom  or 
never  found  to  be  the  good 
husband,  the  good  father,  or 
the  beneficent  neighbor." 

"True  charity  is  not  the  meteor 
which  occasionallyglares,  but 
the  lurrtinary  w^hich,  in  its 
orderly  and  regular  course, 
dispenses  benignant  '  in- 
fluence." 


1.  A  nice  distinction  of  the  sense  is  sometimes  made  by  the  use  or 
omission  of  the  article  a.  If  I  say,  "  He  behaved  with  a  little  rever- 
ence," my  meaning  is  positive.  If  I  say,  "He  behaved  WMih  little 
reverence,"  my  meaning  is  negative.  And  these  two  are  by  no  means 
the  same,  or  to  be  used  in  the  same  cases.  By  the  former,  I  rather 
praise  a  person  ;  by  the  latter,  I  dispraise  him.  For  the  sake  of  this 
distinction,  which  Is  a  very  useful  one,  we  may  better  bear  the  seem- 
ing impropriety  of  the  article  a  before  nouns  of  number.  When  I 
say,  "There  were  ie^^  men  with  him,"  I  speak  diminutively,  and. 
mean  to  represent  them  as  inconsiderable;  whereas,  when  I  say, 
"There  were  a  few  men  with  him,"  I  evidently  intend  to  make  the 
most  of  them. 

What  is  the  difl'erence  in  meaning  between  Uie  expressions,  "  We 
behaved  with  a  little  reverence,"  and  "  We  behaved  with  little 
reverence  ?  " 

1. 


"  He  has  been  much  censured  for 
conducting  himself  with  a  lit- 
tle attention  to  his  business." 

"So  bold  a  breach  of  order  called 
for  (S)  little  severity  in  pun- 
ishing the  oflender." 


His     error    was     accompanied 
with  so  little  contrition  and^ 
candid  acknowledgment,  that 
he  found   a   few  persons   to 
intercede  for  him." 


(1)  Fire,  air,  etc- 
(4)  The  wisest. 


— "  the  four ; "  etc. 
(.'))".4."  (6)  Rill 


(2)  "  The  body." 
0  XV.  (7)*4r4. 


(.3)  The  creation  " 
C8)  '■  A  little." 


160  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

"  There  wore  so  many  mitigating  to  interest  themselves  in  his 

(])   circumstances   attending  favor."   «.  ' 

his    miscondnct,  particularly  "As   his    misfortunes   were    the 
that  (2)  of  his  open  confes-  fruit  of   his   own    obstinacy, 

sion.   that    he  found  (3)  few  a  few  persons  pitied  him." 

friends    who   were   disposed 

2.  In  general,  it  may  be  sufficient  to  prefix  the  article  to  the  former 
of  two  words  in  the  same  construction,  though  the  French  never  fail 
to  repeat  it  in  this  case.  "There  were  many  hours,  both  of  the  night 
and  day,  which  he  could  spend,  without  suspicion,  ia  solitary 
thought."  It  might  have  been,  "  of  the  night  and  of  the  day."  And, 
for  the  salce  of  emphasis,  we  often  repeat  the  article  in  a  series  of 
epiiliels.  "He  lioped  thai  lliis  title  would  secure  him  an  ample  and 
an  independent  authority." 

Is  the  article  to  be  repeated  before  two  words  in  the  same  con- 
struction? 

2. 

"  The  fear  of  shame,  (4)  the  de-  "  He    was    fired   with    desire   of 
sire  of  approbation,  prevent  doing  something,  though  he 

many  bad  actions."  knew  not  yet,  Avith  distinct- 

**In   this   business  he  was  influ-  ness,  either  end  or  means." 

enced  by  a  just  and  (5)  gen- 
erous principle." 

3.  la  common  conversation,  and  in  familiar  stylo,  we  frequently 
omit  the  articles,  which  might  be  inserted  with  propriety  in  writing, 
especially  in  a  grave  style.  "At  worrit,  time  might  be  gained  by  this 
expedient."  "  At  f/te  worst"  would  have  been  belter  in  this  place. 
"Give  me  here  John  Baptist's  head."  There  would  have  been  more 
dis<nity  in  saying,  "John  the  Baptist's  head;"  or,  "The  head  of  .John 
the  Baptist." 

The  article  the  has  sometimes  a  good  eflect  in  distinguishing  a  per- 
son by  an  epithet.  "In  the  history  of  Henry  the  Fourth,  by  Father 
Daniel,  we  are  surprised  at  not  finding  him  the  great  man."  "  I  own 
I  am  often  surprised  that  he  should  have  treated  so  coldly  a  man  so 
much  the  gentleman." 

This  article  is  often  elegantly  put,  after  the  manner  of  the  French, 
for  the  pronoun  possessive  :  as,  "He  looks  him  full  in  the  face  ;  "  that 
Is,  "in  his  face."  "In  his  presence  they  were  to  strike  the  forehead 
on  the  ground  :  "  that  is,  "  their  foreheads.'''' 

We  sometimes,  according  to  the  French  manner,  repeat  the  same 
article,  M'hen  tlie  adjective,  on  account  of  any  clause  depending  upon 
it,  is  put  after  the  substantive.  "  Of  all  the  considerable  governments 
among  the  Alps,  a  commonwealth  is  a  constitution  the  most  adapted 
of  any  to  the  poverty  of  those  countries."  "  With  such  a  specious 
title  as  that  of  blood,  which,  with  the  multitude,  is  always  a  claim  the 
strongest,  and  the  most  easily  comprehended."  "They  are  not  the 
men  in  the  nation  the  most  dilTicult  to  be  replaced." 

"  At  worst,  time  might  be  gained,''  etc.  What  word  may  properly 
be  inserted  in  the  beginning  of  this  sentence  ?  What  is  the  Note  for 
it« 

(1)  J).59.  (2) «  That  circumstance."  Note  I,  Knlo  XIV.  (3)  "  A  few."  359. 

(4)  "  >1)1(t!  tliH."  (.5)  "  >l  gpiiorons." 


SYNTAX.  101 

3. 
"At   worst,  I  could   but  incur   a     "At  best,  his  gift  was  but  a  poor 
gentle  reprimand."  ofTering,   when  we   consider 

his  estate." 

RULE  I. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE   X. 
The  poaacesive  case  in  governed  by  the  foUowing  noun.         ' 

When  the  annexed  substantive  signifies  the  same  thing  as  the  first 
there  is  no  variation  of  case:  as,  "George,  king  of  Great  Brit- 
ain, elector  of  Hauover,"  etc. ;  "  Pompey  contended  with  Caisar,  the 
greatest  general  of  his  time  ;  "Religion,  the  support  of  adversity, 
adorns  prosperity."  Nouns  thus  circumstanced  are  said  to  be  in  ap- 
position  to  each  other.  The  interposition  of  a  relative  and  verb  will 
sometimes  break  the  construction:  as,  '"Pompey  contended  with 
Ca?sar,  who  ions  the  greatest  general  of  his  time."  Here  the  word 
ff^yutral  is  in  the  nominative  case,  according  to  Rule  XV,  or  Note 
4,  under  Rule  VIII. 

The  preposition  of,  joined  to  a  substantire,  i.s  not  always  equiva- 
lent to  the  possessive  case.  It  is  only  so  when  the  expression  can 
be  converted  into  the  regular  form  of  the  possessive  case.  We  can 
say,  "  the  reward  of  virtue,"  and  "  virtue's  reward  ;"  but  though  it  is 
proper  to  say,  "  a  crown  of  gold,"  we  can  not  convert  the  expression 
into  the  possessive  case  and  say,  "gold's  crown." 

Substantives  govern  pronouns  as  well  as  nouns,  in  the  possessive 
case  :  as,  "Every  tree  is  known  by  its  fruit ;"  "Goodness  brings  ita 
reward,*"   "  That  desk  is  mine.'''' 

The  genitive  (I)  its  is  often  improperly  used  for  H  is  or  it  ia :  as, 
"Its  my  book,"  instead  of,  "It  is  my  book." 

The  pronoun  Ai«,  when  detached  from  the  noun  to  which  it  relates, 
is  to  be  considered,  not  as  a  possessive  pronoun,  but  as  the  genitive 
case  of  the  personal  pronoun:  as,  "This  composition  is  Aw." 
"Whose  book  is  that  ?"  "■  Hin.''''  If  we  used  the  noun  itself,  we 
should  say,  "  This  composition  is  John's."  "  Whose  book  is  that  ?" 
"  Eliza's."  The  position  will  be  still  more  evident  when  we  con- 
sider that  both  the  pronouns  in  the  following  sentences  must  have 
a  similar  construction  :  "  Is  it  her  or  his  honor  that  is  tarni.-«hed  ?"  "It 
is  not  hers,  but  hix.'' 

Sometimes  a  stibstantive  in  the  genitive  or  possessive  case  stands 
alone,  the  latter  one,  by  which  it  is  governed,  being  understood^  as, 
"I  called  at  the  bookseller's."  that  is,  at  the  bookseller's  shop.'' 

"Religion,  the  support  of  adversity,   adorns  prosperity."     What  is 
said    of  the  nouns    religion  and    ttupport,    in   respect   to  each   other? 
When  is  the  preposition  q/' joined  to  a  substantive  equivalent  to  the 
possessive  case  ?     Give  an  example. 
"  My  a»ic^8f<?rs  virtue  is  not  mine."     "  Nevertheless.  Asa  liin  heart  (3) 

'(2)  was  perfect  with  the  Lord." 

"  His  brothers  oflence  will  not  con-     "  A  mothers  tenderness  and  a  fa- 
demn  him."  thers    care  are    natures  gifts 

"I  will  not  destroy  the  city    for  lor  mans  advantage." 

ten  sake." 


(l^  Or  posnesiivc.    (-1)  Rule  I.    (:<>  Asa"/  heart. 

14 


162  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

♦'  A  mans  manners'  frequently  in-  "  They  slew  Varus,  fu  that  was 
fluence  his  forturjes."  meiilioned  before." 

''Wisdoms     precepts'   form     the  "They  slew  V«rus,  who  was  him 
good  mans  interest  and  hop-  that  I  mentioned  before." 

piness." 

1.  If  several  nouns  come  together  in  the  genitive  (1)  case,  the 
apostrophe  with  *  is  annexed  to  the  last,  and  understood  to  the  rest: 
as,  "  John  and  Eliza'.s  books;  "This  was  my  father,  mother,  and  un- 
cle's advice."  But  when  any  words  intervene,  perhaps  on  account^ 
of  the  increased  pause,  the  sign  of  the  possessive  should  be  annexed* 
to  each :  as,  "They  are  John's  as  well  as  Eliza's  books ;"  "I  had 
the  physician's,  the  surgeon's,  and  the  apothecary's  assistance." 

"John's  and  Eliza's  books."  Will  you  correct  this  sentence,  and 
give  the  Rule  for  it? 

1. 
"It   was   the   men'e,  (2)  women's.     "This  measure  pained  the  king 
(3)  and  children's  lot  to  suf-  as  well   as  the  people's   ap- 

fer  great  calamities."  probation." 

"  Pe <«>•'«,   John's,   and    Andrew's     "Not  only  the  counsel's   and  at- 
occupation  was  that  ol   fish-  torneys,  but  the  judge's  opin- 

ermen."  ion  also,  favored  hiT*  cause." 

2.  In  poetry,  the  additional  «  is  frequently  omitted,  but  the  apostro- 
phe retained,  in  the  same  manner  as  in  substantives  of  the  plural 
number  ending  in  «;  as,  "the  wrath  of  Peleus*  son."  This  seems 
not  so  allowable  in  prose,  which  the  following  erroneous  example 
will  demonstrate:  "  Moses'  minister;"  "Phinehas'  wife  ;"  "  Feslus 
came  into  Felix'  room  ;"  "  These  answers  were  made  to  the  witness' 
questions."  But  in  cases  which  would  give  too  much  of  the  hissing 
sound,  or  increase  the  ditTiculty  of  pronunciation,  the  omission  takes 
place  even  in  i)rose :  as,  "For  righteousness'  sake;"  "For  con- 
science' sake." 

Is  the  additional  sever  omitted  ?    Give  an  example. 

2. 
•'And    he  cast   himself  down  at     "If  ye  suffer  for  righteousness'a 

Jesus  feet."  sake,  happy  are  ye." 

"  iWosc*  rod  was  turned  into  a  ser-     **  Ye    should  be  subject  for  con- 
pent."  science's  sake." 
"For    Herodias  sake,  his  brother 
Philips  wife." 

3.  Little  explanatory  circumstances  are  particularly  awkward  be- 
tween a  genitive  case  and  the  word  which  u.«?ually  lollowsit:  as, 
"  She  began  to  extol  the  farmer's,  as  she  called  him,  excellent  under- 
standing."  It  ought  to  be,  "the  excellent  understanding  of  the 
farmer,  a*  she  called   him." 

•'  She  began  to  extol  the  farmer's,  as  she  called  him,  excellent  un- 
derstanding." Will  you  correct  this  sentence,  and  give  the  Rule 
for  it  ? 

3. 
"They   very    jirstly    condemned     "  They  implicitly  obeyed  the  pro- 
the  prodigal's,  as  he  was  call-  tector's,  as  they  culled    him, 

ed,    senseless    and    exlrava-  imperious  mandates." 

gant  conduct."  (4) 

(1)  Or  possessive.  (2)  •'  Men-'  is  here  in  llie  i)().«>-i'.«Kive  chpo,  the  aposfniplie  be- 
ing understood :  therefore  ajii-ly  IJiite  I.  (3)  "  ^fen,  women  ;'■'  or.  '  It  war-  the  lot 
(■>/,'.  etc.    (4)  "  The  semekff."  etc.— '  of  thr  jrodigal.  p;  hr  uaf  rniUd." 


SYNTAX.  153 

4.  When  a  sentence  consists  of  terms  signifying  a  name  and  an 
Office,  or  of  any  expressions  by  which  one  part  is  descriptive  or  ex- 
planatory of  the  other,  it  may  occasion  some  doubt  to  which  of  them 
the  sign  of  the  genitive  case  should  be  annexed,  or  whether  it 
should  be  subjoined  to  them  both.  Thus,  some  would  say  "I  left 
the  parcel  at  Smith's  the  bookseller  ;"  others,  "at  Smith  the  book- 
seller s  j  and  perhaps  others,,  "at  Smith's  the  bookseller's."  The 
iirst  of  these  forms  is  most  agreeable  to  the  English  idiom  ;  and  if  the 
addition  consists  of  two  or  more  words,  the  case  seems  to  be  less 
dubious,  as,  "I  left  the  parcel  at  Smith's,  the  bookseller  and  station- 
l^'  .  n  "  ,?  this  subject  requires  a  little  further  explanation,  to  make 
It  intelligible  to  the  learners,  we  shall  add  a  few  observations  tending 
to  unfold  Its  principles.  ** 

^  A  phrase  in  which  the  words  are  so  connected  and  dependent  as 
to  admit  of  no  pause  before  the  conclusion,  necessarily  requires  the 
genitive  sign  at  or  near  the  end  of  the  phrase:  as,  "  Whose  preroga- 
tive is  u  ?  "  ''It  is  the  king  of  Great  Britain's  ;  " '"  That  isthe  dulce 
of  I  ridgewater's  canal ; ''  "  The  bishop  of  Landaff's  excellent  book  ;  " 

g.^ard's^i^ouse^^^"""  ""         "'^''"''   ""'"'^'^'^'y^''  "  ^'h«  ^^Ptain   of  the 

When  words  in  apposition  follow  each  other  in  quick  succession 
It  seems  also  rnost  agreeable  to  our  idiom  to  give  the  sign  of  the 
genitive  a  similar  situation:  especially  if  the  noun  which  governs 
the  genitive  be  expressed:  as,  "  The  emperor  Leopold's:"  ''Dionv- 
*iU8  the  tyrant's  J"  ;'  For  David  my  serva\,rs  sake;  "  "(fiVe  me  John 
s  nr^r'r' '  head  ; "  ''  Paul  the  apostlc^s  advice."  'But  when  a  pause 
n«r,  or  .V  ;*"  governing  noun  not  expressed,  and  when  the  latter 

part  of  the  sentence  is  extended,  it  appears  to  be  requisite  that  the 

Xr  r  '^t'"  •?^''"';'  '"li^^  ^'''  ^^"'^'^«'  ^"^  understood  to  he 
^  wL  '  '^ViV'  Jo'-^J  S^ormont's,  my  old  patron  and  benefactor;" 
Whose  glory  did  he  emulate?  He  emulated  Cresar's,  the  greatest 
general  of  antiquity."  In  the  following  sentences  it  woufd^be  very 
awkward  to  place  the  sign  either  at  the  end  of  each  of  the  clauses, 

,h/l.n  °^^'',^  ^^"t'  °"^  «'°"^'  "These  psalms  are  David's 

the  king,  priest,  and  prophet  of  the  Jewish  people : "  "  We  staid  a 
month  at  lord  Lyttleton's,  the  ornament  of  his  country,  and  the  friend 
of  every  virtue."  The  sign  of  the  genitive  case  ma^;  veVpropeHy 
nar^nfT'r'^  ''  K^^  ""^^  ""^ '^''^  members,  an  ellipsis  atMe  Tauer 
fffJl  I  .?'^T^"''""'"'°"  construction  in  our  language,  as 

mi^  ITZ  T^  'f  J'-\°"". °'-  ^r  «-^«'^P'-^^  ■■  "  They  wished  to  sub- 
^w.c.V  •  ^  "°^  5  "that  IS,  -he  did  not  ^cish  to  submit:^  -He  said 
It  was  their  concern,  but  not  his ; "  that  is,  "  not  his  concern:^ 

on  V  wlT.'if  "•^''  ""i  '^^  ^''"'^'^^*  ^°  ^^"^  ^"^  o^  I'^e  la^t  clause 
com;eTt1n  .  ?  ^^'""T^^  ^^.^'  •?  '•esting-place  is  wanted,  and  that  the 
connecting  circumstance  is  placed  too  remotely  to  be  either  nersnic- 

cZ\r\T'"'"'''  •  '^''  "  '"^1^"^^  ^'°^y  ^"'^  h«  -""l-^«  '  He  eSecl 
vi^  fh^  In^,^'"''  -^^  ^'''T^^  °/  «»^»>,Vy'«;"  "These  psalms  are  Da- 
vid   the  king,  priest   and  prophet  of  the  Jewish  people's:'     It  is  much 

nMo.'.i  '°r'.7'  ^^^?  ';^""^''  "^^•'^^'  ^he  Christiai;  hero,  and  g  ea 
o  l.t      ""  gentiles,"  than  -This  is  Paul,  the  Christian  heroTand 
great  apos  le  of  the  gentiles'  advice."     On  the  other  hand,  the  appli- 

wo  ,^I1  hi         ^""Tr  ".^'"  ^^  ''°^^^  ""'  ^"  ''^  »'"^  ••"""••'  '■»  apposition 

Znll  ?  &^"*^''f.">:^harsh  and  displeasing,  and  perhaps  in  some  cases 

incorrect:   as,    ''The   emperors   Leopold's;"   ''King's   Geor-e's  • » 

Charles's  the  Second's;"  <'The  parcel  was'  left  at  Smfth^  the^boo'k- 


164  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

seller's  nnd  siaiiorier's."  The  rules  which  we  have  endeavored  to 
elucidate  will  prevent  the  inconvenience  of  both  these  modes  of  ex- 
pression ;  and  they  appear  to  be  simple,  perspicuous,  and  consistent 
with  the  idiom  of  the  languag'e. 

Which  is  most  agreeable  to  the  English  idiom,  to  say,  "  Smith's 
the  bookseller,"  or,  "  Smith  the  bookseller's?"  When  the  words  are 
connected  and  dependent,  where  is  thogenitive  (1)  sign  to  be  placed? 
When  words  in  apposition  follow  each  other  in  quick  succession, 
where  should  the  sign  of  the  genitive  be  placed?  What  eflect  is 
perceived  if  we  annex  the  sign  of  the  genitive  to  the  end  of  the  last 
clause  only  of  the  sentence  ?  Give  an  example.  What  is  the  effect 
of  applying  the  genitive  sign  to  both  or  all  the  nouns  in  apposition  ? 
Give  an  example. 

4 
"*I  bought  the  knives  at  Johnson's     *'  I  will  not  for  DavicCs  thy  father's 

(2)  the  cutler's:'  (3)  sake." 

"The    silk    was     purchased     at     "  He  took  refuge  at  the  governor. 

Brown's     the     mercer^s     and  the  king's  representative's." 

JwherrlaHJier''s"  "Whose    (5)   works    are    these? 

"Lord  Feversham  the  general's  They    are    Cicero,   the  most 

tent."  (4)  eloquent  of  men's." 

"This  palace  had  been  the  grand 

aaltan''8  Mahomet's." 

5.  The  English  genitive  has  often  an  unpleasant  sound,  so  that  we 
daily  make  more  use  of  the  particle  of  to  express  the  same  relation. 
There  is  something  awkward  in  the  following  sentences,  in  which 
this  method  has  not  been  taken:  "The  general,  in  the  army's  name, 
published  a  declaration;"  "The  commons'  vote;"  "The  lords' 
house;"  "Unless  he  is  very  ignorant  of  the  kingdom's  condition." 
It  were  certainly  better  to  say,  "  In  the  name  of  the  army  ;  "  "  The 
vote  of  the  commons;"  "The  house  of  lords;"  "The  condition  of 
the  kingdom."  It  is  also  rather  harsh  to  use  two  English  genitives 
with  the  same  substantive:  as  "Whom  he  acquainted  with  the  pope's 
and  the  king's  pleasure."  "The  pleasure  of  the  pope  and  the  king" 
would  have  been  better. 

We  sometimes  meet  with  three  substantives  dependent  on  one 
another,  and  connected  by  the  preposition  of  applied  to  eai-h  of  them: 
as,  "The  severity  of  the  distress  of  the  son  of  the  king  touched  the 
nation;"  but  this  mode  of  expression  is  not  to  be  recommended.  It 
would  be  better  to  say,  "  The  severe  distress  of  the  king's  son  touched 
the  nation."  We  have  a  striking  instance  of  this  laborious  mode  of 
expression  in  the  following  sentence:  *'■  Of  some  q_f  the  books  of 
each  of  these  classes  nf  literature,  a  catalogue  will  be  given  at  the 
end  of  the  work." 

"In  the  army's  name."  How  may  this  expression  be  altered  for 
the  better? 

5. 

"The  world's  government  is  not     "She   married    my   son's   wife's 
left  to  chance."  (6)  brother."  (7) 

(1)  Or  possessive.  (2)  "Johnson's  sJiop,"  Rule  I.  (3)  "  Cufhr.  See  Note  T, 
under  this  Rule.  (4)  "  The  tent  of  lord."  etc.  (6)  431.  (6)  •'  The  government 
of  the  world."       (7)  *'  Tfie  brother  of  my  ton's  wife.'" 


BYNTAX.  165 

"  This  is  my  wife's  brother's  part-    "The   extent  of  the  prerogative 
ner's  house."  (1)  of  the   king  of   England   is 

"It  was  necessary  to  have  both  suflieiently  ascertained." 

tht;  physician's  and  the  sur- 
geon's advice."  (2) 

6.  In  some  cases  we  use  both  the  genitive  termination  and  the 
preposition  of:  as,  "  It  is  a  discovery  of  Sir  Isaac  Newton's."  Some- 
times, indeed,  unless  we  throw  the  sentence  into  another  form,  this 
method  is  absolutely  necessary,  in  order  to  distinguish  the  sense,  and 
to  give  tlie  idea  of  property,  strictly  so  called,  which  is  the  most  im- 
portant of  the  relations  expressed  by  the  genitive  case;  for  the  ex- 
pressions, "This  picture  of  my  friend,"  and  "This  picture  of  my 
friend's,"  suggest  very  different  ideas.  The  latter  only  is  that  of 
property,  in  the  strictest  sense.  The  idea  would,  doubtless,  be  con- 
veyed in  a  better  manner  by  saying,  "  This  picture  belonging  to  my 
friend." 

When  this  double  genitive,  as  some  grammarians  term  it,  is  not 
necessary  to  distinguish  the  sense,  and  especially  in  a  grave  style,  it 
is  generally  omitted.  Except  to  prevent  ambiguity,  it  seems  to  be 
allowable  only  in  cases  which  sup|)osc  the  existence  ot  a  plurality  of 
subjects  of  the  same  .kind.  In  the  expressions,  "A  subject  of  the. 
emperor's,"  A  seniimenl  of  my  brother's,"  more  than  one  subject 
and  one  sentiment  are  supposed  to  belong  to  the  possessor.  But 
when  this  plurality  is  neither  intimated,  nor  necessarily  supposed, 
the  double  genitive,  except  as  before  mentioned,  should  not  be  used : 
as,  "  This  house  of  the  governor  is  very  commodious  ; ''  "  The  crown 
of  the  king  was  stolen;"  "That  privilege  of  the  scholar  was  never 
abused."  But,  after  all  that  can  be  said  for  thi.s  double  genitive,  as 
it  IS  termed,  some  grammarians  think  that  it  would  be  better  to  avoid 
the  use  of  it  altogether,  and  to  give  the  sentiment  another  form  of 
expression. 

Are  there  any  cases  in  which  we  tise  both  the  genitive  termination 
and  the  preposition  oft  Give  an  example.  Is  this  double  genitive 
ever  omitted  ? 

G. 
"That  picture  ol  the  h\n<f'a  does     "This  e.'ilate  of  the  corporation's 

not  much  resemble  C3)  him."  is  much  encumbered." 

"These  pictures  of  the  hinrj  (4)     "That  is  the  eldest  son  of  the  king 

were  sent  to  him  from  Italy."  of  England's." 

7.  When  an  entire  clause  of  a  sentence,  beginning  with  a  participle 
of  the  present  tense,  is  used  as  one  name,  or  to  express  one  idea  or 
circumstance,  the  noun  on  which  it  depends  may  be  put  in  the  geni- 
tive case:  thus,  instead  of  saying,  "What  is  the  reason  of  this  person 
dismissing  his  servant  so  hastily'?"  that  is,  "  What  is  the  reason  of 
this  person  in  dismissing  his  servant  so  hastily?"  we  may  say,  and 
perhaps  ought  to  say,  "  What  is  the  reason  of  this  person's  dismissing 
of  his  servant  so  hastily?"  just  as  we  say,  "  What  is  the  reason  of  this 
person's  hasty  dismission  of  his  servant?"  So  also  we  say,  "I  re- 
member it  being  reckoned  a  great  exploit;"  or,  more  properly,  "  I  re- 
member its  being  reckoned,"  etc.  The  following  sentence  is  correct 
and  proper  :  "  Much  will  depend  on  the pi<pi I' fi  compositig,  but  more  on 
his  reading  frequently."     It  would  not  be  accurate  to  say,  "  Much  will 

(1)  "  This  house,  hflongs  to  the  partner  of  my  tr^fe's  hrothfr'''  (2)  '*  The  advice 
both  of."         '?>)  .VSC.      '  (4)  Or,  ••  The,«   pirturtf  brlnnrjittg  to   thr  Irng,"  el<'. 


1H6  ENOLISH    GRAMMAR. 

depend  on  the  pupil  compoeivg"  etc.  We  also  properly  say,  "This 
will  be  the  effect  of  the  pupil'i  compotitig  frequently,"  instead  of  "  of 
the  pupil  conipoeittg  frequently." 

"  What  is  the  reason  of  this  person  dismissing  his  servant  so  hasti- 
ly ?"     Will  you  correct  this  sentence,  and  give  the  Rule  for  it  ? 

7. 

'*  What  (1)  ca»i  be  the  cause  of  the  the  monarchy  of  Spain,  and 

parliament  neglecting  so  im-  their     withdrawing     entirely 

porlant  a  business?"  their      allegiance      to      that 

*'  Much  depends  on  this  rule  being  crown." 

observed."  "  If  we  alter  the  situation  of  any 

"The  time  of  Williatn  making  the  of  the  words,  we  shall  pres- 

experiment  at  length  arrived."  ently  be  sensible  of  the  melq- 

"It  is  very  probable  that  this  as-  dy  suffering." 

sembiy  was   called,  to  clear  "Such  will  ever  be  the  effect  of 

some  doubt  which  the   Icing  youth    associating    with    vi- 

had  about  the  lawfulness  ofthe  cious  companions." 
HnUonderf,  their  throwing  off 

RULE  VIII. 

C-orre.'jpuiiding  with  Murray's  Grnminnr. 

RULE  xr. 

Artive-trunsitice  verba  govern  the  uhjcctire  case. 

In  English,  the  nominative  case,  denoting  the  subject,  usually  goes 
before  the  vt-rb ;  and  the  objective  case,  denoting  the  object,  follows 
the  verb  active  ;  and  it  is  the  order  that  determines  the  case  in  noimit : 
as,  "Alexander  conquered  the  Persians."  But  xhe  pronoun.,  having  a 
proper  form  for  each  of  those  cases,  is  sometimes,  when  it  is  in  the 
objective  case,  placed  before  the  verb;  and  when  it  is  in  the  nomina- 
tive case,  follows  the  object  and  verb:  as,  '^Whom  ye  ignorantly  wor- 
ship, him  declare  I  unto  you." 

This  position  of  the  pronoun  sometimes  occasions  its  proper  case 
and  government  to  be  neglected,  as  in  the  following  instances: 
"Who  should  I  esteem  more  than  the  wise  and  good?"  "By  the 
character  of  those  who  you  choose  for  your  friends,  your  own  is  likely 
to  be  formed."  "  Those  are  the  persons  who  he  thought  true  to  his  in- 
terests." "Who  should  I  see  the  other  day  but  my  old  Jriend?" 
"Whosoever  the  court  favors.'"  In  all  these  places  it  ought  to  be 
vhovi^  the  relative  being  governed  in  the  objective  case  by  the  verbs 
esteem,  choose,  thought,  etc.  "He  who,  under  all  proper  circumstances, 
has  the  boldness  to  speak  truth,  choose  for  thy  friend  j"  it  should  be 
"  him  who,"  etc. 

Verbs  neuter  and  intransitive  do  not  act  upon  or  govern  nouns 
and  pronouns.  "He  s/ccpn,"  "they  mvac,''  etc.,  are  not  transitive. 
They  are,  therefore,  not  followed  by  an  objective  case,  specifying  the 
o])ject  of  an  action.  But  when  this  case,  or  an  object  of  action,  comes 
after  such  verbs,  though  it  may  carry  the  appearance  of  being  gov- 
erned by  them,  it  is  aflected  by  a  preposition  or  some  other  word  un- 
derstood ;  as,  "  He  resided  many  years  [that  is,  for  or  during  many 
years]  in  that  street ;"  "  He  rode  several  miles  [that  is, /or  or  through 
the  space  of  several  miles]  on  that  day;"  "  He  lay  an  hour  [that  is, 

(1)  Rule  XV. 


SYNTAX. 


107 


durhig  an  hour]  in  greai  torture."  In  the  phrases,  "To  dream  a 
dream,"  "To  live  a  virtuous  life,"  "To  run  a  race,"  "To  walk  the 
horse,"  "To  dance  the  child,"  the  verbs  certainly  assume  a  transitive 
form,  and  may  not,  in  these  cases,  be  improperly  denominated  transi- 
tive verbs. 

How  is  the  nominative  case  usually  known  in  English?  How  the 
objective?  Do  neuter  verbs  govern  nouns  and  pronouns?  In  the 
phrase,  "He  resided  many  years  in  that  street,"  how  do  you  parse 
years  f  When  verbs  naturally  neuter  assume  a  transitive  form,  what 
may  they  fclren 


be  called  ? 

"They  who  opulence  has  made 
proud,  and  v^ho  luxury  has 
corruj)ted,  can  not  relish  the 
simple  pleasures  of  nature." 

"You  who  have  reason  to  dread 
his  wrath,  which  one  day  (1) 
will  destroy  ye  both." 

"  Who  have  I  reason  to  love  so 
(2)  much  (2)  as  this  friend  (3) 
f)t  my  youth?" 

"  Ye,  who  were  dead,  hath  he 
quickened." 

"  Who  did  they  entertain  so  free- 
ly  ?" 

"  The  man  xcho  he  raised  from  ob- 
scurity is  dead." 

"Ye  only  have  I  known  of  all  the 
families  of  the  earth." 

"He  and  they  we  know,  but  who 
(4)  are  you  ?" 


^^  She  that  is  idle  and  mischievous 
reprove  sharply." 

"  Who  did  they  send  to  him  on  so 
important  an  errand?" 

"That  is  the  friend  (4)  who  you 
must  receive  cordially,  and 
who  you  can  not  esteem  too 
highly." 

"  He  invited  my  brother  and  I  to 
see  and  examine  (3)  his  libra- 
ry." 

"  He  who  committed  the  offence 
you  should  correct,  not  I,  who 
am  innocent." 

"  We  should  fear  and  obey  the 
Author  of  our  being,  even  He 
who  has  power  to  reward  or 
punish  us  for  ever." 

"They  who  he  had  most  (5)  in- 
jured,  he   had   the    greatest 


pcason  to  love." 

1.  Some  writers,  however,  use  certain  neuter  or  intransitive  verbs 
as  if  they  were  transitive,  putting  after  them  the  objective  ease, 
agreeably  to  the  French  construction  of  reciprocal  verbs;  but  this 
custom  is  so  foreign  to  the  idiom  of  the  English  tongue  that  it  ought 
not~-to  be  adopted  or  imitated.  The  following  are,  some  instances 
of  this  practice:  "■  Repent i7Jci  him  of  his  design."  "The  king  soon 
found  reason  to  repent  him  of  his  provoking  such  dangerous  enemies." 
"The  popular  lords  did  not  fail  to  enlarge  themselves  on  the  subject." 
"The  nearer  his  successes  approached  him  to  the  throne."  "Go,^ee 
thee  away  into  the  land  of  Judnh."  "I  think  it  by  no  means  a  fit  and 
decent  thing  lo  vie  charities,"  etc.  "They  linve  spent  their  whole 
lime  and  pain.s  to  agree  the  sacred  with  tlie  profane  chronology." 

"Repenting  him  of  his  design."  Will  you  repeat  the  Note  which 
shows  this  sentence  to  be  incorrect? 

1. 

"Though  he  now  takes  pleasure 
in  then^,  he  will  one  day  (6) 
repent  him  (7)  of  indulgences 
fiO  unwarrantable." 

"The  nearer  his  virtues  ap- 
proached   him   to    the   great 


example     belbre     him,     the 
humbler  he  grew." 
It  will  be  very  difficult  to  agree 
his  conduct  with  (8)  the  prin- 
ciples he  professes." 


(I)  Rule  XXII.  (2)  Adverb.         (3)  Rule  XI.         (4)  Rule  XV.  f5)  G70. 

rfi)  R«l«  XXn.    (7)  '  Rrprvtofr   (8) ''  Tomakc—ayrceuithr  etc. 


168  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

2.  Active-transitive  verbs  are  sometimes  as  improperly  made 
neuter  or  intransitive:  as,  "I  must  premise  with  three  circumstances." 
"Those  who  think  to  ingratiate  with  him  by  calumniating  me." 

"  I  must  premise  with  three  circumstances."  Will  you  correct  this 
sentence,  and  give  the  Rule  for  it? 

2. 

"To  ingratiate  (1)  with  some  by     "  I  shall  premise  w^fA  two  or  three 
traducing    others,    mahks    a  general  observations." 

base  and  despicable  mind."  # 

3.  The  neuter  verb  (2)  is  varied  like  the  active;  but  having,  in 
some  degree,  the  nature  of  the  passive,  it  admits,  in  many  instances, 
of  the  passive  form,  retaining  still  the  neuter  signification,  chiefly  in 
such  verbs  as  signify  some  sort  of  motion,  or  change  of  place  or  con- 
dition: as  ''I  ant  come;"  "I  was  gone;"  -'I  am  grown;"  "I  was 
fallen."  The  following  examples,  however,  appear  to  be  erroneous, 
in  giving  the  neuter  verbs  a  passive  form,  instead  of  an  active  one" 
"  The  rule  of  our  holy  religion,  from  which  we  are  infinitely  aioerved.^' 
"  The  whole  obligation  of  that  law  and  covenant  was  also  cooiserf." 
"  Whose  number  was  now  amonMed  to  three  hundred."  '*  This  tnarc- 
sohal,  upon  some  discontent,  icni entered  into^  conspiracy  against  his 
master."  "At  the  cud  of  the  campaign,  when  half  the  men  are  de- 
nerted  or  killed."     It  should  be  '■'have  swerved,"  "  had  cea.sod,"  etc. 

"  I  am  come."     Why  should  not  this  be  "  I  liave  come." 

3. 

"If  such  maxims  and  such  prac-    "The   influence    of   his    corrupt 

tices  (3)  prevail,  what  haH  (4)  example  was  (5)  then  enlire- 

become   of  decency  and   vir-  ly  ceased." 

tue?"  "He  was  entered   into  the  con- 

"I  have  come,  according  to  the  nection     before    the    conse- 

time    proposed;    but   I    have  qucnces  were  considered."  . 

fallen  upon  an  evil  hour." 
"The   mighty  rivals   are   now   at 

length  agreed." 

Rule  XV.  When. two  or  more  nouns,  or  nouns  and  pronouns,  sig- 
nifying the  same  thing,  come  together,  they  are  put  by  apposition  in 
the  same  case. 

^®*  The  examples  ichich  fnlloio  may  he  corrected  hy  this  fiuh  or  thf 
following  Note. 

4.  The  verb  to  he,  through  all  its  variations,  has  the  same  case  after 
it  as  that  which  next  precedes  it.  "  /  am  he  whom  they  invited."  "  It 
may  be  {or,  it  miglit  have  been)  he,  but  it  can  not  be  {or,  could  not 
have  been)  /."  "  It  is  impossible  to  be  they,"  "  It  seems  to  have 
been  he  who  conducted  himself  so  wisely."  "7<  appeared  to  be  «//c 
that  transacted  the  business,"  "  I  understood  it  to  i)e  him."  "  I  be- 
lieve it  to  have  been  them."  "We  at  first  took  it  to  be  her,  but  were 
afterwards  convinced  that  it  was  not  s/tg."  "He  is  not  the  person 
who  it  seemed  he  was."  "  He  is  really  the  person  who  he  appeared 
to  be."  "She  is  not  now  the  woman  ichom  they  represented  her  to 
have  been."  "  ]V/ioni  do  you  fancy  him  to  be  ?  "  By  tlusse  examples,  it 
appears  that  this  substantive  verb  has  no  government  of  case,  but 

(1)  IngtAti&te  ourselves."  (2)  By  neutfr  and  ar.tiw,  Mr.  Murray  bore  means  what 
in  thiH  work  are  style«l  inlransitivc  and  (ransifive  verb-?.  (;5>  Rule  XI.  (4)  "  Is  toe- 
coma.'    (O)  '' H*f.iL' 


SYNTAX.  169 

serves,  in  all  its  forms,  as  a  conductor  to  the  cases;  so  that  the  two 
cases  which,  in  the  construction  of  the  sentence,  are  the  next  before 
and  after  it,  must  always  be  alike.  Perhaps  this  subject  will  be  more 
intelligible  to  the  learner  by  observfng  that  the  words  in.  the  cases 
preceding-  and  following  the  verb  to  be,  may  be  said  to  be  in  ajyposition 
to  each  other.  -Thus,  m  the  sentence,  '-I  understood  it  to  be  him," 
the  words  it  and  him  are  in  apposition:  thtit  is,  "they  refer  to  the 
same  thing,  and  are  in  the  same  case." 

The  following  sentences  contain  deviations  from  the  rule,  and  ex- 
hibit the  pronoun  in  a  wrong  case.  "It  might  have  been  him,  but 
there  is  no  proof  of  it."  "Though  I  was  blamed  it  could  not  have 
been  me."  "I  saw  one  whotji  I  took  to  be  sAe."  "She  is  the  person 
toho  1  understood  it  to  have  been."  "  Who  do  you  think  me  to  be  ?" 
"  Whom  do  men  say  that  I  am  ?  "     "  And  %ohom  think  ye  that  I  am  1 " 

Passive  verbs,  which  signify  naming,  etc.,  have  the  same  case  be- 
fore and  after  them  :  as,  "He  was  called  Caesar;  "  "  She  was  named 
Penelope;"  "Homer  is  styled  the  prince  of  poets;"  "James  was 
created  a  duke;"  "The  general  was  saluted  emperor;"  The  "pro* 
fessor  was  appointed  tutor  to  the  prince." 

'*  I  am  him  whom  they  invited."  Will  you  correct  this  sentence, 
and  give  the  Rule  for  it." 

4. 

*"Well  may  you  be  afraid  ;  it  is  (2)  who  conducted  ihe  busi- 

him  indeed."  ness,  but  I  am  certain  it  was 

"I  would  act  the  same  part,  if  I  not  him." 

Were /itJH,  (1)  or  in  his  situa-  "He    so    much     resembled    my 

tion."                                         '  brother,  that,  at  first  sight,  I 

"Search   the    Scriptures,    for   in  took  it  to  be  he." 

them  ye  think  ye  have  eternal  "  After  all  their  professions,  is  it 

life;  and  they  are  them  which  possible  to  be  them?  " 

testify  of  me."  "It  could  not  have  been  her,  for 

*' Be   composed:    it    is    me:    you  she  always  behaves  discreet- 
have  no  cause  for  fear."  ly." 

"I  can  not  tell  who  has  befriended  "  If  it  was  not  him,  who  do  you 

me,   unless   it    is    him    fr6m  imagine  it  to  have  been?" 

whom  I  have  received  many  "Who  do  you  think  him  to  be?" 

benefits."  "  Whom  do  the  people  say  that  we 

"  I  know  not  whether  it  werfi  them  are?" 

5.  The  auxiliary  let  governs  the  objective  case:  as,  "Let  him  he' 
ware;"  "Let  ««  judge  candidly  ;"  "Let  <^6to  not  presume;  "  "Let 
George  study  his  lesson." 

*'  Let  us  judge  candidly."     In  what  case  is  us  ?     What  is  the  Rule  ? 

5. 

"  Whatever  (3)  others  do,  let  (4)     "  Let  them  and  we  unite  to  op- 
tion and  /act  wisely."  pose  this  growing  (5)  evil." 

*  When  the  verb  to  be  is  understood,  it  has  the  same  case,  before  and  after  it,  aa 
when  it  is  expressed:  as,  "  He  seems  the  leader  of  the  party."  "  He  shall  continue 
steward."  '•  They  appointed  me  executor."  "  I  supposed  him  a  man  of  learning." 
— that  is,  "  He  seems  to  be  the  loauler  of  the  party,"  etc.  Nouns  in  apposition  ar» 
in  the  same  case :  as,  "  We  named  the  man  Pompey."  "  They  may  term  Charles  a 
visionary,  but  they  can  not  call  hira  a  deceiver."  "  Hortensius  died  a  martyt." 
"•The  gentle  Sidney  lived  the  shepherd's  friend." 

(1)  Rule  XV.  (2)  '■  TVuy  were  the  pertons"  (V)  Rnle  VIII.  (4)  Imp.  Rule  VI. 
(6}  669. 

16 


170  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

BULE  XII. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE    Xll. 

The  infinitive  mood  may  Jbe  governed  by  verbs,  participles,  adj^'ctives, 
iionns,  and  pronouns. 

The  preposition  to,  though  generally  used  before  the'Iatler  verb,  is 
sometimes  properly  omitted  :  as,  "I  heard  him  say  it,"  instead  of 
"  to  say  it."  ^ 

The  verbs  which  have  commonly  other  verbs  (bllowing  them,  in 
the  infinitive  mood,  without  the  sign  to,  are  bid,  dure,  need,  vmkc,  see, 
hear,  feel,  and  also  fet,  not  used  as  an  auxiliary,  and  perhaps  a  few 
others  :  as,  "  1  bade  him  do  it ;"  "  Ye  dare  not  do  it ;"  "  1  saw  him 
do  it ;"     "  I  heard  him  say  it ;"  "Thou  lettest  him  go." 

Will  you  name  the  verbs  which  have  commonly  other  verbs  in  the 
infinitive  mood  after  them,  without  the  sign  to  .^ 

"It   is  better   (1)  live  on  a   little     ♦' I  need   not  t<>  solicit  him  to  do 

(2)  than  outlive  a  good  deal."  a  kind  action." 

"  You  ought  not  walk  too  hastily."     "I  dare  not  to  proceed  so  hastily, 
"  I  wish  him  not  wrestle  with  his  lest  I  should  give  ofleuce." 

happiness."  "  I  have  seen  some  young  persons 

to  conduct   themselves  very 
discreetly." 

1.  In  the  following  passages  the  Word  to,  the  sign  of  the  infinite 
mood,  where  it  is  distinguished  by  italic  characters,  is  superfluous 
and  improper:  "I  have  observed  some  satirists  to  use,"  etc.  ''To 
see  so  many  to  make  so  little  conscience  of  so  great  a  sin."  "  It  can 
not  but  be  a  delighful  spectacle  to  God  and  angels  lo  see  a  young  per- 
son, besieged  by  powerful  tcniplalions  on  every  side,  to  acquit  him- 
self gloriously,  and  resolutely  to  hold  out  iigainst  the  most  violent  as- 
saults :  to  behold  one  in  the  printe  and  flower  of  his  age,  that  is  court- 
ed by  pleasures  and  honors,  by  the  devil,  and  all  the  bewitching  van- 
ities of  the  world,  to  reject  all  these,  and  to  cleave  steadfastly  unto 
God." 

This  mood  has  also  been  improperly  used  in  the  following  places: 
•'I  am  not  like  other  men  to  envy  the  talents  lean  not  reach." 
"  Grammarians  have  denied,  or  at  least  doubted,  them  to  ie  genuine." 
"  That  all  our  doings  may  be  ordered  by  thy  governance,  to  do  always 
what  is  righteous  in  thy  sight." 

The  infinitive  is  frequently  governed  by  adjectives,  substantives, 
and  participles:  as,  '•  He  is  eager  to  learn  ;"  '•  She  is  worthy  to  be 
loved  j"  ''They  have  a  desire  to  improve;"  ''Endeavoring  to  per- 
suade." 

The  infinitive  mood  has  much  of  the  nature  of  a  substantive,  ex- 
pressing the  action  itself  which  the. verb  signifies,  as  the  participle 
has  the  nature  of  an  adjective.  Thus  the  infinitive  mood  does  the 
office  of  a  substantive  in  different  cases — in  the  nominative,  as, 
^'To  play  is  pleasant;"  in  the  objective,  as,  "  Boys  love  to /)/ay  y" 
"  Fgr  to  will  is  present  with  me;  but  to  2)eT/onn  that  which  is  good,  I 
find  not." 

(1)  "  To  UveJ'— Ruin  XII.    (2)  Noun.     ' 


SYNTAX. 


171 


The  infinitive  mood  is  often  made  absolute,  or  used  independently 
on  the  rest  of  the  sentence,  supplying:  the  place  of  the  conjunction 
that  with  the  potential  mood:  as,  "To  confess  the  truth,  I  was  in 
fault ;"  "  To  begin  with  the  first ;"  "To  proceed  ;"  '-To  conclude  "— 
that  is,    "That  I  may  confess,"  etc. 

"I  have  observed  some  satirists  to  use,"  etc.  What  is  incorrect 
in  this  sentence  ? 

In  the  expression,  "  He  is  eag:er  to  learn,"  will  you  parse  to  learn  f 
What  is  the  rule?  (I)  "To  play  is  pleasant."  Will  you  parse  to  plaj/, 
and  give  a  rule  for  it?  (1)  "To  confess  the  truth,  I  was  in  fault." 
How  is  to  confess  parsed  ?     What  is  the  rule  for  it?  (2)  . 


1. 


"It  is  a  great  support  to  virtue 
when  we  see  a  good  mind  to 
maintain  (3)  its  patience  and 
tranquillity  under  injuries 
and  airiiction,  and  ^o  cordially 
forgive  its  oppressors." 

"  It  is  the  difference  of  their  con- 
duct which  makes  us  to  ap- 
prove the  one  and  to  reject 
the  other." 

"We  should  not  be  like  many 
persons,  to  (4)  depreciate  the 
virtues  loe  (5)  do  not  pos- 
sess." 


"To  see  (6)  young  persons  whb 
are  courted  by  health  and 
pleasure,  to  resist  all  the  al- 
lurements of  vice,  and  to 
steadily  pursue  virtue  and 
knowledge,  is  cheering  and 
delightful  to  every  good 
mind." 

'•They  acted  with  so  much  re- 
serve, that  some  persons 
doubted  them  to  be  ntncere."{l) 

"And  the  multitude  wonderefd, 
when  they  saw  the  U\me  to 
walk,  and  the  blind  to  see." 
(8) 


KULE  XXVI. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE   XIll. 

In  the  t(8e  of  ivords  and  pJtrasea  which,  in  j^oint  of  tiine,  relate  to  each 
other,  a  due  rer/ard  to  that  relation  shoidd  he  obierred.  Instead  of 
saying,  "  The  Lord  hath  yivcn,  and  the  Lord  hath  taken  away,"  ice 
'  should  say,  "  The  Lord  gave,  and  the  Lord  hath  taken  away."  In- 
stead of,  "  I  remember  the  family  more  than  twenty  years,"  it  should 
be,  "■  I  have  remembered  the  family  more  than  twenty  years." 

It  is  not  easy  to  give  particular  rules  for  the  management  of  the 
moods  and  tenses  of  verbs  with. respect  to  one  another,  so  that  they 
may  be  proper  and  consistent.  The  best  rule  that  can  be  given,  is  this 
very  general  one — "To  observe  what  the  sense  necessarily  requires." 
It  may,  however,  be  of  use  to  give  a  few  examples  of  irregular  con- 
struction. "  The  last  week  I  intended  to  have  written,"  is  a  very  com- 
mon phrase — the  infinitive  being  in  the  pat^t  time,  as  well  as  the  verb 
whic-l)  it  follows.  But  it  i^ certainly  wrong;  for  how  long  soever  it 
now  is  since  I  thought  of  writing,/©  write  was  then  present  to  me, 
and  must  still  he  considered  as  present,  when  I  bring  back  that  time, 
and  the  thoughts  of  it.     It  ought,  therefore,  to  be,   "The  last  week  I 


(1)  Rule  XIT.  (2)  NoteXir,  LVIIl.  (3)  Fc>r  tn  maintain  r^nd  maintain.  (4) 
"Who"  (H)  "T/u-1/."  (6)  Note  XIII.  (1)  "  Their  sincerity:'  (S) -' Ftrsons  who 
had  bi^tn  lame,  walking;  and  thnm'  ir%n  htd  h^n  bfivrf,  ff^ing." 


172  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

inteuded  to  write.''*  The  followingf  sentences  are  also  erroneous  :  *'  I 
can  not  excuse  the  remissness  of  those  whose  business  it  should  have 
been,  as  it  certainly  was  their  interest,  to  have  interposed  their  good 
offices;"  "Thertiwere  two  circumstances  which  made  it  necessary 
for  them  to  have  lost  no  time;"  *'  History  painters  would  have  found 
it  difficult  to  have  invented  such  a  species  of  beings."  They  ought  to 
be,  to  interpose,  to  lose,  to  invent.  "On  the  morrow,  because  he  would 
have  known  the  certainty  wherefore  he  was  accused  of  the  Jews,  he 
loosed  him."  It  ought  to  be,  "  because  he  would hiow,'^  or  rather,  *'  be- 
in fj  Willi ucj  to  know.'''  "The  blind  man  said  unto  him,  Lord,  that  I 
might  receive  my  sight."  "If  by  any  means  I  might  attain  unto  the 
resurrection  of  the  dead."  May,  in  both  places,  would  have  been  bet- 
ter. "  From  his  biblical  knowledge,  he  appears  to  study  the  Script- 
ures with  great  attention-;"  "  to  have  studied,^'  etc.  "  I  feared  that  I 
should  have  lost  it  before  I  arrived  at  the  city  ;"  ^^  should  lose  it."  "I 
had  rather  walk;"  it  should  be,  "  I  rcould  rather  walk."  *' It  would 
have  aflbrded  me  no  satisfaction,  if  I  could  perform  it ;"  it  should 
be,  "  if  I  could  have  performed  it;"  or,  "  It  woidd  afford  me  no  satis- 
faction, if  I  could  perform  it." 

To  preserve  consistency  in  the  time  of  verbs,  we  must  recollect 
that,  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  often 
carry  vi-ith  them  a  future  sense  ;  and  that  the  auxiliaries  should  and 
wotild,  in  the  imperfect  times,  are  used  to  express  the  present  or 
future,  as  well  as  the  past. 

*'  I  intended  to  have  written."  Will  you  point  out  the  incorrect- 
ness of  this  sentence,  and  give  a  rule  for  it? 

"The  next  new-year's  day  I  shall  hold  on  all  the  opportunities 

be  (1)  at  school  three  years."  which  the  imprudence",  weak-. 

"  And  he  that  was  dead  (2)  sat  up,  ness,  or  necessities  of  princes 

and  began  to  speak."  afford   it,    to    extend    its    au- 

*'  I  should  be  obliged  to  him  if  be  tliority." 

ypiV;  gratify  me  in  that  particu-     "Fierce   as  he  moved,  his  silver 
lar."  shafts  resound." 

"And    the    multitude   wondered     "They  maintained  that  Scripture 
when  they  saw  the  dumb  to  conclusion,  that  all  mankind 

speak,    the    maimed     to    be  rise  from  one  head." 

whole,   the   lame   walk,   and     "  John  will  earn  his  wages  when 
the  blind  seeing."  (-3)  his  service  is  completed." 

"  J  have  compassion  on  the  mul-     "Ye  will  not  come  unto  me  that 
titude,  because  they  co7iti?tne  ye  might  have  life." 

with  me  now  three  days."  "Be   that  as   it  will,  he  can  not 

"In  the  treasury  belonging  to  the  justify  his  conduct." 

cathedral  in  this  city  is  pre-     "  I  have  been  at  London  a  year, 
served,  (4)  with  the  greatest  and  seen  the  king  last  sum- 

veneration,    for    upwards    of  mer." 

six    hundred    years,    a   dish     "  After  we  visited  London,  we  re- 
which    they    pretend    to    be  turned,  content  and  thankful, 

made  qf  emerald."  to   our   retired  and  peaceful 

"The  Court  of  Rome  gladly  laid  habitation." 

1.  It  is  proper  further  to  observe?,  that  verbs  of  the  infinitive  mood 
in  the  following  form — to  write,  to  be  loriting,  and  to  he  written — always 
denote  something  coit temporary  with  the  time  of  the  governing  verb, 

(1)  "  Shall  7iat>e  ieen;"  (2) '■' Hadbeen  dettd."  (3)  See  the  last  example . 

nodor  tb©  pr&cedinfi^  rule.         (4)  A  dleb  ha«  been  ptesetved," 


syntax;  173 

or  subsequent  to  it;  but  when  verbs  oi"  thai  mood  are  expressed  as 
follows — to  have  been  'wnfivg,  to  have  loritten,  and  to  have  been  written — 
they  always  denote  something  a?itececlent  to  the  time  of  the  govern- 
ing- verb.  This  remark  is  thought  to  be  of  importance;  for,  if  duly 
attended  to,  it  will,  in  mosl  ca^es,  besufticient  to  direct  us  in  the 
relative  application  of  these  lenses. 

The  following  sentence  is  properly  and  analogically  expressed:  "I 
found  him  better  than  I  expected  to  find  him."  '-Expected  to  have 
found  him,"  is  irreconcilable  alike  to  grammar  and  to  sense.  Indeed, 
all  verbs  expressive  of  hope,  desire,  intention,  or  command,  must  in- 
variably be  followed  by  the  present,  and  not  the  perfect,  of  the  infini-^ 
tive.  P>ery  person  would  perceive  an  error  in  this  expression— "  It 
is  long  since  I  commanded  him  to  have  done  it;"  yet  "expected  to 
have  found,"  is  no  better.  Jt  is  as  clear  that  the  finding  must  be  pos- 
terior to  the  expectation,  as  that  the  obedience  must  be  posterior  to 
the  command. 

In  the  sentence  which  follows,  the  verb  is  with  propriety  put  in  the 
perfect  tense  of  the  infinitive  mood:  "It  would  have  afforded  me 
great  pleasure,  as  often  as  I  reflected  upon  it,  to  have  been  the  mes- 
senger of  such  intelligence."  As  the  message,  in  this  instance,  was 
antecedent  to  the  pleasure,  and  not  contemporary  with  it,  the  verb 
expressive  of  the  message  must  denote  that  antecedence,  by  being 
in  the  perfect  of  the  infinitive,  if  the  message  and  the  pleasure  had 
been  referred  to  as  contemporary,  the  subsequent  verb  would,  with 
equal  propriety,  have  been  put  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive:  as, 
"It  would  have  afforded  me  great  pleasure  to  be  the  messenger  of 
such  intelligence."  In  the" former  instance,  the  phrase  in  question  is 
equivalent  to  these  words— "  ^'  /  had  been  the  messenger;"  in  the 
latter  instance,  to  this  expression — ^^  Being  the  messenger." 

It  is  proper  to  inform  the  learner  that,  in  order  to  express  the  past 
time  with  the  defective  verb  ought,  the  perfect  of  the  infinitive  must 
always  be  used  :  as,  "  He  ought  to  have  done  it."  When  we  use  this 
verb,  this  is  the  only  possible  way  to  distinguish  the  past  from  the 
present. 

In  support  of  the  positions  advanced  under  this  rule,  we  can  pro- 
duce the  sentiments  of  eminent  grammarians — amongst  whom  are 
Lowth  and  Campbell.  But  there  are  some  writers  on  grammar  who 
strenuously  maintain  that  the  governed  verb  in  the  infinitive  ought 
to  be  in  the  past  tense,  when  the  verb  which  governs  it  is  in  the  past 
time.  Though  this  can  not  be  admitted,  in  the  instances  which  are 
controverted  under  this  rule,  or  in  any  instances  of  a  similar  nature, 
yet  there  can  be  no  doubt  that,  in  many  cases  in  which  the  thing  re- 
ferred to  preceded  the  governing  verb,  it  would  be  proper  and  allow- 
able. We  may  say,  "From  a  conversation  I  once  had  with  him,  he 
appeared  to  have  studied  Homer  with  great  care  and  judgment."  It 
would  be  properalso  to  say,  "  From  his  conversation,  l^e  apjiears  to 
have  studied  Homer  with  great  care  and  judgment ;"  "That  unhappy 
man  in  supposed  'to  have  died  by  violence."  These  examples  are  not 
only  consistent  with  our  rule,  but  they  confirm  and  illustrate  it.  It  is 
the  tense  of  the  governing  verb  only  that  marks  what  is  called  the 
absolute  time;  the  tense  of  the  verb  governed  marks  solely  its  re- 
lative lime  with  respect  to  the  oth«r. 

To  assert,  as  some  writers  do,  that  verbs  in  the  infinitive  mood 
have  no  tenses,  no  relative  distinctions  of  present,  past,  and  future, 
is  inconsistent  with  just  grammatical  views  of  the  subject.    That 


174  ENGLISH    grammar/ 

these  verbs  associate  wiih  verbs  in  all  the  tenses,  is  no  proof  of  their 
haying  no  peculiar  time  of  their  own.  Whatever  period  the  govern- 
ing verb  assumes,  whether  present,  pas.t,  or  future,  the  governed 
verb  in  the  iiitinitive  always  respects  that  period,  and  its  time  is  cal- 
culated from  it.  Thus,  the  time  of  the  infinitive  maybe  before,  after, 
or  the  same  as,  the  time  of  the  governing  verb,  according  as  the  thing 
signified  by  the  iniinitive  is  supposed  to  be  before,  after,  or  present 
with  the  thing  denoted  by  the  governing  verb.  It  is,  therefore,  with 
great  propriety  that  tenses  are  assigned  to  verbs  o(  the  infinitive 
mood.  The  point  of  time  from  which  ihey  are  computed  is  of  no 
consequence,  since  present,  past,  and  future  are  completely  appli- 
cable 4.0  them. 

We  shall  conclude  our  observations  under  this  rule  by  remarking, 
that  though  it  is  often  proper  to  use  the  perfect  of  the  infinitive  after 
the  governing  verb,  yet  there  are  particular  cases  in  which  it  would 
be  belter  to  give  the  expression  a  different  form.  Thus,  instead  of 
saying,  "I  wish  to  have  written  to  him  sooner,"  "I  then  wished  to 
have  written  to  him  sooner,"  "  He  will  one  day  wish  to  have  written 
sooner,"  it  would  be  more  perspicuous  and  forcible,  as  well  as  more 
agreeable  to  the  practice  of  good  writers,  to  say,  "  I  wish  that  I  had 
written  to  him  sooner,"  "  I  then  wished  that  1  had  written  to  him 
sopner,"  "  He  will  one  daj'  wish  that  he  had  written  sooner."  Should 
the  justness  of  these  strictures  be  admitted,  there  would  still  be  nu-- 
merous  occasions  for  the  use  of  the  past  infinitive,  as  we  may  per- 
ceive by  a  few  examples:  "It  would  ever  afterwards  have  been  a 
source  of  pleasure  to  have  found  him  wise  and  virtuous  ;"  "  To  have 
deferred  his  repentance  longer,  would  have  disqualified  him  from  re- 
penting at  all  j"  "They  will  then  see,  that  to  have  faithfully  perform- 
ed their  duly  would  have  been  their  greatest  consolation." 

"  I  expected  to  have  found  him."  Will'you  correct  this  sentence, 
and  give  a  rule  for  it  ?  What  tense  of  the  infinitive  must  be  used  to 
express  past  time  with  the  defective  verb  ought  1  Give  an  example. 
Is  it  proper  ever  to  use  the  perfect  of  the  infinitive  after  the  govern- 
ing verb  ?     Give  an  example. 

1. 

"  I  purpose  to  go  to  London  in  a  to  relieve  him   from  that  dis- 

few  months,  and  after  I  ehall  tressed  situation." 

faiish  (1)    my  business  there,  "  It  required  so  much  care,  that  I 
to  proceed  (2)  to  America."  thought  1  should   have  lost  ft 

*\  These   prosecutions  of  William  before  I  reached  home." 

seem  to  6e  the  most  iniquitous  "We  have  done  no  more  than  it 
measures     pursued    by     the  was  our  duty  to  have  done." 

court   during    the   time  that  "  He  would  have  assisted  one  of 
the    use  of  parliaments   was  his  friends,  if  he  could  do  it 

suspended."  without    injuring  the   other; 

"From   the   little  conversation  I  but  as  that  could  not  Aai;eiee» 

had  with  him,  he  appeared  to  done,  he  avoided  all   interfer- 

have  been  a  man  of  letters."  ence." 

"  I   always    intended   to  have  re-  "  Must  it  not  he  expected  that  he 
warded  my  son  according  to  would   have  defended  an   au- 

his  merit."  ,  thorily    which  had  been   so 

"  It   would,   on     reflection,  have  long  exercised  without   con- 

given   me    great  satisfaction  troversy  ?"  (3) 

(1)   "  Shall  have  finished:'    (2)  Rule  IX.    (3)  "  MigM  it  not  have  been,"  etc. 


SYNTAX 


175 


"These  enemies  of  Christianity 
M'ere  confounded,  whilst  tliey 
were  expecting  to  have  found 
an  opportunity  to  have  be- 
trayed its  author."' 

"  liis  sea-sickness  was  so  great, 
tliat  I  often  feared  he  would 
have  died  before  our  arrival.'' 

"  If"  these  persons  had  inleniled 
to  deceive,  they  would  have 
lakt;n  care  to  have  avoided 
what  woijlil  expose  them  to 
the  objections  of  their  oppo- 
nents." 

"  It  was  a  pleasure  to  have  re- 
ceived his  approbation  of  my 


labors,  for  which  I  cordially 
thanked  iiini." 

"  It  would  have  aflbrded  me  still 
greater  ple^isure  to  receive 
his  approbation  at  an  earlier 
period;  but  to  receive  (1)  it  at 
all,  rejected  credit  upon  me." 

'*  To  be  censured  by  him  would 
soon  have  proved  an  insuper- 
able discouragement," 

"  Him  portioned  maids,  appren- 
ticed orpiians  blest, 

The  young  who  labor,  and  the  old 
who  rest." 

"  The  doctor,  in  his  lecture,  jsaid 
that  fever  always  produced 
thirst." 


RULE  XIV. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 


KULK    XIV. 


Active  participles  from  active  transitive  verbs  govern  tke  objective  case 

"Esteeming  (2)  theirselvcs  wise, 

they  became  fools." 
"  Suspecting     not  only    ye,    but 

they  also,   I  was   studious    to 

avoid  all  intercourse." 


enemies  to  me,  and  he  ns  a 
suspicious  friend." 
"From  having  exposed  (4)  his- 
self  tqo  freely,  in  diiferent 
climates,  he  entirely  lost  his 
.  health." 


"I  could    not  avoid  considering, 
(3)  in  some  degree,  they  as 

1.  Participles  are  sometimes  governed  by  the  article  ;  for  the  pres- 
ent participle,  with  the  dehnite  article  the  before  it,  becomes  a  sub- 
stantive, and  must  have  the  preposition  of  after  it:  as,  "These  are 
the  rules  of  grammar,  by  the  observing  of  which  you  may  avoid  mis 
lakes."  It  would  not  be  proper  to  say,  "  by  the  observing  which,' 
nor,  "by  observing  of  which;"  but  the  phrase,  without  either  article 
or  preposition,  would  be  right:  as,  "  by  observing  which."  The  ar- 
ticle a  or  an  has  the  same  effect :  as,  "  This  was  a  betraying  of  the 
trust  reposed  in  him." 

This  rule  arises  from  the  nature  and  idiom  of  our  language,  and 
from  as'plain"  a  principle  as  any  on  which  it  is  founded,  namely:  that 
a  word  which  has  the  article  before  it,  and  the  possessive  preposition  of 
after  it,  must  be  a  noun;  and,  if  a  noun,  it  ought  to  follow  the  con- 
struction of  a  noun,  and  not  to  have  the  regimen  of  a  verb.-  It  is  the 
participial  termination  of  this  sort  of  word.s  tlial  is  apt  to  deceive 
us',  and  make  us  treat  them  as  if  they  were  of  an  amphibious  species, 
partly  nouns  and  partly  verbs. 

The  following  are  a  few  examples  of  the  violation  of  this  rule: 
"  He  was  sent  to  prepare  the  way  by  preaching  of  rei)entance ;"  it 
ought  lobe,  "■by  the  preaching  of  repentance,"  or,  '>  by  preaching 
repentance."     "  iJy  the  continual  mortifying  our  corrupt  afiections;" 

(1)  "T(j/iaDereceu'ec?."— Noto  Xlir.    (2)  llulo  XIII.    (3)  Rule  VIII.    (4)601. 


176  ENei.lSH    GRAMMAR. 

it  should  be, '*  by  the  continual  mortifying  of"  or,  '' by  continually 
mortifying  our  corrupt  afl'ections."  "They  laid  out  themselves  tow- 
ards the  advancing  and  promoting  ibe  good  of  it ;"  "towards  advanc- 
ing and  promotiaig  the  good."  "It  is  a?i  overvaluing  ourselves!>  to 
reduce  everlhing  to  the  narrow  measure  of  our  capacities  :"  **  it  is 
overvaluing  ourselves,"  or,  "  «w  overvaluing  o/ ourselves."  "Keep- 
ing of  one  day.  in  seven,"  etc.  ;  it  ought  to  be,  "  the  keeping  of  one 
day,"  or,  "  kee|>ing  one  day." 

A  phrase  in  which  the  article  precedes  the  present  participle,  and 
the  possessive  preposition  ibliows"  it,  will  not,  in  every  instance,  con- 
vey the  same  meaning  as  would  be  conveyed  by  the  participle  with- 
out the  article  and  preposition.  '•  He  expressed  the  pleasure  he  had 
in  the  hearing  of  the  philosopher,"  is  capable  of  a  diiierent  sense 
from  "He  expressed  the  pleasure  he  had  in  hearing  the  philoso- 
pher." When,  therefore,  we  wish,  for  the  sake  of  harmony  or  varie- 
ty, to  substitute  one  of  these  phraseologies  for  the  other,  we  should 
previously  consider  whether  they  are  perfectly  similar  in  the  senti- 
ments they  convey. 

"  By  the  observing  of  which."  Will  you  parse  observing?  Rule 
for  it?  What  words  in  tliis  sentence  may  be  omitted  with  propriety? 
Would  it  be  proper  to  omit  one  of  them  only  ? 

1. 

"  By  observing  of  truth,  you  will  ly  situated  for  gaining  of  wis- 

command  esteem,  as  well  as  dom.       Poverty     turns     our 

secure  peace."  thoughts  too  much  upon  the 

"  He  prepared  them  for  this  event  supplyingour  wants, and  rich- 

by  the  sending  to  them  prop-  es  upon  the  enjoying  our  su- 

er  information."  .  perfluities." 

"  A  person    may  be  great  or  rich  "Pliny,  speaking  of  Cato  the  Cen- 

by  chance-,  but  can   not   be  sor's   disapproving  the   Gre- 

wise  or  good  without  i^Ae  tak-  clan  orators,  expressed  hira- 

ing  pains  for  it."  self  thus." 

"  Nothing  could   have  made   her  "Propriety  of   pronunciation    i.s 

so  unhappy,  as   the  marrying  the  giving  to  every  word  that 

a 'man  who  possessed   such  sound  which  the  most  polite 

principles."  usage  of  the  language  appro- 

"  The   changing    times   and  sea-  priates  to  it." 

sons,  the  removing   and  set-  "  T'/se  not  attendiiTg(l)  to  this  rule 

ting    up    kings,    belongs    to  is   the   cause   (2)   of  a   very 

Providence  alone."  common  error." 

"The  middle  station  of  life  Seems  "This  was,  in  fact,  a  converting 

to  be  the  most  advantageous-  the  deposit  to  his  own  use." 

2  The  same  observations  which  have  been  inade  respecticg  the 
effect  of  the  article  and  participle  appear  to  be  applicable  to  the  pro- 
noun and  participle,  when  they  are  similarly  associated:  as,  "JVluch 
depends  on  their  olservimj  of  the  rule,  and  error  will  be  the  conse- 
quence of  their  neylectivg  of  it ;"  instead  of  "  their  ohservinr'  the  rule, 
and  their  neglecting  it."  We  shnli  pe'rcj^ive  this  more  clearly  if  we 
substitute  a  noun  for  the  pronoun:  as,  "Mui:h  depends  upon  Tyro's 
ohservingof  Xhe  y\x\q,"  eXc.  But,  as  this  construction  sounds  rather 
harshly,  it  would,  in  general,  be  better  to  express  the  sentiment  in 
the  following  or  some  other  Ibrm  :  "Much  depends  on   the  rule's  he- 

(1)  Kule  VI.    (2)  llule  XV.  , 


SYNTAX.  ]<^^ 

mark  may  be  applied^to  s^ve  ^1  o^her  1  ."'^^'^'"^ '^•"  '^^'^'^ '•^- 
fouod  in  ihfs  work,  wh  ch  tho'^ih  p'  "'°^'''''  ^'  ^^'P'-^s.^ion  to  be 
correct,  are  not  always  the  wal?Jv,  ]7  '^  ^^^"tended  ior  as  strfetly 
ant  sound.  ■  "'°'^  elig,ble,on  account  of  their  unpleas- 

^e  sometimes  meet  \vith  exnressinnc  iii.«  «i     i-  n 
;"/o/  h,s  sentences,  he  wa.  ^ery  ^x"  a  -    '  l'/^''"''^^^       '/"/onu- 
he  proceeded  to  blows."     But   ihl^TinlnrrJf  7     '^^"'"^  ""•(  "^'"^'^' 
sitionsdonol    like  art k-l^^  ^.V?     '^'^  '^^  '"correct  language— ior  prepo- 

phrase,  "  By  observ,,  "  wl   M^^  have  shown    above  in   the 

peat  the  Note  ?  P'-^Position  o/  were  omuted  ?     Will   you   re- 


"  There  will  be  no  dancer  of /A/-;.-  .•«      .u 

he^is,  ,nde,„e-<,   .„  „!,  S",'  [iSI-^''^  '"^  -  "-^y  of 

"  I.  was  from  our  misunderHanJ.     "  '''',he",eramhor'?'"'h"'''"7> 

lilt  nesi  authors,  his  mind  be- 
came highly  improved." 

difler^u  i;rti;:i!^ri::;':i^l:^:;^',j^!r  1-^^     are  someti.es 

irately  used.  It  is  frequent  v  ad  S?  V'"'  '^7  ';**  "°^  indiscrim- 
"He  run  "  for  "  he  ran  "  "t7.  i  '.  il*"  '^^^^^'^  ^or  "he  began  :" 
pie  being  here  n  eV  nliead  J tC  '  ^V  '"  ^'^  '''"^"'^ '"  ^"«  P«rtic  - 
frequently  the  imperel^tense      V^  ""^   much  more 

wrote,"  L  a  I  h^dtrltte"^''  !!r:at:U  e^^fo^^^^^^  ^^' :  ^  ^^^ 
"I  have  ea^"  for  "  I  have  eaten  "  u  t?;^^''^'''  ^'^'^  ^  ^'^s  ^'hosen  ;" 
sighs;"  -;.ere  iJrworeT'  \^IU  wo  in'^K'*^' '''"'^•"^""'^«^^  ^'''J^ 
"He  hath  bore  witness    0  1  is  fH,Wnr  ^^f,   spoke;"    "*;Wre„." 

means  he  overrun  h  l^^^^'t:^':::^"^^''''''''".  "  ^^  »^'"« 
''rxsenP     '' His  con«tiin»fm     ho'   i    ''"'"'"'•  The   sun    has  rose ;" 

-strong  ^o\::^r^,^:::z!^^z^^'^  ^'f  - 

"»»7WW"  source  Of  true   happiness;"  it  ought   to  be, 

in  J^  ?n;r^?^!:.:^^'i:;^!:;f ,;:;;!:- ;7P-Perly  contracted  by  chang- 

of  the  school  ;"  ''She  was   riuch  d?  t  "i  •""l'"*'^''^'   ^^  1"^  '^"P^"' 
i>a*.sf./,"  ''rfiW«*W."  ^istrest,      they  ought  (o  be  "«ur-    • 

Is  it  correct    to  say,  "  He  beo-nn '?"     WKo.   • 
sion  ?     Will   yon  repeat  Note?"     Pnn  H  '  ''•'?^  '"  ^'^^  «-^P''^«- 

contracted  to',  with^'roprielv?  Participle  ending  in  ed  be 


(1)  Ouiit  ''their." 


178 


ENGMSH    GRAMMAR. 


3. 


''  By  too  eager  pursuit,  he  ?•«??  a 
great  risk  of  beiiigdisappoiiit- 
ed."  (I) 

"He  had  not  long  enjoyed  repose 
before  he  begun  to  be  weary 
of  liaviiig  nothing  to  do." 

"  He  was  greatly  healed,  and 
drunk  with  avidity." 

"Though  his  conduct  was,  in 
some  respects,  exceptignable, 
yet  he  dared  not  commit  so 
great  afi  offence  as  that  which 
was  proposed  to  him." 

"A  second  deluge  learning  thus 
o'errun, 

And  the  monks  finished  what  the 
Goths  begun." 

"  If  some  events  had  not  fell  out 
very  unexpectedly,  I  should 
have  been  present." 

"  He  would  have  went  with  us, 
had  he  been  invited." 

"  He  returned  the  goods  which  he 
had  stole,  and  made  all  the 
reparation  in  his  power." 

*' They  have  chose  the  part  of 
honor  and  virtue." 

"  His  vices  have  weakened  his 
mind  and    broke  his  health." 

"  He  had  mistook  his  true  interest, 
and  found  himself  forsook  by 
his  former  adherents." 

"  The  bread  that  has  been  eat  is 
soon  forffot." 


'•No      contentions      have     arose 
amongst  theiu  since  their  re-_ 
conciliation." 

''  The  cloth  had  no  seam,  but 
was  wove  throughout." 

"  Tlie  French  language  is  spoke 
in  every  state  in  Europe." 

•'His  resolution  was  too  strong  to 
be  shook  by  slight  opposi- 
tion." 

"  He  was  not  much  restrained  af- 
terwards, having  took  ii^i- 
proper  liberties  at  first." 

"  He  has  not  yet  wore  off  the 
rough  manners  which  he 
brought  with  him." 

"You  who  have  forsook  your 
friends,  are  entitled  to  no  con- 
Hdence." 

"They  who  have  bore  a  part  in 
the  labor,  shall  share  the  re- 
ward." 

"  When  the  rules  have  been  wan- 
tonly broke,  there  can  be  no 
plea 'for  iavor." 

"  He  writes  as  the  best  authors 
would  have  wrote,  had  they 
writ  on  the  same  subject." 

'He  heapt  up  great  riches,  but 
past  his  time  miserably." 

"  He  talkt  and  stampt  with  such 
vehemence,  that  he  was. sus- 
pected to  be  insane." 


KULE  XXVII. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE    XV. 

Adverbs^  though  tJiey  have  no  government  of  case,  tense,  etc.,  require  an 
appropriate  situation  in  the  sentence,  viz :  for  the  most  part,  before 
adjectives,  after  verbs,  active  or  neuter,  and  freqiiently  between  the  aux- 
iliari/  and  the  verb  :  as,  "  He  made  a  very  sensible  discourse  ;  he 
epoke  nnaffcctedli/  and  forcibly,  and  %oas  attentively  heard  by  the 
whole  assembly." 

A  few  instances  of  erroneous  positions  of  adverbs  may  serve  to  il- 
lustrate the  rule.  "  He  must  not  expect  to  find  study  agreeable  al- 
ways;"  "  a/Hja^>»  agreeable."  We  always  find  them  ready  when  we 
want  them  ;"  '*^We  find  them  «Z»ia^s  ready,"  etc.  "  Disserrations  on 
the  prophecies  which  have  remarkably  been  fulfilled ;"  "which  have 


(1)  Pres.  pass.  part,  used  as  a  aouu — Rule  X. 


SYNTAX.  179 

been  remarkably:'  "  Instead  of  looking  contemptuously  down  on  the 
crooked  in  mind  or  in  body,  we  should  look  up  thankfully  to  God, 
who  hath  made  us  bettor;''  "Instead  of  lookm^r  ^o^yn  contemptaor,s- 
ly,  etc  M^e  should  thankfully  look  up,^^  etc.  -  If  thou  art  blessed 
naturally  with  a  good  memory,  continually  exercise  it ;"  ''naturalb, 
bleaaed,    etc.,  '' exercu^e  it  continually." 

Sometimes  the  adverb  ig  placed  w"ith  propriety  before  the  verb  or 
at  some  distance  after  it,  sometimes  between  the  two  auxiliarie-« 
and  sometimes  after  them  both,  as  in  the  following  examples-  -'Vice 
always  creeps  by  degrees,  and  insennbly  twines  around  us  those  con- 
cealed fetters  by  which  we  are  at  last  completely  bound."  "  He  en- 
couraged  the  English  barons  to  carry  .their  opposition- /awAe;--" 
Ihey  compelled  him  to  declare  that  he  would  abjure  the  ■realm  fhr 
ever  ;     instead  of,  "  to  carry  farther  their  opposition,"  and  "  to  abjure 

S'*''m*''4.u''  'i''*^'',"-  "^^'^  ^"''^  generally  been  reckoned  an  honest 
man  The  book  may  always  be  had  at  such  a  place,"  in  preference 
to  has  been  generally,"  and  '' may  be  always."  "  These  rules  will 
be  cW/y  understood,  alter  they  have  been  diligently  siudied,"  is  prefera- 
ble  to  "These  rules  will  clearly  be  understood,  after  they  have  dili 
gently  been  studied."  ^ 

From  the  preceding  remarks  and  examples,  it  appears  that  no 
exact  and  determinate  rule  can  be  given  for  the  placing  of  adverbs 
on  all  occasions.  The  general  rule  may  be  of  considerable  use  :  but 
the  easy  flow  and  perspicuity  of  the  phrase  are  the  things  which 
ought  to  be  chiefly  regarded. 

The  adverb  there  is  olten  used  as  an  expletive,  t.r  as  a  word  that 
adds  nothing  to  the  sense;  in  which  case  it  precedes  the  verb  and 
the  nominative  noun:  as,  "There  is  a  person  at  the  door;"  "There 
are  some  thieves  in  the  house;"  which  would  be  as  well,  or  better 
expressed  by  saying,  "A  person  is  at  the  door;"  "Some  thieves  are 
m  the  house."  Sometimes  it  is  made  use  of  to  give  a  small  de^^ree 
of  emphasis  to  the  sentence:  as,  "  There  was  a  man  sent  from  God  • 
whose  name  was  John."  When  it  is  applied  in  its  strict  sense,  it 
principally  follows  the  verb  and  the  nominative  case:  as.  "The  man 
stands  there." 

What  wotd  is  misplaced  in  the  sentence,  "  He  must  not  expect  to 
find  study  agreeable  always  ?  "  Will  you  correct  the  sentence,  and 
give  the  rule  for  the  position  of  adverbs  ?  How  is  the  adverb  some- 
times placed  with  respect  to  the  verb  ?  With  respect  to  the  auxiliary  ? 
"  He  was  jileasing  not  often,  (1 )  be-  being   not    admitted,    he   be- 

cause he  was  vain."  came  sul)missive." 

"William  nobly  acted,  though  he     "These  things  should   be  never 

was  unsuccessful."  separated." 

"We   may  happily    live,  though     ''Unless    he    have   more  govern- 
our  possessions  are  small."  ment  of  himself,  he  will    be 

From  whence  (2)  we  may  date  always  discontented." 

likewise   the   period   of  this     "  iVevo/-  (3)  sovereign  was  (4)  so 
event."  much  beloved  by  the  people." 

*  It  can  not  be  impertinent  or  ri-     "He   was    determined    to   inyite 
diculous,  therefore,  to  remon-  back  the  king,  and  to  call  to- 

^^'''^te-"  get  her  his  friends." 

He  offered  an   apology,  which     "So  well   educated  a   boy  gives- 


great  hopes  to  his  friends." 


(1)  "  Not  often  pleasing:'        (2)  589.        (3)  "  No:^       (4)  «  Ever  so:' 


180  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

"Not  only  he  found  her  employ-    "•  My  opinion  was  given  on  ra^Aer 

ed,  hut  pleased  and  tranquil  a  (1)  cursory  perusal  of  the 

also."  '  book." 

''We   always   should    prefer  our     "  It  is  too  common  with  mankind 

duly  to  our  pleasure."  to   be    engrossed    and    bver- 

"It  is  impossible  continually  to  come,    totally     by     present 

be  at  work."  events." 

"  The  heavenly  bodies  are  in  mo-     "  When  the  Romans  were  pressed 

tion  perpetually."  with   a   foreign    enemy,   the 

''Having  not   known,  or   having  women  contributed  all  their 

not  considered,  the  measures  rings  and  jewels  voluntarily, 

proposed,    ho   failed   of  sue-  to  assist  the  government." 

cess." 

1.  The  adverb  never  generally  precedes  the  verb :  as,  "I  never  was 
there; "  "  He  never  comes  at  a  proper  time."  When  an  auxiliary  is 
used,  it  is  placed  indifferently,  either  before  or  after  this  adverb:  as, 
"He  was  never  seen  {of  never  was  seen)  to  laugh  from  that  time." 
Never  seems  to  be  improperly  used  in  the  following  passages:  "Ask 
me  never  so  much  dowry  and  gift;"  "If  I  make  my  hands  never  so 
clean  ; "  "Charm  he  never  so  wisely."  The  word  ever  would  be  more 
suitable  to  the  sense. 

How  is  the  adverb  never  generally  placed  with  respect  to  the  verb? 
Give  an  example.  Give  an  example  where  the  word  never  is  im- 
properly used  instead  of  ever. 

1. 
"  They  could  not   persuade  him,     "  If  some  persons'  opportunities 
though   they    were   never   so  were  never  so  favorable,  they 

eloquent."  would  be  indolent  to  improve 

them." 

2.  In  imitation  of  the  French  idiom,  the  adverb  of  place,  tvhere,  is 
often  used  instead  of  the  pronoun  relative  and  a  preposition.  "They 
framed  a  protestation,  joAere  they  repeated  all  their  former  claims;" 
i.  e.,  "m  ichich  they  repeated."  "The  king  was  still  determined  to 
run  forwards  in  the  same  course  tohere  he  was  already,  by  his  pre- 
cipitate career,  too  fatally  advanced ;"  i.  e.,  "in  which  he  was."  But 
it  would  be  better  to  avoid  this  mode  of  expression. 

The  adverbs  hence,  thence,  and  whence,  imply  a  preposition — for  they 
signify,  "  from  this  place,"  "from  that  ])lace,"  "from  what  place."  It 
seems,  therelbre,  strictly  speaking,  to  be  improper  to  join  a  preposi- 
tion with  them,  because  it  is  superfluous:  as,  "This  is  the  leviathan 
from  whence  the  wits  of  our  age  are  said  to  borrow  their  weapons ;" 
"An  ancient  author  prophesies  from  hence."  But  the  origin  of  these 
words  is  little  attended  to,  and  the  preposition  from,  so  oftien  used  in 
construction  with  them,  that  the  omission  of  it,  in  many  cases, 
•would  seem  stiff',  and  be  disagreeable. 

The  adverbs  here,  there,  where,  are  often  improperly  applied  to  verbs 
signifying  motion  instead  of  the  adverbs  hither,  thither,  whither:  as, 
"He  came  here  hastily;"  "They  rode  there  with  speed."  They 
should  be,  "  He  came  hither  ;  "  "They  rode  thither"  etc. 
•  "  They  framed  a  protestation,  where  they  repeated  all  their  former 
claims."     Will  you  correct  this  sentence,  and  repeat  Note  2? 

(1)  A  rather."— ILvlU  IX. 


SYNTAX.  I8i 


"He  drew  up  a  petition,  Wjure  he  "GeorjE^e   is   active;    lie   \valked 

too     freely    rei)resented    his  there  in  les«s  than  an  hour." 

own -merits."  (1) 

"Hi*  follies  had  reduced  him  to  "  Where  are  you  all  going  in  such 

a  situation  wket-e  he  had  much  haste  ?  " 

to  fear  and  nothing  to  hope."  "Whither  have  they  been  since 
"It  is  reported  that  the  prince  will  they  left  the  city  ?  " 

come  here  to-morrow." 

3.  We  have  some  examples  of  adverbs  being  used  for  substantives  : 
"In  16S7  he  erected  it  into  a  community  of  regulars,  since  when  it 
ha* begun  to  increase  in  those  countries  as  a  religious  order;"  i.  e., 
"since  which  tifne.'^  "A  little  while,  and  I  shall  not  see  you;"  i.  e., 
"a  short  time.''''  "It  is  worth  their  while;"  i.  e.,  "it  deserves  their 
time  and  pains."  But  this  use  of  the  word  rather  suits  familiar  than 
grave  style.  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  phrase,  "To  do  a  thing 
anyhotn,'"  i.  e.,  "in  any  manner;"  or  ''somehow;"  i.  e.  "in  some  man- 
ner." "Somehow,  worthy  as  these  people  are,  they  are  under  the 
influence  of 'prejudice." 

Will  you  repeat  this  note,  and  give  an  example  under  it  f 

3. 
"Charles    left   the    seminary  too     "Nothing    is    better    worth     the 
early,   since    when    he     has  while  (.3)  of  young  persons, 

made    very    little    improve-  than  theacquisition  of  knowl- 

nient."  (2)  ,  edge  and  virtue." 

RULE  XIX. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULt    XVI. 

Two  negatives^  in  the  same  sim^ile  sentence^  arc  equivalent  to  an  affirma- 
tive: ««,  "  Nor  did  they  not  perceive  him  ;"  i.  e.,  "They  did  perceive 
him." 

It  is  better  to  express  an  affirmation  by  a  regular  affirmative  than 
by  two  separate  negatives,  as  in  the  former  sentence;  but  when  one 
of  the  negatives  is  joined  to  another  word,  as  in  the  latter  sentence, 
the  two  negatives  form  a  pleasing  and  delicate  variety  of  expression. 

Some  writers  have  improperly  employed  two  negatives  instead  of 
one,  as  in  the  following  instances  :  "  1  never  did  repent  of  doing  good, 
nor  shall  not  now;"  "  nor  shall  I nowy  "Never  no  imitator  grew  up 
to  his  author;"  '■'never  did  any"  etc.  "  I  can  not  by  no  means  allow 
him  what  his  argument  must  prove  ;"  "I  can  not  by  awy  means,"  etc. ; 
,  or,  "  /  can  by  no  means'^  "  Nor  let  no  comforter  approach  me ;"  nor  let 
any  comforter,"  etc.  "  Nor  is  danger  ever  apprehended  in  such  a  gov- 
ernment, no  more  than  we  commonly  apprehend  danger  from  thunder 
or  earthquakes;"  it  should  be,  "any  more."  "Ariosto,  Tasso,  nor 
Galileo,  no  more  than  Raphael,  were  not  born  in  republics  ;"  "  Neither 
Ariosto,  Tasso,  nor  Galileo,  any  more  than  Raphael,  was  born  in  a 
republic." 

Should  we  express  an  affirmation  by  an  affirmative,  or  by  two  sepa- 
rate negatives  ?  Will  you  give  an  example  of  the  improper  use  of  two 
negatives? 

a}  Rule  XXII=  (2)  ''And  from  that  Umi  he,"  etc.;  or,  "  «nS  hat  titiid  Hutde,"  etc. 
(8) '*  rSe  ^tme  aiitf  artiWtVjH  0^^  etc. 


182 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR- 


"  Neither  ricJies  nor  honors,  nor 
■no  such  perishing  goods,  can 
satisfy  the  desires  of  an  im- 
mortal spirit." 

"  Be  honest,  nor  take  no  shape  nor 
semblance  of  disguise." 

"We  need  not,  «o)-  (1)  do  not  con- 
fine his  operations  to  narrow 
limits." 

"1  am  resolved  not  to  comply  with 
the  proposal,  neither  at  pres- 
ent nor  at  any  other  time.*' 

*' There  can  not  be  nothing  more 
insignificant  than  vanity." 

"Nothing  never  affected  her  so 
much  as  this  misconduct  of 
her  child." 


"Do  not  interrupt  me  yourselves, 
nor  let  no  one  disturb  my  re- 
tirement.'' 

**  These  people  do  not  judge  wise- 
ly, nor  take  no  proper  meas- 
ure to  effect  their  purpose." 

"The  measure  is  so  exceptiona- 
ble that  we  can  not,  by  no 
means,  permit  it." 

"  1  have  received  no  information 
on  the  subject,  neither  from 
him  7ior  from  his  friend." 

"Precept  nor  discipline  is  not  so 
forcible  as  example." 

**The  king  nor  the  queen  was  not 
all  deceived  in  the  business." 


RULEX. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE  XVII. 

Prepositions  govern  the  objective  case. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  nominative  case  being  used 
instead  of  the  objective,:  "  Who  servest  thou  under?"  "Who  do  you 
speak  to?"  "We  are  slill  much  at  a  loss  who  civil  power  belongs 
to."  "  Who  dost  thou  ask  for?"  "Associate  not  with  those  who  none 
can  speak  well  of."     In  all  these  places  it  ought  to  be  ^' whom." 

The  ))repositions  to  and  y'or  are  often  understood,  chiefly  before  the 
pronouns:  as,  "Give  me  the  book;"  "Got  me  some  paper;"  that  is, 
"  ^o  m'e,"  "/or  me."  "Woe  is  me;"  i,  e.,  "?omc."  "  He  w^s  ban- 
ished England  ;"  i.  e.,  "■/mm  England." 

"Who  do  you  *peak  to?"  Will  you  correct  this  sentence,  and  ex- 
plain why  it  is  wrong?  "Give  me  the  book."  What  is  understood 
in  this  sentence? 

"We  are  all  accountable  creat- 
ures, each  for  hisself." 

*'They  willingly,  and  oftheirsclves, 
endeavored  1o  make  up  the 
difference." 

"He  laid  the  suspicion  upon  some- 
body, I  know  not  ivho,  in  the 
company." 

"I  hope  it  is  not  I  toho  (2)  ho  is 
displeased  with." 

"  To  poor  we,  there  is  not  much 
hope  remaining." 

"Does   that   boy    know   who    he 


speaks  to?  Who  does  he  of- 
fer such  language  to?" 

"  It  was  not  he  that  they  were  so 
angry  with." 

"  What  t-'oncord  can  subsist  be- 
tween those  who  commit 
crimes  and  t/tei/  (3)  who  ab- 
hor them  ?" 

"  The  person  who  I  travelled  with 
has  sold  the  horse  which  ht; 
rode  on  during  our  journey." 

"It  is  not  I  he  is  engiiged  with." 

"Who  did  he  receive  that  intelli- 
gence from  ?" 

1.  The  preposition  is  often  separated  from  the  relative  which  it 
governs:  as  "  Whom  wilt  thou  give  it  to?"  instead  of,  "  To  johom  wilt 
thou  give  it?"  'He  is  an  author  whom  I  am  much  delighted  with;" 
"The  world  is  too  polite  to  shock  aiithors  with  a  truth,  which  gener- 


(1)  "  And  do."         (2)  •'  With  whom." 


(3)  "  TT\ofor 


SYNTAX.  183 

ally  their  booksellers  are  the  first  that  inform  them  of"     Th;^  ;«  - 

fh"rr;n"a:d'l,;V;;:r.r;,:!'^'^^"°"^'^-^  «^--  --h  better  wu" 
"  Will  you  repeat  this  note,  and  give  an  example  under  it? 

I. 
"To  have  no  one  whom  we  Iipnrt      '^  w^  ;<,  „  r  •      i     i 

ily  «ish  well  ,o,  „„7  wtem  "mIT^  """'"'  '  ""'  '"■S'"y 


MTc  are  warmly  concerned  for, 
is  H  deplorable  state." 


»elve.."     Thi,   we    "   in.h.   (h    T'''  "A""''  ""'"•"'"nl  'o,  tl'em- 

,    lil.-e,  wliere  Cullne.s  ami  exacl,ie"°  o  ' ,  vn,;  ""'  "'   •■■"'  ""''  ""= 

of  every  other  .on.ideraUoTll  .r:y°be''aT;iuT  """'  '"""  "■>••  "'"^^ 

go've;isT",?i;e;;"„::rut,::ir.,;;s;r"'""  ^■■°'" "- "-"  -"-" " 

2. 
preceding  word." 

and  find  it  does  not^anKv'er  our  x2'.r.',?n''^  '"p  '  '''^•-^"  "'^"  ''^^«  '^ 
positions  must  be  imnroner    .   thM..  "'•     ^^"^  ^^^'  'l-flerent  pre- 

sentence :  as  '  T  e  S  't  ,  1  "' n^'^?'''^'^"^'""  «"^  '"  ^'^^  ^^«n1e 
English."        '  '^   ^'"'''"   ''^""'y  ^'*''"<^f>   "^"'"-^^  twe-nty 

prele^^nl^e  •:r .:  ^i^^^i^^^rj^  u:^^:!;'^^^  ^^^-^-^  the 
torn  has  not  decided  in  Tvor^f  e  her  of  i  lem  ^^'^'"'^^^"^V^'r^  ^"^  «"«- 
and  "  Expert  in  a  thin-  •"  -  Exn^  ,   .?  fii  r  *"  ^^^^     ^^•'^''^  «»,» 

takes,-    'ExperUn&eptionT  '  ''  ^'"'^'"^  '  remedy  for  his  mis-. 

sa^  t- ar:?:^;^;;^^  toir  v:^br  t?r:;i:&i'^^  ^^"^-^'^  ^^« 

rived:  as,  "A  compliance  J/1^  'to  cl^.l^t/^Vi-T";'' "^''^  ^^ 
to  tyranny,"  "  disposed  to  tyrannize  "  '  ^  ^       ^  disposition 

""^thi^l^sl^i^h'iSe^'Xt^*''^  'rn^^'^"!"^'^'^^'^^^'  '^-> 

sion:  promised   much^enjov-  hlZVn\   '^"S-'^^^^  .''''^ays 

ment.''  •'  ■  b'therto  been  disappointed  in 

. that  pleasure." 

(1)  "By  the  preceding  ^,-o^d,  ^n7^^ii^ena^'~^~^:^, 


184  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

4.  As  an  accurale  and  appropriate  use  of  the  preposition  is  ot  great 
imporiatice,  we  shall  select  a  coosiderable  number  of  examples  of  im- 
propriety in  the  application  of  this  part  of  speech. 

1st.  With  respect  to  the  preposition  of.  "  He  is  resolved  of  going 
to  the  Persian  court;"  "o?j.  goino^,"  etc.  "  He  was  totally  dependent 
of  the  Papal  crown  ;"  '•'■on  the  Papal,"  etc.  "To  call  of  a  person," 
and  "  to  wait  of  hira  ;"  '*o«  a  person,"  etc.  "  He  was  eager  of  recom- 
mending it  to  his  fellow-citizens;"  "  i/i  re/iommending,"  etc.  0/ is 
sometimes  omitted,  and  sometimes  inserted,  after  worthy :  as,  "It  is 
worthy  observation,"  or  "of  observation."  But  it  would  have  been 
better  omitted  in  the  following  sentences:  "The  emulation  who 
should  serve  their  country  best,  no  longer  subsists  among  them,  but 
o/who  should  obtain  the  most  lucrative  command."  "The  rain  hath 
been  falling  of  a  long  time;"  "failing  a  long  time."  "It  is  situation 
chiefly  which  decides  of  the  fortune  and  characters  of  men;"  "de- 
cides the  fortune,"  or  "  concerning  the  fortune."  "  He  found  the  great- 
est dirticulty  of  writing;"  "  iVi  Vriting."  "It  might  have  given  me  a 
greater  taste  of  its  antiquities."  A  taste  of  a  thing  implies  actual  en- 
joyment of  it;  but  a  taste /or  it  implies  only  a  capacity  for  enjoyment. 
"  This  had  a  much  greater  share  of  inciting  him,  than  any  regard  after 
his  father's  commands;"  "share  in  inciting,"  and  "regard  to  his 
father's,"  etc. 

2d.  "With  respect  to  the  prepositions  to  and  for.  "  You  have  be- 
stowed your  favors  to  the  most  deserving  persons;"  "upon  the  most 
deserving,"  etc.  "  He  accused  the  ministers  for  betraying  the  Dutch;" 
"  o/having  bet  rayed,"  "  His  abhorrence  to  that  superstitious  figure;" 
"o/that,"  etc.  "A  great  change  to  the  better;"  ^^for  the  better," 
"  Your  prejudice  to  my  cause  ;"  "  against.^'  "  The  English  were  very 
different  people  then  to  what  they  are  at  present;"  "/ro7»  what,"  etc. 
"In  compliance  to  the  declaration;"  "  it)?'<^,"  etc.  "It  is  more  than 
they  thought  for  ;"  "  thought  of."  "  There  is  no  need  for  it ;"  "  of  it." 
For  is  superfluous  in  the  phrase,  "More  than  he  knows  for."  "No 
discouragement  for  the  authors  to  proceed;"  "^o  the  authors,"  etc. 
"It  was  perfectly  in  compliance  to  some  persons;"  "mfA."  "The 
wisest  princes  need  not  think  it  any  diminution  to  their  greatness,  or 
derogation  to  their  sufficiency,  to  rely  upon  counsel;"  "diminution 
o/,"  and  "  derogation /roHJ." 

3d-  "With  respect  to  the  prepositions  ivitha.n<\  upon.  "Reconciling 
himself  with  the  king,"  "Those  things  which  have  the  greatest  re- 
semblance with  each  other,  frequently  differ  the  most."  "That  such 
rejection  should  be  consonant  with  our  common  nature;"  "con- 
formable with,"  etc.  "The  history  of  Peter  is  agreeable  with  the 
sacred  texts."  In  all  the  above  instances  it  should  be  "  to,"  instead  of 
'■'■with."  "It  is  a  use  that,  perhaps,  I  should  not  have  thought  on; 
"thought  of."  "A  greater  quantity  may  be  taken  from  the  heap, 
without  making  any  sensible  alteration  upon  it;"  "  t  n  it."  "  Intrust- 
ed to  persons  on  whom  the  parliament  could  confide;"  "trtwhom." 
"  He  was  made  much  on  at  Argos  ;"  "mucho/."  "If  policy  can- pre- 
vail upon  force  ;"  "  over  force."  "  I  do  likewise  dissent  with  the  ex- 
aminer;" ''■from." 

4th.  With  respect  to  tlie  prepositions  in,  from,  etc.  "They  should 
be  informed  in  some  parts  of  his  character;"  " aftowf,"  or  " concern- 
ing"  "Upon  such  occasions  as  fell  into  their  cognizance;"  ^'nnder." 
"  That  variety  of  factions  into  which  we  are  still  engaged ;"  in  which." 
"  To  restore  myself  into  the  favor ;"  "<o  the  favor.''    "  Could  he  have 


SYNTAX. 


186 


profited  from  his  repeated  experiences;"  ''Jy."  From  seems  to  be 
superfluous  after  forbear :  as,  "He  could  not  ibrbear  from  appointin*^ 
the  pope,"  etc.  "A  strict  observance  after  times  and  fashions  ;"  "  of 
times."  "The  character  which  we  may  now  value  ourselves  by  draw- 
ing;" ''upon  drawing."  "  Neither  of  them  shall  make  me  swerve  out 
of  the  path;  ''from  the  path."  "Ye  blind  guides  which  strain  at  a. 
gnat  and  swallow  a  camel ;"  it  ought  to  be,  "which  strain  out  a  gnat, 
or  take  a  gnat  out  of  the  liquor  by  straining  it."  The  impropriety  of 
the  preposition  has  wholly  destroyed  the  meaning  of  the  phrase. 

The  preposition  among  generally  implies  a  nunaber  of  things.  It 
can  not  be  properly  used  in  conjunction  with  tlie  word  every,  which  is 
in  the  singular  number:  as,  "Which  is  found  among  every  species  of 
liberty  ;''  "The  opinion  seems  to  gain  ground  among  everybody." 

"  He  is  resolved  of  going  to  the  Persian  court."  Will  you  correct 
this  sentence  ?  "  You  have  bestowed  your  favors  to  the  most  deserv- 
ing persons."     How  should  this  sentence  be  altered  ? 

"Reconciling  himself  with  the  king."     AVhat  inaccuracy  is  there  In 
this  sentence  ?     "  They  should  be  informed  h\  some  parts  of  his  char 
acter."     Will  you  correct  this  sentence? 


4. 


"  She  finds  a  difficulty  o/ fixing  her 
mind." 

"Her  sobriety  is  no  derogation  to 
her  understanding." 

"  There  was  no  water,  and  he  died 
for  (1)  thirst." 

"  We  can  fully  confide  on  (2)  none 
but  the  truly  good." 

"  I  have  no  occasion  of  his  ser- 
vices." 

"  Many  have  profited  from  good 
advice." 

"  Many  ridiculous  practices  have 
been  brought  in  vogue." 

"The  error  was  occasioned  by 
compliance  to  earnest  en- 
treaty." 

**This  is  a  principle  in  unison  to 
our  nature." 

"We  should  entertain  no  preju- 
dices to  simple  and  rustic 
persons." 

*' They  are  at -present  resolved  of 
doing  tfieir  duty." 

"That  boy  is  known  under  the 
name  of  the  idler." 

"Though  conformable  with  cus- 
tom, it  is  not  warrantable." 

"This  remark  is  founded  in  truth." 

"  His  parents  think  on  him  and  his 
improvements  with  pleasure 
and  hope." 


"  His  excuse  was  admitted  of  by 
(3)  his  master." 

"  What  went  ye.out  for  to  see?" 

"There  appears  to  have  bgen  a 
million  men  brought  into  the 
field." 

"His  present  was  accepted  of  by 
his  friends." 

"More  than  a  thousand  of  men 
were  destroyed." 

"It  is  my  request  that  he  will  be 
particular  in  speaking  to  the 
following  points." 

"  The  Saxons  reduced  the  greater 
part  of  Britain  to  their  own 
power." 

"He  lives  opposite  the  royal  ex- 
change." 

"Their  house  is  situated  to  the 
northeast  side  of  the  road." 

"  The  performance  was  approved 
otby  all  who  understood  it." 

"He  was  accused  of  having  acted 
unfairly." 

"  She  has  an  abhorrence  to  all  de- 
ceitful conduct." 

^'They  were  some  distance  (4) 
from  home,  when  the  acci- 
dent happened." 

"  His  deportment  was  adapted  for 
conciliating  regard." 

"  My  father  writes  me  very  fre- 
quently." 


(l)  "  Of." 
16 


(2)  "/n." 


(3)  "  By." 


(4)  Rule  XXII. 


186 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


"  When  We  havie  had  a  true  taste 
for  the  pleasures  of  virtue, 
we  can  have  no  relish  for 
those  of  vice." 

"How  hrppy  it  is  to  know  hi3w 
to  live  at  limes  by  one's  self, 
to  leave  one's  self  in  regret, 
to  find  one's  self  again  with 
pleasure!  The  world  is  then 
less  necessary  for  us." 

'*  Civility  makes  its  way  among 
every  kind  of  persons." 


"Their   conduct  was    agreeable 

with  their  profession." 
"We  went  leisurely  above  stairs, 

and  came  hastily  below.    We 

shall  write  up  s^tairs  this  fore- 
noon, and  down  stairs  in  the 

afternoon." 
"  The  politeness  of  the  world  has 

the   same   resemblance   with 

benevolence,  that  the  shadow 

has  with  its  substance." 
"  He  had  a  taste  of  such  studies, 

and  pursued  them  earnestly." 

5.  The  preposition  to  is  made  use  of  before  nouns  of  place,  when 
they  follow  verbs  and  participles  of  motion  :  as,  "  1  went  to  London  ;" 
"I  am  going  Motown."  But  th*;  preposition  at  is  generally  used  after 
the  neuter  verb  to  be:  as,  "I  have  been  at  London  ;"  "I  was  at  the 
place  appointed;"  "[  shall  be  at  Paris."  We  likewise  say,  "He 
touched,  arrived  at  any  place."  The  preposition  ■in  is  set  before 
countries,  cities,  and  large  towns:  as,  "He  lives  in  France,  in  Lon- 
don, or  in  Birmingham."  But  before  villages,  single  houses,  and 
cities  which  are  in  distant  countries,  at  is  used:  as,  "He  lives  at 
Hackney;"  "He  resides  at  Monipelier." 

It  is.  a  matter  of  ''ndifTerence  with  respect  to  the  pronoun  one  art' 
other,  whether  the  prepositicfti  of  be  placed  betwe<?n  the  fwo  parts  of 
it,  or  before  them  both.  We  may  say,  "They  were  jealous  of  one 
another;"  or,  "They  were  jealous  one  of  another;"  but  perhaps  the 
former  is  better. 

Participles  are  frequently  used  as  prepositions:  as,  excepting,  re- 
specting, tonchivg,  concerning,  according.  "They  were  all  in  fault  ex- 
cept  or  excepting  him." 

How  is  the  preposition  to  used  with  nouns  of  place?  Give  aa 
example.  Are  participles  ever  used  as  prepositions?  Give  an  ex- 
ample. 

5.  , 

"I  have  been  to  London,  after 
having  resided  «  year  at 
France;  and  I  now  live  at 
Islington." 


"They  have  just  landed  in  Hull, 
and  are  going  for  Liverpool. 
They  intend  to  reside  some 
time  in  Ireland." 


KULE  XI. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE   XVIII. 

Conjunctions  u&iialli/  connect  verba  of  the  same'mood  and  tense,  and  nouns 
or  pronouns  of  the  same  case. 
A  few  examples  of  inaccuracy  respecting  this  rule  may  further 
display  its  utility.  "If  he  prefer  a  virtuous  life,  and  is  sincere  in  his 
proles sions,  he  will  succeed  ;■'  if  he  prefers."  "  To  deride  the  miseries 
o(  the  unhappy,  is  inhuman  ;  and  wanting  compassion  towards  them, 
is  unchristian  ;  "  "and  to  want  compassion."  "The  parliament  ad- 
dressed the  king,  and  has  been  prorogued  the  same  day;"  "and  was 
prorogued."  "His  wealth  and  him  bid  adieu  lo  each  other;"  "and 
Ae."     "He  entreated  us,  my  comrade  oud  1,  to  live  harmoniously;" 


SYNTAX. 


18t 


•'  comrade  and  me."  "  My  sister  and  her  were  on  good  terms ; "  "  and 
«^c."  *'  We  often  overlook  the  blessings  which  are  in  our  possession, 
and  are  searching  after  those  which  are  out  of  our  reach  ;"  it  ought 
to  be  "■  and  search  after." 

'His  wealth  and  him  bid  adieu  to  each  other."     Will  you  correct 
this  sentence,  and  give  the  rule  for  Conjunctions? 


"To  be  moderate  in  our^iews, 
and  proceeding  temperately 
in  the  pursuit  of  them,  is  the 
best  way  to  ensure  success." 

*'  Between  him  and  I  there  is 
some  disparity  of  years  ;  but 
none  between  him  and  she." 

"  By  forming  themselves  on  fan- 
tastic models,  and  ready  to 
vie  with  one  another  in  the 
reigning  follies,  the  young  be- 
gin with  being  ridiculous, 
and  end  with  being  vicious 
and  immoral." 


"Professing  regard,  and  toact{)) 
differently,  discover  a  base 
mind." 

"  Did  he  not  tell  me  his  fault,  and 
entreated  me  to  forgive  him  ?  " 

"My  brother  and  Jiim  are  toler- 
able grammarians." 

"If  he  understand  the  subject, 
and  attends  io  it  industrious- 
Ij'^,  he  can  scarcely  fail  of 
success." 

"  You  and  us  enjoy  many  privi- 
leges." 

"  She  and  him  are  very  unhappily 
connected." 

1.  Conjunctions  are,  indeed,  frequently  made  to  connect  diflereht 
moods  and  tenses  of  verbs ;  but  in  these  instances  the  nominative 
•must  generally,  if  not  always,  be  repeated,  which  is  not  necessary, 
though  it  may  be  done,  under  the  construction  to  which  the  rule  re- 
fers. We  may  sijy,  "  He  lives  temperately,  and  he  should  live  tem- 
perately;" "He  may  retttrn,  but  ha-unll  not  continue;'^  "She  waa 
proud,  though  she  i.v  now  humble:"  but  it  is  ol)vious  that,  in  such 
cases,  the  nominative  ought  to  be  repeated;  and  that,  by  this  means, 
the  latter  members  of  these  sentences  are  rendered  not  so  strictly 
dependent  on  the  preceding  as  those  are  which  come  under  this  rule. 
When,  in  the  progre.^'S  c>(  a  sentence,  we  pass  from  the  aiRrmative  to 
the  negative  form,  or  from  the  negative  to  the  aflirniative,  the  subject 
or  nominative  is  always  resumed:  as,  "  We  is  ricli,  but  he  is  not  re- 
spectable." There  appears  to  be,  in  general,  equal  reason  for  repeat- 
ing the  nominative,  and  resuming  the  subject,  when  the  course  of 
the  sentence  is  diverted  by  a  change  of  the  mood  or  tense.  The 
following  sentences  may,  therefore,  be  improved:  "Anger  glances 
into  the  breast  of  a  wise  man,  but  will  rest  only  in  the  bosom  of 
fools;"  "but  r('.8ts  only  ;  "  or,  "but  it  ivill  rest  only."  "Virtue  is  praised 
by  many,  and  would  be  desired  also,  if  her  worth  were  really  known :" 
"and  site  would."  "The  world  begins  to  recede,  and  will  soon  dis- 
appear; "  *'  and  it  will." 

Do  conjunctions  ever  connect  diflerent  moods  and  lenses  of  verbs  ^ 
What  case  must  generally  be  repeated  in  such  instances?  Give  aa 
example. 


1. 


"We  have  met  with  many  disajv 
pointments;  and.  if  life  con- 
tinue, shall  (2)  probably  meet 
with  manj'^  more." 


Rank  may  confer  inlluetice,  but 
will  (3)  not  necessarily  pro- 
duce virtue." 


(1)  "  Acting,"  or  "  To  profess  reffard,  and  to  act,"  etc. 
will." 


(2)«m  shaU?'    (3)'«i< 


188 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


"  He  does  not  want  courage,  but  "  He  might  have  been  happy,  and 

is  defective  in  sensibility."  is  now  (1)  fully  convinced  of 

"These  people    have  indeed  ac-  it." 

quired  great   riches,  but  do  "  Learning  strengthens  the  mind, 

not  command  esteem."  and,  if  properly  applied,  will 

"Our   seasons    of   improvement  improve  our  morals  too." 
ar^short,  and,  whether  used  ♦ 
or  not,  will  soon  pass  away." 

KULE  XXVIII. 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULE    XIX. 

Some  coyijtmctions  require  tJie  indicative,  some  the  Buhjunctive,  mood  after 
them.  It  is  a  general  rule  thaty  when,  something  contingent  or  doubtful 
is  implied,  the  subjunctive  ought  to  be  used  :  as,  "  If  I  toere  to  write  he 
would  not  regard  it;"  "  He  will  not  be  pardoned  unless  he  rcpeitt." 

Conjunctions  that  are  of  a  positive  and  absolute  nature  require  the  indica- 
tive mood :  "As  \ivl\ie  advances,  so  \icii  recedes  f  "He  is  healthy, 
Jccau«e  he  78  temperate." 

The  conjunctions  if,  though,  unless,  except,  whether,  etc.,  generally 
require  the  subjunctive  mood  after  them  :  as,  "7/"  thou  be  afflicted, 
repine  not ;"  "  Though  he  slai/  me,  yet  will  I  trust  in  him ;"  "  He 
can  not  be  clean,  unless  he  wash  himself;"  "  No  power  except  it  icere 
given  from  above;"  ^^ Whether  it  7cere  I  or  they,  so  we  preach."  But* 
even  these  conjunctions,  when  the  sentence  does  not  imply  doubt, 
admit  of  the  indicative  :  as,  "Thoughhe  is  poor,  he  is  contented." 

The  following  example  may,  in  some  measure,  serve  to  illustrate 
the  distinction  between  the  subjunctive  and  tlie  indicative  moods  : 
"  Though  he  were  divinely  inspired,  and  spoke,  therefore,  as  the  oracles 
of  God,  with  supreme  authority  ;  though  he  icere  endued  with  super- 
natural powers,  and  could,  therefore,  have  confirmed  the  truth  of 
what  he  uttered,  by  miracles — yet,  in  compliance  With  the  way  in 
which  human  nature  and  reasonable  creatures  are  usually  wrought 
upon,  he  reasoned,"  That  our  Saviour  was  divinely  inspired,  and 
endued  with  supernatural  powers,  are  positions  that  are  here  taken 
for  granted,  as  not  admitting  the  least  doubt ;  they  would,  therefore, 
have  been  better  expressed  in  the  indicative  mood:  "Though  he  luas 
divinely  inspired;  though  he  uas  endued  with  supernatural  powers." 
The  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  like  improper  manner  in  the  follow- 
ing example  :  "  Though  he  were  a  son,  yet  learned  he  obedience  by 
the  things  which  he  suflered."  But,  in  a  similar  passage,  the  indica- 
tive, with  great  pro))riety,  is  employed  to  the  same  purpose:  '^I'hough 
he  was  rich,  yet  for  our  sakes  he  became  poor." 

What  conj.unctions  generally  require  the  subjunctive  mood  after 
them? 

'*  If  he  acquires  (2)   riches,   they  "  I  shall  walk  in  the  fields  to-day, 
will  corrupt  his  mind,  and  be  unless  it  rains."  ^ 

useless  to  others."  "  As  the  governess  were  (3)  pres- 

*' Though   he  urges  me  yet   more  ent,    the    children     behaved 

earnestly,  1  shall  not  comply,  properly." 

unless  he  advances  more  for- 
cible reasons." 


{\) '' And  now  he  is."  (2)464.  (.3)465. 


SYNTAX. 


189 


"She  disapproved  the  measure, 
because  it  were  very  improp- 
er." ' 

"Though  he  be  high,  he  hath  re- 
spect to  the  lowly." 

*'  Though  he  were  her  friend,  he 
did  not  attempt  to  justify  her 
conduct." 

*' Whether  he  improve  or  not  I 
can  not  determine."  ' 


Though  the  fact  be  extraordina- 

"■yj  't  certainly  did  happen." 
Kemember  what  thou  wert,  and 
be  (1)  humble." 
"O   that   his   heart  was   tender, 
and  susceptible  of  the  woes 
of  others." 
"  Shall   then  this  verse  to  future 

age  pretend, 
Thou  wert  my -uide,  philosopher, 
and  IrieMd.^"' 

requifr,h:"nbjt:,^.t;^'!SV".s  To"""'"   "'r^'-'^'   "—^"ily 

•'//he  6.  bu,  .liscree(,ho  wm  'uccLed  '•     ill'f'  '^"?'  '''""  "''"''^'" 
be  used,  on  this  occasion   «,h„,?  a,?        .■        '  "'=  ""JicMive  ought  to 

she  .vC^  ^0°  'A'„''h' *"' ^''^'Th^s"'"'"^?-^''""'''  ''«  ""'»'"  ■  '  "^> 
following  ,brn,s  of  expressS:  "  If  he T'utui'rv  ""  n"'.'''''?''  '"  ""= 

r:'irCw:s'Thifiei£"hi"t^iS^4'"™ 

hea,..iiy  fo.,...  ^;„,::xvo:  ro'^'^et'iroSl^-" " " "'°-  ■'-' 


"Despise  not  any  condition,  lest 

it  happens  to  be  your  own." 
"Let   him   that  is  sanguine  take 

heed  lest  he  miscarries." 
"Take  care  that   thou   breakest 

not  any   of   the    established 

rules." 
"If  he  does   but  (2)  intimate  his 

desire,  it  will  be  sufficient  to 

produce  obedience." 
"At   the  time  of  his  return,  if  he 

is  but  expert  in  the  business, 

he  will  find  employment." 
"If  he  do   but  speak  to  display 


1. 


his  abilities,  he  is  unworthy 
of  attention." 

"  If  he  be  but  in  health,  I  am  con- 
tent." 

"  If  he  does  promise,  he  will  cer- 
tainly perform." 

"Though  he  do  praise  her,  it  is 
only  for  her  beauty." 

"  If  thou  dost  not  forgive,  per- 
haps thou  wilt  not  be  forgiv- 
en." 

"If  thou  do  sincerely  believe  the 
truths  of  religion,  act  accord- 
ingly." 


wii  "•  leu,  anu  inink  [(hat]  he  were  not  wrong." 

Wdl  you  repeat  this  note,  and  give  an  example  under  it  ? 


(1)  Tmpera, 


(2)  654. 


190  ENOLI8H    ORAMMAR 

2. 
"His  confused   behavior  made  it     "  Hi"  apolojry  was    so  plausible 

reasonable  to  suppose  that  be  lliat    many    bclriendcd    him, 

frtTf  guilty."  and    ihonght   lie   were    inno- 

"  He  is  so  conscious  of  deserving  cent." 

the  rebuke,   that  he  dare  not 

make  any  reply." 

3.  The  saiuo  conjunction  governing-  both  the  indicative  and  the 
subjunctive  moods,  in  the  same  sentcnc«»  and  in  the  same  circum- 
stances, seems  to  be  a  great  impropriety — as  in  these  inslanres:  "Jf 
there  he  but  one  body  of  Icgisliilors,  it  is  no  better  than  a  lyranny;  if 
there  are  only  two,  there  will  want  a  casting  voice."  "//"  a  man  hat* 
A  hundred  ^hcep,  mid  one  of  llicui  i«  gone  astray,"  etc. 

May  the  same  conjunction  have  both  the  stibjunctive  and  indica- 
tive moods  after  it  in  the  same  sentence  ?  Give  an  e:tainple  of  this 
impropriety. 

.S. 

"  If  one  man  j.n-cjcr  a  life  of  in-  unless  he  aim  ;il  reputation, 
dustry.  it  is  because  he  has  or  hopes  for  some  singular 
an  idea  of  comfort  in  wealth;  advantage." 
if  another  prefers  a  life  of  "  Though  the  design  be  laudable, 
gayety,  it  is  fron)  a  like  idea  and  is  favorable  to  our  in- 
concerning  j)leasure."  terest,  it  will   involve   much 

"No  one  engages  in  that  l/Usiiiess  anxiety  and  labor." 

4.  Almost  all  the  irregularities  in  the  construction  of  any  language 
have  arisen  from  the  ellipsis  of  some  words  which  were  originally  in- 
serted in  the  sentence,  and  made  it  regular;  and  it  is  probable  that 
this  has  generally  been  the  case  with  respect  to  the  conjunctive  form 
of  words  now  in  use.  which  will  appear  iVom  the  following  examples: 
*•  We  shall  overtake  him.  though  he  j-hh/"  that  is,  "  ihou'ih  lie  thuxild 
run."  •"  Unless  he  act  prudently,  he  will  not  accomplish  his  purpose ;" 
that  is,  "  unless  he  shall  act  prudently."  "  If  he  HKccred,  and  obtain 
his  end,  he  will  not  be  the  happier  fir  it;"  that  is,  "if  he  nhould  suc- 
ceed, and  should  obtain  his  end."  These  remarks  and  examples  are 
designed  to  show  the  original  of  many  of  our  present  conjunctive 
Ibrms  of  expression,  and  to  enable  the  student  to  examine  the  pro- 
priety of  usigg  them,  by  tracing  the  words  in  que^lion  to  their  i)ro|)er 
origin  and  ancient  connecticms.  But  it  is  necessary  to  be  more  par- 
ticular on  this  subject,  and  therefore  we  shall  add  a  few  observations 
respecting  it. 

That  p.irt  of  the  verb  which  grammarians  call  the  present  tense  of 
the  subjunctive  mood  has  a  future  signiiication.  This  is  efl'ecled  by 
varying  the  ti'rminations  of  the  second  and  third  |ier.>ons  sinj^ular  of 
the  indicative,  as  will  be  evident  from  the  following  exaini)les :  "If 
ihou  proHjjer,  thou  sbouUlst  be  tliiuikful  ;"  ''I'niess  he  stiidt/  more 
closely,  he  will  never  he  learned."  ."^ome  writers,  however,  would 
express  these  sentiments  without  those  variations:  "  If  thou  ^j/os^jfir- 
c.v^,"  etc. ;  '' Unless  he  .v/i(f^»t«,'' etc.  ;  and,  as  there  is  great  diversity 
of  ))raclice  on  this  point,  it  is  proper  to  offer  the  learners  a  few  re- 
marks to  assist  them  in  distinguishing  the  right  application  of  these 
different  fbrnis  of  expression.  It  may  be  considered,  as  a  rule,  that  the 
changes  of  termination  are  necessary  wlieii  lliese  two  circumstances 
concur:  Isi,  When  the  subject  is  ol  a  dubious  and  contingent  nature  j 


SYNTAX.  191 

and,  2d,  When  the  verb  has  a  reference  to  future  time.     In  the  follow- 
ng  sentences  both  these  circumstances  will  be  found  to  unite     -Tf 
thou  y,;„rc  another,  thou  M-ili  hurt  thyself"     "•  He  has  a  hard  heart 
and  It  he  ronhmie  impenitent,  he  must  suffer."     "IIe^vil!  maintain 
h.s  principles   iho.igh   he  lose  his  estate."     -  Wlunhcr  1  e  s /STr 

rr,in'e'''":f;;''r"  iV'^":"^"''     '''''  ^^  '^r  •--P^-u'"he'wmVo 
repine  i(  .,  man  smUe  his  servaiH,  and  he  die"  etc.— PJxod  xxi  20 

In  all  these  examples  the  things  si^nihed  by  the  verbs  are  micer  ah, 
and  re/er  to  future  time.     But  in  the  instaijces  which  follow   fut'e 

r"cV-^"?f,irou^r'  T'T'  'T'r  ^  'V^^'^^"^  -n'trucZ/uke: 
puue  .      it  thou  livest  virtuously,  thou  art  hapjjy."     "  Unless  he  mean^ 

virtue,  he  does  not  regard  her  precepts."     "Though   he  seen,  to  be 
simple  and  artless,  he  hos  dece.Ved  us."     "  Wheihe    v  m  e   "  I  etter 

Lenten  es     no  In. ^T\  '^'^y*^'^''    «^ti  "Acts  viii,  37.     There  are  many 

^a^V  r^^ei  of-t^''"'""'''''r%"V^°"^'"^*^"'^>'  '^"'^  fnturity^are  ncc^s- 
,w'j  •^''''  ,P''"P'''^"ty  of  altering  the  lermiiiations,  will  be  evi- 

dent by  inspeeiing  the  following  examples,  which  show  tl^t  there  are 
us  anees  ,n  which  neither  of  thecircumstances  alone  mpestt^the, 
r  V  -'I'Tnrrf '  'f  ""'"^7  contingency  is  denote'd,  but  no  fu" 
uirity  .  it  he  thuks  as  he  speaks,  he  may  safely  be  trusted  •"  "  If  he 
t.  now  disposed  to  it.  I  will  perform  li.e  operation  •''- He  acts  un 
rv^htly,  unless  ho  decaves  me.''     In  the  following    ent'encefutni^lvT; 

S-'  'as  r  ^'^"^'■"^""T  "^^^  •?""   ■''  '^^  su.r,^:,,  U  w    ?^be 
gra  e."'  '""^*"  "^''«''^^'''  these  birds  will  gradually  emi- 

It  appear-s,  from  the  tenor  of  ihe  examples  adduced,  that  the  rules 
above  mentioned  may  be  extended  to  assert  that,  in  ca'e.  whereTn 
contingency  and  futurity  do  not  concur,  it  is  not  proper  to  tu  if  tie 
verb  from  its  signification  of  present  time,  or  to  vJry  ts  fo  n  or  ter 
mination.  The  verb  would  then  be  in  the  indicative  mood  whatever 
conjunctions  might  attend  it,  If  these  rules,  which  seLTto  f  rm  the 
rue  distinction  between  the  subjunctive  and  the  indicave  moods  n 
this  tense,  were  adopted  and  established  in  practice,  we  should  have 
on  his  point,  a  principle  of  decision  .imple'and  pr^ci.^  and  eabfj 
applicable  to  every  case  that  might  occu'r.  h  wi  I.  doni  tiJ.s  some- 
1  mes  happen  that,  on  this  oc-asion.  as  well  as  on  many  other  occa- 
sions, a  .strict  adherence  to  grMmmal.cal  rules  would  render  the  hn. 

4o  give  the  expression  a  different  turn,  than  violate  grammar  for  the 
sake  o(  ease,  or  even  of  elegance.  <iiMm.ir  lor  me 

Has  the  present  tense  oi"  the  snbjnnclive  mood  a  fnlure  -^ienifiea- 
t.on?  How  IS  this  effected^  What  two  circumstances  .shouTd  eon- 
cur  to  render  necessHry  this  change  of  termination' 

Should  the  termination  be  changed  when  futurity  and  contingency 
do  not  coijcur  /     What  mood  or  form  will  the  verb  then  be  ^^  ?  ^"^"^^^ 

•1. 

"  ^'' no'L^h/kr"'  ^'''*"''  ^"  '""  ^^"     "  '^'^""^^  ''^  /"''"•  ^^  •''>«"  "ot  be 

utterly  vast  down  " 


102 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


there  all  is  order,  beauty,  and 
pleasure." 

"If  Charlotte  desire  to  gain  es- 
teem and  love,  she  does  not 
employ  the  proper  means." 

"Unless  the  accountant  deceive 
me,  my  estate  is  considerably 
improved." 

"  Though  self-government  pro- 
duce some  uneasiness,  it  is 
light  when  compared  with  the 
pain  of  vicious  indulgence." 

"  Whether  he  tliink  as  he  speaks, 
lime  will  discover." 

"If  thou  censure  uncharitably, 
thou  deserv«;st  no  favor." 

"Though  virtue  appenr  severe, 
she  is  truly  amiable." 

"  Though  success  be  very  doubt- 
ful, it  is  proper  that  he  en- 
deavors to  succeed." 


"On.  condition   that   he   cornea,   I 

will  consent  to  stay." 
"However  that  affair  terminates, 
(1)  my  conduct  will  be  unim- 
peachable." 
"  If  virtue  rewards  us  not  .so  soon 
as   we  desire,   the   payment 
will  be  made  with  interest." 
"Till    repentance   composes   his 
mind,  he  will  be  a  stranger  to 
peace." 
"  Whether   he  confesses  or    not, 
the  truth  will  certainly  be  dis- 
covered." 
"  If  thou  censurest  uncharitably, 
thou  wilt  be  entitled  to  no  fa- 
vor." 
"  Though,  at  times,  the  ascent  to 
the  temple  of  virtue  appears 
steep  and  craggy,  be  not  dis- 
couraged.    Persevere     until 
thou     gainest     the    sommit:  » 

f).  On  the  form  of  the  auxiliaries  in  the  compound  tenses  of  the  sub- 
junctive mood  it  seems  proper  to  make  a  few  observations.  Some 
writers  express  themselves  in  the  perfect  tense  as  follows:  "  If  thou 
fuive  determined,  we  must  submit;"  Unless  he  have  consented,  the 
writings  will  be  void."  But  we  believe  that  few  authors  of  critical 
sagacity  write  in  this  manner.  The  proper  form  seems  to  be,  "  If  thou 
hast  determined."  "Unless  he  has  consented,"  etc.,  conformably  to 
what  we  generally  meet  witti  in  the  Bible:  "I  have  surnamed  thee, 
though  thou  hast  not  known  me." — Isaiah  xlv,  4,  5.  "■  What  is  the 
hope  of  the  hypocrite,  though  he  Aa<A  gained,"  etc. — Job  xxvii,  8.  See, 
also,  Acts  xxviii,  4. 

"  If  thou  have  determined,  we  must  submit."  How  should  this 
sentence  be  altered? 

5. 

"Ifthou  ^aue  promised,  be  faithful  to  submission,  he  is  too  gen- 

to  thy  engagement."  erous  to  exact  it." 

"Though  he  have  proved  his  right     "  Unless  he  have  improved,  he  is 

unfit  for  the  odice." 

G.  In  the  pluperfect  and  future  lenses  we  sometimes  meet  with 
such  expressions  as  these:  "If  thou  had  applied  thyself  diligently, 
thou  wouldsi  have  reaped  the  advantage  ;  "  "  Unless  thou  shall  speak 
the  whole  truth,  we  can  not  determine;  "  "  If  thou  isfll  undertake  the  , 
business,  therii  is  little  doiiln  of  success."  This  mode  of  expressing 
the  auxiliaries  does  not  appear  to  be  warraijted  by  the  general  prac- 
tice of  correct  writers.  They  should  be  hadst,  shult,  and  wilt;  and 
we  find  them  used  in  this  form  in  the  Sacred  Scriptures:  "If  thou 
hadnt  known,  etc. — Lukexix,  47.  "  if  thou  Jiadst  been  here,"  etc. — 
John  xi,  21.  "  If  thou  io//r,  thou  canst  make  me  clean."^ — Mall»  viii, 
2.     See,  also,  2  Sam.  ii,  27;  Matt,  xvii,  4.  * 

"If  thou  wilt  undertake  the  business,  tiiere  is  little  doubt  of  suc- 


(1)  "Or,  may  terminatfiy 


SYNTAX.  193 

cess."     Ts  this  mode  of  expression  warranted  by  good   authority? 
How  should  it  be  altered  ? 

6. 

*' If  thou  Aarf  succeeded,  perhaps  priety   of   the    measure,   we 

thou  wouldst  not  be  the  hap-  shall  not  desire  thy  support." 

pier  for  it."  y  «  Thoua^h  thou  will  not  acknowl- 

"  Unless  thou  shall   see  the  pro-  edge,  thou  canst  not  deny  the 

fact." 

» 

7.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  imperfect  tense,  in  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  is  also  very  frequently  varied  in  its  termination:  as, 
"If  tliou  loved  him  truly,  thou  wouldst  obey  him;"  "Though  thou 
did  conform,  thou  hast  gained  nothing  by  it."  This  variation,  how- 
ever, appears  to  be  improper.  Our  present  version  of  the  Scriptures, 
which  we  again  refer  to  as  a  good  grammatical  authority  in  points  of 
this  nature,  decides  against  it:  "If  thou  knewest  the  sfift,"  etc. — John 
iv,  10.  "If  thou  didst  receive  it,  why  dost  thou  glory?"  etc. — 1  Cor. 
iv,  7.  See,  also,  Dan.  v,  22.  But  it  is  proper  to  remaric  that  the 
form  of  the  verb  to  be,  when  used  subjunctively  in  the  imperfect 
tense,  is  indeed  very  considerably  and  properly  varied  from  that 
which  ii  has  in  the  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mood,  as  the  learner 
will  perceive  by  turning  to  the  conjugation  of  that  verb. 

Is  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperfect  ever  varied  in  its 
termination  in  the  subjunctive  mood  ?  Will  you  give  an  example  ?  Is 
this  variation  proper  ? 

1. 

"  If  thou  gave  liberally,  thou  wilt  lent,  this  conduct  would  de- 
receive  a  liberal  reward."  base  him." 

"Though  thou  did  injure  him,  he  "  Was  I  to  enumerate  all  her  vir- 

harbors  no  resentment."  tues,  it  would  look  lilce  flat- 

"It  would  be  well,  if  the   report  tery." 

was  only  the  misrepresenla-  "  Though  I  was  perfect,  yet  would 

tion  of  her  enemies."  I  not  presume." 

"  Was  he  ever  so  great  and  opu- 

8.  It  may  not  be  superfluous  also  to  observe  that  the  auxiliaries  of 
the  potential  mood,  when  applied  to  the  subjunctive,  do  not  change 
the  termination  of  the  second  person  singular.  We  properly  say, 
"If  thou  rrtayst  of  canst  go;"  "Though  thou  migktHt  live;"  "Unless 
thou  couldst  read;"  "If  thou  looiddst  learn;" — and  not,  "If  thou 
mmy  or  can  go,"  etc.  It  is  sufficient,  on  this  point,  to  adduce  the  au- 
thorities of  Johnson  and  Lowth:  "If  thon  ekon/dst  go." — Johmon.  "  If 
thou  mayst,  mightut,  or  corddst  love." — LoTath.  Some  authors  think 
that,  when  that  expresses  the  motive  or  end,  the  termination  of  these 
auxiliaries  should  be  varied:  as,  "I  advise  thee,  that  thou  way  be- 
ware ;  "  "  He  checked  thee,  that  thou  shoitld  not  presume  ;  "  but  there 
does  not  appear  to  be  any  ground  for  this  exception.  Lt'  the  expres- 
sion of  "condition,  doubt,  contingency,"  etc.,  does  not  warrant  a 
change  in  the  form  of  these  auxiliaries,  why  should  they  have  it,  when 
a  motive  or  end  is  expressed  ?  Tl)e  translators  of  the  Scriptures  do 
not  appear  to  have  made  the  distinction  contended  for.  "Thou 
buildest  the  will,  that  thou  mayxt  bi<  their  king." — Neh.  vi,  6.  "  There 
is  forgiveness  with  thee,  that  thou  nuc^'ft  be  feared." — Ps.  cxxx,  4. 

From  the  preceding  observations  under  this  rule  it  appears  that, 
wTih  fespect  ^  \v>rtt  m  ternrt^d  th'e  ]^6s«nt  t^ntfe  tff  any  Verh,  Vh«3n 
17 


194  ENOLISll    GKAMMAR. 

Ihe  circumstances  of  contingency  and  futurity  concur,  it  is  proper  lo 
vary  the  terminations  of  the  >econtl  and  tliird  jier.sons  ^intrular;  that 
without  the  concnrriMice  of  those  cirrnru.-taiices.  the  Itrniination 
should  not  be  altered;  and  that  the  verb  and  tlie  auxiliaries  of  the 
three  pa>t  tenses,  and  the  auxiharies  of  the  llrst  future,  undergo  no 
alterations  wliatever,  except  the  xinq)erfect  of  the  verb  to  le,  which, 
in  cases  denoting  contingency,  is  varied  in  all  the  persons  of  the 
singular  number. 

After  perusing  what  has  been  advanced  on  this  subject,  it  will  be 
•  natural  for  the  student  to  inquire  wliat.  is  the  extent  of  the  subjunc- 
tive mood?  Some  grammarians  think  it  extends  only  to  what  is 
called. the  present  tense  of  verbs  generally,  iincler  the  circiimslances 
of  contingency  and  futurity,  and  to  the  imperlect  tense  of  the  verb 
to  he,  when  it  denotes  contingency,  etc.,  becnuse  in  these  tenses  only 
the  form  of  the  verb  admits  of  variation  ;  and  they  suppose  that  it  is 
variation  merely  wliich  constitutes  the  di>tinclioa  of  moods.  It  is 
the  opinion  of  other  grammarians  (in  which  opinion  we  concur) 
that,  besides  the  two  cases  just  mentioned,  all  v«^rlis  in  the  three  past 
and  the  two  future  tenses  are  in  tbe  subjunctive  mood,  when  they 
denote  contingency  or  uncertainty,  though  they  have  not  any  change 
of  terminalion  ;  and  that,M'hen  contingency  is  not  sfgnilit'd.  the  verb, 
through  all  these  five  tenses,  belong-;  lo  the  indicative  mood,  what- 
ever conjunction  may  attend  it.  They  lliink  that  the  definition  and 
nature  of  the  subjunctive  mood  have  no  reference  to  change  of'ter- 
mination,  but  thai  they  refer  merely  to  the  manner  of  the  being,  ac- 
tion, or  passion  signified  by  the  verb;  and  that  the  subjunctive  Uiood 
may  as  properly  exist  without  a  variation  ol'  the  verb  as  the  infinitive, 
mood,  which  has  no  terminations  different  from  those  of  the  indica- 
tive. The  decision  of  this  point  may  not,  by  some  grammarians,  be 
thought  of  much  consequence.  But  the  rules  which  aseertain  the 
propriety  of  varying  or  not  varying  the  terminations  of  the  verb,  will 
certainly  be  deemed  imj)orlant.  These  rules  may  be  well  oliserved, 
without  a  uniformily  of  sentiment  respecting  the  nature  anil  limits  of 
-the  subjunctive  mood.* 

Do  the  auxiliaries  of  the  potential  mood,  when  applied  to  the  sub- 
junctive, change  the  termination  of  the  second  person  singular? 
When  is  it  proper  to  vary  the  terminations  of  the  second  and  tfiird 
persons  singular  of  the  present  tense?  Do  the  verb  and  auxiliaries 
of  the  past  lenses,  and  the  auxiliaries  of  the  (irst  future,  undergo 
any  alteration?     What  exception?     What   is  the  opinion  of  some 

"Wo  have  stated,  for  the  student's  Hifoiniation,  the  difTeient  opiiiionK  of  gram- 
marians rcspecliiig  the  English  siibjinutivc  mood:  First,  that  whicli  bnpposes 
there  is  no  such  mood  in  our  language  ;  Secondly,  that  which  extends  it  nofnrthcr 
than  the  variations  of  the  verb  extend;  Tlnrdly,  that  which  weh.ave  adopted  and 
explained  itt  large,  and  wliieh,  in  gi^neral.  cc  iiespondH  with  tlie' view.sof  the  most 
approved  writers  on  Engli.sh  grimuiiar.  We  may  add  n  fourth  opinion,  which  ap- 
pears to  posseHB.  at  ler.st,  much  phiusibiJity,  This  opinion  admits  the  arrange- 
ment we  have  given,  with  one  variation,  nuntelv,  that  of  assigning  to  the, first 
tense  of  the  sulijnncfive  two  forms — 1st,  tliat  which  sinqjly  denotes  contingency, 
is,  "If  he  desires  it,  1  will  perform  the  operation" — (hat  is,  if  he  now  desires  it; 
2<l]y,  that  whish  denotes  t)0th  contingency  and  futurity,  as.  "If  he  desire  it,  I  will 
perform  the  ojjeration" — that  is,  "  Jf  lie  .«liouhl  hereafter  desire  it.'  This  last  the- 
ory of  the  subjunctive  mood  claims  (he  merit  of  rendering  the  whole  system  of 
the  moods  consistent  and  regular — of  being  more  couforniable  tlian  any  otlier  to 
the  definition  of  tlie  subjunctive,  and  of  not  referring  to  the  iiulicative  mood  forms 
of  fexpressiou  wliich  ill  accord  with  its  simplicity  and  nature,  l^-rhaps  this  the- 
ory will  bear  a  strict  cxiiminatiou." 


SVJNTAX.  195 

granunarians  in  regard  to  the  extent  of  the  subjunctive  mood?  What 
is  the  opinion  of  other  grammarians  ?  In  which  of  these  opinions 
does  the  author  concur? 

8. 

*'If  thou  may  share  in  his  labors,  "Unless  thou  can  fairly  support 

be  thankful,  and  do  it  cheer-  the  cause,  give  it  up  honor- 

fullv."  ablv." 

"Though   thou  might   have  fore-  "Unless    thou     should     make    a 

seen  the  danger,  thou  couldst  timely    retreat,     the    danger 

not  have  avoided  it."  wlU   be  unavoidable." 

"If  thou  could    convince  him,  he  "I  have  labored  and  wearied  my- 

M'ould  not  act  accordingly."  self   that    thou    may    be    at 

'*  If  thou  would  improve  in  knowl-  ease." . 

edge,  be  diligent."  "He   enlarged  on   those  dangers, 

•  that  thou  should  avoid  them." 

9.  Soine  conjunctions  have  correspondent  conjunctions  belonging 
to  them,  either  expressed  or  understood  :  as — 

1st.  T/iough — yet,  nevertheless  :  as,  "  Though  he  was  rich,  yet  for  our 
sakes  he  became  poor  ;"   Though  powerful,  he  was  meek." 

2d.    Whether — or  :   as,  "  Whether  he  will  go  or  not,  I  can  not  tell." 

*id.     Either — or  :   as,  "  I  will  either  f>e\\d  it,  or  bring  it  myself." 

4th.  Neither — nor  :  '*  Neither  he  nor  I  am  able  to  compass  it." 

5th.  As — as:  expressing  a  cgmparison  of  equality:  as,  "She  is 
an  amiable  as  her  sister,  and  as  much   respected." 

Olli.  As — so  :  expressiHga  com[)arison  of  equality:  as,  'Ms  the  stars, 
eo  shall  thy  seed  be." 

•7th.  As- — so:  expressing  a  comparison  of  equality:  '^  As  the  one 
dieth,  80  dieth  the  other  ;"  '■'As  he  reads,  so  they  read." 

8th.  So — a-^  :  with  a  verb  expressing  a  comiarison  of  quality:  as, 
"  To  see  thy  glory,  so  as  I  have  seen  thee  in  the  sanctuary." 

9th.  So — as  :  with  a  negative  and  an  adjective  expressing  a  compari- 
son of  quantity:  as,  "  Ponipey  was  not  so  great  a  general  as  Cassar, 
nor  so  great  a  man." 

10th.  So — that:    expressing  a   consequence:  as,  "He    was  sofa-, 
tigued  that  he  could  scarcely  move." 

Xhe  conjunctions  or  and  nor  may  often  be  used  with  nearly  equal 
propriety.  "The  king,  whose  character  was  not  sufPicieutly  vigor- 
ous nor  decisive,  assented  to  the  measure."  In  this  sentence,  or 
would,  perhaps,  have  been  better  ;  but,  in  general,  vor  seems  to  repeat 
the  negation  in  the  former  part  of  the  sentence,  and  therefore  gives 
more  emphasis  to  the  expression.  * 

Are  there  any  conjunctions  which  have  correspondent  conjunc- 
tions belonging  to  them?     Giv»»  examples. 

9. 

"  Neillier   the  cold   or  the  fervid,  "  He  is  not  as  diligent  and  learn- 
but      characters       uniformly  ed  as  his  brother." 
warm,  are  formed  for  friend-  "I  will  present  it  to  him  myself,  or 
ship."  direct  it  to  be  given  to  him." 

"They    are    both     praiseworthy,  "Neither     despise     or      oppose 

and  one  is  cf/v/cr//// (1)  deserv-  what    thou  dost     not    under- 

insc^sis  the  other."  stand." 


(1)  For  *'  equality,''  read  "  a«.'' 


196 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


"The  house  is  not  as  commodi- 
ous as  we  expected  it  would 
be." 

"I  must,  however,  be  so  candid 
to  own  I  have  been  mistak- 
en." 

"  There  was  something  so  amiable 
and  yet  so  piercing  in  his 
look,  as  (1)  aflected  me  at 
once  with  love  and  terror." 

"  I  gained  a  son  ; 

And  such  a  son  as  all  men  hailed 
me  happy." 

*' The  dog  in  the  manger  would 
not  eat  the  hay  himself,  nor 
suffer  the  ox  to  eat  it." 

"  As  far  as  I  am  able  to  judge, 
the  book  is  well  written," 


"We  should  faithfully  .perform 
the  trust  committed  to  us,  or 
uigenunusiy  relinquish  the 
charge." 

"He  is  not  as  emineut,  and  as 
much  esteemed,  as  he  thinks 
himself  to  be." 

"  The  work  is  a  dull  performance, 
and  is  neither  capable  of 
pleasing  ("2)  the  understand- 
ing or  the  imagination." 

"There  is  no  condition  so  secure 
as  can  not  admit  of  change." 

"This  is  an  event  which  nobody 
presumes  upon,  or  is  so  san- 
guine to  hope  for." 

"  We  are  generally  pleased  with 
any  little  accomplishments  of 
body  or  mind." 

10.  Conjuiu'tions  are  often  improperly  used,  both  singly  and  in 
pairs.  The  following  are  examples  of  th's  impropriety:  "  The  rela- 
tions are  so  uncertain,  as  that  they  require  a  great  deal  of  examina- 
tion ;"  it  should  be,  "  that  they  require,"  etc.  "  There  was  no  man 
so  sanguine,  who  did  not  apprehend  some  ill  consequences ;"  it  ought 
to  be,  '*  so  sanguine  as  not  to  apprehend,"  etc. ;  or,  "  no  man.  how 
sanguine  soever,  who  did  .not,"  etc.  "To  trust  in  him  is  no  more 
but  to  acknowledge  his  power."  "This  is  no  other  but  the  gate  of 
paradise."  In  both  of  these  instances  hxU  should  be  than.  "  We 
should  suflicieiuly  weigh  the  object^  of  our  hope — whether  they  are 
such  as  we  may  reasonably  expect  from  them  what  they  jiropose," 
etc. ;  it  ought  to  be,  *'  that  we  may  reasonably,"  etc.  "  The  duke  had 
not  behaved  with  that  loyalty  as  he  ought  to  have  done;"  "  with  which 
he  ought."  "  lu  the  order  as  they  lie  iu  his  preface;"- it  should  be, 
"in  order  as  they  lie;"  or,  "in  the  order  in  xohich  they  lie."  "Such 
sharp' .replies  that  cost  him  his  life;"  "■  as  coat^'' eXc.  "If  he  were 
truly  that  scarecrow,  as  he  is  now  commonly  painted  ;"  "  such  a  scare- 
crow," etc.  "  I  wish  I  could  do  that  justice  to  his  memory,  to  oblige 
the  painters,"  etc.;  "do  «mcA  justice  as  to  oblige,"  etc. 

Will  you  repeat  this  note,  and  give  an  example  under  it  ?  What  is 
said  of  sentences  beginning  with  the  conjunctive  form  of  the  verb  ? 
Give  an  ^xample.  When  has  a«  the  force  of  a  relative  pronoun?  (3) 
Give  an  example. 


There  is  a  peculiar  neatness  in  a  sentence  beginning  with  the  con- 
junctive form  of  a  verb.  "  Were  there  no  difference,  there  would  be 
no  choice." 

A  double  con]unctive,  in  two  correspondent  clauses  of  a  sentence?, 
is  sometimes  made  use  of:  as,  "  Had  he  done  this,  he  hud  esf^aped  '" 
'■'Had  the  limitations  on  the  prerogative  been,  in  his  time,  quite  fixed 
and  certain,  his  integrity  hail  made  him  regard  as  sacred  the  bounda- 
ries of  the  constitution."     The  sentence  in  the  common  form  would 


(1)  "  Jlxat  it."    (2)  "NeitJui'  t?ie."    (8)  650. 


BYHTAJL. 


197 


have  read  thus:  "If  the  limitations  on  the  prerogative  had  been," 
etc.,  "his  integrity  would  haye  made  him  regard,"  etc. 

The  particle  as,  when  it  is  connected  with  the  pronoun  such,  has 
the  force  of  a  relative  pronoun:  as,  "Let  such  as  pre.^'Ume  to  advise 
others,  look  well  to  their  own  conduct  ;"  which  is  equivalent  to,  "Let 
them  who  presume,"  etc.  But  when  used  by  itself,  liiis  particle  is  to 
be  considered  as  a  conjunction,  or  perhaps  as  an  adverb. 

Our  language  wants  a  conjunction  adapted  to  a  familiar  style,  equiv- 
alent to  notwUhstanding.  The  words  fvr  all  that  seem  to  be  too  low. 
"  The  word  was  in  the  mouth  of  every  one,  but,  for  all  that,  the  sub- 
ject may  still  be  a  secret." 

In  regard  that  is  solemn  and  antiquated  ;  because  would  do  much 
belter  in  the  following  sentence  :  "  It  can  not  be  otherwise,  in  regard 
that  the  French  prosody  differs  from  that  of  every  other  language," 

The  word  except  is  (ar  preferable  to  other  than.  "  It  admitted  of  no 
eflectual  cure  other  than  amputation."  Except  is  also  to  be  preferred 
to  all  but;  "  They  were  happy,  all  but  the  stranger."  In  the.  two  fol- 
lowing phrases  thCtConjunction  as  is  improperly  omitted  :  "  Which  no- 
body presumes  or  is  so  sanguine  to  hope."  "I  must,  however,  be 
80  just    ,    to  own."  ■'^ 

The  conjunction  that  is  often  properly  omitted,  and  understood  : 
as,  "  I  beg  you  would  come  to  me  ;"  "  See  thou  do  it  not ;"  instead 
of  "  that  you  would,"  "that  thou  do. "^  But  in  the  following,  and 
many  sin)ilar  phrases,  this  conjunction  were  much  belter  inserted: 
"Yet  it  is  reason  tfyi  memory  of  their  virtues  remain  to  posterity." 
It  should  be,  "  Yet  it  is  just  that  the  memory,"  elc. 


10. 


*  Be  ready  to  succor  such  persons 
who  (1)  need  thy  assistance." 

*'  The  matter  was  no  sooner  pro- 
posed, but  (2)  he  privately 
withdrew  to  consider  it." 

"  He  has  too  much  sense  and 
prudence  than  to  become  a 
dupe  to  such  artifices." 

"  It  is  not  suflBcient  that  our  con- 
duct, as  far  as  it  respects  oth- 
ers, appears  to  be  unexcep- 
tionable." 

"  The  resolution  was  not  the  less 
fixed,  that  (3)  the  secret  was 
yet  communicated  to  very 
few." 

"He  opposed  the  most  remarka- 
ble corruptions  oithe  Church 
of  Rome,  so  (A)' as  that  his' 
doctrines  were  embraced  by 
great  numbers." 

"  Germany  ran  the  same  risk  as 
Italy  had  done." 


He  gained  nothing  further  by 
his  speech,  but  only  (5)  to  be 
commended  for  his  elo- 
quence." 

'  He  has  little  more  of  the  schol 
ar  besides  the  name." 

'  H,j  has  lilileof  the  scholar  than 
the  name." 

•  They  had  no  sooner  risen,  but 
they  applied  themselves  to 
their  studies."' 
From  no  other  institution,  be- 
sides the  admirable  one  of 
juries,  could  so  great  a  bene- 
fit be  expected." 

■  Those  savage  people  seemed 
to  have  no  other  element  but 
war." 

Such  me;i  that  act  treacherously 
ought  to  be  avoided." 

'No  errors  are  so  trivial,  but  they 
(6)  deserve  to  be  corrected." 


(1)  "  As."    (2)  «  Than."    (3) 
ctpty    (6)  "  That  thty  d-o  not." 


Though."    (4)  "  And  on  this  account."    (6)  "  E»- 


198  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

EULE  XXIX. 
Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RULK    XX. 

When  the  qiialitiea  of  difl'ere7if  things  arc  compared,  the  latter  noun  or 
pronoun  is  not  yaverncd  hi/ the  conjunction  than  or  as,  but  agrees  with 
the  verb,  or  ia  governed  bi/  the  verb  or  j^reposition,  expressed  or  under- 
stood ;  aa,  "Tliou  art  wiser  than  1;"  that  ia^  ''than  I  am."  '' Tliey 
loved  him  more  than  me;"  that  ia,  "more  than  they  loved  me." 
•  "The  sentiment  is  well  expressed  by  Plato,  but  much  better  by 
Solomon  than  him  ;"  "  that  is,  "than  by  him." 

The  propriety  or  impropriety  of  many  phrases  in  the  preceding,  as 
well  as  iii  some  other  forms,  may  be  discovered  by  supplying-  the 
words  thiil  are  not  expressed — which  will  be  evident  from  the  follow- 
ing instances  of  erroneous  construction  :  "  He  can  read  belter  than 
me."  '-He  is  as  good  as  her."  "  Wliether  I  be  present  or  no."  "Who 
did  this?  Me."  By  supplying  the  words  understood  in  each  of  these 
phrases,  their  impropriety  and  governing  rule  will  appear:  as,  "better 
than  I  can  read ;"  "as  good  as  she  is;"  "  present  or  not  present :" 
"I  did  it." 

"Thou  art  wiser  than  I."  Will  you  parse  7,  and  repeat  the  rule 
for  it  ? 

"In  some  respects  we  have  had  "They  know  how  to  write  as  well 
as  many  advantages  as  them  ;  as  him;  but  he  is  a  much  bet- 

but  in  the  article  of  a  good  li-  ter  grammarian  than  them." 

brary,  they  have  had  a  greater  "Though  she  is  not  so  learned  as 
privilege  than  us."  him,  ^e  is  as  much  beloved 

"The  undertaking  was  much  bet-  and  respected." 

ter  executed   by  his   brother  "These  people,  though  they  pos- 
than  he."  sess   more  shining  qualities, 

"They  are  much  greater  gainers  are  not  so  proud  as  him,  nor 

than  me  by  this  unexpected  so  vain  as  her." 

event." 

1.  By  not  attending  to  this  rule,  many  errors  have  been  committed — 
a  number  of  which  js  subjoined,  as  a  further  caution  and  direction  to 
the  learner:  "Thou  art  a  much  greater  Ictser  than  me  by  his  death." 
"She  suffers  hourly  more  than  me."  "We  contributed  a  third  more 
than  the  Dutch,  who  were  obliged  to  the  same  proportion  more  than 
us.'U  "King  Charles,  and,  more  than  him,  the  duke  and  the  popish 
faction,  were  at  liberty  to  form  new  schenxes."  "The  drift  of  all  his 
sermons  was,  to  prepare  the  .Tews  for  the  reception  of  a  prophet 
mightier  than  him,  and  whose  shoes  he  was  not  worthy  to  bear."  "It 
was  not  the  work  of  so  eminent  an  author  as  him  to  whom  it  was  first 
imputed."  "A  stone  is  heavy,  and  the  sand  weighty;  btit  a  fool's 
wrath  is  heavier  than  them  both."  "  If  the  king  give  us  leave,  we 
may  perform  the  office  as  well  as  them  that  do."  In  these  passages 
it  ought  to  be,  "  /,  roe,  he,  they,'''  respectively. 

When  the  relative  who  immediately  follows  than,  it  seems  to  form 
an  exception  to  the  2'Jth  Rule — for,  in  that  connection,  the  relative 
must  be  in  the  objective  case:  as,  "Alfred,  than  whom,  a  greater  king 
never  reigned,"  etc.  "  Beelzebub,  than  whom,  Satan  excepted,  none 
liigher  sat,"  etc.  It  is  remarkable  that,  in  such  instances,  if  the  per- 
sonal pronoun  were  used,  it  would  be  in  the  nominative  case:  as,  "A 


SYNTAX.  199 

greater  king'  never  reigned  than.  Ae,"  etc., — that  is,  ^^(han  he  jcns.^^ 
" Beelzebub, j//,«)t  he.''  etc.. — that  is,  ''than  he  sot^  The  phrase  fhaii 
whom  is,  however,  avoided  iiy  the  best  modern  writers. 

"She  snllers  hourly  niore  lliaa  nio."  Will  you  correct  this  sen- 
tence, and  explain  why  it  is  wrong? 

1. 

** "Who  betrayed  her  eotnpanion  ?"  no,  must  depend  on  his 'ap- 

'•Not  »if."  plication." 

"Who   revealed   the    secrets    he  '-Charles   Xll,  of  Sweden,  than 

ouo^hi   to    have    concealed?"  who  (1)  a  more  courageous 

"  Not /ii'w."'  person   never  lived,  appears 

"  Who  related  falsehoods  to  screen  to  have  been  destitute  of  iho 

herself,  and  to  bring  an  odi-  tender  sensibilities  ofnature." 

uiu  upon  others."     "Not  me;  "Salmasius  (a  more  learned  man 

it  was  /ler.''  than  him  has  seldom  appear- 

*'There  is  but  one  in  fault,  and  ed)  was  not  happy  at  the  close 

that  is  me."  of  life." 

"  Whether  he  will  be  learned  or 

RULE  XXX.  * 

Corresponding  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

RITLE  XXI. 

To  avoid  disagreeable  repetitions,  and  to  axpreis  our  ideas  in  a  feio 
words,  an  e/lipsis,  or  otui-ifiion  of  soi/te  word-i,  iv  frequently  admitted. 
Instead  of  sayififf^  "  He  was  a  learned  man,  he  was  a  wise  man,  and 
he  was  a  good  man,"  we  ina/ci  uh-e  of  the  eUi2fn8,  and  sai/,  '*  lie  was  a 
learned,  wi^e,  and  good  man." 

JV/ie)>  the  omifision  of  words  laonld  ohtcure  the  sentence,  iceake)t.  its  force, 
or  be  attended  with  an  impropriety,  the)/  Tfinst  be  expressed.  In  the 
sentence,  "  We  are  apt  lo  love  who  love  us,"  th'e  word  them  should  be 
supplied.  '*A  beautiful  field  and  trees"  is  not  proper  language  ;  it 
should  be,  "Beautiful  fields  and  trees,"  or  "A  beautiful  field  and  fine 
trees." 

Almost  all  compounded  sentences  are  more  or  less  elliptical,  some 
examples  of  which  may  be  seen  muter  the  difTerent  parts  of  speech. 

"  I  gladly  shunned  who  gladly  fled  from  me."  Will  you  correct  this 
sentence,  and  repeat  the  latter  part  of  Rule  XXX,  by  which  the  cor- 
rection is  made? 

"  I  gladly  shunned  (2)  who  gladly  fell  a  victiiu  to  the  madness  of 

fled  from  me."  the  people,  inuh,  virtue,  re- 

"And  this  is  (3)  it  men  mean  by  dis-  ligion,  fell  with  him.""  (5) 

tributive  justice,  and  is  prop-  "The  fear  of  death,  nor  hope  of 

erly  termed  equity."  life,  could  make  him  submit  to 

"His    honor,    interest,    religion,  a  dishonest  iu-lion."  (0) 

were    all    euibarked    in    this  "An  elegant  hou<e  and  furniture 

undertaking."  (4)  were,  by  this  event,  irrecov- 

"  When  so  good  a  man  as  Socrates  erably  lost  to  the  owner."  (7) 

(1)  "  lf^/w>wi"— Note  XX.  (648.)  (2)  " mm  who."  (3)  "  That  which."  (4)  Tn- 
gcrt  "/its"  twice  more.    (6)  •'>4h(/"  twice.     (8)  '^  N^cither — nor.''    (1)  ^- Much  cost- 


200  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

1.  The  ellipsis  of  the  article  is  thus  used:  "A  man,  woman,  and 
child;"  that  is,  "a  man,  a  woman,  and  a  child."  "A  lipuse  and  gar- 
den ;"  that  is,  "a  house  and  a  garden."  "The  sun  and  moon;''  that 
is,  ''  the  sun  and  the  moon."  "  The  day  and  hour,"  that  is,  *'  the  day 
and  the  hour."  In  all  these  instances,  the  article  being  once  express- 
ed, the  repetition  of  it  becomes  unnecessary.  There  is,  however,  ao 
exception  to  this  observation,  when  some  peculiar  emphasis  requires 
a  repetition,  as  in  the  fojlowiug  sentence:  "Not  only  the  year,  but 
the  day  and  the  hour."  In  this  case  the  ellipsis  of  the  last  article 
would  be  improper.  When  a  different  form  of  the  article  is  requisite, 
the  article  is  also  properly  repeated  :  as,  "A  house  and  a?^  orchard," 
instead  of  "a  house  and  orchard." 

Will  you  give  an  example  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  article*  Is  it  neces- 
sary to  repeat  the  article  in  each  of  these  instances? 


"These   rules   are  addressed   to  a  dreary  season,  if  we  arrive 

none  but  theintelligent  and  at  it  with  an  unimproved,  or 

the  (1)  attentive."  with  a  corrupted  mind." 

''The  gay  and   the  pleasing   are,     "  The  more  I  see  of  his  conduct, 
sometimes,   the  most   insidi-  I  like  him  better." 

ous  and    the  mo.>^  dangerous     "It  is  not  only  the  duty,  but  in- 
companions."  terest,  of  young   persons   to 

"Old  age  will  prove  a  joyless  and  be  studious  and  diligent." 

2.  The  nomi  is  frequentfy  omitted  in  the  following  manner:  "The 
laws  of  God  and  man  ;"  that  is,  "  The  laws  of  God  and  the  laws  of 
man."  In  some  very  emphatical  expressions,  the  ellipsis  should  not 
be  used:  as,  "Christ,  the  powef  of  God,  and  the  wisdom  of  God ;" 
which  is  more  emphatical  than  "Christ  the  power  and  wisdom  of 
God." 

Will  you  "give  an  example  of  the  omif<sion  of  {he  7ioun?  Should 
this  ellipsis  always  be  used  ?  * 


"  TJiese  counsels  were  the  die-  noble    entertainment*  when 

,      lates  of  virtue,  and //tecZicfafes  others  leave  us."  (4) 

(2)  of  true  honor."  "Without  firmness,  nothing  that 

"Avarice  and  cunning  may  ac-  is  great  can  be  undertaken; 

quire   an   estate,    but  avarice  that  is  difficult  or  hazardous, 

aiid     cuijning   can    not   gain  can  be  accomplished."  (5) 

friends."  (3)  "The  anxious  man  is  the  votary 

"A   taste-  for    useful    knowledge  of    riches,    the    negligent   of 

will  provide  for  us  a  great  and  pleasure."  (6) 

3.  The  ellipsis  of  the  adjective  is  used  in  the  following  manner: 
"A  delightful  garden  and  orchard  ;"  that  is,  "A  delightful  garden  and 
a  delightful  orchard."  "A  little  man  and  woman;"  that  is,  "  a  liille 
man  and  a  little  woman."  In  such  elliptical  expressions  as  these  the 
adjective  ought  to  have  exactly  the  same  significatioti,  and  to  be  quite 
as  proper,  when  joined  to  the  latter  substantive  as  to  the  former; 
otherwise  tlie  ellipsis  should  not  be  admitted. 

Sometimes  the  ellipsis  is  improperly  iipplied  to  nouns  of  different 

(1)  Reject  '"the."  (2)  "  Virtve  and  of  trtte."  (3)  Insert  "  they"  in  the  place  of 
I  wo  nouns,  d)  Insert '■  enieitaivmcnts."  (b)  Insert  "  nothing."  (6)  Insert  "man, 
that:' 


SYNTAX.  201 

umbers:  as,  "A  magnificent  house  and  gardens."     In  this  case  it  is 
etterto  use  another  adjective:  as,  "A  magnificent  house,  and  fine 
•gardens." 

Will  you  give  an  example  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  adjective?     What 
rule  is  to  be  observed  in  the  use  of  this  ellipsis? 

3. 

"His   crimes   had    brought    him  "^That  species  of  coinmerce  will 

into  extreme  distress  and  ex-  produce  great  gain  or  loss." 

treme  per])lexity."  (1)  (4) 

"He  has'an  affectionate  brother,  "Many   days,    and  even   weeks, 

and  an  affection   sister,   and  pass  away  unimproved."  (4) 

they  live  in  great  harmony."  "This   wonderful    action    struck 

(2)  the  beholders  with  exceeding 

"We    must    guard    against    too  (0).  astonishment."  (4) 

great  severity,  and  lacilily  of  "The  people  of  this  country  pos- 

manners."  (3)  sess    a   healthy   climate   and 

"We  should  often  recollect  what  -    soil."  (3) 

the  wisest  men  have  said  and  "  Thfy  enjoy  also  a  free  conslitu- 

written    concerning     human  lion  and  laws."  (4) 
happiness  and  vanity."  (4) 

4.  The  following  is  the  ellipsis  of  the  pronoun  :  "1  love  and  fear 
him  ;"  that  is,  "  I  love  him,  and  I  fear  him."  "  My  house  and  lands  ;" 
that  is,  "  My  house,  and  my  lands."  In  these  instances  th^eilipsis 
may  take  place  with  propriety;  but  if  we  would  be  more  express  and 
emphatical,  it  must  not  be  used:.as,  "His  friends  and  his  foes;" 
"  My  sons  and  my  daughters." 

In  some  of  the  common  forms  of  speech,  the  relative  pronoun  is 
usually  omitted:  as,  "This  is  the  man  they  love/'  instead  of,  "This 
is  the  man  whom  they  love ;"  "  These  are  the  goods  they  bought,"  for 
"These  are  the  goods  which  they  bought." 

In  complex  sentences  it  is  much  better  to  have  the  relative  pro- 
noun expressed  :  as  it  is  more  proper  to  say,  "The  posture  in  which 
I  lay,"  than  "  In  the  posture  1  lay;"  "The  horse  on  which  I  rode,  fell 
down,"  than  "The  horse  I  rode,  fell  down." 

The  antecedent  and  the  relative  connect  the  parts  of  a  sentence 
together;  and,  to  prevent  obscurity  and  confusion,  they  should  answer 
to  each  other  with  great  exactness.  "We  speak  that  we  do  know, 
and  testify  that  we  have  seen."  Here  the  ellipsis  is  manifestly  im- 
proper, and  ought  to  be  supplied:  as,  "We  speak  that  which  we  do 
know,  and  testify  that  whidi  we  have  seen." 

Will  you  give  an  exam|ile  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  pronoun?  Can  this 
ellipsis  be  properly  used  at  all  times  ? 


"His  reputation   and    his   estate  and  that  is  the  best  that  can 

were  both  lost  by  gaming."  (G)  be  said  of  it."  (8) 

"This    intelligence    not  only  ex-  "This     was    the     person    whom 

cited    our   hopes,    but   fears  calumny  had  greatly  abused, 

loo."  (7)  and    sustained    the    injustice 

"  His  conduct  is  not  scandalous;  with  singular  Patience."  (7) 


(1)  Reject  an  adjective.  (2)  Reject  two  words.  (3)  Insert  two  words.  (4)  In- 
sert an  adjective,  {b)  '■'■  Exceedingly:'  (6)  Kejcc^a  iirononn.  (7)  Insert  a  pro- 
noun.   (8)  "  Thatr-thaW 


202  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

"He   discovered   some   qualities  must  possess  a  great  memc 

in  the  youth  of  a  disaj^reeable  ry."  ([). 

nature,     and     to     hiin    were  "By  pre.sum|Uion  and  by   vanity 

wholly  unaccountable."  (I)  we  provoke  enmity,  and  we 

"The  captain    had   several    men  incur  contempt."  (2) 

died  in  his  ship  of  the  scurvy."  "In  the  circumstances  1  was  at 

(1)  that  time,  my  troul)les  pressed 

"  He    IS    not    only  sensible    and  heavily  upon  me."  (3J 

learned,  but  is  religious  too."  "  He  had  destroyed   his  constitu- 

(1)  lion,  by  the  very  same  errors 

"  The  Chinese  language  contains  that  so  many  have  been  de- 
an immense  numberof  words  ;  stroyed." 
and  who  would    learn  them 

5.  The  ellipsis  of  the  verb  is  used  in  the  following  instances  :  "  The 
man  wasold  and  crafty;"  that  is,  "  The  man  was  old,  and  the  man  wa.s 
crafty."  "  Slie  was  young,  and  beautiful,  and  good;"  that  is,  "She 
was  young,  she  was  beautiful,  and  sl>e  was  good."  *'Thou  art  po6r, 
and  wretched,  and  miserable,  and  blind,  and  naked."  If  we  would 
fill  up  the  ellipsis  in  the  last  sentence,  thou  art  oughtjo  be  repeated 
before  each  of  the  adjectives. 

If,  in  such  enumeratiori,  we  choose  to  ))oint  outoiie  properly  above 
the  rest,  that  property  must  be  placed  last,  and  the  ellipsis  supplied  : 
as,  "  She  is  young  and  beanliful,  and  she  is  good." 

"  I  v.'ent  to  see  and  hear  him  ;"  that  is,  "  1  went  to  see,  and  I  went 
to  hear  him."  In  this  instance,  there  is  not  only  an  ellipsis  of  the 
goverihing  verb,  I  vient,  but  likewise  of  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  mood, 
which  is  governed  by  it. 

Do,  did,  have,  had,  shall,  icill,  may,  mi(fhf.  and  the  rest  of  the  auxiliaries 
of  the  compound  tenses,  afe  frequently  used  alone  to  spare  the  repe- 
tition of  the  verb:  as,  "He  regards  his  word,  but  thou  dost  not;" 
that  is,  "dost  not  regard  it."  "We  succeeded,  but  they  did  not;" 
"did  not  succeed."  "I  have  learned  my  task,  but  thou  hast  not;" 
"  hast  not  learned."  "  They  must,  and  they  shall  be  punished  ;"  that 
is,  "  they  must  be  punished." 

Will  you  give  an  example  , of  the  ellipsis  of  the  verb?  Suppose 
we. wish  to  point  out  one  property  above  the  rest?  liow  are  the 
auxiliaries  sometimes  used? 

5. 

"He  is  temperate,  he  is  disinter-  "It  is  happy  for  us  when  we  can 

esied,  he  is  benevolent;  he  is  calmly  and  deliberately  look 

an  ornament  to  his  family,  and  back  on    the    past,   and    can 

a  cHidit  to  his  profession."  (1)  quietly     anticipate     the     fu- 

"Genuine  virtue    supposes    our  ture."  (0) 

benevolence  to   be  strength-  "  The  sacrifices  of  virtue  will  not 

ened,  and  to  be  confirmed  by  only  be   rewarded   hereafter, 

principle."  (o)  but  recompensed  even  in  this 

"Perseverance   in   laudable   pur-  lift;."  (7) 

suits  will  reward  all  our  toils,  "  All  those  possessed  of  any  office, 

and  will  produce  effects  be-  resignc'l   their  'former   com- 

.  yond  our  ctilcnlation."  (G)  mission."  (3) 

(1)  Insert  a  pronoun.  (2)  Reject  a  proaoun.  (3)  Insert  two  words.  (4)  Reject 
six  words,  aiW  insert  one.  (5)  Reject  two  words.  (6)  Reject  one  word.  (7)  In- 
iert  three  M'ords. 


SYNTAX.  203 

"If  young   persons  were  deter-  mand  respect  from  the  Ilcen- 

niined  to  conduct  themselves  tioiis  themselves."  (I) 

by  the    rules  of   virtue,   not     "Charles  was  a  man  of  learning, 
only  would   they   escape   in-  knowledge,  and  benevolence, 

numerable  dangers,  but  com-  and,  what  is  still  more,  a  true 

Christian."  (I) 

G.  The  ellipsis  of  the  adverb  is  used  iu  the  following  manner:  "  He 
spolv-e  and  acted  wisely;"  that  is,  "He  spoke  wisely,  and  he  acted 
wisely."  "Thrice  I  went  and  oirer^Hl  my  service;"  that  is,  "Thrice 
1  went,  and  thrice  I  ofl'ured  my  service." 

How  is  the  ellipsis  of  the  adverb  used? 

0. 

"The  temper  of  him  who  is  al-     "How  a  seed  grows   up   into   a 

ways    in   the    bustle   of    the  tree,  and  the  mind  acts  upon 

world,  will    be   often   riimed,  the  body,  are  mysteries  which 

?ind  be  often  disturbed."  (2)  »    we  can  not  ex|)lain."  (4) 

"We  often  commend  iniprudent-     "Verily  there  is  a  reward  for  the 

ly,  as  well  as  censure  impru-  righteous.     There   is    a  God 

dently."  (3)  that  judgeth  in  the  earth."  (4) 

7.  The  ellipsis  of  the  prepoaificm.  as  well  as  of  the  verb,  is  seen  in 

the  following  instances:  "He  went  into  the  abbeys,  halls,  and  public 

buildings;"  that  is,  "lie  went  into  the  abbeys,  he'went  into  the  halls, 

and  he  went  into  the  public  buildings."     "  He  also  went  through  all 

the  streets  and  lanes  of  the  city ;  "  that  is,  "through  all  the  st'reets, 

and  through  all  the  lanes,"  etc.     "  He  spoke  to  every  man  and  woman 

there;  "  that  is,  "to  every  man,  and  to  every  woman."     "This  day, 

next  month,  last  year;"  that  is,  "On  this  day,  in  the  next  month,  iu 

the  last  year."     "The  Lord  do  that  which  seemeth  him  good  ;  "  that 

is,  "which  seemeth  to  him." 

Will  you  give  me  an  example  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  jireposition  and 
the  verb  ? 

7. 

"Changes  are  almost  continually  "They    are    now    reconciled    to 

taking  place,  in  men  and  in  what  they  could  not  formerly 

manners,  in  opinions  and  in  be  prompted,  by  any  consider- 

customs,  in  private  forlunes  ations."  (4) 

and  public  conduct."  (4)  (2)   •  "  Censure  is  the  tax  which  n  man 
"Averse  either  to  contradict  or  pays  the  public  tor  being  emi- 

blame,  the    too    complaisant  nent."  (4) 

man    goes    along v  with    the  "Reflect  on  the  state  of  human 

manners  that  prevail."  (4)  life,  and  the  society  of  men 

"By  this  habitual  indelicacy,  the  as  mixed  with  good  and  with 

virgins  smiled  at  what  they  evil."  (4) 

blushed  before.'.'  (4) 

8.  The  ellipsis  of  the  conjunction  is  as  follows:  "  Thev~  confess  the 
power,  wisdom,  goodness,  and  love  of  their  Creator;  "  that  is,  "the 
power,  and  wisdom,  and  goodness,  and  love  of,"  etc.  "Though  I 
love  him,  I  do  not  ti^atter  him;"  that  is,  "Though  I  love  him,  yet  i  do 
not  flatter  him." 

Will  you  give  an  exam|)ls  of  the  ellipsis  of  a  conjunction? 

(1)  Insert  two  words.  (2)  Reject  two  words.  (3)  Reject  oiio  word.  (4)  Insert 
one  word. 


204  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

8. 

"In  all  stations  and   conditions,     "Religious  persons  are  often  un- 

tJie   important   relations  taUe  justly  represented  as  persons 

place,    of    masters    and    ser-  of  romantic  character,  vision- 

vants,     and     husbands     and  ary     notions,     unacquainted 

wives,  and  parents  and  ciiil-  with  the  world,  unfit  to  live 

dren,       and       brothers      and  in  it."  (3) 
friends,     and     citizens     and     "No    rank,    station,    dignity    of 

subjects."  (1)  birth,     possessions,  -exempt 

"Destitute   of    principle,    he    re-^  men  from  contributing  their 

garded  neither  his  family,  nor  share  to  public  utility!""  (4; 
his  friends,  nor   his   reputa- 
tion." (2) 

^  9.  The  ellipsis  of  the  inte)Jectio?i  is  not  very  common  j  it,  however, 
is  sometimes  used:  as,  "Oh.  pity  and  shame!"  that  is,  "Oh,  pity! 
oh,  shame  I " 
^  As  the  ellipsis  occurs  in  almost  every  sentence  in  the  English  lan- 
guage, numerous  examples  ol*  it  might  be  given;  but  only  a  few 
more  can  be  admitted  here. 

In  the  following  instance,  there  is  a  very  considerable  one:  "He 
will  often  argue  that  if  this  part  of  our  trade  were  well  cultivated, 
we  should  gain  from  one  nation;  and  it'  another,  from  another;"  that 
is,  "  He  will  often  argue  iha"!  ii  this  part  of  our  trade  were  well  culti- 
vated, we  should  gain  from  one  nation;  and  if  another  part  of  our 
trade  were  well  cultivated,  we  should  gain  from  another  nation." 

The  following  instances,  though  short,  contain  much  of  the  ellip- 
sis: "Woe  is  nie;"i.e.,  "woe  is  tome."  "To  let  blood;  "  i.e.,  "to  let 
out  blood."  "  To  let  down  ;  "  i.  e.,  "  to  let  it  fall  or  slide  down."  "  To 
walk  a  mile;"  i.  e.,  "to  walk  through  the  space  of  a  mile."  "To 
sleep  all  night;"  i.e.,  "to  sleej)  through  all  the  night."  "To  go  a 
fishing;"  "To  go  a  hunting;"  i.  e.,  "to  go  on  a  fishing  voyage  or 
business;"  "to  go  on  a  hunting  pgrty."  "I  dine  at  two  o'clock;" 
i.  e.,  "  at  two  of  the  clock."  "  By  sea,  by  land,  on  shore ; "  i.  e.,  "  by 
the  sea,  by  the  land,  on  the  shore." 

What  is  said  of  the  ellipsis  of  the  interjection? 

9. 
"Oh,  my  father,  Oh,  my  friend!     "Oil,  piety !  virtue !  how  insensi- 
how  great    has  bet  n  my  in-  ble    have    I     been    to    your 

gratitude!"  (2)  charms!"  (5) 

10.  The  examples  that  foJIow  are  produced  to  show  the  impropri- 
ety of  the  ellipsis  in  some  particular* cases.  "The  land  was  always 
possessed,  during  pleasure,  by  those  intrusted  with  the  command  ;  " 
it  should  be,  "  those /jersowe  intrusted;  "  or,  "those  jt'/to  t/je?-^  intrusted." 
"  If  he  had  read  farther,  he  would  have  found  several  of  his  objec- 
tions might  have  been  spared;"  that  is,  "he  would  have  found  that 
several  o'f  his  objections,"  etc.  "There  is  nothing  men  are  more 
deficient  in 'than  knowing  their  own  characters;"  it  ought  to  be, 
"nothing  in  which  men,"  and,  "than  in  knowing."*  "I  scarcely 
know  any' part  of  natural  philosophy  would  yield  more  variety  and 
use;"  it  should  be,  ''which  would  yield,"  etc.  "In  the  temper  of 
minti  he  was  then;"  that  is,  "in  which  he  then  was."  "The  little 
fcatisfaction  and  consistency  to  be  found  in  most  of  the  systems  of 

(1)  Reject  four  words.  (2)  Reject  one  word.  (3)  Insert  three  words*  '  4)  "  Nor— 
no— nor  a%y."    (f>)  Insert  one  word. 


SYNTAX.  ,  205 

to  kirn  to  whom  '  etc  '  '  '  '*» 

"  Why  do  ye.i,.,  which,-,  „„,,,w.  " ""  i.i'i';::!';,'';,^;,^' %T''^ 

"The   showbread,  which   is   no.  g^rher'.'-  ''zT'  "'"  "''°'°'  '"^ 

KTTLE  XXXI. 
Coi-respondii.g  with  Murray's  Grammar, 

nULE  XXII. 
All  the  parte  of  a  sentence  should  correspond  to  each  other  •  a  reanlar 

^p^:ra,:iE^^--j--rt:h^S!;?- 

rnrrT:;;;:e:ti,:-Sst='^iri:'ri? 

Inftor  «lli,  e;>   1  '-"^"  leniences,  It  i.s  not  necessary  to  siinn  v  the 

laiier  em  ^.^is,  hecaiisp  it  cnn  tint  i^-^j  « -.  i-  i     ■^        -^xi'iMy  mc 

cene  Ih.u  it  ■,,  calculated  to  ascertain  the  true  gmmramical  co,i"tru<- 

"ThisHedicationmayserveforalmo.stanybooIcthatha^  is  or  shall 
be  p„I>l,shecl ;"  ,t  ought  to  be,  "that  has  been  or  shal  bepubl?  hed  " 
'He  was  gu.ded  by  Interests  always  different,  sometimes  com  a rv  to 
tho.e  of  the  community;"  "different  yVom/'  or,  'U  ways  c  ffereni  ' 
^Willi.T  °^  ^•\\^'°«'">unity,  and  sometimes  con?  arv  to  th/m  " 
Will  be  urged  that  these  books  are  as  old,  or  even  older  than  ^k. 
dition?"  the  words  "as  old  "  and  "oidf-r"r.Tn  J^^"  "'"*^' •  ^"^"  ira- 
regimen ;  it  should  be.  "  as  ^Id'^s  tradUion,  o  "e vel  o  J^r  ''  '^"^Tre' 

noTTca^,T:J-'''^'^%T''r'  r^'  '"^"  ""-^  '^°^  born,  c^ai  least  may 
not   acqu  re;      "or  vthich   at  least  they   may   not   acquire ''     "The 

iZiU     Zu  ^'"'  <;^^"«»'"ct'on  the  lirst  verb  is  said  to  miti-ate  the 

teeth  of  the  common  law,  which  is  an  evident  solecism.     "  M^ti'Vtes 

matS.r''"         ^"^  ^'^'^'  '^"^  '^''^  ^^  '^'"  ^""'^  ^'^^  been  g'ram! 

"  They  presently  grow  into  good  humor  and  good  langua-e  towards 

the  crown  f  "gr^ownuo  good  language"  is  ve"ry  improper!     '  ?here 

(1)  Ingert  three  worrt..         (2)  Tomt  one  V,yrd.        (8)  In.>,t  twWord.: 


206  ENULISH    GRAMMAR. 

is  never  wanting  a  set  of  evil  instruments,  who,  either  out  of  mad 
zeal,  private*  hatre(!,  or  iiltliy  lucre,  are  always  ready,"  etc.  We  say 
properly,  -'A  man  acts  oul  of  mad  zeal,"  or  "out  of  private  hatred;" 
but  we  can  not  say,  U'  we  would  speak  English,  "  he  ads  out  of  filthy 
lucre."  "To  double  her  kindness  and  caresses  of  me;"  the  word 
kindness  requires  to  be  followed  by  either  to  or  for,  and  can  not  be 
construed  with  the  preposition  of.  ''Never  was  man  so  teased,  or 
sufiered  half  the  uneasiness,  as  1  have  done  this  evening;"  the  first 
and  third  clauses,  namely,  "  never  was  man  so  teased," '' as  I  have 
done  this  evening,"'  can  not  be  joined  without  an  impropriety:  and  to 
connect  the  second  and  third,  the  word  t/mt  must  be  substituted  for 
as;  ''or  sufiered  half  the  uneasiness  that  I  have  done;"  or  else, 
"half so  much  uneasiness  as  I  have  suffered." 

The  first  part  of  the  following  sentence  abounds  with  adverbs,  and 
those  such  as  are  hardly  consistent  with  one  another:  ''  Hon-  much 
soever  the  reformation  of  this  dcgen-erate  age  is  almost  utterly  to  be  de- 
spaired of,  wo  may  yet  have  a  more  comfortable  prospect  of  future 
limes."  The  sentence  would  be  more  correct  in  the  following  t'orni : 
"  Thovfjh  the  reformation  of  this  degenerate  age  is  nearly  to  be  de- 
spaired of,"  etc. 

"Oh  !  shut  not  up  my  soul  with  the  sinners,  nor  my  life  with  the 
blood-thirsty;  in  whose  hands  is  wickedness,  and  their  right  hand  is 
full  of  gifts."  As  the  passage  introduced  by  the  copulative  conjunc- 
tion and,  was  not  intended  as  a  continuation  of  the  principal  and  in- 
dependent part  of  the  sentence,  but  of  the  dependent  part,  the  relative 
loltone  should  have  Ijcen  used  instead  of  the  possessive  their  ;  namely, 
"  and  tohoae  right  hand  is  full  of  gifts." 

"Eye  iiath  not  seen,  nor  ear  heard,  neither  .hove  entered  into  the 
heart  of  man,  the  things  which  God  hath  prepared  for  them  that  love^ 
him."  There  seems  to  be  an  impropriety  in  this  instance,  in  which 
the  same  noun  serves  in  a  double  ca|>acily,  performing  at  the  same 
lime  the  ofiices  both  of  tlie  nominative  and  objective  cases.  "  Neith- 
er hath  it  entered  into  the  heart  of  man  to  conceive  the  things,"  etc., 
would  have  been  regular. 

"  "We  have  tiie  power  of  retaining,  alfering,  and  compounding  those 
images  which  we  have  once  received,  into  all  the  varieties  of  picture 
and  vision."  It  is  very  proper  to  say,  "altering  and  compounding 
those  images  which  we  have  once  receiveil,  into  all  the  varieties  of 
picture  and  vision;"  but  we  can  not  with  propriety  say,  "retaining 
them  into  all  the  varieties  ;"  and  yet,  according  to  the  manner  in  which 
the  words  are  ranged,  this  construction  is  unavoidable  :  for  retaining^ 
altering,  and  compoi/fidinc/  are  participles,  each  of  which  equally  re- 
fers to  and  governs  the  subsequent  noun,  those  iviages ;  and  that 
noun,  again,  is  neces^ari■|y  connected  with  the  loilowing  preposition, 
into.  The  construction  might  easily  have  been  rectified  by  di<joining 
the  participle  retaining  from  the  other  two  participles,  in  this  way: 
"  \V(i  have  tlie  power  of  retaining  those  imngcs  which  we  have  once 
received,  and  of  altering  and  compounding  them  into  all  the  varieties 
of  picture  and  vision  ;"  or,  perhaps,  belter  thus  :  ''  We  have  the  pow- 
er of  retaining,  altering,  and  compounding  those  images  which  we 
have  once  received,  and  of  forming  themi  into  all  the  varieties  of  pict- 
ure and  vision." 

Why  is  the  first  example  under  this  rule  inaccurate?     "This  dedi- 
cation may  serve  for  almost  any  book  that  Ims,  is,  or  shalll  be  publish-  ■ 
ed."     Will  you  point  out  the  iiuiccuracies  in  this  seuleiice,  and  cor- 
rect them  ( 


SYNTAX. 


207 


"Several  allerations  and  additions 

have  been  made  to  t  he  M'orlv."  (1) 
"The  rirst  propcsnl  was  esi>ential- 

ly  ditltreiit,  and  inferior  to  the 

second."  (2) 
"  He  is  Jiiore  bold  and  active,  but 

not  i'o  wise  and  studious,  as 

his  companion."'  (3) 
"Neither  has  he,  nor  any  other 

persons,  suspt^cted  so  much 

dissinndation."  (4) 
"  The  court  of  France  or  Enghind 

was  to  have  been  tlie  umpire." 

"In  the  reign  of  Henry  H  all  for- 
eign commodities  were  i)len- 
ty  in  England."  (H) 

"There  is  no  talent  so  useful  to- 
wards success  in  business,  or 
which  puts  men  more  out  of 
the  reach  of  accidents,  than 
tiiat  quality  generally  posses- 
sed by  persons  ofCuol  temper, 
ami  is,  \v\  common  langua»'-e 
called  discretion."  (7) 

"The  tirsl  project  was  to  shorten 
discourse,  by  putting  polysyl- 
lables into  one."  (S) 


ple'asant  ta  look  upon  j,  but 
never  so  much  as  in  the  open- 
ing o(  the  spring."  (12) 

"The  intentions  of  some  of  these 
philosophers,  nay,  of  many, 
might  and  probably  were 
good."  (]3) 

"It  was  an  unsuccessful  under- 
taking; which,  although  it 
has  failed,  i.s  no  objection  at 
all  to  an  enterprise  so  well 
concerted."  (1 4) 

"The  reward  is  his  due,  and  it  has 
already,  or  will  hereafter,  be 
given  to  him."  (15) 

"By  intercourse  with  wise  and 
experienced  persons,  who 
know  the  world,  we  may  im- 
prove and  rubotithe  rust  of  a 
private  and  retired  educa- 
tion." (16) 

"Sincerity  i.s  as  valuable,  and 
even  more  valuable,  than 
knowledge."  (17) 

"No  person  was  ever  so  perplex- 
ed, or  sustained  ihe  mortifica- 
tions, as  he  has  done  to-dav  " 
(IS)  ^ 


"'1d!Lrr.olA::;;J^.!^l^!"!!^^^     "^^^   Romans  gave  not  omy  the 


.others  to  take  the  .'^flme  mea 
ures  for  their  cure  which   I 
have."  (9) 

"The  greatest  masters  of  critical 
learning  diOtr  among  one  an- 
othevy 

"Micciiah  said,  If  thou  certainly 
return  in  peace,  then  halh  not 
the  Lord  spoken  by  me."  (10) 


freedom  of  the  city,  but 
capacity  for  emj)loyments,  to 
several  towns  in  Gaul,  Spain, 
and  Germany."  (J9)  v 

"Such  writers  have  no  oilier 
standard  on  which  to  form 
themselves,  except  what 
chances  to  be  fashionable  and 
popular."  (10) 


I  iV^  not  suppose  that  we  Britons  "  Whatever  we  do  secretly,  shall 

want  a  genius,  more  than  the  be  displayed  and  heard  in  the 

,,r^,  '"''i^  ''[*"""  "«'?hbors."  (JO)  clearest  light."  (20) 

The  deal  man   whose  ears  were  "  To  the  happiness  of  possessing 

opened  and  h.s  tongue  loosen-  a    person    of   so    uncommon 

ed,     doubtless    glorihed     the  merit,  Boethiu.-  soon  had  the 

-rir  S     T"^'"?-     ^'/^  ^'alisfaclion  of.  obtaining  the 

Groves,  helds.  and  meadows  are,  hi-hest     honor    his    counlrv 

at   any    season    of  the    year,  uo^ild  bestow."                      . 

.7."  ^  U'^Xlivelan  Jn'^^'il^ ',''■    .^!h"  ^^"  "'•^''■'''"'-  '"  '^'  •''''<^<^^  and  from  ' 
^  7"     ,7^  9.  1.*  <  ,.*•     Z"*^  ^""'''■^  "Aare."     (.5)  "  Or  that  of."    (6)  -  Pknti- 


•  ■  (  V  )/ 


PROSODY.  C 


Prosody  consists  of  two  parts:  the  former  teaches  the  true  pbo- 
wuKoiATroN  of  words,  comprisinj?  accent,  QUANTiry,  emphasis,  pause, 
and  tone;  the  latter,  the  laws  of  versification. 


-OF   PRONUNCIATION. 

of  accent. 

Accent  is  the  laying  of  a  peculiar  stress  of  the  voice  on  a  certain 
letter  or  syllable  in  a  word,  that  it  may  be  better  heard  than  the  rest, 
or  distinguii^hed  from  them;  as,  in  the  word  presivae,  the  stress  of  the 
voice  must  be  on  the  letter  n,  and  second  syllal)le  aume,  which  take 
the  accent. 

••     OF   QUANTITY. 

The  QUANTITY  of  a  syllable  is  that  time  which  is  occupied  in  pro- 
nouncing it.     It  is  considered  long  or  short. 

A  vowel  or  syllable  is  long,  when  the  accent  is  on  the  vowel,  which 
occasions  it  to  be  slowly  joined  in  pronunciation  with  the  following 
letter:  a^^/all,  tale,  mood,  konse^  feature. 

A  syllable  is  short  when  the  accent  is  on  the  consonant,  which  oc 
casions  the  vowel  to  be  quickly  joined  to  the  succeeding  letter:  as, 
ant,  bonnet,  htinger. 

A  long  syllable  generally  requires  doubhe  the  time  of  a  short  one  in 
pranonncing  it;  thus,  mate  and  note  should  be  pronounced  as  slowly 
again  as  mat  and  not. 

OF  EMPHASIS. 

By  EMPHASIS  is  meant  a  stronger  and  fuller  sound  of  voice,  by  which 
we  distinguish  some  word  or  words  on  which  we  design  to  lay  a  par- 
ticular stress,  and  to  show  how  they  aflect  the  rest  of  the  sentence. 
Sometimes  the  emphatic  words  must  be  distinguished  by  a  particular 
tone  of  voice,  as  well  as  by  a  greater  stress. 

OF  PAUSES. 

Pauses  or  rests,  in  speaking  and  reading,  arc  a  total  cessation  of 
the  voice,duriag  a  perceptible,  and,  in  many  cases,  a  measurable  space 
of  time. 


What  is  prosody  ?  How  much  more  time  does  the 

What  is  accent?    What  is  the  pronunciation  of  a  4ong  syllable 

quantity  of  a  syllable?     When  is  occupy  than  a  short  one?     What 

a  vov/oi  or  syllable  long  ?     When  is  emphasis  ?     What  are  pauses  ? 

sh'csrt?    Gh'e  examples  of  each. 


^' 


PTJ13LICj^Tl6]SrS 


O)' 


GEORGE  L.  BIDGOOB. 

iiiOilieliptir  #'rl00!  ..^pii5. 

TILK  00]S  KE])K]RA:TJ!:  SPEJJ/KK.     Fcunh  eciition. 
^riic  bcHt  Spell  or  extant. 

THE  CO^SKEBEKATE  PETMEE.     Eoiirti)  edition. 

THE  CONFEHJ^^.EATE  E^HYMI^NC  EiUMEB. 

IXEESTJIATI^^H  PEBlEil.     EeiUitiiiilly  colored. 

THE  OOJN  FEDJ^iiATE  IlEADEE.     I^arr  I. 

8.MtTH'S   K.NC  iMSiT  JiRA  M IM  A  H. 


N  <  >  \v  II  i^:  A  Y>  y  , 

THE    ARMY    SONGSTER. 

l><.'dii.aU  li  to  ihp  Ann}  of  Noiilit.'Mi  \irgiiii.H.. 
Thi'  b«'.st  cv'*]  led  ion  of  ^^oiio's  ])u})li.^}iid  in  the  South. 

.  ..^  . 

AkOHK.SS    OKJJtKS     TO 

ri; nLisiiioji  a^d  bookselekr. 

101  MAIN  STREET. 

IlICiiMONU,  V.?. 

\-  - -'-rs 


tP^ 


